PC 130-7 Sebm - Sebm036303 - Sebm036303 PDF

SEBM036303
MACHINE MODEL SERIAL NUMBER
PC130-7 70001 and up
• This shop manual may contain attachiments and optional equipment that are not available in your
area. Please consult your local Komatsu distributor for those items you may require.
Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice.
• PC130-7 mounts the SAA4D95LE-3 engine.

For details of the engine, see the 95-3 Series Engine Shop Manual.
© 2004
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan 10-04(02) 00-1
(3)
CONTENTS
No. of page
01 GENERAL ................................................................................................................01-1
10 STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION .................................................................10-1
20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING .......................................................................20-1
30 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ..........................................................30-1
40 MAINTENANCE STANDARD......................................................................40-1
90 OTHERS ....................................................................................................................90-1
00-2 PC130-7
(2)
The affected pages are indicated by the use of the
Mark Indication Action required
following marks. It is requested that necessary
actions be taken to these pages according to the Q Page to be newly added Add
table below.
q Page to be replaced Replace
( ) Page to be deleted Discard
Pages having no marks are those previously revised

or made aditions.
LIST OF REVISED PAGES

Mark Page Revision Mark Page Revision Mark Page Revision Mark Page Revision Mark Page Revision
number number number number number
q 00-1 (3) 10-6 10-47 q 10-84 (3) 10-126
00-2 (2) 10-7 10-48 q 10-85 (3) q 10-127 (3)
q 00-2-1 (3) 10-8 10-49 10-86 10-128
q 00-2-2 (3) 10-9 q 10-50 (3) 10-87 10-129
q 00-2-3 (3) 10-10 q 10-51 (3) 10-88 10-130
00-3 10-11 q 10-52 (3) q 10-89 (3) 10-131
00-4 10-12 q 10-53 (3) q 10-90 (3) 10-132
00-5 10-13 q 10-54 (3) q 10-91 (3) 10-133
00-6 10-14 q 10-55 (3) q 10-92 (3) 10-134
00-7 10-15 q 10-56 (3) q 10-93 (3) 10-135
00-8 10-16 q 10-57 (3) q 10-94 (3) 10-136
00-9 q 10-17 (3) 10-58 q 10-95 (3) q 10-137 (3)
00-10 q 10-18 (3) q 10-59 (3) 10-96 q 10-138 (3)
00-11 q 10-19 (3) q 10-60 (3) 10-97 10-139
00-12 10-20 Q 10-60-1 (3) q 10-98 (3) 10-140
00-13 10-21 Q 10-60-2 (3) 10-99 10-141
00-14 q 10-22 (3) Q 10-60-3 (3) 10-100 q 10-142 (3)
00-15 q 10-23 (3) Q 10-60-4 (3) q 10-101 (3) 10-143
00-16 q 10-24 (3) Q 10-60-5 (3) 10-102 10-144
00-17 q 10-25 (3) q 10-61 (3) q 10-103 (3) 10-145
00-18 q 10-26 (3) q 10-62 (3) 10-104 10-146
00-19 q 10-27 (3) 10-64 10-105 10-147
00-20 q 10-28 (3) q 10-65 (3) 10-106 10-148
00-21 q 10-29 (3) 10-66 10-107 10-149
00-22 q 10-30 (3) 10-67 10-108 10-150
q 10-31 (3) 10-68 10-109 10-151
01-1 q 10-32 (3) q 10-69 (3) 10-110 10-152
01-2 q 10-33 (3) 10-70 q 10-111 (3) q 10-153 (3)
01-3 q 10-34 (3) q 10-71 (3) q 10-112 (3) 10-154
q 01-4 (3) q 10-35 (3) q 10-72 (3) 10-113 10-155
01-5 q 10-36 (3) q 10-73 (3) q 10-114 (3)
01-6 q 10-37 (3) q 10-74 (3) q 10-115 (3) 20-1 (1)
01-7 q 10-38 (3) q 10-75 (3) 10-116 20-2 (1)
01-8 10-39 q 10-76 (3) 10-117 20-3 (1)
01-9 q 10-40 (3) q 10-77 (3) q 10-118 (3) 20-4 (1)
q 10-41 (3) q 10-78 (3) 10-119 20-5 (1)
10-1 q 10-42 (3) 10-79 10-120 20-6 (1)
10-2 10-43 10-80 10-121 20-7 (1)
10-3 q 10-44 (3) 10-81 10-122 20-8 (1)
q 10-4 (3) q 10-45 (3) q 10-82 (3) q 10-124 (3) 20-9 (1)
10-5 10-46 q 10-83 (3) 10-125 20-10 (1)
PC130-7 00-2-1
(3)
Revision Revision Revision Revision Revision
Mark Page number Mark Page number Mark Page number Mark Page number Mark Page number
20-11 (1) 20-151 (1) 20-233 (1) 20-327 (1) 20-416 (1)
20-101 (1) 20-152 (1) 20-234 (1) 20-328 (1) 20-417 (1)
20-102 (1) 20-153 (1) 20-235 (1) 20-329 (1) 20-418 (1)
20-103 (1) 20-154 (1) 20-236 (1) 20-330 (1) 20-419 (1)
20-104 (1) 20-155 (1) 20-237 (1) 20-331 (1) 20-420 (1)
20-105 (1) 20-156 (1) 20-238 (1) 20-332 (1) 20-421 (1)
20-106 (1) 20-157 (1) 20-239 (1) 20-333 (1) 20-422 (1)
20-107 (1) 20-158 (1) 20-240 (1) 20-334 (1) 20-423 (1)
20-108 (1) 20-159 (1) 20-241 (1) 20-335 (1) 20-424 (1)
20-109 (1) 20-160 (1) 20-242 (1) 20-336 (1) 20-425 (1)
20-110 (1) 20-161 (1) 20-243 (1) 20-337 (1) 20-426 (1)
20-111 (1) 20-162 (1) 20-244 (1) 20-338 (1) 20-427 (1)
20-112 (1) 20-163 (1) 20-245 (1) 20-339 (1) 20-428 (1)
20-113 (1) q 20-164 (3) 20-246 (1) 20-340 (1) 20-429 (2)
20-114 (1) q 20-165 (3) 20-247 (1) 20-341 (1) 20-430 (1)
20-115 (1) ( 20-166) 20-248 (1) 20-342 (1) 20-431 (1)
20-116 (1) 20-167 (2) 20-249 (1) 20-343 (1) 20-432 (1)
20-117 (1) 20-168 (1) 20-250 (1) 20-344 (1) 20-433 (1)
20-118 (1) 20-169 (1) 20-251 (1) 20-345 (1) 20-434 (1)
20-119 (1) 20-170 (1) 20-252 (1) 20-346 (1) 20-436 (1)
20-120 (1) 20-171 (1) 20-253 (1) 20-347 (1) 20-437 (1)
20-121 (1) 20-201 (1) 20-254 (1) 20-348 (1) 20-438 (1)
20-122 (1) 20-202 (1) 20-255 (1) 20-349 (1) 20-439 (1)
20-123 (1) 20-203 (1) 20-256 (1) 20-350 (1) 20-440 (1)
20-124 (1) 20-204 (1) 20-257 (1) 20-351 (1) 20-441 (1)
20-125 (1) 20-205 (1) 20-258 (1) 20-352 (1) 20-442 (1)
20-126 (1) 20-206 (1) 20-301 (1) 20-354 (1) 20-443 (1)
20-127 (1) 20-207 (1) 20-302 (1) 20-355 (1) 20-444 (1)
20-128 (1) 20-208 (1) 20-303 (1) 20-356 (1) 20-445 (1)
20-129 (1) 20-209 (1) q 20-304 (3) 20-357 (1) 20-446 (1)
20-130 (1) 20-210 (1) 20-305 (1) 20-358 (1) 20-447 (1)
20-131 (1) 20-211 (1) 20-306 (1) 20-359 (1) 20-448 (1)
20-132 (1) 20-212 (1) 20-307 (1) 20-360 (1) 20-449 (1)
20-133 (1) 20-213 (1) 20-308 (1) 20-362 (1) 20-450 (1)
20-134 (1) 20-214 (1) 20-310 (1) 20-363 (1) 20-451 (1)
20-135 (1) 20-215 (1) 20-311 (1) 20-364 (1) 20-452 (1)
20-136 (1) 20-216 (1) 20-312 (1) 20-365 (1) 20-453 (1)
20-137 (1) 20-217 (1) 20-313 (1) 20-401 (1) 20-454 (1)
20-138 (1) 20-218 (1) 20-314 (1) 20-402 (1) 20-455 (1)
20-139 (1) 20-219 (1) 20-315 (1) 20-403 (1) 20-456 (1)
20-140 (1) 20-220 (1) 20-316 (1) 20-404 (1) 20-457 (1)
20-141 (1) 20-222 (1) 20-317 (1) 20-405 (1) 20-458 (1)
20-142 (1) 20-223 (1) 20-318 (1) 20-406 (1) 20-459 (1)
20-143 (1) 20-224 (1) 20-319 (1) 20-408 (1) 20-460 (1)
20-144 (1) 20-225 (1) 20-320 (1) 20-409 (1) 20-461 (1)
20-145 (1) 20-226 (1) 20-321 (1) 20-410 (1) 20-462 (1)
20-146 (1) 20-228 (1) 20-322 (1) 20-411 (1) 20-463 (1)
20-147 (1) q 20-229 (3) 20-323 (1) 20-412 (1) 20-464 (1)
q 20-148 (3) 20-230 (1) 20-324 (1) 20-413 (1) 20-465 (1)
20-149 (1) 20-231 (1) 20-325 (1) 20-414 (1) 20-466 (1)
20-150 (1) 20-232 (1) 20-326 (1) 20-415 (1) 20-467 (1)
00-2-2 PC130-7
(3)
Revision Revision Revision Revision Revision
Mark Page number Mark Page number Mark Page number Mark Page number Mark Page number
20-468 (1) 20-619 (1) 30-45 (2) 30-96 (2) q 90-5 (3)
20-469 (1) 20-620 (1) 30-46 (2) 30-97 (2) q 90-7 (3)
20-470 (1) 20-621 (1) 30-47 (2) 30-98 (2) q 90-9 (3)
20-471 (1) 20-622 (1) 30-48 (2) 30-99 (2) q 90-11 (3)
20-472 (1) 20-623 (1) 30-49 (2) 30-100 (2) ( 90-13)
20-473 (1) 20-624 (1) 30-50 (2) 30-101 (2) ( 90-15)
20-474 (1) 30-51 (2) 30-102 (2) ( 90-17)
20-475 (1) 30-1 (2) 30-52 (2) ( 90-19)
20-476 (1) 30-2 (2) 30-53 (2) 40-1
20-501 (1) 30-3 (2) 30-54 (2) 40-2
20-502 (1) 30-4 (2) 30-55 (2) 40-3
20-504 (1) 30-5 (2) 30-56 (2) 40-4
20-505 (1) 30-6 (2) 30-57 (2) 40-5
20-506 (1) 30-7 (2) 30-58 (2) 40-6
20-507 (1) 30-8 (2) 30-59 (2) 40-7
20-508 (1) 30-9 (2) 30-60 (2) 40-8
20-509 (1) 30-10 (2) 30-61 (2) 40-9
20-510 (1) 30-11 (2) 30-62 (2) 40-10
20-511 (1) 30-12 (2) 30-63 (2) 40-11
20-512 (1) 30-13 (2) 30-64 (2) 40-12
20-513 (1) 30-14 (2) 30-65 (2) 40-13
20-514 (1) 30-15 (2) 30-66 (2) 40-14
20-515 (1) 30-16 (2) 30-67 (2) q 40-15 (3)
20-516 (1) 30-17 (2) 30-68 (2) q 40-16 (3)
20-517 (1) 30-18 (2) 30-69 (2) 40-17
20-518 (1) 30-19 (2) 30-70 (2) q 40-18 (3)
20-519 (1) 30-20 (2) 30-71 (2) q 40-19 (3)
20-520 (1) 30-21 (2) 30-72 (2) q 40-20 (3)
20-521 (1) 30-22 (2) 30-73 (2) 40-21
20-522 (1) 30-23 (2) 30-74 (2) q 40-22 (3)
20-523 (1) 30-24 (2) 30-75 (2) q 40-23 (3)
20-524 (1) 30-25 (2) 30-76 (2) 40-24
20-525 (1) 30-26 (2) 30-77 (2) 40-25
20-601 (1) 30-27 (2) 30-78 (2) 40-26
20-602 (1) 30-28 (2) 30-79 (2) 40-27
20-603 (1) 30-29 (2) 30-80 (2) 40-28
20-604 (1) 30-30 (2) 30-81 (2) 40-29
20-605 (1) 30-31 (2) 30-82 (2) 40-30
20-606 (1) 30-32 (2) 30-83 (2) 40-31
20-607 (1) 30-33 (2) 30-84 (2) 40-32
20-608 (1) 30-34 (2) 30-85 (2) 40-34
20-609 (1) 30-35 (2) 30-86 (2) 40-35
20-610 (1) 30-36 (2) 30-87 (2) 40-36
20-611 (1) 30-37 (2) 30-88 (2) 40-37
20-612 (1) 30-38 (2) 30-89 (2) 40-38
20-613 (1) 30-39 (2) 30-90 (2) 40-39
20-614 (1) 30-40 (2) 30-91 (2) 40-40
20-615 (1) 30-41 (2) 30-92 (2) 40-41
20-616 (1) 30-42 (2) 30-93 (2)
20-617 (1) 30-43 (2) 30-94 (2) q 90-1 (3)
20-618 (1) 30-44 (2) 30-95 (2) q 90-3 (3)
PC130-7 00-2-3
(3)
SAFETY SAFETY NOTICE
SAFETY
SAFETY NOTICE
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
Proper service and repair is extremely important for safe machine operation. The service and
repair techniques recommended by Komatsu and described in this manual are both effective
and safe. Some of these techniques require the use of tools specially designed by Komatsu for
the specific purpose.
To prevent injury to workers, the symbol k is used to mark safety precautions in this manual.
The cautions accompanying these symbols should always be followed carefully. If any danger-
ous situation arises or may possibly arise, first consider safety, and take the necessary actions
to deal with the situation.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS 6. Decide a place in the repair workshop to keep

tools and removed parts. Always keep the tools
Mistakes in operation are extremely dangerous. and parts in their correct places. Always keep
Read the Operation and Maintenance Manual care- the work area clean and make sure that there is
fully BEFORE operating the machine. no dirt or oil on the floor. Smoke only in the areas
1. Before carrying out any greasing or repairs, read provided for smoking. Never smoke while work-
all the precautions given on the decals which are ing.
fixed to the machine.
2. When carrying out any operation, always PREPARATIONS FOR WORK
wear safety shoes and helmet. Do not wear
loose work clothes, or clothes with buttons 7. Before adding oil or making any repairs, park the
missing. machine on hard, level ground, and block the
• Always wear safety glasses when hitting wheels or tracks to prevent the machine from
parts with a hammer. moving.
• Always wear safety glasses when grinding 8. Before starting work, lower blade, ripper, bucket
parts with a grinder, etc. or any other work equipment to the ground. If
3. If welding repairs are needed, always have a this is not possible, insert the safety pin or use
trained, experienced welder carry out the work. blocks to prevent the work equipment from fall-
When carrying out welding work, always wear ing. In addition, be sure to lock all the control
welding gloves, apron, hand shield, cap and levers and hang warning signs on them.
other clothes suited for welding work. 9. When disassembling or assembling, support the
4. When carrying out any operation with two or machine with blocks, jacks or stands before
more workers, always agree on the operating starting work.
procedure before starting. Always inform your 10.Remove all mud and oil from the steps or other
fellow workers before starting any step of the places used to get on and off the machine.
operation. Before starting work, hang UNDER Always use the handrails, ladders or steps when
REPAIR signs on the controls in the operator's getting on or off the machine. Never jump on or
compartment. off the machine. If it is impossible to use the
5. Keep all tools in good condition and learn the handrails, ladders or steps, use a stand to pro-
correct way to use them. vide safe footing.
00-3
SAFETY SAFETY NOTICE
PRECAUTIONS DURING WORK 19.Be sure to assemble all parts again in their origi-
nal places.
11.When removing the oil filler cap, drain plug or Replace any damaged parts with new parts.
hydraulic pressure measuring plugs, loosen • When installing hoses and wires, be sure
them slowly to prevent the oil from spurting out. that they will not be damaged by contact
Before disconnecting or removing components with other parts when the machine is being
of the oil, water or air circuits, first remove the operated.
pressure completely from the circuit. 20.When installing high pressure hoses, make sure
12.The water and oil in the circuits are hot when the that they are not twisted. Damaged tubes are
engine is stopped, so be careful not to get dangerous, so be extremely careful when install-
burned. ing tubes for high pressure circuits. Also, check
Wait for the oil and water to cool before carry- that connecting parts are correctly installed.
ing out any work on the oil or water circuits. 21.When assembling or installing parts, always use
13.Before starting work, remove the leads from the the specified tightening torques. When installing
battery. Always remove the lead from the nega- protective parts such as guards, or parts which
tive (–) terminal first. vibrate violently or rotate at high speed, be par-
14.When raising heavy components, use a hoist or ticularly careful to check that they are installed
crane. correctly.
Check that the wire rope, chains and hooks are 22.When aligning two holes, never insert your fin-
free from damage. gers or hand. Be careful not to get your fingers
Always use lifting equipment which has ample caught in a hole.
capacity. 23.When measuring hydraulic pressure, check that
Install the lifting equipment at the correct places. the measuring tool is correctly assembled before
Use a hoist or crane and operate slowly to pre- taking any measurements.
vent the component from hitting any other part.
24.Take care when removing or installing the tracks
Do not work with any part still raised by the hoist
of track-type machines.
or crane.
When removing the track, the track separates
15.When removing covers which are under internal suddenly, so never let anyone stand at either
pressure or under pressure from a spring, end of the track.
always leave two bolts in position on opposite
sides. Slowly release the pressure, then slowly
loosen the bolts to remove.
16.When removing components, be careful not to
break or damage the wiring. Damaged wiring
may cause electrical fires.
17.When removing piping, stop the fuel or oil from
spilling out. If any fuel or oil drips onto the floor,
wipe it up immediately. Fuel or oil on the floor
can cause you to slip, or can even start fires.
18.As a general rule, do not use gasoline to wash
parts. In particular, use only the minimum of
gasoline when washing electrical parts.
00-4
FOREWORD GENERAL
FOREWORD
GENERAL
This shop manual has been prepared as an aid to improve the quality of repairs by giving the serviceman an
accurate understanding of the product and by showing him the correct way to perform repairs and make judge-
ments. Make sure you understand the contents of this manual and use it to full effect at every opportunity.
This shop manual mainly contains the necessary technical information for operations performed in a service
workshop. For ease of understanding, the manual is divided into the following chapters; these chapters are fur-
ther divided into the each main group of components.
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION

This section explains the structure and function of each component. It serves not only to give an under-
standing of the structure, but also serves as reference material for troubleshooting.
In addition, this section may contain hydraulic circuit diagrams, electric circuit diagrams, and mainte-
nance standards.
TESTING AND ADJUSTING

This section explains checks to be made before and after performing repairs, as well as adjustments to
be made at completion of the checks and repairs.
Troubleshooting charts correlating "Problems" with "Causes" are also included in this section.
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

This section explains the procedures for removing, installing, disassembling and assembling each com-
ponent, as well as precautions for them.
MAINTENANCE STANDARD
This section gives the judgment standards for inspection of disassembled parts.
The contents of this section may be described in STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION.
OTHERS
This section mainly gives hydraulic circuit diagrams and electric circuit diagrams.
In addition, this section may give the specifications of attachments and options together.
NOTICE
The specifications contained in this shop manual are subject to change at any time and without any
advance notice. Use the specifications given in the book with the latest date.
00-5
FOREWORD HOW TO READ THE SHOP MANUAL
HOW TO READ THE SHOP MANUAL REVISED EDITION MARK
VOLUMES When a manual is revised, an edition mark

Shop manuals are issued as a guide to carrying out ((1)(2)(3)....) is recorded on the bottom of the pages.
repairs. They are divided as follows:
Chassis volume: Issued for every machine model REVISIONS

Engine volume: Issued for each engine series
Each issued as one Revised pages are shown in the LIST OF REVISED
Electrical volume:
}
Attachments volume: · volume to cover all
models
PAGES next to the CONTENTS page.
SYMBOLS
These various volumes are designed to avoid dupli-
cating the same information. Therefore, to deal with So that the shop manual can be of ample practical
all repairs for any model , it is necessary that chas- use, important safety and quality portions are
sis, engine, electrical and attachment volumes be marked with the following symbols.
available.
DISTRIBUTION AND UPDATING

Any additions, amendments or other changes will be
sent to KOMATSU distributors. Get the most up-to- Symbol Item Remarks
date information before you start any work.
k
Special safety precautions
Safety are necessary when per-
forming the work.
FILING METHOD
1. See the page number on the bottom of the page. Special technical precau-
File the pages in correct order. tions or other precautions
2. Following examples show how to read the page a Caution for preserving standards
number. are necessary when per-
forming the work.
Example 1 (Chassis volume):
Weight of parts of sys-
10 - 3
4
tems. Caution necessary
Weight when selecting hoisting
Item number (10. Structure and wire, or when working pos-
Function) ture is important, etc.
Consecutive page number for each
3
Places that require special
item. Tightening
attention for the tightening
torque
torque during assembly.
Example 2 (Engine volume):
2
Places to be coated with
12 - 5 Coat adhesives and lubricants,
etc.
Unit number (1. Engine) Places where oil, water or
5
Item number (2. Testing and Adjust- Oil, water fuel must be added, and
ing) the capacity.
Consecutive page number for each
Places where oil or water
6
item.
Drain must be drained, and
quantity to be drained.
3. Additional pages: Additional pages are indicated
by a hyphen (-) and number after the page
number. File as in the example.
Example:
10-4 12-203
10-4-1 12-203-1
Added pages
10-4-2 12-203-2
10-5 12-204
00-6
FOREWORD HOISTING INSTRUCTIONS
HOISTING INSTRUCTIONS
HOISTING
Slinging near the edge of the hook may cause

k Heavy parts (25 kg or more) must be lifted the rope to slip off the hook during hoisting, and
with a hoist, etc. In the DISASSEMBLY a serious accident can result. Hooks have max-
AND ASSEMBLY section, every part imum strength at the middle portion.
weighing 25 kg or more is indicated clearly
with the symbol 4
• If a part cannot be smoothly removed from the

machine by hoisting, the following checks
should be made:
1) Check for removal of all bolts fastening the 100% 88% 79% 71% 41%
part to the relative parts. SAD00479
2) Check for existence of another part causing
3) Do not sling a heavy load with one rope alone,
interference with the part to be removed.
but sling with two or more ropes symmetrically
wound onto the load.
k Slinging with one rope may cause turning
WIRE ROPES
1) Use adequate ropes depending on the
weight of parts to be hoisted, referring to of the load during hoisting, untwisting of
the table below: the rope, or slipping of the rope from its
original winding position on the load, which
Wire ropes can result in a dangerous accident.
(Standard "Z" or "S" twist ropes
without galvanizing) 4) Do not sling a heavy load with ropes forming a
wide hanging angle from the hook.
Rope diameter Allowable load
When hoisting a load with two or more ropes,
the force subjected to each rope will increase
mm kN tons with the hanging angles. The table below
shows the variation of allowable load kN {kg}
10 9.8 1.0 when hoisting is made with two ropes, each of
11.5 13.7 1.4 which is allowed to sling up to 9.8 kN {1000 kg}
12.5 15.7 1.6
vertically, at various hanging angles.
14 21.6 2.2
16 27.5 2.8
When two ropes sling a load vertically, up to
18 35.3 3.6 19.6 kN {2000 kg} of total weight can be sus-
20 43.1 4.4 pended. This weight becomes 9.8 kN {1000 kg}
22.4 54.9 5.6 when two ropes make a 120° hanging angle.
30 98.1 10.0 On the other hand, two ropes are subjected to
40 176.5 18.0 an excessive force as large as 39.2 kN {4000
50 274.6 28.0 kg} if they sling a 19.6 kN {2000 kg} load at a
60 392.2 40.0 lifting angle of 150°.
★ The allowable load value is estimated to be one-

sixth or one-seventh of the breaking strength of
the rope used.
2) Sling wire ropes from the middle portion of the

hook.
00-7
FOREWORD METHOD OF DISASSEMBLING, CONNECTING PUSH-PULL TYPE COUPLER
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLING, CONNECTING PUSH-PULL TYPE COUPLER
k Before carrying out the following work, release Type 1

the residual pressure from the hydraulic tank.
For details, see TESTING AND ADJUSTING,
Releasing residual pressure from hydraulic
tank.
k Even if the residual pressure is released from

the hydraulic tank, some hydraulic oil flows out
when the hose is disconnected. Accordingly,
prepare an oil receiving container.
Disconnection
1) Release the residual pressure from the hydrau-
lic tank. For details, see TESTING AND
ADJUSTING, Releasing residual pressure from
hydraulic tank.
2) Hold adapter (1) and push hose joint (2) into

mating adapter (3). (See Fig. 1)
★ The adapter can be pushed in about 3.5
mm.
★ Do not hold rubber cap portion (4).
3) After hose joint (2) is pushed into adapter (3),

press rubber cap portion (4) against (3) until it
clicks. (See Fig. 2)
4) Hold hose adapter (1) or hose (5) and pull it out.

(See Fig. 3)
★ Since some hydraulic oil flows out, prepare
an oil receiving container.
Connection
1) Hold hose adapter (1) or hose (5) and insert it in
mating adapter (3), aligning them with each
other. (See Fig. 4)
★ Do not hold rubber cap portion (4).
2) After inserting the hose in the mating adapter

perfectly, pull it back to check its connecting
condition. (See Fig. 5)
★ When the hose is pulled back, the rubber
cap portion moves toward the hose about
3.5 mm. This does not indicate abnormality,
however.
00-8
FOREWORD METHOD OF DISASSEMBLING, CONNECTING PUSH-PULL TYPE COUPLER
Type 2 Type 3
1) Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion 1) Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion
and push body (2) in straight until sliding pre- and push body (2) in straight until sliding pre-
vention ring (1) contacts contact surface a of vention ring (1) contacts contact surface a of
the hexagonal portion at the male end. the hexagonal portion at the male end.
2) Hold in the condition in Step 1), and turn 2) Hold in the condition in Step 1), and push
lever (4) to the right (clockwise). until cover (3) contacts contact surface a of
the hexagonal portion at the male end.
Disassembly
3) Hold in the condition in Steps 1) and 2), and 3) Hold in the condition in Steps 1) and 2), and
pull out whole body (2) to disconnect it. pull out whole body (2) to disconnect it.
• Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion • Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion
and push body (2) in straight until sliding pre- and push body (2) in straight until sliding pre-
vention ring (1) contacts contact surface a of vention ring (1) contacts contact surface a of
the hexagonal portion at the male end to con- the hexagonal portion at the male end to con-
nect it. nect it.
Connection
00-9
FOREWORD COATING MATERIALS
COATING MATERIALS
★ The recommended coating materials such as adhesives, gasket sealants and greases used for disassembly
and assembly are listed below.
★ For coating materials not listed below, use the equivalent of products shown in this list.
Category Komatsu code Part No. Q'ty Container Main applications, featuresr
• Used to prevent rubber gaskets, rub-

LT-1A 790-129-9030 150 g Tube ber cushions, and cock plug from
coming out.
• Used in places requiring an immedi-
ately effective, strong adhesive.
20 g Polyethylene Used for plastics (except polyethyl-
LT-1B 790-129-9050 (2 pcs.) container ene, polyprophylene, tetrafluoroeth-
lene and vinyl chloride), rubber,
metal and non-metal.
• Features: Resistance to heat and
Polyethylene chemicals
LT-2 09940-00030 50 g container • Used for anti-loosening and sealant
purpose for bolts and plugs.
Adhesive: • Used as adhesive or sealant for met-
790-129-9060 al, glass and plastic.
1 kg
(Set of adhesive
LT-3 Hardening Can
and hardening agent:
agent) 500 g
Adhesives
Polyethylene • Used as sealant for machined holes.
LT-4 790-129-9040 250 g container
Holtz • Used as heat-resisting sealant for re-

790-126-9120 75 g Tube pairing engine.
MH 705
• Quick hardening type adhesive
Three bond Polyethylene • Cure time: within 5 sec. to 3 min.
790-129-9140 50 g
1735 container • Used mainly for adhesion of metals,
rubbers, plastics and woods.
• Quick hardening type adhesive
• Quick cure type (max. strength after
Aron-alpha Polyethylene
790-129-9130 2g 30 minutes)
201 container • Used mainly for adhesion of rubbers,
plastics and metals.
• Resistance to heat, chemicals
Loctite Polyethylene
79A-129-9110 50 cc • Used at joint portions subject to high
648-50 container temperatures.
• Used as adhesive or sealant for gas-
LG-1 790-129-9010 200 g Tube kets and packing of power train case,
etc.
• Used as sealant for various threads,
pipe joints, flanges.
LG-5 790-129-9080 1 kg Can • Used as sealant for tapered plugs,
elbows, nipples of hydraulic piping.
• Features: Silicon based, resistance
to heat, cold
• Used as sealant for flange surface,
LG-6 790-129-9020 200 g Tube tread.
• Used as sealant for oil pan, final
Gasket drive case, etc.
sealant
• Features: Silicon based, quick hard-
ening type
LG-7 790-129-9070 1g Tube • Used as sealant for flywheel hous-
ing, intake manifold, oil an, thermo-
stat housing, etc.
Three bond • Used as heat-resisting sealant for re-
790-129-9090 100 g Tube pairing engine.
1211
• Features: Silicone type, heat resist-
ant, vibration resistant, and impact
Three bond 419-15-18131 100 g Tube resistant sealing material
1207B • Used as sealing material for transfer
case
00-10
FOREWORD COATING MATERIALS
Category Komatsu code Part No. Q'ty Container Main applications, featuresr
• Used as lubricant for sliding portion

LM-G 09940-00051 60 g Can (to prevent from squeaking).
Molybdenum • Used to prevent seizure or scuffling
disulphide of the thread when press fitting or
lubricant LM-P 09940-00040 200 g Tube shrink fitting.
• Used as lubricant for linkage, bear-
ings, etc.
SYG2-400LI • General purpose type
SYG2-350LI
G2-LI SYG2-400LI-A Various Various
SYG2-160LI
SYGA-160CNLI
SYG2-400CA • Used for normal temperature, light

SYG2-350CA load bearing at places in contact
G2-CA SYG2-400CA-A Various Various with water or steam.
SYG2-160CA
SYGA-160CNCA
Molybdenum • Used for heavy load portion

SYG2-400M 400 g × 10 Bellows type
disulphide
Grease SYG2-400M-A 400 g × 20 Bellows type
grease SYGA-16CNM 16 kg Can
LM-G (G2-M)
• Seizure resistance and heat resist-
Hyper White
Grease G2-T SYG2-400T-A ance higher than molybdenum di-
SYG2-16CNT 400 g Bellows type sulfide grease
G0-T (*) SYG0-400T-A (*) 16 kg Can • Since this grease is white, it does
*: For use in cold SYG0-16CNT (*) not stand out against machine
district
body.
Biogrease G2B • Since this grease is decomposed
SYG2-400B by bacteria in short period, it has
G2-BT (*) SYGA-16CNB 400 g Bellows type less effects on microorganisms,
*: For high SYG2-400BT (*) 16 kg Can animals, and plants.
temperature SYGA-16CNBT (*)
and large load
SUNSTAR • Used as primer for cab side

Glass (Using limit: 4 months)
PAINT PRIMER 20 ml container
580 SUPER
Primer
SUNSTAR • Used as primer for glass side
Glass (Using limit: 4 months)
GLASS PRIMER 20 ml container
580 SUPER 417-926-3910
Adhesive for cab glass
• "S" is used for high-tempera-

SUNSTAR ture season (April - October)
PENGUINE Polyethylene and "W" for low-temperature
SEAL 580 320 ml container season (November - April) as
SUPER "S" or
Adhesive adhesive for glass.
"W" (Using limit: 4 months)
Sika Japan, Polyethylene • Used as adhesive for glass.
20Y-54-39850 310 ml (Using limit: 6 months)
Sikaflex 256HV container
SUNSTAR • Used to seal joints of glass

Polyethylene parts.
PENGUINE 417-926-3920 320 ml container (Using limit: 4 months)
SEAL No. 2505
Caulking
material • Used to seal front window.
SEKISUI Polyethylene (Using limit: 6 months)
SILICONE 20Y-54-55130 333 ml container
SEALANT
00-11
FOREWORD STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUE
STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUE

STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUE TABLE (WHEN USING TORQUE WRENCH)
★ In the case of metric nuts and bolts for which there is no special instruction, tighten to the torque given in
the table below.
Tightening torque
Thread diameter Width across
of bolt flats
mm mm Nm kgm
6 10 11.8 – 14.7 1.2 – 1.5

8 13 27 – 34 2.8 – 3.5
10 17 59 – 74 6 – 7.5
12 19 98 – 123 10 – 12.5
14 22 153 – 190 15.5 – 19.5
16 24 235 – 285 23.5 – 29.5

18 27 320 – 400 33 – 41
20 30 455 – 565 46.5 – 58
22 32 610 – 765 62.5 – 78
24 36 785 – 980 80 – 100
27 41 1150 – 1440 118 – 147

30 46 1520 – 1910 155 – 195
33 50 1960 – 2450 200 – 250
36 55 2450 – 3040 250 – 310
39 60 2890 – 3630 295 – 370
Tightening torque
Thread diameter Width across
of bolt flats
mm mm Nm kgm
6 10 5.9 – 9.8 0.6 – 1.0

8 13 13.7 – 23.5 1.4 – 2.4
10 14 34.3 – 46.1 3.5 – 4.7
12 27 74.5 – 90.2 7.6 – 9.2
Sealing surface
TABLE OF TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR FLARED NUTS

★ In the case of flared nuts for which there is no
special instruction, tighten to the torque given in
the table below. SAD00483
Thread diameter Width across flat Tightening torque
mm mm Nm kgm
14 19 24.5 ± 4.9 2.5 ± 0.5

18 24 49 ± 19.6 5±2
22 27 78.5 ± 19.6 8±2
24 32 137.3 ± 29.4 14 ± 3
30 36 176.5 ± 29.4 18 ± 3
33 41 196.1 ± 49 20 ± 5
36 46 245.2 ± 49 25 ± 5
42 55 294.2 ± 49 30 ± 5
00-12
TABLE OF TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR SPLIT FLANGE BOLTS

★ In the case of split flange bolts for which there is no special instruction, tighten to the torque given in the
table below.
Thread diameter Width across flat Tightening torque
mm mm Nm kgm
10 14 59 – 74 6 – 7.5
12 17 98 – 123 10 – 12.5
16 22 235 – 285 23.5 – 29.5
TABLE OF TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR O-RING BOSS PIPING JOINTS

★ Unless there are special instructions, tighten the O-ring boss piping joints to the torque below.
Thread diameter Width across flat Tightening torque (Nm {kgm})

Norminal No.
mm mm Range Target
02 14 35 – 63 {3.5 – 6.5} 44 {4.5}

03, 04 20 Varies depending 84 – 132 {8.5 – 13.5} 103 {10.5}
05, 06 24 on type of 128 – 186 {13.0 – 19.0} 157 {16.0}
10, 12 33 connector. 363 – 480 {37.0 – 49.0} 422 {43.0}
14 42 746 – 1010 {76.0 – 103} 883 {90.0}
TABLE OF TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR O-RING BOSS PLUGS

★ Unless there are special instructions, tighten the O-ring boss plugs to the torque below.
Thread diameter Width across flat Tightening torque (Nm {kgm})

Norminal No.
mm mm Range Target
08 08 14 5.88 – 8.82 {0.6 – 0.9} 7.35 {0.75}

10 10 17 9.8 – 12.74 {1.0 – 1.3} 11.27 {1.15}
12 12 19 14.7 – 19.6 {1.5 – 2.0} 17.64 {1.8}
14 14 22 19.6 – 24.5 {2.0 – 2.5} 22.54 {2.3}
16 16 24 24.5 – 34.3 {2.5 – 3.5} 29.4 {3.0}
18 18 27 34.3 – 44.1 {3.5 – 4.5} 39.2 {4.0}
20 20 30 44.1 – 53.9 {4.5 – 5.5} 49.0 {5.0}
24 24 32 58.8 – 78.4 {6.0 – 8.0} 68.6 {7.0}
30 30 32 93.1 – 122.5 {9.5 – 12.5} 107.8 {11.0}
33 33 — 107.8 – 147.0 {11.0 – 15.0} 124.4 {13.0}
36 36 36 127.4 – 176.4 {13.0 – 18.0} 151.9 {15.5}
42 42 — 181.3 – 240.1 {18.5 – 24.5} 210.7 {21.5}
52 52 — 274.4 – 367.5 {28.0 – 37.5} 323.4 {33.0}
00-13
TIGHTENING TORQUE FOR 102 ENGINE SERIES

1) BOLT AND NUTS
Use these torques for bolts and nuts (unit: mm) of Cummins Engine.
Thread diameter Tightening torque
mm Nm kgm
6 10 0 2 1.02 0 0.20
8 24 0 4 2.45 0 0.41
10 43 0 6 4.38 0 0.61
12 77 0 12 7.85 0 1.22
2) EYE JOINTS
Use these torques for eye joints (unit: mm) of Cummins Engine.
mm Nm kgm
6 802 0.81 0 0.20
8 10 0 2 1.02 0 0.20
10 12 0 2 1.22 0 0.20
12 24 0 4 2.45 0 0.41
14 36 0 5 3.67 0 0.51
3) TAPERED SCREWS
Use these torques for tapered screws (unit: inch) of Cummins Engine.
inch Nm kgm
1 / 16 301 0.31 0 0.10
1/8 802 0.81 0 0.20
1/4 12 0 2 1.22 0 0.20
3/8 15 0 2 1.53 0 0.41
1/2 24 0 4 2.45 0 0.41
3/4 36 0 5 3.67 0 0.51
1 60 0 9 6.12 0 0.92
TIGHTENING TORQUE TABLE FOR HOSES (TAPER SEAL TYPE AND FACE SEAL TYPE)
★ Tighten the hoses (taper seal type and face seal type) to the following torque, unless otherwise specified.
★ Apply the following torque when the threads are coated (wet) with engine oil.
Taper seal
Tightening torque (Nm {kgm}) Face seal type
type
Nominal size Width across
of hose flats Nominal thread
Thread size size Root diameter
Range Target - Threads per
(mm) inch, Thread series (mm) (Reference)
9
02 19 34 - 63 {3.5 - 6.5} 44 {4.5} 14 – - 18UNF 14.3
16
11
22 54 - 93 {5.5 - 9.5} 74 {4.5} – – - 16UN 17.5
03 16
24 59 - 98 {6.0 - 10.0} 78 {8.0} 18 – –
13
04 27 84 - 132 {8.5 - 13.5} 103 {10.5} 22 – - 16UN 20.7
16
05 32 128 - 186 {13.0 - 19.0} 157 {16.0} 24 1 - 14UNS 25.4
3
06 36 177 - 245 {18.0 - 25.0} 216 {22.0} 30 1 – - 12UNF 30.3
16
(10) 41 177 - 245 {18.0 - 25.0} 216 {22.0} 33 – –
(12) 46 197 - 294 {20.0 - 30.0} 245 {25.0} 36 – –
(14) 55 246 - 343 {25.0 - 35.0} 294 {30.0} 42 – –
00-14
FOREWORD ELECTRIC WIRE CODE
ELECTRIC WIRE CODE

In the wiring diagrams, various colors and symbols are employed to indicate the thickness of wires.
This wire code table will help you understand WIRING DIAGRAMS.
Example: 5WB indicates a cable having a nominal number 5 and white coating with black stripe.
CLASSIFICATION BY THICKNESS
Copper wire
Norminal Cable O.D. Current
number Dia. of Cross (mm) rating Applicable circuit
Number of strands section (A)
strands (mm2) (mm2)
0.85 11 0.32 0.88 2.4 12 Starting, lighting, signal

etc.
2 26 0.32 2.09 3.1 20 Lighting, signal etc.
5 65 0.32 5.23 4.6 37 Charging and signal
15 84 0.45 13.36 7.0 59 Starting (Glow plug)
40 85 0.80 42.73 11.4 135 Starting
60 127 0.80 63.84 13.6 178 Starting
100 217 0.80 109.1 17.6 230 Starting
CLASSIFICATION BY COLOR AND CODE
Circuits
Priori- Charging Ground Starting Lighting Instrument Signal Other
ty Classi-
fication
Code W B B R Y G L
Pri-
1 mary
Color White Black Black Red Yellow Green Blue
Code WR — BW RW YR GW LW
2
Color White & Red — White & Black Red & White Rellow & Red Green & White Blue & White
Code WB — BY RB YB GR LR
3
Color White & Black — Black & Yellow Red & Black Yellow & Black Green & Red Blue & Yellow
Code WL — BR RY YG GY LY
Auxi-
4 liary Yellow & Green &
Color White & Blue — Black & Red Red & Yellow Blue & Yellow
Green Yellow
Code WG — — RG YL GB LB
5
Color White & Green — — Red & Green Yellow & Blue Green & Black Blue & Black
Code — — — RL YW GL n
6
Color — — — Red & Blue Yellow & White Green & Blue n
00-15
FOREWORD CONVERSION TABLE
CONVERSION TABLE
METHOD OF USING THE CONVERSION TABLE

The Conversion Table in this section is provided to enable simple conversion of figures. For details of the
method of using the Conversion Table, see the example given below.
EXAMPLE
• Method of using the Conversion Table to convert from millimeters to inches
1. Convert 55 mm into inches.
(1) Locate the number 50 in the vertical column at the left side, take this as A, then draw a horizontal line
from A.
(2) Locate the number 5 in the row across the top, take this as B, then draw a perpendicular line down
from B.
(3) Take the point where the two lines cross as C. This point C gives the value when converting from mil-
limeters to inches. Therefore, 55 mm = 2.165 inches.
2. Convert 550 mm into inches.
(1) The number 550 does not appear in the table, so divide by 10 (move the decimal point one place to the
left) to convert it to 55 mm.
(2) Carry out the same procedure as above to convert 55 mm to 2.165 inches.
(3) The original value (550 mm) was divided by 10, so multiply 2.165 inches by 10 (move the decimal point
one place to the right) to return to the original value. This gives 550 mm = 21.65 inches.
Millimeters to inches
1 mm = 0.03937 in
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.039 0.079 0.118 0.157 0.197 0.236 0.276 0.315 0.354

10 0.394 0.433 0.472 0.512 0.551 0.591 0.630 0.669 0.709 0.748
20 0.787 0.827 0.866 0.906 0.945 0.984 1.024 1.063 1.102 1.142
30 1.181 1.220 1.260 1.299 1.339 1.378 1.417 1.457 1.496 1.536
C
40 1.575 1.614 1.654 1.693 1.732 1.772 1.811 1.850 1.890 1.929
A 50 1.969 2.008 2.047 2.087 2.126 2.165 2.205 2.244 2.283 2.323
60 2.362 2.402 2.441 2.480 2.520 2.559 2.598 2.638 2.677 2.717
70 2.756 2.795 2.835 2.874 2.913 2.953 2.992 3.032 3.071 3.110
80 3.150 3.189 3.228 3.268 3.307 3.346 3.386 3.425 3.465 3.504
90 3.543 3.583 3.622 3.661 3.701 3.740 3.780 3.819 3.858 3.898
00-16
Millimeters to Inches
1 mm = 0.03937 in
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.039 0.079 0.118 0.157 0.197 0.236 0.276 0.315 0.354

10 0.394 0.433 0.472 0.512 0.551 0.591 0.630 0.669 0.709 0.748
20 0.787 0.827 0.866 0.906 0.945 0.984 1.024 1.063 1.102 1.142
30 1.181 1.220 1.260 1.299 1.339 1.378 1.417 1.457 1.496 1.536
40 1.575 1.614 1.654 1.693 1.732 1.772 1.811 1.850 1.890 1.929
50 1.969 2.008 2.047 2.087 2.126 2.165 2.205 2.244 2.283 2.323
60 2.362 2.402 2.441 2.480 2.520 2.559 2.598 2.638 2.677 2.717
70 2.756 2.795 2.835 2.874 2.913 2.953 2.992 3.032 3.071 3.110
80 3.150 3.189 3.228 3.268 3.307 3.346 3.386 3.425 3.465 3.504
90 3.543 3.583 3.622 3.661 3.701 3.740 3.780 3.819 3.858 3.898
Kilogram to Pound
1 kg = 2.2046 lb
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 2.20 4.41 6.61 8.82 11.02 13.23 15.43 17.64 19.84

10 22.05 24.25 26.46 28.66 30.86 33.07 35.27 37.48 39.68 41.89
20 44.09 46.30 48.50 50.71 51.91 55.12 57.32 59.53 61.73 63.93
30 66.14 68.34 70.55 72.75 74.96 77.16 79.37 81.57 83.78 85.98
40 88.18 90.39 92.59 94.80 97.00 99.21 101.41 103.62 105.82 108.03
50 110.23 112.44 114.64 116.85 119.05 121.25 123.46 125.66 127.87 130.07
60 132.28 134.48 136.69 138.89 141.10 143.30 145.51 147.71 149.91 152.12
70 154.32 156.53 158.73 160.94 163.14 165.35 167.55 169.76 171.96 174.17
80 176.37 178.57 180.78 182.98 185.19 187.39 189.60 191.80 194.01 196.21
90 198.42 200.62 202.83 205.03 207.24 209.44 211.64 213.85 216.05 218.26
00-17
Liter to U.S. Gallon

1l = 0.2642 U.S. Gal
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.264 0.528 0.793 1.057 1.321 1.585 1.849 2.113 2.378

10 2.642 2.906 3.170 3.434 3.698 3.963 4.227 4.491 4.755 5.019
20 5.283 5.548 5.812 6.076 6.340 6.604 6.869 7.133 7.397 7.661
30 7.925 8.189 8.454 8.718 8.982 9.246 9.510 9.774 10.039 10.303
40 10.567 10.831 11.095 11.359 11.624 11.888 12.152 12.416 12.680 12.944
50 13.209 13.473 13.737 14.001 14.265 14.529 14.795 15.058 15.322 15.586
60 15.850 16.115 16.379 16.643 16.907 17.171 17.435 17.700 17.964 18.228
70 18.492 18.756 19.020 19.285 19.549 19.813 20.077 20.341 20.605 20.870
80 21.134 21.398 21.662 21.926 22.190 22.455 22.719 22.983 23.247 23.511
90 23.775 24.040 24.304 24.568 24.832 25.096 25.361 25.625 25.889 26.153
Liter to U.K. Gallon

1l = 0.21997 U.K. Gal
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.220 0.440 0.660 0.880 1.100 1.320 1.540 1.760 1.980

10 2.200 2.420 2.640 2.860 3.080 3.300 3.520 3.740 3.950 4.179
20 4.399 4.619 4.839 5.059 5.279 5.499 5.719 5.939 6.159 6.379
30 6.599 6.819 7.039 7.259 7.479 7.969 7.919 8.139 8.359 8.579
40 8.799 9.019 9.239 9.459 9.679 9.899 10.119 10.339 10.559 10.778
50 10.998 11.281 11.438 11.658 11.878 12.098 12.318 12.528 12.758 12.978
60 13.198 13.418 13.638 13.858 14.078 14.298 14.518 14.738 14.958 15.178
70 15.398 15.618 15.838 16.058 16.278 16.498 16.718 16.938 17.158 17.378
80 17.598 17.818 18.037 18.257 18.477 18.697 18.917 19.137 19.357 19.577
90 19.797 20.017 20.237 20.457 20.677 20.897 21.117 21.337 21.557 21.777
00-18
kgm to ft. lb
1 kgm = 7.233 ft. lb
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 7.2 14.5 21.7 28.9 36.2 43.4 50.6 57.9 65.1

10 72.3 79.6 86.8 94.0 101.3 108.5 115.7 123.0 130.2 137.4
20 144.7 151.9 159.1 166.4 173.6 180.8 188.1 195.3 202.5 209.8
30 217.0 224.2 231.5 238.7 245.9 253.2 260.4 267.6 274.9 282.1
40 289.3 296.6 303.8 311.0 318.3 325.5 332.7 340.0 347.2 354.4
50 361.7 368.9 376.1 383.4 390.6 397.8 405.1 412.3 419.5 426.8
60 434.0 441.2 448.5 455.7 462.9 470.2 477.4 484.6 491.8 499.1
70 506.3 513.5 520.8 528.0 535.2 542.5 549.7 556.9 564.2 571.4
80 578.6 585.9 593.1 600.3 607.6 614.8 622.0 629.3 636.5 643.7
90 651.0 658.2 665.4 672.7 679.9 687.1 694.4 701.6 708.8 716.1
100 723.3 730.5 737.8 745.0 752.2 759.5 766.7 773.9 781.2 788.4
110 795.6 802.9 810.1 817.3 824.6 831.8 839.0 846.3 853.5 860.7
120 868.0 875.2 882.4 889.7 896.9 904.1 911.4 918.6 925.8 933.1
130 940.3 947.5 954.8 962.0 969.2 976.5 983.7 990.9 998.2 1005.4
140 1012.6 1019.9 1027.1 1034.3 1041.5 1048.8 1056.0 1063.2 1070.5 1077.7
150 1084.9 1092.2 1099.4 1106.6 1113.9 1121.1 1128.3 1135.6 1142.8 1150.0
160 1157.3 1164.5 1171.7 1179.0 1186.2 1193.4 1200.7 1207.9 1215.1 1222.4
170 1129.6 1236.8 1244.1 1251.3 1258.5 1265.8 1273.0 1280.1 1287.5 1294.7
180 1301.9 1309.2 1316.4 1323.6 1330.9 1338.1 1345.3 1352.6 1359.8 1367.0
190 1374.3 1381.5 1388.7 1396.0 1403.2 1410.4 1417.7 1424.9 1432.1 1439.4
00-19
kg/cm2 to lb/in2
1kg/cm2 = 14.2233 lb/in2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 14.2 28.4 42.7 56.9 71.1 85.3 99.6 113.8 128.0

10 142.2 156.5 170.7 184.9 199.1 213.4 227.6 241.8 256.0 270.2
20 284.5 298.7 312.9 327.1 341.4 355.6 369.8 384.0 398.3 412.5
30 426.7 440.9 455.1 469.4 483.6 497.8 512.0 526.3 540.5 554.7
40 568.9 583.2 597.4 611.6 625.8 640.1 654.3 668.5 682.7 696.9
50 711.2 725.4 739.6 753.8 768.1 782.3 796.5 810.7 825.0 839.2
60 853.4 867.6 881.8 896.1 910.3 924.5 938.7 953.0 967.2 981.4
70 995.6 1010 1024 1038 1053 1067 1081 1095 1109 1124
80 1138 1152 1166 1181 1195 1209 1223 1237 1252 1266
90 1280 1294 1309 1323 1337 1351 1365 1380 1394 1408
100 1422 1437 1451 1465 1479 1493 1508 1522 1536 1550
110 1565 1579 1593 1607 1621 1636 1650 1664 1678 1693
120 1707 1721 1735 1749 1764 1778 1792 1806 1821 1835
130 1849 1863 1877 1892 1906 1920 1934 1949 1963 1977
140 1991 2005 2020 2034 2048 2062 2077 2091 2105 2119
150 2134 2148 2162 2176 2190 2205 2219 2233 2247 2262
160 2276 2290 2304 2318 2333 2347 2361 2375 2389 2404
170 2418 2432 2446 2460 2475 2489 2503 2518 2532 2546
180 2560 2574 2589 2603 2617 2631 2646 2660 2674 2688
190 2702 2717 2731 2745 2759 2773 2788 2802 2816 2830
200 2845 2859 2873 2887 2901 2916 2930 2944 2958 2973
210 2987 3001 3015 3030 3044 3058 3072 3086 3101 3115
220 3129 3143 3158 3172 3186 3200 3214 3229 3243 3257
230 3271 3286 3300 3314 3328 3343 3357 3371 3385 3399
240 3414 3428 3442 3456 3470 3485 3499 3513 3527 3542
00-20
Temperature
Fahrenheit-Centigrade Conversion ; a simple way to convert a Fahrenheit temperature reading into a Cen-
tigrade temperature reading or vice versa is to enter the accompanying table in the center or boldface col-
umn of figures.
These figures refer to the temperature in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade degrees.
If it is desired to convert from Fahrenheit to Centigrade degrees, consider the center column as a table of
Fahrenheit temperatures and read the corresponding Centigrade temperature in the column at the left.
If it is desired to convert from Centigrade to Fahrenheit degrees, consider the center column as a table of
Centigrade values, and read the corresponding Fahrenheit temperature on the right.
1°C = 33.8°F
°C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F
–40.4 –40 –40.0 –11.7 11 51.8 7.8 46 114.8 27.2 81 117.8

–37.2 –35 –31.0 –11.1 12 53.6 8.3 47 116.6 27.8 82 179.6
–34.4 –30 –22.0 –10.6 13 55.4 8.9 48 118.4 28.3 83 181.4
–31.7 –25 –13.0 –10.0 14 57.2 9.4 49 120.2 28.9 84 183.2
–28.9 –20 –4.0 –9.4 15 59.0 10.0 50 122.0 29.4 85 185.0
–28.3 –19 –2.2 –8.9 16 60.8 10.6 51 123.8 30.0 86 186.8

–27.8 –18 –0.4 –8.3 17 62.6 11.1 52 125.6 30.6 87 188.6
–27.2 –17 1.4 –7.8 18 64.4 11.7 53 127.4 31.1 88 190.4
–26.7 –16 3.2 –7.2 19 66.2 12.2 54 129.2 31.7 89 192.2
–26.1 –15 5.0 –6.7 20 68.0 12.8 55 131.0 32.2 90 194.0
–25.6 –14 6.8 –6.1 21 69.8 13.3 56 132.8 32.8 91 195.8

–25.0 –13 8.6 –5.6 22 71.6 13.9 57 134.6 33.3 92 197.6
–24.4 –12 10.4 –5.0 23 73.4 14.4 58 136.4 33.9 93 199.4
–23.9 –11 12.2 –4.4 24 75.2 15.0 59 138.2 34.4 94 201.2
–23.3 –10 14.0 –3.9 25 77.0 15.6 0 140.0 35.0 95 203.0
–22.8 –9 15.8 –3.3 26 78.8 16.1 61 141.8 35.6 96 204.8

–22.2 –8 17.6 –2.8 27 80.6 16.7 62 143.6 36.1 97 206.6
–21.7 –7 19.4 –2.2 28 82.4 17.2 63 145.4 36.7 98 208.4
–21.1 –6 21.2 –1.7 29 84.2 17.8 64 147.2 37.2 99 210.2
–20.6 –5 23.0 –1.1 30 86.0 18.3 65 149.0 37.8 100 212.0
–20.0 –4 24.8 –0.6 31 87.8 18.9 66 150.8 40.6 105 221.0

–19.4 –3 26.6 0 32 89.6 19.4 67 152.6 43.3 110 230.0
–18.9 –2 28.4 0.6 33 91.4 20.0 68 154.4 46.1 115 239.0
–18.3 –1 30.2 1.1 34 93.2 20.6 69 156.2 48.9 120 248.0
–17.8 0 32.0 1.7 35 95.0 21.1 70 158.0 51.7 125 257.0
–17.2 1 33.8 2.2 36 96.8 21.7 71 159.8 54.4 130 266.0

–16.7 2 35.6 2.8 37 98.6 22.2 72 161.6 57.2 135 275.0
–16.1 3 37.4 3.3 38 100.4 22.8 73 163.4 60.0 140 284.0
–15.6 4 39.2 3.9 39 102.2 23.3 74 165.2 62.7 145 293.0
–15.0 5 41.0 4.4 40 104.0 23.9 75 167.0 65.6 150 302.0
–14.4 6 42.8 5.0 41 105.8 24.4 76 168.8 68.3 155 311.0

–13.9 7 44.6 5.6 42 107.6 25.0 77 170.6 71.1 160 320.0
–13.3 8 46.4 6.1 43 109.4 25.6 78 172.4 73.9 165 329.0
–12.8 9 48.2 6.7 44 111.2 26.1 79 174.2 76.7 170 338.0
–12.2 10 50.0 7.2 45 113.0 26.7 80 176.0 79.4 175 347.0
00-21
FOREWORD UNITS
UNITS
In this manual, the measuring units are indicated with Internatinal System of units (SI).
As for reference, conventionally used Gravitational System of units are indicated in parentheses { }.
Example:
N {kg}
Nm {kgm}
MPa {kg/cm2}
kPa {mmH2O}
kPa {mmHg}
kW/rpm {HP/rpm}
g/kWh {g/HPh}
00-22
01 GENERAL
GENERAL ASSEMBLY DRAWING ........................................... 01-2

SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................... 01-4
WEIGHT TABLE ........................................................................ 01-7
LIST OF LUBRICANTS AND WATER ....................................... 01-9
PC130-7 01-1
GENERAL GENERAL ASSEMBLY DRAWING
GENERAL ASSEMBLY DRAWING

SPECIFICATION DIMENSIONAL DRAWING
PC130-7
Item Unit
2.5 m arm, 500 mm shoe 3.0 m arm, 700 mm shoe
A Overall length mm 7,595 7,485
B Overall height mm 2,810 3,170
C Overall width mm 2,490 2,490
D Shoe width mm 500 700
E Cab height mm 2,810 2,810
F Trail swing radius mm 2,190 2,190
G Crawler overall length mm 3,610 3,610
H Distance between tambler center mm 2,880 2,880
01-2 PC130-7
GENERAL GENERAL ASSEMBLY DRAWING
WORKING RANGE DRAWING
PC130-7
Working range (mm)
2.5 m arm 3.0 m arm
A Maximum digging radius 8,290 8,785
B Maximum digging depth 5,520 6,015
C Maximum digging height 8,610 8,790
D Maximum vertical wall digging depth 4,940 5,360
E Maximum dumping height 6,170 6,535
F Minimum swing radius of work equipment 2,450 2,610
G Maximum reach at ground level 8,170 8,665
PC130-7 01-3
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
PC130-7
Machine model
Serial No. 70001 and up

Bucket capacity (SAE) m3 0.5 0.5
Operating weight kg 12,200 13,050
Max. digging depth mm 5,520 6,015
Working ranges
Max. vertical wall depth mm 4,940 5,360

Max. digging reach mm 8,290 8,785
Max. reach st ground level mm 8,170 8,665
Max. digging height mm 8,610 8,970
Performance
Max. dumping height mm 6,170 6,535

Max. digging force (bucket) kN {kg} 93.2 {9,500} 93.2 {9,500}
Swing speed rpm 11.0 11.0
Swing max. slope angle deg. 20 20
Travel speed (Hi/Lo) km/h 2.7/5.5 2.7/5.5
Gradeability deg. 35 35
Ground pressure kPa {kg/cm2} 38 {0.39} 29 {0.30}
Overall length (for transport) mm 7,595 7,485
Overall width mm 2,490 2,690
Overall height (for transport) mm 2,810 3,170
Overall height to top of cab mm 2,730 2,730
Ground clearance of counterweight mm 855 855
Min. ground clearance mm 400 400
Dimension
Tail swing radius mm 2,190 2,190

Min. swing radius of work euipment mm 2,450 2,610
Height of work equipment at min.
swing radius mm 6,455 6,455
Length of track mm 3,610 3,610

Distance between tumbler center mm 2,880 2,880
Track gauge mm 1,990 1,990
Overall height of machine cab mm 1,885 1,885
Model SAA4D95LE-3
4-cycle, water-cooled, in-line, vertical,
Type direct injection, with turbochatger, after cooler
No. of cylinders-bore x stroke mm 4 – 95 x 115
Piston displacement l {cc} 3.260 {3,260}
Engine
Rated horsepower kW/rpm{HP/rpm} 66.2/2,200 {88.7/2,200}

Performance
Max. torpue Nm/rpm{kgm/rpm} 353/1,500 {36.0/1,500}
High idling speed rpm 2,400
Low idling speed rpm 1,100
Min. fuel consumption ratio g/kWh{g/HPh} 224 {165}
01-4 PC130-7
(3)
PC130-7
Machine model
Starting motor 24V, 3.0 kw

Engine
Alternator 24V, 25A
Battery 12V, 64 Ah x 2
Radiator type Aluminum wave (4-line)
Carrier roller 1 on each side

Undercarriage
Track roller 7 on each side
Track shoe (iron shoe) Asembly-type triple grouster, 43 on each side
(road liner) Road liner, 43 on each side
Type x no. Variable displacement piston type x 1

Hydraulic pump
Discharge l /min 226 (at 2,200rpm)
Set pressure (at operation) MPa {kg/cm2} 31.9 {325}
(at traveling) 34.8 {355}

Type x no. 7-spool type x 1
Hydraulic motor Control
valve
Control method Hydraulic type

Variable displacement piston type
Travel motor
(with brake valve, holding brake) x 2
Fixed displacement piston type
Swing motor
(with safety valve, holding brake) x 1
Hydraulic tank Box-shaped, open
Hydraulic filter Tank return side
Hydraulic system
Hydraulic cooler Air cooled

Type Reciprocating piston tipe Reciprocating piston tipe
Cylinder inner diameter mm 105 105

Boom cylinder
Piston rod diameter mm 70 70
Stroke mm 990 990

Work equipment cylinder
Max. length betwiin pins mm 2,490 2,490
Min. length betwiin pins mm 1,500 1,500

Arm cylinder
Stroke mm 1,175 1,175
PC130-7 01-5
PC130-7
Machine model

Work equipment cylinder
Hydraulic system

Bucket cylinder
Stroke mm 885 885
01-6 PC130-7
GENERAL WEIGHT TABLE
WEIGHT TABLE
k This weight table is a guide for use when transporting or handling component.
Unit: kg
Machine model PC130-7
Engine assembly (excl. water, oil) 449
• Engine (excl. water, oil) 345
• Engine mount 19.6
• PTO 4.1
• Hydraulic pump 80
Radiator, oil cooler assembly 83
Revolving frame 1,110
Operator's cab 279
Operator's seat 35
Fuel tank (excl. fuel) 101
Hydraulic tank (excl. hydraulic oil) 89
Control valve 116
Self pressure reducing valve 4.8
Counterweight 2,455
Swing motor (with brake valve) 26
Swing circle 155
Swing machinery 72.2
Center swivel joint 28.6
Track frame assembly 2,260
• Track frame 1,280
• Idler assembly 79 x 2
• Recoil spring assembly 69.5 x 2
• Carrier roller 16.5 x 2
• Track roller 21 x 14
• Travel motor, final drive assembly 144 x 2
• Sprocket 33.7 x 2
Track shoe assembly
• Triple grouser shoe (500mm) 725 x 2
• City pad shoe (500mm) 720 x 2
• Road liner (500mm) 780 x 2
PC130-7 01-7
GENERAL WEIGHT TABLE
Unit: kg
Machine model PC130-7
Boom assembly 1,088
Arm assembly 392.4
Bucket link assembly 92.7
Bucket assembly 369
Boom cylinder assembly 92.7
Arm cylinder assembly 135
Bucket cylinder assembly 82.6
01-8 PC130-7
GENERAL LIST OF LUBRICANTS AND WATER
LIST OF LUBRICANTS AND WATER
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE CAPACITY ( )

RESERVOIR KIND OF
FLUID -22 -4 14 32 50 68 86 104°F
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40°C Specified Refill
SAE 30
SAE 10W
Engine oil pan 17.5 16
SAE 10W-30
SAE 15W-40
PTO case 0.75 0.75
Swing machinery case SAE 30 2.5 2.5
Final drive case (each) Engine oil 2.5 2.5
Idler (each) 0.090 --- 0.090 ---

0.105 0.105
Track roller (each) 0.075 --- 0.075 ---

SAE 30
0.085 0.085
Carrier roller (each) 0.068 --- 0.068 ---

0.076 0.076
SAE 10W
SAE 10W-30
Hydraulic system 140 90
SAE 15W-40
Hydraulic oil HD46-HM (a)
ASTM D975 No.2

Fuel tank Diesel fuel 240
ASTM D975 No. 1
Cooling system Coolant Add antifreeze 18.2
PC130-7 01-9
10 STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION
PTO ...........................................................................10- 2
COOLING SYSTEM ..................................................10- 3
POWER TRAIN .........................................................10- 5
SWING CIRCLE ........................................................10- 6
SWING MACHINERY................................................10- 7
TRACK FRAME.........................................................10- 8
IDLER CUSHION ......................................................10- 9
HYDRAULIC COMPONENT LAYOUT ......................10- 10
VALVE CONTROL.....................................................10- 12
HYDRAULIC TANK AND FILTER..............................10- 14
HYDRAULIC PUMP (PISTON PUMP) ......................10- 15
CONTROL VALVE.....................................................10- 36
SUCTION SAFETY VALVE .......................................10- 46
CLSS .........................................................................10- 47
SELF PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE ....................10- 79
CENTER SWIVEL JOINT..........................................10- 86
TRAVEL MOTOR (FINAL DRIVE).............................10- 87
SWING MOTOR ........................................................10- 96
SOLENOID VALVE....................................................10-102
PPC ACCUMULATOR...............................................10-104
PPC VALVE ...............................................................10-105
WORK EQUIPMENT .................................................10-116
AIR CONDITIONER PIPING .....................................10-117
ENGINE CONTROL ..................................................10-118
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM ..............................10-123
MONITOR SYSTEM..................................................10-150
PC130-7 10-1
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION PTO
PTO
1. Coupling 5. Level plug

2. Shaft 6. Oil filler plug
3. Cage 7. Breather
4. Hydraulic pump
10-2 PC130-7
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION COOLING SYSTEM
COOLING SYSTEM
PC130-7 10-3
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION COOLING SYSTEM
1. Reservoir tank 9. Charge air inlet hose

2. Shroud 10. Radiator inlet hose
3. Oil cooler 11. Charge air outlet hose
4. Fan 12. Oil cooler outlet
5. Radiator 13. Drain valve
6. Fan guard 14. Radiator outlet hose
7. Oil cooler 15. Air condenser
8. Radiator cap 16. Oil cooler inlet
SPECIFICATION
Radiator Oil cooler Charge air cooler
Aluminium wave
Core type (4-line) CF40 Aluminium wave
Fin pitch (mm) 3.5/2 3.5/2 4.0/2
Total heat dissipation surface (m2) 25.58 11.60 9.54
Pressure valve cracking pressure 49.0 ± 14.7

— —
(kPa {kg/cm2}) {0.5 ± 0.15}
Vacuum valve cracking pressure -4.9 – 0 — —
(kPa {kg/cm2}) {-0.05 – 0}
10-4 PC130-7
(3)
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION POWER TRAIN
POWER TRAIN
1. Idler 8. Swing hold brake solenoid valve

2. Control valve 9. 2-speed travel changeover solenoid valve
3. Self pressure reducing valve 10. PPC lock solenoid valve
4. Travel motor 11. Swing motor
5. Hydraulic pump 12. Center swivel joint
6. Engine 13. Swing machinery
7. 2-stage relief solenoid valve 14. Swing circle
PC130-7 10-5
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION SWING CIRCLE
SWING CIRCLE
1. Outer race SPECIFICATIONS

2. Ball
90
3. Inner race Reduction ratio: – 11
= – 8.182
Amount of grease: 6.5 l (Grease: G2-LI)

a. Inner race soft zone "S" position
b. Outer race soft zone "S" position
10-6 PC130-7
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION SWING MACHINERY
SWING MACHINERY
1. Swing pinion (No. of teeth: 11) 10. No. 1 planetary gear (No. of teeth: 24)
2. Case 11. No. 2 planetary gear (No. of teeth: 22)
3. No. 2 sun gear (No. of teeth: 17) 12. Drain plug
4. No. 2 planetary carrier (No. of teeth: 17) 13. Swing circle
5. Ring gear (No. of teeth: 61)
6. No. 1 planetary carrier (No. of teeth: 17) SPECIFICATION
7. No. 1 sun gear (No. of teeth: 14)
8. Oil level gauge/ oil filler port Reduction ratio: 1414
+ 61
x 17 + 61
17
= 24.58
9. Swing motor
PC130-7 10-7
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION TRACK FRAME
TRACK FRAME
1. Idler 5. Sprocket
2. Track frame 6. Track roller
3. Carrier roller 7. Idler cushion
4. Travel motor 8. Track shoe
10-8 PC130-7
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION IDLER CUSHION
IDLER CUSHION
1. Idler SPECIFICATION
2. Support Grease : G2-LI
3. Yoke Amount of filled grease : 140 ml
4. Cylinder
5. Recoil spring
6. U-packing
7. Pilot
8. Nut
9. Valve
10. Grease fitting
PC130-7 10-9
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION HYDRAULIC COMPONENT LAYOUT
HYDRAULIC COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Bucket cylinder
2. Arm cylinder
3. Boom cylinder
4. Hydraulic tank
5. Swing motor
6. Hydraulic pump
7. Oil cooler
8. L.H. travel motor
9. Control valve
10. 4-spool solenoid valve
• PPC lock
• 2-speed travel speed selection
• Swing holding brake
• 2-stage relief
11. L.H. PPC valve
12. R.H. PPC valve
13. Travel PPC valve
14. Center swivel joint
10-10 PC130-7
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION HYDRAULIC COMPONENT LAYOUT
PC130-7 10-11
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION VALVE CONTROL
VALVE CONTROL
10-12 PC130-7
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION VALVE CONTROL
1. R.H. work equipment PPC valve

2. R.H. work equipment control lever
(for boom and bucket operation)
3. Main pump
4. Control valve
5. 4-spool solenoid valve
6. L.H. work equipment control lever
(for arm, swing operation)
7. L.H. work equipment PPC valve
8. Safety lock lever
9. L.H. travel pedal
10. R.H. travel pedal
11. L.H. travel lever
12. R.H. travel lever
13. Travel PPC valve
14. Attachment PPC valve
(Attachment installable machine)
15. Attachment pedal
(Attachment installable machine)
Lever and Pedal Positions

(A) HOLD
(B) Boom LOWER
(C) Boom RAISE
(D) Bucket CURL
(E) Bucket DUMP
(F) HOLD
(G) Arm OUT
(H) Arm IN
(J) Swing LEFT
(K) Swing RIGHT
(L) L.H. travel FORWARD
(M) L.H. travel REVERSE
(N) R.H. travel FORWARD
(P) R.H. travel REVERSE
(Q) PPC FREE
(R) PPC LOCK
PC130-7 10-13
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION HYDRAULIC TANK AND FILTER
HYDRAULIC TANK AND FILTER
1. Hydraulic tank SPECIFICATION

2. Drain plug Tank capacity : 130 l
3. Oil filler cap Hydraulic oil amount in tank : 90 l
4. Pressure valve Pressure valve cracking pressure :
5. Vacuum valve 16.7 ± 6.9 kPa {0.17 ± 0.07 kg/cm2}
6. Sight gauge Vacuum valve cracking pressure :
7. Suction strainer -0.49 – 0 kPa {-0.005 – 0 kg/cm2}
8. Filter element Bypass valve set pressure :
9. Bypass strainer 103 ± 29.4 kPa {1.05 ± 0.2 kg/cm2}
10. Bypass valve
10-14 PC130-7
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION HYDRAULIC PUMP
HYDRAULIC PUMP (PISTON PUMP)

MAIN PUMP
Type : HPV95 (for 105cc/rev.)
1. Main pump IM : PC mode change current

2. LS valve PA : Main pump delivery
3. PC valve PB : Main pump pressure input
4. Fixed choke valve PS : Main pump absorption
5. PC-EPC valve (for PC mode selection) PD1 : Case drain
6. LS-EPC valve (for LS set selection) PLS : Control valve LS pressure inlet
PEPC : EPC valve basic pressure inlet
PC130-7 10-15
1. Shaft 8. Valve plate

2. Cradle 9. End cap
3. Case 10. Spring
4. Rocker cam 11. Servo last chance filter
5. Shoe 12. Servo piston
6. Piston 13. Slider
7. Cylinder block
10-16 PC130-7
FUNCTION
• This pump converts engine rotation and torque
transmitted to the pump shaft into hydraulic
energy and discharges pressurized oil according
to load.
• This pump can change delivery when the swash
plate angle is changed.
STRUCTURE
• Cylinder block (7) is supported to shaft (1) with
spline a, and shaft (1) is supported with the front
and rear bearings.
• Shoe (5) is punched to the tip of piston (6) with a
concave ball so that piston (6) and shoe (5) form
a spherical bearing.
• Shoe (5) is always pressed to plane A of rocker
cam (4) and slides in a circle.
Rocker cam (4) leads highly pressurized oil
together with cylindrical plane B with cradle (2)
fixed to the case, forms a static pressure bearing
and slides.
• Piston (6) moves in the axial direction relatively
in each cylinder of cylinder block (7).
• Cylinder block (7) rotates relatively while sealing
pressurized oil against valve plate (8), and the
plane is designed to balance the oil pressure
properly.
• Oil in each cylinder of cylinder block (7) is
absorbed and discharged through valve plate
(8).
PC130-7 10-17
(3)
OPERATION
1. Pump Operation
• Shaft (1) rotates together with cylinder block (7),
and shoe (5) slides on plate A. When rocker
arm (4) moves along cylindrical plane B, the
inclination to centerline X of rocker cam (4)
and the axial direction of cylinder block (7)
changes. Inclination is called "swash plate
angle."
• When the swash plate angle of center line X of

rocker cam (4) is to the axial direction of cylin-
der block (7), plane A works like the cam against
shoe (5).
• Therefore, piston (6) slides inside cylinder block
(7), and the capacities E and F of cylinder block
(7) come to change differently. Then, the pump
absorbs and discharges the difference E-F.
• When the capacity in E chamber contracts as
cylinder block (7) rotates, the pump discharges
oil during the process. On the other hand, when
the capacity in F chamber increases, the pump
absorbs oil during the process. (The figure
shows the end of the absorbing process in
Chamber F and the end of the discharging pro-
cess in Chamber E.
• When the centerline X of rocker cam (4) comes

to the axial direction of cylinder block (7) (when
the swash plate angle is 0), the difference
between capacities E and F in cylinder block (7)
comes to 0. And the pump comes to stop
absorbing or discharging oil, i.e., the pump
stops. (However, the swash plate angle never
comes to 0 practically.)
• In other words, swash plate angle and the
pump delivery are in the proportional relations.
10-18 PC130-7
(3)
2. Delivery Control
• When swash plate angle increases, the differ-
ence between capacities E and F becomes
larger and delivery Q increases. Servo piston
(12) changes the swash plate angle .
• The servo piston moves in the direction of
straight reciprocation according to signal pres-
sures of the PC and LS valves. This straight
motion is transmitted to rocker arm (4) through
slider (13), and rocker cam (4), which is sup-
ported with the cylindrical plane to cradle (2),
slides in the direction of rotation.
• Servo piston's (12) area receiving the pressure is

different on the right and left sides, and the dis-
charge (self) pressure PP from the main pump is
always led to the pressure chamber of the small
diameter piston.
• The output pressure Pen of the LS valve is led to
the pressure chamber of the large diameter pis-
ton.
• Motions of the servo piston are controlled
according to the relations between the small
diameter piston pressure PP and the large diam-
eter piston pressure Pen and the rate of area
receiving pressure of the small diameter piston
to that of the large diameter piston.
PC130-7 10-19
(3)
LS AND PC VALVE
LS valve
1. Sleeve PA : Pump pressure inlet

2. Piston PB : Pump pressure inlet
3. Spool PDP : Drain
4. Seat PLP : Control pressure outlet
5. Plug PLS : Over load pressure inlet
6. Spring PPL : Control pressure intle
7. Sleeve PSIG : LS mode switching pressure inlet
8. Nut
9. O-ring
10. Nut
PC Valve
1. Piston 10. Plug

2. Spring 11. Lock nut
3. Seat
4. Spring PA : Pump discharge pressure inlet
5. Seat PA2 : Pump discharge pressure inlet
6. Spool PD : Drain pressure outlet
7. Piston PM : PC mode switching pressure inlet
8. Sleeve PPL : PC valve signal pressure outlet
9. Lock nut
10-20 PC130-7
FIXED THROTTLE VALVE
1. Plug
2. Plug
PA : Drain pressure outlet

POUT : Control pressure outlet
PIN : LS valve signal pressure inlet
PC130-7 10-21
FUNCTION
1. LS Valve
• The LS valve detects loads and controls delivery.
• This valve controls main pump delivery Q with
differential pressure PLS (PP – PLS) [that is
called LS Differential Pressure] between the
main pump pressure PP and control valve outlet
pressure PLS.
• This valve is applied with main pump pressure
PP, pressure PLS that is obtained from the con-
trol valve output [that is called LS Pressure] and
pressure PSIG from the LS-EPC valve [that is
called LS Selection Pressure].
• The relations of differential pressure PLS (=
PP – PLS) between main pump pressure PP and
LS pressure PLS with delivery Q vary with the
LS selection current ISIG of the LS-EPC valve as
shown in the right figure.
• As ISIG changes from 0 to 1A, the spring set
force changes accordingly, and the selector point
for pump discharge amount changes from 0.64
to 2.1 MPa {6.5 to 21.5 kg/cm2} at the standard
median.
2. PC Valve
• When pump discharge pressure PP rises, the
control valve spool stroke will increase and the
opening area will enlarge. So, the PC valve con-
trols pump delivery Q so that delivery Q does not
increase above a certain level depending on dis-
charge pressure PP.
The valve also controls the pump absorbing
hydraulic horsepower to approximately equal
horsepower so that the pump absorbing horse-
power does not exceed the engine horsepower.
• This means that, when a load to the actuator
increases during operation and pump discharge
pressure PP rises, this valve will reduce pump
delivery Q, or when pump discharge pressure
PP drops, this valve will increase delivery Q.
• In this case, the relations between pump dis-
charge pressure PP and pump delivery Q
change as shown in the right figure since the cur-
rent value given to the PC-EPC valve solenoid is
regarded as a parameter.
• However, some PC valves have the function to
sense actual engine speeds in the heavy-duty
operation mode and to reduce pump delivery
and recover speed when the speed reduces due
to increase of load.
• In other words, when an increase of load
reduces engine speed below the set value, the
command current from the controller to the PC-
EPC valve solenoid will increase as engine
speed reduces and will reduce the pump swash
plate angle.
10-22 PC130-7
(3)
OPERATION
1. LS Valve
1) When the control valve is at the center
value position
• The LS valve is a 3-way selector valve, and
the pressure PLS (LS pressure) from the
control valve inlet is being led to spring
chamber B and pump discharge pressure PP
is being led to the H port of sleeve (8).
• Spool (6) position is determined depending
on the force of LS pressure PLS + the force
of spring (4) Z and force of the pump dis-
charge pressure (self-pressure) PP.
PC130-7 10-23
(3)
• Before the engine starts, servo piston (12) is

pressed to the right side. (See the right fig-
ure.)
• If the control lever is at the "center value"
position when the engine starts, LS pressure
PLS will be 0 MPa (0 kg/cm2). (The LS valve
interconnects to the drain circuit through the
control valve spool.)
• At the time, spool (6) is pressed to the left
side and C port is connected to D port. The
pump discharge pressure enters from K port
to the piston large diameter side and from J
port to the piston small diameter side respec-
tively. So, the area difference of servo pis-
ton (12) minimizes the swash plate angle.
10-24 PC130-7
(3)
2) Operation in direction for maximum pump • Therefore, pressure on the piston large
delivery diameter side of servo piston (12) comes to
• When the LS differential pressure PLS drain pressure PT, and since the pump dis-
between pump discharge pressure PP and charge pressure PP is applied to port J on
LS pressure PLS reduces (when the control the small diameter side, servo piston (12) is
valve is large and discharge pressure PP pushed to the right side and the swash plate
drops, for example), the combined force of is moved to the delivery increasing direction.
LS pressure PLS and spring (4) pushes • When port G is applied with the output pres-
spool (6) to the right side. sure of the EPC valve for the LS valve, pis-
• When spool (6) moves, port D is connected ton (7) is pushed to the left side.
to port E to bring the PC valve in line. At the • This is effective to reduce spring (4) set
time, the PC valve is connected to the drain force, and the differential pressure between
port, and circuit D – K is applied with drain oil pressure PP when ports D and E of spool
pressure PT. (The operation of the PC valve (6) are connected and PP changes.
will be explained later.)
PC130-7 10-25
(3)
3) Operation in direction for minimum pump • Though pump discharge pressure PP comes
delivery to port J of the piston small diameter side,
• The following explains movement of servo servo piston (12) is pushed to the left side
piston (12) to the left side (in the direction for due to the area difference between the pis-
minimum pump delivery). When LS differen- ton large diameter side and the piston small
tial pressure PLS increases (when the con- diameter side of servo piston (12) and the
trol valve opening area becomes small and swash plate is moved in the delivery reduc-
pump discharge pressure PP increases, for ing direction.
example), the force of discharge pressure • When port G is applied with the LS selection
PP pushes the spool (6) to the left side. pressure, it is effective to reduce spring (4)
• As spool (6) moves, pump discharge pres- set force.
sure PP flows from port C to port D and
comes from port K to the piston large diame-
ter side.
10-26 PC130-7
(3)
4) When the servo piston balances • At the time, the relations of areas receiving
• The area receiving pressure on the piston pressure on both ends of servo piston (12)
large diameter side is supposed to be A1, are A0 : A1 = 1 : 1.75, and the ones of pres-
the one on the small diameter side is sup- sures applied on the piston both ends at the
posed to be A0 and pressure flowing to the balancing time are PP : PEN = 1.75 : 1
piston large diameter side is supposed to be approximately.
PEN. • Spring (4) force has been adjusted so that
• When pump discharge pressure PP of the the balance stop position of spool (6) is
LS valve balances with the combined force determined when PP – PLS = 2.21 MPa
of LS pressure PLS and spring (4) force Z {22.5 kg/cm 2 } is satisfied at the standard
and the relations of A0 x PP = A1 x PEN are center.
satisfied, servo piston (12) stops at the posi- • When port G is applied with PSIG (EPC
tion and the swash plate is held at the inter- valve output pressure for LS valve of 0 – 2.9
mediate position (stops where the opening MPa {10 – 30 kg/cm 2 }), however, the bal-
from port D to port E of spool (6) is almost ance stop position changes proportionally to
equal to the one from port C to port D). the PSIG pressure in the range of PP – PLS
from 2.1 to 0.6 MPa {21.5 to 6.5 kg/cm2}.
PC130-7 10-27
(3)
2. PC Valve And pressure output from the PC valve

(1) When the pump controller is normal, the (the pressure at C port) varies with the
load to the actuator is small and the pump spool position.
discharge pressure PP is low • The value of command current X is
1) Function of PC-EPC Valve Solenoid determined depending on type of work
(1) (lever control), selection of working
• The pump controller provides a com- mode, set point of engine speed and
mand current to PC-EPC valve solenoid actual speed.
(1). This command current actuates the
PC-EPC valve and outputs a signal pres-
sure. When receiving the signal pres-
sure, the PC valve changes the force
given to piston (2).
• Spool (3) stops where the force to piston
(2) balances with the combined force of
spring setting force of springs (4) and (6)
on the opposite side and the force given
to spool (3) by the pump discharge pres-
sure PP.
10-28 PC130-7
(3)
2) Function of Spring • Also, since the pressing force of piston

• The loads to springs (4) and (6) of the PC (2) changes as the command current
valve are determined depending on input to the PC-EPC valve solenoid (1)
swash plate position. changes, the load to springs (4) and (6)
• As servo piston (9) moves, piston (7) changes depending on the value of the
connected to slider (8) moves to the right command current.
or the left. • The C port of the PC valve is connected
• When piston (7) moves to the left, spring to the E port of the LS valve. The self
(6) will be contracted. If the piston pressure PP is provided to A port, the
moves further to the left, the spring will small diameter side of servo piston (9)
be brought to seat (5) and be fixed there. and B port.
Thereafter, spring (4) will only move.
This means that the spring load changes
as piston (7) extends or contracts springs
(4) and (6).
PC130-7 10-29
(3)
• When the pump discharge pressure PP

is small, the spool is located at a position
in the left direction. At the time, C port is
connected to D port, and pressure to the
LS valve becomes drain pressure PT. If
E port of the LS valve is connected to G
port at the time, the pressure from J port
to the large diameter side of the piston
will become drain pressure PT. And the
servo piston will moves to the right side.
Then, the pump delivery will increase.
• Also, as servo piston (9) operates, slider
(8) moves piston (7) to the right side, and
the spring force becomes weak because
springs (4) and (6) expand. As the
spring force becomes weak, spool (3)
moves to the right side to disconnect C
port from D port. Then, the pump dis-
charge pressure ports B and C are con-
nected.
• As a result, pressure at the C port rises
and pressure on the large diameter side
of the piston rises as well, and servo pis-
ton (9) stops moving to the right side.
This means that the stop position of
servo piston (9) (= pump delivery) is
determined where the pressing force
caused pressure PP to spool (3), the
pressing force of the PC-EPC valve sole-
noid and the forces of the springs (4) and
(6) balance with each other.
10-30 PC130-7
(3)
(2) When the pump controller is normal, the • When E port of the LS valve is connected to
load to actuator is large and the pump G port, this pressure is led from J port to the
discharge pressure PP is high large diameter side of the servo piston (9)
• When the load is large and the pump dis- and the servo piston comes to stop.
charge pressure is high, the force pushing • When the pump discharge pressure PP
spool (3) to the left side increases and spool increase and spool (3) moves further to the
(3) comes to the position shown in the above left side, discharge pressure PP will flow to C
figure. port so as to minimize the pump delivery.
• Then, the pressure flowing from C port to the
LS valve becomes about 3/5 of the pump dis-
charge pressure PP because the pressure
from A port partly flows from C port to D port
through the LS valve as shown in the above
figure.
PC130-7 10-31
(3)
• When servo piston (9) moves to the left side,

piston (7) will move to the left.
Then, springs (4) and (6) will be compressed
and will push spool (3) back. If piston (7)
moves further to the left, ports C and D will
open wide.
• As a result, the pressure at port C (= J) will
drop, and servo piston (9) will move to the
left and will stop.
At the time, servo piston (9) is located further
to the left than where it is when pump dis-
charge pressure PP is low.
• The positional relations between pump dis-

charge pressure PP and servo piston (9) are
shown by a broken line because springs (4)
and (6) are 2-stage ones. And the relations
between discharge pressure PP and pump
delivery Q are as shown in the right figure.
• Also, when the command current X to the

PC-EPC valve solenoid increases, the rela-
tions between the pump discharge pressure
PP and the pump delivery Q will move in par-
allel in relation to the pushing force of the
PC-EPC valve solenoid. Therefore, the force
of the PC-EPC valve solenoid (1) will be
added to the leftward pressing force of the
discharge pressure PP to the spool (3), and
the relations between PP and Q will move
from to as X increases.
10-32 PC130-7
(3)
3) When the pump controller is out of order • When the pump discharge pressure is
and the PC redundant switch is set to ON low, the combined force of the force of
1) In case of light load to main pump PC-EPC valve solenoid (1) and dis-
• When the pump controller is out of order, charge pressure PP is smaller than the
set the PC redundant switch to ON to spring set force. So, spool (3) balances
change the circuit to the resistor side. In at a position in the left side.
this case, since the current is too large • At the time, C port has the same pres-
when power is directly taken from the sure as the drain pressure at D port, and
battery, the resistor is connected to con- the drain pressure PT is led to the large
trol the current to the PC-EPC valve sole- diameter side of servo piston (9) through
noid. the LS valve. Then, servo piston (9)
• At the time, the current becomes con- moves in the diction where delivery
stant and piston (2) pressing force increases because the pressure on the
becomes constant as well. small diameter side of the piston is large.
PC130-7 10-33
(3)
2) In case of heavy load to main pump

• When the PC redundant switch is set to
ON just like in the previous paragraph, a
constant command current is sent to PC-
EPC valve solenoid (1). So, piston (2)
pushes spool (3) with a constant force.
• When pump discharge pressure PP
rises, the spool will moves further to the
left side than when the main pump is
lightly loaded and will balance at the
position shown in the above figure.
• In this case, since the pressure from A
port is led to C port, servo piston (9) will
move to the left side (small delivery) and
will stop at a position further to the left
than when the pump is lightly loaded.
10-34 PC130-7
(3)
• This means that the current, which is

sent to the PC-EPC valve solenoid
through the resistor when the PC redun-
dant switch is set to On, determines the
curve between pump discharge pressure
PP and delivery Q as shown in the figure.
• When the PC redundant switch is set to
ON, curve is further to the left than
curve drawn when the pump control-
ler is normal.
PC130-7 10-35
(3)
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION CONTROL VALVE
CONTROL VALVE
OUTLINE
The following are 3 types of control valves.
• 6-spool valve (without service valve)
• 7-spool valve (with service valve)
• 8-spool valve (with 2 service valve)
a Each service valve is a single add-on type, so it
is possible to add or remove the extra valve at
any time.
External apperance and cross sections shown are
for the 7 spool valve only.
AA : Pressure sensor port

(pressure sensor is intalled) 1. Swing bleed valve
A1 : To swing motor MB 2. Travel junction valve
A2 : To L.H. travel motor A 3. Arm rcheck valve
A3 : To R.H. travel motor A 4. Cover
A4 : To boom cylinder bottom 5. Service valve
A5 : To arm cylinder head 6. Bucket valve
A6 : To bucket cylinder head 7. Arm valve
A7 : To attachment 1 8. Boom valve
B1 : To swing motor MA 9. R.H. travel valve
B2 : To L.H. travel motor B 10. L.H. travel valve
B3 : To R.H. travel motor B 11. Swing valve
B4 : To boom cylinder head 12. PT port block
B5 : To arm cylinder bottom 13. Boom lock valve
B6 : To bucket cylinder bottom
B7 : To attachment 1
BP : From boom RAISE PPC/EPC valve
LS : To pump LS valve
PA1 : From swing L.H. PPC/EPC valve
PA2 : From L.H. travel forward PPC valve
PA3 : From R.H. travel reverse PPC valve
PA4 : From boom RAISE PPC/EPC valve
PA5 : From arm OUT PPC/EPC valve
PA6 : From bucket DUMP PPC/EPC valve
PA7 : From service 1 PPC valve
PB1 : From swing R.H. PPC/EPC valve
PB2 : From L.H. travel reverse PPC valve
PB3 : From R.H. travel forward PPC valve
PB4 : From boom LOWER PPC/EPC valve
PB5 : From arm IN PPC/EPC valve
PB6 : From bucket CURL PPC/EPC valve
PB7 : From service 1 PPC valve
P : From main pump
PP : To main pump
PX : From 2-stage relief solenoid valve
SA : From swing stroke control solenoid valve
SB : From swing stroke control solenoid valve
TS1 : To tank
TS2 : To tank
TB : To tank
TC : To oil cooler
TSW : To swing motor
10-36 PC130-7
(3)
7 spool valve
(6 spool valve + service valve)
PC130-7 10-37
(3)
CROSS-SECTIONAL DRAWING
a Cross-sectional drawing shows 7-spool valve (6-spool + service valve).
(1/8)
1. Safety-suction valve 8 Safety-suction valve mount (service B)

2. Suction valve (L.H. travel A) 9. Suction valve (Bucket bottom)
3. Suction valve (R.H. travel A) 10. Suction valve (Arm bottom)
4. Suction valve (Boom bottom) 11. Suction valve (Boom head)
5. Suction valve (Arm head) 12. Suction valve (R.H. travel B)
6. Suction valve (Bucket head) 13. Suction valve (L.H. travel B)
7. Safety-suction valve mount (service A) 14. Lift check valve
10-38 PC130-7
(3)
(2/8)
1. Main relief valve

2. Spool (swing)
3. Spool (L.H. travel)
4. Spool (R.H. ravel)
5. Spool (boom)
6. Spool (arm)
7. Spool (bucket)
8. Spool (service)
PC130-7 10-39
(3/8)
1. Pressure compensation valve F (swing) 9. Pressure compensation valve R (service)

2. Pressure compensation valve F (L.H. travel) 10. Pressure compensation valve R (bucket)
3. Pressure compensation valve F (R.H. travel) 11. Pressure compensation valve R (arm)
4. Pressure compensation valve F (boom) 12. Pressure compensation valve R (boom)
5. Pressure compensation valve F (arm) 13. Pressure compensation valve R (R.H. travel)
6. Pressure compensation valve F (bucket) 14. Pressure compensation valve R (L.H. travel)
7. Pressure compensation valve F (service) 15. Pressure compensation valve R (swing)
8. Unload valve
a The above F and R means the following valves :
F : Flow control valve
R : Pressure reducing valve
10-40 PC130-7
(3)
(4/8)
1. LS pressure detection plug

2. LS bypass plug
3. Pump pressure detection plug
4. Check valve (bucket head)
5. Check valve (arm head)
6. LS selection valve
PC130-7 10-41
(3)
(5/8)
1. Main relief valve 7. Swing bleed valve

2. Cooler bypass valve 8. Pressure compensation valve F
3. Lift check valve
4. LS selection valve F : Flow control valve
5. Spool (swing) R : Pressure reducing valve
6. Pressure compensation valve R
10-42 PC130-7
(3)
(6/8)
1. Suction valve (A) 8. Suction valve (B)

2. Suction valve (B) 9. Spool (R.H. travel)
3. Spool (L.H. travel) 10. Pressure compensation valve R
4. Pressure compensation valve R 11. Pressure compensation valve F
5. Travel junction valve
6. Pressure compensation valve F F : Flow control valve
7. Suction valve (A) R : Pressure reducing valve
PC130-7 10-43
(7/8)
1. Suction valve (A) 9. Spool

2. Boom lock valve 10. Pressure compensation valve R
3. Suction valve (B) 11. Arm regemeration valve
4. Spool 12. Pressure compensation valve F
5. Pressure compensation valve R
6. Pressure compensation valve F F : Flow control valve
7. Suction valve (A) R : Pressure reducing valve
8. Suction valve (B)
10-44 PC130-7
(3)
(8/8)
1. Suction valve (A) 9. Pressure compensation valve R

2. Suction valve (B) 10. Pressure compensation valve F
3. Spool 11. Pressure relief plug
4. Pressure compensation valve R 12. Unload valve
5. Pressure compensation valve F
6. Safty-suction valve mount (A) F : Flow control valve
7. Safty-suction valve mount (B) R : Pressure reducing valve
8. Spool
PC130-7 10-45
(3)
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION SUCTION SAFETY VALVE
SUCTION SAFETY VALVE

(SAFETY VALVE WITH SUCTION FOR SERVICE PORT)
1. Suction valve
2. Main valve
3. Piston
4. Piston spring
5. Poppet
6. Poppet spring
7. Suction valve
8. Sleeve
9. Adjustment screw
10. Lock nut
SPECIFICATION
Part No. (Reference) Set pressure Use
709-70-74600 24.5 MPa {250 kg/cm2} For crusher

(at the time of 5l/min.)
709-70-74700 17.2 MPa {175 kg/cm2}

(at the time of 5l/min.)
10-46 PC130-7
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION CLSS
CLSS
OUTLINE OF CLSS
Features Configuration
CLSS stands for Closed Center Load Sensing Sys- • The CLSS consists of a variable displacement
tem and is featured as follows : piston pump, a control valve and actuators.
• Fine controllability without affect of load • The pump body consists of a main pump, a PC
• Controllability that allows digging even in the fine valve and an LS valve.
control mode.
• Ease of compound operation in which the flow
distribution performance depends on spool
opening area during compound operation.
• Saving of energy by variable pump control
PC130-7 10-47
Basic principle
1. Control of pump swash plate angle
• The pump swash plate angle (pump delivery) is
controlled so that the LS differential pressure
PLS, which is the difference between the pump
discharge pressure PP and the LS pressure PLS
(actuator load pressure) at the control valve out-
let, becomes constant.
(LS differential pressure PLS = Pump pressure
PP - LS pressure PLS)
• When the LS differential pressure PLS reduces

below the set pressure of the LS valve (when the
actuator load pressure is high), the pump swash
plate angle will move in the direction of maxi-
mum. When the set pressure is raised (when the
actuator load pressure is low), the pump swash
plate angle will move in the direction of mini-
mum.
a For the detail of the operation, see the paragraph
of "Hydraulic Pump."
10-48 PC130-7
2. Pressure compensation control

• A valve (pressure compensation valve) is
mounted on the outlet side of the control valve.
In case of compound operation of the actuator
with this valve, the differential pressure P
between the spool upstream (inlet) and the
downstream (outlet) of each valve becomes con-
stant irrespective of load (pressure). So, the flow
from the pump is distributed (compensated) in
proportion to the opening areas S1 and S2 of
each valve being operated.
PC130-7 10-49
EACH FUNCTION AND OPERATION OF EACH VALVE

Hydraulic circuit diagram and valve names
10-50 PC130-7
(3)
1. Unload valve
Set pressure : 3.38 MPa {34.5 kg/cm2}
2. Safety-suction valve
Set pressure : 35.8 MPa {365 kg/cm2}
3. Pressure compensation valve
4. Suction valve
5. Main relief valve
Set pressure : normal: 31.9 MPa {325 kg/cm2}
High pressure : 34.8 MPa {355 kg/cm2}
6. Lift check valve
7. Cooler bypass valve
8. LS selection valve
9. Swing bleeding valve
10. Travel junction valve
11. Arm regeneration valve
12. Boom lock valve
PC130-7 10-51
(3)
UNLOAD VALVE
1. When the control valve is neutral
FUNCTION
• When the control valve is neutral, the delivery Q
equivalent to the pump minimum swash plate
angle is released to the tank circuit. At the time,
pump discharge pressure PP is set to 2.45 MPa
{25.0kg/cm2} with spring (3) inside the vale. (The
LS pressure PLS is 0 MPa {0kg/cm2}.)
OPERATION 1. Unload valve

• Pump discharge pressure PP is applied to the 2. Sleeve
left end face of spool (4) and LS pressure PLS is 3. Spring
applied to the right end face. 4. Spool
• Since the LS pressure PLS is 0 when the control
valve is neutral, pump discharge pressure PP is PLS : LS circuit (pressure)
only applied and is set with the lead to spring (3). PP : Pump circuit (pressure)
• When pump discharge pressure PP rises to T : Tank circuit
spring (3) load (2.45 MPa {25.0 kg/cm2}), spool
(4) will move toward the right side and pump cir-
cuit PP will interconnect to tank circuit T through
the drill hole.
• Therefore, pump discharge pressure PP is set to
2.45 MPa {25.0 kg/cm2}.
10-52 PC130-7
(3)
2. When the control valve is in the fine control When the differential pressure between dis-
mode charge pressure PP and LS pressure PLS
comes to spring (3) load (2.45 MPa {25.0 kg/
FUNCTION
cm2}), the unload valve will open and LS differ-
• When the control valve is in the fine control
ential pressure PLS will come to 2.45 MPa
mode and the requested flow of the actuator is
less than the pump minimum swash plate angle, {25.0 kg/cm2}.
pump discharge pressure PP is set to LS pres-
sure PLS + 2.45 MPa {25.0 kg/cm2}.

• When the control valve is operated in the fine 2. Sleeve
control mode, LS pressure PLS will occur and 3. Spring
will be applied to the right end face of spool (4). 4. Spool
At the time differential pressure between LS
pressure PLS and pump discharge pressure PP PLS : LS circuit (pressure)
increases because the opening area of the con- PP : Pump circuit (pressure)
trol valve spool is small. T : Tank circuit
• When the differential pressure between pump
discharge pressure PP and LS pressure PLS
comes to spring (3) load (2.45 MPa {25.0 kg/
cm2}), spool (4) will move to the right side and
pump circuit PP will interconnect to tank circuit T.
• This means that pump discharge pressure PP is
set to the spring force (2.45 MPa {25.0 kg/cm2} +
LS pressure PLS, and LS differential pressure
PLS comes to 2.45 MPa {25.0 kg/cm2}.
PC130-7 10-53
(3)
3. When the control valve is operated

FUNCTION
• If the required flow of the actuator increases over
the pump minimum swash plate angle when the
control valve is operated, the flow to tank circuit
T will be interrupted and pump delivery Q will be
completely flown to the actuator circuit.

• When the control valve is operated with large 2. Sleeve
stroke, LS pressure PLS will occur and will be 3. Spring
applied to the right end face of spool (4). At the 4. Spool
time, the opening areas of the control valve
spool is large and the difference between LS PLS : LS circuit (pressure)
pressure PLS and pump discharge pressure PP PP : Pump circuit (pressure)
is small. T : Tank circuit
• So, the differential pressure between pump dis-
charge pressure PP and LS pressure PLS does
not reach spring (3) load (2.45 MPa {25.0 kg/
cm2}) and spring (3) pushes spool (4) to the left
side.
• Then, pump circuit PP and tank circuit T are
interrupted, and pump delivery Q is completely
flown to the actuator circuit.
10-54 PC130-7
(3)
LEADING OF LS PRESSURE
FUNCTION
• The LS pressure is load pressure to the actuator Also, orifice C is mounted on piston (5) halfway
on the outlet side of the control valve. from pump circuit PP to pressure reducing valve
• In case of a work equipment valve, pressure (3), and the orifice has the damper function.
reducing valve (3) of the pressure compensation • The travel valves leads actuator circuit pressure
valve reduces pump discharge pressure PP to A directly to LS circuit PLS.
the same level as actuator circuit pressure A and
leads the pressure to LS circuit PLS.
1. Work equipment valve (boom, arm, bucket, swing)
OPERATION • Both end face areas of pressure reducing valve

• When spool (1) is operated, pump discharge (3) are the same (SA = SLS), and actuator circuit
pressure PP will be led to actuator circuit A pressure PA (= A) is applied to the SA side and
through bridge passage b from flow control valve reduced pump discharge pressure PP is applied
(2) and spool notch a. to the SLS side on the opposite side.
• Since pressure reducing valve (3) moves to the • Therefore, pressure reducing valve (3) balances
right at the same time, pump discharge pressure at the position where actuator circuit pressure
PP led from orifice c is reduced due to pressure PA becomes equal to the pressure of spring
loss at notch d and is led to LS circuit PLS and to chamber PLS1. The pump discharge pressure
spring chamber PLS1. PP reduced at notch d comes to actuator circuit
• At the time, LS circuit PLS is connected to tank pressure A and is led to the LS circuit PLS.
circuit T from LS bypass plug (4).
PC130-7 10-55
(3)
2. Travel valve
OPERATION
• When spool (1) is operated, the pump discharge
pressure PP will be led to actuator circuit A
through bridge passage b from flow control valve
(2) and spool notch a.
• At the same time, the actuator circuit pressure
PA moves pressure reducing valve (3) to the
right side, and notches c and d interconnect to
the travel junction circuit e and LS circuit PLS
respectively.
• So, actuator circuit pressure PA (= A) is led from
notch c to LS circuit PLS through notch d.
a The travel circuit is different from the work equip-
ment circuit, actuator circuit pressure PA is
directly led to the LS circuit PLS.
10-56 PC130-7
(3)
LS BYPASS PLUG
FUNCTION
• This plug released residual pressure of the LS
pressure PLS.
• This plug slows the rising speed of the LS pres-
sure PLS, causes pressure losses at the spool
and the throttle of the shuttle valve by the dis-
carded throttled flow and reduces the effective
LS differential pressure for higher safety.
OPERATION 1. LS bypass plug

• Pressurized oil in the LS circuit PLS flows from
clearance filter a in the space between LS PLS : LS circuit (pressure)
bypass plug (1) and the valve body to tank circuit T : Tank circuit (pressure)
T through orifice b.
PC130-7 10-57
(3)
PRESSURE COMPENSATION VALVE

FUNCTION
• When the load pressure becomes lower than
another actuator and the flow is going to
increase during a compound operation, this
valve compensates the load pressure. (At the
time, the load pressure of another actuator under
compound operation (the upper side) is higher
than that of the actuator on this side (the lower
side).
10-58 PC130-7
OPERATION
• When the load pressure of another actuator side
(the upper side) rises during a compound opera-
tion, the flow in actuator circuit A on this side (the
lower side) is apt to increase.
• In this case, LS pressure PLS of another actua-
tor is applied to spring chamber PLS1 and
pushes pressure reducing valve (1) and flow
control valve (2) to the left side.
• Flow control valve (2) throttles the opening area
between pump circuit PP and spool upstream
PPA and causes a pressure loss between PP
and PPA.
• Flow control valve (2) and pressure reducing
valve (1) balance each other where the pressure
difference between PA applied to both end faces
of pressure reducing valve (1) and PLS becomes
the same as the pressure loss between PP
before and after the flow control valve and PPA.
• So, the pressure differences between upstream
pressures PPA and downstream pressures PA of
both spools under compound operation become
the same, and the pump flow is distributed in
proportion to the opening area of each spool
notch a.
PC130-7 10-59
(3)
AREA RATIO OF PRESSURE COMPENSATION VALVE

FUNCTION
• The pressure compensation valve slightly adjust the ratio (S2/S1) of area S1 on the left side of flow control
valve (2) and area S2 on the right side of pressure reducing valve (1) to suite the characteristics of each
actuator and determines the compensation characteristics.
S1 : Area of flow control valve (2) - area of piston (3)
S2 : Area of pressure reducing valve (1) - area of piston (3)
Area ratio (S1:S2) and compensation characteristics

• When the ratio is 1.00 : The expression [Pump (discharge) pressure PP - Spool notch upstream pressure
PPB] [LS circuit pressure PLS - Actuator circuit pressure PA (= A)] can be held,
and the flow is distributed as per the spool opening area ratio.
• When the ratio is more than 1.00 : The expression PP - PPB > PLS - PA (= A) can be held, and the flow is
distributed less than the spool opening area ratio.
• When the ratio is less than 1.00 : The expression PP - PPB < PLS - PA (= A) can be held, and the flow is
distributed more than the spool opening area ratio.
10-60 PC130-7
(3)
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION
BOOM HOLDING VALVE

FUNCTION
• When the boom lever is not being operated, the oil at the boom bottom leaks from spool (1) and prevents
hydraulic drift of the boom.
OPERATION
1) At boom RAISE
When the control lever is operated to boom
RAISE, the main pressure from the control
valve pushes poppet (5) up.
As a result, the main pressure oil from the
control valve passes through the inside of
the valve and flows to the boom cylinder bot-
tom.
PC130-7 10-60-1
(3)
2) At boom HOLD
When the control lever has been operated
to boom RAISE and is then returned to the
HOLD position, the holding pressure at the
boom cylinder bottom end is closed by pop-
pet (5). At the same time, the oil flowing
inside poppet (5) from orifice a in poppet (5)
is closed by pilot spool (3).
In this way, the boom is held in position.
10-60-2 PC130-7
(3)
3) At boom LOWER
When the control lever is operated to boom
LOWER, pilot pressure P1 from the PPC
valve pushes pilot spool (3) and the pressure
oil in chamber b inside the poppet is drained.
The oil pressure at port Ab increases
because of the pressure oil from the boom
cylinder bottom, but the oil pressure in cham-
ber b is lowered by orifice a.
If the pressure in chamber b becomes lower
than the pressure at port Aa, poppet (5)
opens and the pressure oil from port Ab
flows to port Aa and goes to the control
valve.
PC130-7 10-60-3
(3)
BOOM REGENERATION CIRCUIT

FUNCTION
1) When the boom is being lowered, if bottom pressure A of cylinder (1) is higher than head pressure B,
and the boom is lowered under its own weight, this sends the return oil flow at the bottom end to the
head end to increase the cylinder speed by that amount.
OPERATION
• If the boom is lowered under its own weight,
pressure A at the bottom end of boom cylinder
(1) becomes higher than pressure B at the head
end.
• When this happens, part of the return oil at the
bottom end passes through regeneration pas-
sage a of boom spool (1), pushes check valve
(3) open, and flows to the head end.
• As a result, the boom lowering speed is
increased.
10-60-4 PC130-7
(3)
2) When lowering the boom, if head pressure B of cylinder (1) is greater than bottom pressure A, and the
work equipment is in the load process, check valve (3) closes and shuts off the circuit between the head
and bottom ends.
OPERATION
• When the boom is lowered, if the work equip-
ment is in the load process, pressure B at the
head end of cylinder (1) becomes higher than
pressure A at the bottom end.
• When this happens, check valve (3) is closed by
spring (4) and pressure B at the head end, so
the circuit between the head circuit and bottom
circuit is shut off.
PC130-7 10-60-5
(3)
ARM REGENERATION CIRCUIT

1. At arm in and own weight fall
FUNCTION
• When the arm falls due to its own weight
because head pressure A in arm cylinder (1) is
higher than bottom pressure B during arm dig-
ging, this circuit brings the return flow on the
head side to the bottom side to increase the cyl-
inder speed.
OPERATION 1. Arm cylinder

• When the arm falls for digging due to its own 2. Arm spool
weight, the head side pressure A in arm cylinder 3. Check valve
(1) will rise above bottom side pressure B.
• At the time, part of the return flow on the head A : Head circuit (pressure)
side passes through regeneration passage a of B : Bottom circuit (pressure)
arm spool (2), pushes check valve (3) to open it PP : Pump circuit (pressure)
and flows to the bottom side.
• This increases the arm digging speed.
PC130-7 10-61
(3)
2. At arm in process
FUNCTION
• When bottom pressure B of cylinder (1) rises
above head pressure A and the arm enters the
digging process, check valve (3) will be closed
and the circuits on the head side and the bottom
side will be interrupted.
OPERATION 1. Arm cylinder

• When the arm is in the digging process, the bot- 2. Arm spool
tom side pressure B of arm cylinder (1) will rise, 3. Check valve
close check valve (3) and interrupt the circuits on
the head side and the bottom side. A : Head circuit (pressure)
B : Bottom circuit (pressure)
PP : Pump circuit (pressure)
10-62 PC130-7
(3)
TRAVEL JUNCTION VALVE

(L.H. and R.H. travel junction circuit)
1. When traveling straight
10-64 PC130-7
FUNCTION
• When the L.H. and R.H. travel spool is operated
to compensate flow errors in the L.H. and R.H.
travel circuits during straight travel, the junction
circuit will open.
• Then, the flows to the L.H. and R.H. travel
motors will become the same during the straight
travel, and travel deviation will decrease.
• At the time of steering, load pressure difference
brings back the pressure reducing valve of the
travel valve inside the steering and closes the
spool notch opening of the travel junction valve
to close the junction circuit for steering.
OPERATION
• When the L.H. and R.H. travel spool (1) is oper-
ated, the pump delivery will flow from the pump
circuit PP to A through the actuator circuit PA.
• When traveling straight, the actuator circuit PA
will be equalized and the L.H. and R.H. pressure
reducing valves (2) will be pressed the same
stroke to the right. Then, the notch a and the
junction circuit will open.
• The L.H. travel forward oil pressure P1 and the
R.H. travel forward oil pressure P2 are led to the
spring chamber on the both end of the travel
junction valve spool (4) through the respective
shuttle valves (5). So, P1 = P2, and the spool is
at the neutral position, and the notch d is open.
• Then, the L.H. and R.H. travel actuator circuits
are interconnected with the junction circuit.
When any difference occurs in the flows to the
L.H and R.H. travel motors, this valve will com-
pensate them and will reduce occurrence of
travel deviations.
PC130-7 10-65
(3)
2. When operating travel steering
10-66 PC130-7
OPERATION
• When the L.H. travel spool (L.H. 1) is returned to
the neutral side from the straight traveling state
and the steering is operated, there will occur any
difference in the load pressures in the L.H. and
R.H. travel actuator circuits PA (R.H. A > L.H. A).
The LS pressure PLS will become the same as
the R.H. A on the higher load pressure side.
• Therefore, the flow control valve on the L.H.
travel side is pressed to the left side with the LS
pressure PLS, i.e., the load pressure on the R.H.
travel side, and the notch a closes to interrupt
the L.H. and R.H. travel circuits. Also, since the
pressures in the spring chambers on the both
ends of the travel junction valve spool (4)
become different and P1 becomes higher than
P2, the spool (4) moves to the P1 side and the
notch d closes. Then, the steering can be oper-
ated.
• The damper is provided to relax the transition
characteristics of the junction circuit at the time
of abrupt operation.
PC130-7 10-67
TRAVEL LS BYPASS CIRCUIT

1. At normal operation
10-68 PC130-7
FUNCTION
• When an actuator is operated during travel, this
circuit will increase the discarded throttled flow of
the LS circuit PLS, loosen the pressure compen-
sation accuracy of the travel circuit and limits
reduction of the travel speed to small extent.
• The bypass circuit is closed in case of indepen-
dent travel or independent operation of an actua-
tor.
OPERATION
• When boom spool (1) is operated, the LS circuit
PLS will come to the same pressure as the boom
circuit pressure A1.
• At the same time, the LS circuit pressure PLS is
led to the spring chamber PLS1 of pressure
reducing valve (2) of the travel valve.
• Since the travel spool is not operated, the travel
actuator circuit PA is closed and check valve (4)
inside flow control valve (3) is also closed.
• Therefore, the travel LS bypass circuit is closed
in case of independent operation of the boom.
PC130-7 10-69
(3)
2. At operation of travel + other actuator
10-70 PC130-7
OPERATION
• When boom spool (1) is operated, the LS circuit
PLS will come to the same pressure as the boom
circuit pressure A1.
• Since the actuator circuit pressure is generally
higher at boom RAISE than during travel (A1 >
A2), the pressure in spring chamber PLS1 of
flow control valve (3) on the travel side is higher
than the travel circuit pressure PA.
• So, the pressure reducing valve (2) moves to the
left side, and the LS pressure of spring chamber
PLS1 pushes check valve (4) from orifice a to
open it and flows to the travel circuit PA through
passages b and c.
• Therefore, when LS circuit pressure PLS, which
has been as high as boom circuit pressure A1,
flows to travel circuit A2, the pressure will drop.
PC130-7 10-71
(3)
3. At simultaneous operation of boom + swing

FUNCTION
• When the boom is raised at the time of swinging,
the swing pool stroke will be controlled and the
flow to the boom will be distributed more to raise
the boom more.
1) When the boom is not raised
OPERATION 1. Spool (swing)

• Since the SA and SB ports are interconnected to 2. Piston
the drain and no force is given to piston (2), the 3. Plug
stroke of spool (1) is not controlled. So, spool 4. Case
(1) comes to cases (4) and (5) and the stroke 5. Case
increases by ST1. This increases the filtering oil
flow. ST1 : Spool stroke
10-72 PC130-7
(3)
2) At simultaneous operation of boom RAISE
OPERATION
• When the boom RAISE PPC pressure is led to
piston (2) as the stroke control pilot pressure PS
through SA and SB ports, piston (2) will be
pressed in the inner direction.
• At the time, the maximum stroke of spool (1) will
shorten (by ST0) due to control of piston (2).
Boom RAISE OFF ST1 > Boom RAISE ON ST0
• The spool (1) stroke is controlled and shortens.
If the boom is raised at the time of swing (hoist
swing), notch a opening area will decrease. So,
the flow distribution to the boom will increase
and the boom will rise higher at the time of hoist
swing.
PC130-7 10-73
(3)
SWING BLEED VALVE

FUNCTION
• For swing operation, a bleed valve is provided to
the pressure reducing valve to raise the LS pres-
sure slowly and to smooth the swing operation.
1. Swing at neutral position
OPERATION
• Since notch a of pressure reducing valve (1) and
the LS circuit are closed and the bleed-off circuit
and LS circuit are also closed, the LS pressure
PLS is not affected by operation of other work
equipment.
• The pump discharge pressure PP is also inter-
rupted from the bleed-off circuit with piston (2)
and is not affected.
• Notch b of bleed spool (3) and the bleed-off cir-
cuit are interconnected each other.
10-74 PC130-7
(3)
2. At swing fine control
OPERATION
• The pressure reducing valve moves in the right
direction, and notch a and the LS circuit intercon-
nect each other. Also, pump circuit PP, bleed-off
circuit and LS circuit interconnect each other
through piston (2).
• Bleed spool (3) moves in the left direction in pro-
portion to raise of the swing PPC pressure PA.
But notch b throttles and interconnect to the
bleed-off circuit in the fine control region and
determines the intermediate pressure before
pump discharge pressure PP is reduced and
applied to LS pressure PLS.
• Therefore, the intermediate pressure is set lower
than the pump discharge pressure PP and rises
as bleed spool (3) moves . So, the LS pressure
PLS rises slowly.
PC130-7 10-75
(3)
3. At full swing operation
OPERATION
• When the swing PPC pressure PA comes to the
maximum, notch b of bleed spool (3) interrupt
the bleed-off circuit. The intermediate pressure
becomes equal to the pump discharge pressure
PP, and the LS pressure PLS becomes equal to
the actuator circuit pressure.
10-76 PC130-7
(3)
LS SELECT VALVE
FUNCTION
• At the time of simultaneous operation of swing +
boom RAISE, this valve prevents high swing LS
pressure from entering the LS circuit PLS and
also prevents the boom RAISE speed from
reducing by securing the pump flow at the time of
swing drive.
1. During normal operation
OPERATION
• The pilot pressure is not generally applied to pilot
port BP except for boom RAISE operation.
• In this state, the pump discharge pressure PP
pushes valve (1) to open it and is led to pressure
reducing valve (4) of the swing valve. At the
time of swing operation, there occurs the LS
pressure PLS suitable for the load pressure, and
the pressure is led to the pump LS valve.
PC130-7 10-77
(3)
2. At simultaneous operation of swing + boom RAISE
OPERATION
• At the simultaneous operation of swing + boom
RAISE, the signal pressure of the PPC circuit is
led to pilot port BP.
• When this pilot pressure BP is applied to piston
(2) and reaches a pressure that is stronger than
spring (3), piston (2) will be pushed to the left
side, valve (1) will close and the pump discharge
pressure PP will not come to flow to pressure
reducing valve (4) of the swing valve.
• Then, the swing pressure does not cause LS
pressure PLS, but the LS pressure PLS cause
the boom RAISE pressure is led to the pump LS
valve, and the pump delivery is controlled with
the boom RAISE LS pressure.
• The pilot pressure BP depends on the control
lever stroke.
10-78 PC130-7
(3)
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION SELF PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE
SELF PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE
P1 : From pump
PR : Supply to solenoid valve, PPC valve and EPC valve.
T : To hydraulic tank
PC130-7 10-79
1. Control valve block 7. Spring (pressure reducing valve main)

2. Valve (sequence valve) 8. Valve (pressure reducing valve)
3. Spring 9. Spring (safety valve)
4. Screw 10. Ball
5. Poppet 11. Filter
6. Spring (pressure reducing valve pilot)
10-80 PC130-7
FUNCTION
• The self pressure reducing valves reduces the
discharge pressure of the main pump and sup-
plies it to the solenoid valve, the PPC valve, etc.
as the control pressure.
PC130-7 10-81
1. At engine stop (total low pressure)
OPERATION
• Spring (6) pushes poppet (5) to the seat, and the
circuit between ports PR and T is closed.
• Spring (7) pushes valve (8) to the left side, and
the circuit between ports P1 and PR is open.
• Spring (3) pushes valve (2) to the left side, and
the circuit between ports P1 and P2 is closed.
10-82 PC130-7
(3)
2. At neutral and reduction of load pressure P2

(at own weight fall in boom LOWER and arm
IN)
Note : When load pressure P2 is lower than output
pressure PR of the self pressure reducing
valve.
OPERATION • Therefore, there will occur a differential pressure

• Spring (3) and the PR pressure (0 MPa {0 kg/ around hold a in spool (8) and the spool will
cm2} at the time of engine stop) pushes valve (2) move in the direction to close port P1 and the PR
in direction to close the circuit between ports P1 opening. Then, the P1 pressure is reduced and
and P2. When the hydraulic oil enters P1 port, adjusted to a certain pressure (set pressure) with
the expression (P1 pressure Spring (7) force + the opening and is supplied as the PR pressure.
( d area x PR pressure)) holds, and the self
pressure reducing valve will adjust the openings
of ports P1 and P2 so that the P1 pressure can
be maintained higher than the PR pressure.
• When the PR pressure rises above the set pres-
sure, poppet (5) will open and the hydraulic oil
flows through the route from PR port, hole a in
spool (8), poppet (5) opening to tank port T.
PC130-7 10-83
(3)
3. At raise of load pressure P2
OPERATION • Therefore, there will occur a differential pressure

• When the load pressure P2 rises due to digging around hold a in spool (8) and the spool will
or other operations, the pump delivery will move in the direction to close port P1 and PR
increase and P1 pressure will rise. opening. Then, the P1 pressure is reduced and
Then, the expression (P1 pressure > Spring (7) adjusted to a certain pressure (set pressure) with
force + ( d area x PR pressure)) will hold, and the opening and is supplied as the PR pressure.
valve (2) will move to the right side till the stroke
end. As a result, the opening between ports P1
and P2 will increase, the passage resistance will
become smaller to reduce engine loss horse-
power.
• When the PR pressure rises above the set pres-
sure, poppet (5) will open and hydraulic oil will
flow through the route from the PR port, hole a in
spool (8), poppet (5) opening to tank port T.
10-84 PC130-7
(3)
4. At occurrence of abnormal high pressure
OPERATION
• When PR pressure of the self pressure reducing
valve rises abnormally high, ball (10) will sepa-
rate from the seat against spring (9) force to flow
hydraulic oil to the output ports PR o T so as to
reduce the PR pressure. Then, the equipment
(PPC valve, solenoid valve, etc.), to which the oil
pressure is supplied, is protected from the abnor-
mal high pressure.
PC130-7 10-85
(3)
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION CENTER SWIVEL JOINT
CENTER SWIVEL JOINT
1. Cover A1 : From control valve (R.H. travel Forward)

2. Body A2 : To R.H. travel motor B
3. Slipper seal B1 : From control valve (L.H. travel Forward)
4. O-ring B2 : To L.H. travel motor A
5. Shaft C1 : From control valve (R.H. travel Reverse)
C2 : To R.H. travel motor A
D1 : From control valve (L.H. travel Reverse)
D2 : To L.H. travel motor B
E1 : 2-stage travel selection solenoid valve
E2 : To L.H./R.H. travel motor D
DR1 : To hydraulic tank
DR2 : From L.H. travel motor C1 and R.H. travel
motor C2
10-86 PC130-7
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION TRAVEL MOTOR
TRAVEL MOTOR (FINAL DRIVE)
A : From control valve (L.H./R.H. travel)

B : From control valve (L.H./R.H. travel)
C1 : To hydraulic tank (L.H. travel motor)
Plug (R.H. travel motor)
C2 : Plug (L.H. travel motor)
To hydraulic tank (R.H. travel motor)
D : From travel 2nd speed selector solenoid valve
PC130-7 10-87
1. Plug 18. RV gear B

2. Check valve spring 19. Cover
3. Check valve 20. Driven gear
4. Return spring 21. Drive gear
5. Counterbalance valve 22. Drain plug
6. Safety valve 23. Hub
7. Safety valve spring 24. Regulator piston
8. End cover 25. Spindle
9. Regulator valve 26. Piston
10. Spring 27. Floating seal
11. Brake piston 28. Plate
12. Cylinder 29. Disc
13. Spring 30. Valve plate
14. Swash plate 31. Spring
15. Pivot 32. Piston
16. Crankshaft 33. Plug
17. RV gear A 34. Check valve
10-88 PC130-7
SPECIFICATION
Type GM18VL3
Theoretical delivery Hi 33.2 {33.2}
(cm3/rev{cc/rev}) Lo 52.7 {52.7}
Hi 3,562
Rated speed (rpm)
Lo 2,291
Brake releasing pressure 0.68
(MPa{kg/cm2}) {6.94}
Hi-Lo switching pressure 2.94
(MPa{kg/cm2}) {30}
Final drive reduction ratio 66
OUTLINE
Travel speed selection
• Swash plate (14) has 2 faces (x, y) behind it, and

is supported by pivot (15).
• When pressure of comtrol chamber a rises, it
pushes regulator piston (24), then swash plate
angle becomes minimum, then travel speed
goes high.
PC130-7 10-89
(3)
OPERATION
Operation of motor
At slow speed (the motor swash plate angle is maximized.)
• Since the travel 2nd speed selector solenoid

valve is demagnetized, pressurized oil from the
main pump does not flow to the D port.
• Therefore, spring (10) has pressed regulator
valve (9) to the left side.
• So, regulator valve (9) stops the main pressur-
ized oil led from the control valve to the end
cover by pushing check valve (34).
• The pressurized oil in the control chamber drains
in the motor case through passage b of regulator
valve (9).
• Then, the main pressurized oil from cylinder c
chamber pushes swash plate (14) in the direc-
tion to maximize the swash plate angle and the
motor capacity is increased to the maximum for
slow speed travel.
10-90 PC130-7
(3)
At high speed (the motor swash plate angle is minimized.)
• When the travel 2nd speed selector solenoid

valve is energized, pilot pressure from the main
pump will flow in D port and push regulator valve
(9) in the right direction.
• Therefore, the main pressurized oil from the con-
trol valve passes through passage b of regulator
valve (9), flows in control chamber a and pushed
regulator piston (24) in the left direction.
• Then, swash plate (14) is pressed in the direc-
tion to minimize the swash plate angle, and the
motor capacity is minimized for high speed
travel.
PC130-7 10-91
(3)
Operation of brake valve

• The brake valve consists of check valves (3a)
and (3b), counterbalance valve (5) and safety
valve (6), and the circuit configuration is as per
the right figure.
• Functions and operations of these components
are as follows :
Counterbalance valve, check valve

Function
• When traveling down a slope, the own weight
falling force will make the machine travel faster
than the motor rotation. So, traveling with
reduced engine speed is very dangerous
because the motor idles and runs away.
These valves let the machine travel at a speed
appropriate for the engine speed (pump delivery)
to prevent this danger.
Operation at oil supply

• When the travel lever is operated, pressurized oil
from the control valve will be supplied to the PA
port, push and open check valve (3a) and flow
from MA port on the motor inlet side to MB port
on the motor outlet side.
Since the motor outlet circuit is closed with check
valve (3b) and counterbalance valve (5), how-
ever, the supply-side pressure will rise.
10-92 PC130-7
(3)
• The pressurized oil on the supply side flows in

the S1 chamber from orifice E1 of counterbal-
ance valve (5). When the pressure in S1 cham-
ber rises above the switching pressure of the
counterbalance valve, counterbalance valve (5)
will be pressed in the right direction.
So, the circuit between outlet side MB port and
PB port will open, the motor outlet circuit will
open, and the motor will start rotating.
Brake operation at traveling downhill

• If the machine is going to run away when travel-
ing downhill, the motor will idle to reduce oil pres-
sure on the motor inlet side and the pressure in
S1 chamber through orifice E1.
When the pressure in S1 chamber drops below
the switching pressure of the counterbalance
valve, counterbalance valve (5) will be returned
in the left direction with return spring (4), and out-
let side MB port will be throttled.
Then, pressure on the outlet side will rise and
rotation resistance will occur to the motor to pre-
vent the machine from running away.
This means that counterbalance valve (5) moves
to a position where the machine own weight and
inlet side pressure balance with the pressure at
outlet side MB port, and the outlet circuit is throt-
tled to control speed to the pump delivery.
PC130-7 10-93
(3)
Safety valve
Function
• When stopping a travel (or traveling downhill),
counterbalance valve (5) will close the inlet and
outlet circuits of the motor. Since the motor
keeps rotating by inertia, however, pressure on
the outlet side of the motor will rise abnormally
and the motor and pipes may be damaged.
Then, safety valve leads the abnormally high
pressure to the inlet side of the motor to prevent
equipment from being damaged.
Operation
• When the pressurized oil being supplied from PA
port is stopped flowing at the time of travel stop,
return spring (4) will return counterbalance valve
(5) from the right side to the left side (neutral
position).
• Though counterbalance valve (5) closes a cham-
ber on the outlet side circuit, the inertia lets the
motor rotate and the pressure in a chamber
rises.
• The highly pressurized oil in a chamber passes
through throttle b of safety valve (6a) and enters
in d chamber from c chamber. The pressurized
oil entered in d chamber moves piston (32) to the
left side. Meantime, safety valve (6a) is pushed
to open by the pressurized oil in a chamber, and
the pressurized oil in a chamber flows in f cham-
ber through e port. Therefore, the pressurized
oil in a chamber flows in f chamber at a compar-
atively slow speed to control the pressure in a
chamber and also to prevent cavitation in f
chamber at the same time.
• When piston (32) reaches the stroke end, the
pressures in d and c chambers will rise, safety
valve (6a) will be closed again and the pressure
in a chamber will rise further.
• Then, safety valve (6b) will open and the pres-
surized oil in the a chamber will flow in f chamber
from g chamber. The pressure in a chamber
can be controlled in two stage as mentioned
above, and the hydraulic motor can be smoothly
braked to stop.
10-94 PC130-7
(3)
Operation of parking brake

When operating travel
• When the travel lever is operated, pressurized oil
from the pump will work on counterbalance valve
(5), open circuit a to the parking brake and flow
in b chamber of brake piston (11).
• The pressure in b chamber overcomes spring
(31) and pushed brake piston (11) in the left
direction.
• This will eliminate the press force to plate (28)
and disc (29), and plate (28) and disc (29) will
separate, and the brake force will be released.
When positioning travel neutral

• When the travel lever is brought to the neutral
position, counterbalance valve (5) will return to
the neutral position and circuit a to the parking
brake will be closed.
• The pressurized oil in b chamber of brake piston
(11) will be drained in the case, and spring (31)
will push the brake piston in the right direction.
• Therefore, plate (28) and disc (19) will be
pushed to each other, and the brake will come to
work.
PC130-7 10-95
(3)
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION SWING MOTOR
SWING MOTOR
TYPE : KMF40ABE-3
B : From swing brake solenoid valve SPECIFICATION

S : From control valve Type : KMF40ABE-3
T : To tank Theoretical delivery : 40.2 cc/rev
MA : From control valve Safety valve set pressure : 27.5 MPa {280 kg/cm2}
MB : From control valve Rated speed : 2,413 rpm
Brake releasing pressure :1.77 MPa{18.0 kg/cm2}
10-96 PC130-7
1. Drive shaft 11. Cylinder

2. Spacer 12. Valve plate
3. Case 13. Piston
4. Disc 14. Center shaft
5. Plate 15. Safety valve
6. Brake ring 16. Check valve
7. Brake piston 17. Check valve spring
8. Housing 18. Shuttle valve
9. Reverse prevention valve 19. Shuttle valve spring
10. Center spring 20. Brake spring
PC130-7 10-97
SWING BRAKE
1. When solenoid valve is demagnetized
Operation
• When the solenoid valve of the swing brake is
demagnetized, pressurized oil from the control
pump will be interrupted and the B port will be
connected to the tank circuit.
• Then, brake piston (7) will be pressed downward
with brake spring (8) and will push disc (4) and
plate (5) to work the brake.
2. When solenoid valve is energized

Operation
• When the solenoid valve of the swing brake is
energized, the valve will be changed over and
pressurized oil from the control pump will enter
the B port and will flow in to the brake chamber
A.
• Pressurized oil in the A chamber will push brake
spring (8) and brake piston (7) will move upward.
Then, disc (4) and plate (5) will separate to
release the brake.
10-98 PC130-7
(3)
REVERSE PREVENTION VALVE
1. Valve body
2. Spool (MA side)
3. Spring (MA side)
4. Plug (MA side)
5. Spool (MB side)
6. Spring (MB side)
7. Plug (MB side)
MA : Port
MB : Port
T1 : Port
T2 : Port
PC130-7 10-99
Effect explanation drawing
10-100 PC130-7
FUNCTION
• This function is used for reducing swing back
generated on a swing body that can result from
factors such as inertia of the swing body, back-
lash and rigidity of the machinery system and
compressibility of hydraulic oil.
• This function helps preventing loose loads at the
end of swing or cutting lead time (better position-
ing performance allows you to proceed to the
next operation within a shorter time).
1. When MB port pressure is generated

Operation
• MB pressure is conducted to d room via the cut-
out. Utilizing difference of space (D1>D2), the
pressure compresses spring (6) and drives spool
(5) leftward to interconnect MB o e.
• Since MA pressure at this time is lower than the
pressure set on spring (3), spool (2) is not moved
and pressurized oil remains closed. Thus, the
braking force is maintained.
2. When the motor is once stopped

Operation
• The motor is reverse rotated by charging pres-
sure generated on the MB port (1st reverse rota-
tion).
• At this time, reversing pressure is generated on
the MA port. MA pressure conducted to a room
interconnects MA o b by compressing spring (3)
and driving spool (2) rightward.
• The pressure is then conducted through drilled
hole on spool (5) to interconnect b o f. Revers-
ing pressure on the MA port is bypassed to the T
port to disable the 2nd reverse rotation.
PC130-7 10-101
(3)
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION SOLENOID VALVE
SOLENOID VALVE
FOR PPC LOCK, 2ND TRAVEL SPEED SELECT, SWING HOLD BRAKE AND 2-STAGE
RELIEF SOLENOID VALVE.
1. PPC lock solenoid valve A1 : To PPC valve

2. 2nd travel speed select solenoid valve A2 : To 2-stage relief valve
3. Swing hold brake solenoid valve A3 : To swing hold brake
4. 2-stage relief solenoid valve A4 : To 2nd travel speed select valve
ACC : To accumulator
Solenoid valve P1 : From self-pressure reducing valve
5. Push pin T : To hydraulic oil tank
6. Coil
7. Gauge
8. Spool
9. Block
10. Spring
Check valve
11. Plug
12. Spring
13. Plunger
10-102 PC130-7
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION SOLENOID VALVE
OPERATION
When solenoid is "demagnetized"
• Coil (6) remains demagnetized as long as signal
current to it is stopped..
• Thus, spool (8) is pushed leftward by spring (10).
• Since ports P to A are closed by this spool, flow
of pilot oil pressure to the actuator is blocked. At
the same time, oil from the actuator is lead from
A port to T port, then drained to the hydraulic oil
tank.
When solenoid is "magnetized"

• Coil (6) is magnetized by signal current con-
ducted to it.
• Thus, spool (8) is pushed rightward by push pin
(5).
• As the result, pilot oil pressure is conducted from
P port through cage (7) and A port up the actua-
tor.
At the same time, T port is closed, thereby block-
ing flow of oil to the hydraulic oil tank.
PC130-7 10-103
(3)
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION PPC ACCUMULATOR
PPC ACCUMULATOR
1. Gas plug
2. Shell
3. Poppet
4. Holder
5. Bladder
6. Oil port
SPECIFICATIONS
Gas used : Nitrogen gas
Gas capacity : 0.3 l
Charged gas pressure :
1.18 MPa (12 kg/cm2) at 80°C
Maximum operating pressure :
6.86 MPa (70 kg/cm2)
10-104 PC130-7
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION PPC VALVE
PPC VALVE
FOR SWING, WORK EQUIPMENT
P : From main pump P3 : Left : Swing RIGHT/Right : Bucket CURL

P1 : Left : Arm OUT/Right : Boom LOWER P4 : Left : Swing LEFT/Right : Bucket DUMP
P2 : Left : Arm IN/Right : Boom RAISE T : To tank
PC130-7 10-105
1. Spool 6. Nut (for linking the lever)

2. Metering spring 7. Joint
3. Centering spring 8. Plate
4. Piston 9. Retainer
5. Disk 10. Body
10-106 PC130-7
OPERATION
1) At neutral
• Ports A and B of the control valve and ports P1
and P2 of the PPC valve are connected to drain
chamber D through fine control hole f in spool
(1). (Fig. 1)
2) During fine control (neutral o fine control)

When piston (4) starts to be pushed by disc (5),
retainer (9) is pushed; spool (1) is also pushed
by metering spring (2), and moves down.
When this happens, fine control hole f is shut off
from drain chamber D, and at almost the same
time, it is connected to pump pressure chamber
PP, so pilot pressure oil from the main pump
passes through fine control hole f and goes from
port P1 to port A.
When the pressure at port P1 becomes higher,
spool (1) is pushed back and fine control hole f is
shut off from pump pressure chamber PP. At
almost the same time, it is connected to drain
chamber D to release the pressure at port P1.
When this happens, spool (1) moves up or down
so that force of metering spring (2) is balanced
with the pressure at port P1. The relationship in
the position of spool (1) and body (10) (fine con-
trol hole f is at a point midway between drain
hole D and pump pressure chamber PP) does
not change until retainer (9) contacts spool (1).
Therefore, metering spring (2) is compressed
proportionally to the amount of movement of the
control lever, so the pressure at port P1 also
rises in proportion to the travel of the control
lever. In this way, the control valve spool moves
to a position where the pressure in chamber A
(the same as the pressure at port P1) and the
force of the control valve spool return spring are
balanced. (Fig. 2)
PC130-7 10-107
3) During fine control (when control lever is

returned)
When disc (5) starts to be returned, spool (1) is
pushed up by the force of centering spring (3)
and the pressure at port P1.
When this happens, fine control hole f is con-
nected to drain chamber D and the pressure oil
at port P1 is released.
If the pressure at port P1 drops too far, spool (1)
is pushed down by metering spring (2), and fine
control hole f is shut off from drain chamber D. At
almost the same time, it is connected to pump
pressure chamber PP, and the pump pressure is
supplied until the pressure at port P1 recovers to
a pressure that corresponds to the lever position.
When the spool of the control valve returns, oil in
drain chamber D flows fine control hole f' in the
valve on the side that is not working. The oil
passes through port P2 and enters chamber B to
fill the chamber with oil. (Fig. 3)
4) At full stroke
When disc (5) pushes down piston (4), and
retainer (9) pushes down spool (1), fine control
hole f is shut off from drain chamber D, and is
connected with pump pressure chamber PP.
Therefore, the pilot pressure oil from the main
pump passes through fine control hole f and
flows to chamber A from port P1, and pushes the
control valve spool.
The oil returning from chamber B passes from
port P2 through fine control hole f' and flows to
drain chamber D. (Fig. 4)
10-108 PC130-7
FOR TRAVEL
P : From main pump P3 : R.H reverse

T : To tank P4 : R.H forward
P1 : L.H reverse P5 : Travel signal
P2 : L.H forward
PC130-7 10-109
1. Plate 5. Metering spring

2. Body 6. Centering spring
3. Piston 7. Valve
4. Collar 8. Pin
10-110 PC130-7
OPERATION
1. In the neutral mode
• P1 and P2 ports of the operation valves A, B and
PPC valve are connected to drain room D via the
fine control hole f on spool (1).
2. In the fine control mode

(neutral o fine control)
• As piston (4) is pushed by disk (5), retainer (9) ia
also pushed. At the same time, spool (1) is also
pushed down via the metering spring (2).
• By this move, connection of the fine control hole
f is switched from drain room D to the pump
pressure room PP, and pilot pressurized oil for
the main pump is conducted from P1 port to A
port.
• As P1 port pressure increases, spool (1) is
pushed back. By this move, connection of the
fine control hole f is switched from pump pres-
sure room PP to drain room D, thereby relieving
P1 port pressure.
• As the result, spool (1) moves up and down so
that force of metering spring (2) and P1 port
pressure may be balanced.
Positional relationship between spool (1) and
body (10) (fine control hole f is situated at mid
point between drain room D and pump pressure
room PP) remains unchanged until retainer (9) is
contacted against spool (1).
• Metering spring (2) is, therefore, compressed in
proportion to strokes of the operation lever.
Thus, the P1 port pressure, too, also increases
in proportion to strokes of the operation lever.
• As the result, the operation valve spool moves to
the position where pressure of A room (the same
as P1 port pressure) is balanced against force of
the operation valve spool return spring.
PC130-7 10-111
(3)
3. In the fine control mode (when operation

lever is shifted back to its original position)
• As disk (5) starts returning, spool (1) is pushed
up by force of centering spring (3) and P1 port
pressure.
• By this move, the fine control hole f is connected
to drain room D and relieves pressurized oil of
P1 port to it.
• If P1 port pressure goes excessively low, spool
(1) is pushed down by metering spring (2) and
passage between the fine control hole f and
drain room D is shut down. And, almost at the
same time, the hole is connected to pump pres-
sure room PP and starts supplying pressure to
the pump. This supply continues until P1 port
pressure is recovered to the level equivalent to
the lever position.
• When the operation valve spool returns, oil in
drain room D flows in through the fine control
hole f' on the not moving side valve. Oil is then
conducted via P2 port to room B to fill it up.
4. In the full stroke mode

• When disk (5) pushes down piston (4) and
retainer (9) pushes down spool (1), connection of
the fine control hole f is switched from drain
room D to pump pressure room PP.
• Thus, pilot pressurized oil from the control pump
passes through the fine control hole f and con-
ducted to A room via P1 port to push the opera-
tion valve spool.
• Return oil from B room is conducted from P2 port
to drain room D via the fine control hole f'.
10-112 PC130-7
(3)
FOR SERVICE
1. Spool P : From self pressure reducing valve

2. Metering spring T : To tank
3. Centering spring P1 : To blade or service valve
4. Piston P : To blade or service valve
5. Lever
6. Plate
7. Retainer
8. Body
9. Filter
PC130-7 10-113
OPERATION
1. In the neutral mode
• P1 and P2 ports of the operation valves A, B and
PPC valve are connected to drain room D via the
fine control hole f on spool (1).
2. In the fine control mode

(Neutral o fine control)
• As piston (4) is pushed by disk (5), retainer (7) is
also pushed. At the same time, spool (1) is also
pushed down via metering spring (2).
• By this move, connection of the fine control hole
f is switched from drain room D to pump pres-
sure room PP, and pilot pressurized oil for the
control pump is conducted from P1 port to A
port.
• As P1 port pressure increases, spool (1) is
pushed back. By this move, connection of the
fine control hole f is switched from pump pres-
sure room PP to drain room D, thereby relieving
P1 port pressure.
• As the result, spool (1) moves up and down so
that force of metering spring (2) and P1 port
pressure may be balanced.
• Positional relationship between spool (1) and
body (8) (fine control hole f is situated at mid
point between drain room D and pump pressure
room PP) remains unchanged until retainer (7) is
contacted against spool (1).
• Metering spring (2) is, therefore, compressed in
Thus, the P1 port pressure, also increases in
• As the result, the operation valve spool moves to
the position where pressure of A room (the same
as P1 port pressure) is balanced against force of
the operation valve spool return spring.
10-114 PC130-7
(3)
3. In the fine control mode (when the operation

lever is shifted back to its original position)
• As lever (5) starts returning, spool (1) is pushed
up by force of centering spring (3) and P1 port
pressure. By this move, the fine control hole f is
connected to drain room D and relieves pressur-
ized oil of P1 port to it.
• If P1 port pressure goes excessively low, spool
(1) is pushed down by metering spring (2) and
passage between the fine control hole f and
drain room D is shut down. And, almost at the
same time, the hole is connected to pump pres-
sure room PP and starts supplying pressure to
the pump. This supply continues until the P1
port pressure is recovered to the level equivalent
to the lever position.
• When the operation valve spool returns, oil in
drain room D flows in through the fine control
hole f' on the not moving side valve. Oil is then
conducted via P2 port to the room B to fill it up.
4. In the full stroke mode

• When disk (5) pushes down piston (4) and
retainer (7) pushes down spool (1), connection of
the fine control hole f is switched from drain
room D to pump pressure room PP.
• Thus, pilot pressurized oil from the control pump
passes through the fine control hole f and con-
ducted to A room via P1 port to push the opera-
tion valve spool.
• Return oil from B room is conducted from P2 port
to drain room D via the fine control hole f'.
PC130-7 10-115
(3)
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION WORK EQUIPMENT
WORK EQUIPMENT
1. Bucket
2. Link
3. Bucket cylinder
4. Arm
5. Arm cylinder
6. Boom
7. Boom cylinder
10-116 PC130-7
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION AIR CONDITIONER PIPING
AIR CONDITIONER PIPING
A: Hot air/cold air spurting port

B: Internal air circulation port
C: External air inlet
D: Refrigerant checking port
1. Hot water inport piping 5. Receiver tank

2. Air conditioner compressor 6. Hot water return piping
3. Condenser 7. Air conditioner unit
4. Refrigerant piping 8. Duct
PC130-7 10-117
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION ENGINE CONTROL
ENGINE CONTROL
1. Starting switch OUTLINE

2. Fuel control dial • The engine can be started and stopped with only
3. Governor motor starting switch (1).
4. Starting motor • The engine throttle and pump controller (8) rev-
5. Linkage eives the signal of fuel control dial (2) and trans-
6. Battery relay mits the drive signal to governor motor (3) to
7. Battery control the governor lever angle of fuel injection
8. Engine throttle and pump controller pump (9) and control the engine speed.
9. Fuel injection pump
10-118 PC130-7
(3)
1. OPERATION OF SYSTEM
Starting engine
• When the starting switch is turned to the START
position, the starting signal flows to the starting
motor, and the starting motor turns to start the
engine.
When this happens, the engine throttle and
pump controller checks the signal from the fuel
control dial and sets the engine speed to the
speed set by the fuel control dial.
Engine speed control

• The fuel control dial sends a signal to the engine
throttle and pump controller according to the
position of the dial. The engine throttle and pump
controller calculates the angle of the governor
motor according to this signal, and sends a sig-
nal to drive the governor motor so that it is at that
angle.
When this happens, the operating angle of the
governor motor is detected by the potentiometer,
and feedback is sent to the engine throttle and
pump controller, so that it can observe the opera-
tion of the governor motor.
Stopping engine
• When the starting switch is turned to the STOP
position, the engine throttle and pump controller
drives the governor motor so that the governor
lever is set to the NO INJECTION position.
• When this happens, to maintain the electric
power in the system until the engine stops com-
pletely, the engine throttle and pump controller
itself drives the battery relay.
PC130-7 10-119
2. COMPONENT
Fuel control dial
1. Knob
2. Dial
3. Spring
4. Ball
5. Potentiometer
6. Connector
FUNCTION
• The fuel control dial is installed under the monitor
panel, and a potentiometer is installed under the
knob. The potentiometer shaft is turned by turn-
ing the knob.
• As the potentiometer shaft is turned, the resis-
tance of the variable resistor in the potentiometer
changes and a throttle signal is sent to the
engine throttle and pump controller.
The hatched area in the graph shown at right is
the abnormality detection area.
10-120 PC130-7
GOVERNOR MOTOR
1. Potentiometer OPERATION
2. Cover While motor is stopped
3. Shaft • Electric power is applied to both phases A and B
4. Dust seal of the motor.
5. Bearing
6. Motor While motor is running
7. Gear • The engine throttle and pump controller supplies
8. Connector a pulse current to phases A and B, and the motor
revolves, synchronizing to the pulse.
FUNCTION
• The motor is turned according to the drive signal
from the engine throttle and pump controller to
control the governor lever of the fuel injection
pump.
This motor used as the motive power source is a
stepping motor.
• A potentiometer for feedback is installed to moni-
tor the operation of the motor.
• Revolution of the motor is transmitted through
the gear to the potentiometer.
PC130-7 10-121
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM

CONTROL FUNCTION
1
Engine/Pump composite control function
2
Pump/Valve control function
3
One-touch power maximizing function
4
Auto-deceleration function
5
Electric control system Auto-warm-up/Overheat prevention function
6
Swing control function
7
Travel control function
8
ATT flow control, circuit selector function (if equipped)
Self-diagnosis function
10-122 PC130-7
MACHINE CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
10-124 PC130-7
(3)
PC130-7 10-125
1. ENGINE AND PUMP CONTROL FUNCTION
10-126 PC130-7
FUNCTION
• This function is for selecting any of the four work-
ing modes "A," "B", "E" and "L" with the working
mode selector switch on the monitor panel. The
controller can select optimum engine torques or
pump absorption torques for works to be
expected.
• The controller detects the engine governor

speed set with the fuel control dial depending on
the pump absorption torque set in each mode
and detects actual engine speeds. Then, the
controller controls all torques at each output
point of the engine so that the pump can absorb
them.
• When an engine speed was lowered, the control-

ler prevents the engine from stopping by throt-
tling the pump absorption toque.
PC130-7 10-127
(3)
1. CONTROL METHOD IN EACH MODE 66.2 kW/2,200 rpm

A Travel (A1)
{88.7 HP/2,200 rpm}
Mode A
• Matching point in Mode A 65.5 kW/2,200 rpm
A Work (A2)
• When a load to the pump increases and the {87.8 HP/2,200 rpm}
pressure rises and the engine speed lowers.
At the time, the controller reduces the pump
delivery so that the speed lowers to the speed at
the full output point or so. If the pressure drops
on the contrary, the controller increases the
pump delivery so that the speed comes to the
speed at the full output point or so.
The controller repeats these controls so that the
engine can always be used at speeds at the full
output point or so.
10-128 PC130-7
Mode E / Mode B / Mode L

Mode E B L
Partial output point 90% 90% 56%
Model PC130-7
Mode E 58.8 kW/2,000 rpm {78.9 HP/2,000 rpm}
Mode B 58.8 kW/2,000 rpm {78.9 HP/2,000 rpm}
Mode L 36.8 kW/1,500 rpm {70 HP/1,500 rtpm}
• At this time, the controller keeps the pump

absorption torque along the constant horse-
power curve and lower the engine speed by
the composite control of the engine and
pump.
• By this method, the engine is used in the low
fuel consumption area.
PC130-7 10-129
2. FUNCTION TO CONTROL PUMP DURING

TRAVEL
• If the machine travels in mode work A, B, E, or L,
the working mode does not change, but the
pump absorption torque and engine speed rise
to travel A mode.
3. PUMP DRIVE IN AN EMERGENCY

• Even if controllers and sensors get out of order,
the emergency pump drive switch (S) will enable
to maintain functions of the machine with absorp-
tion torques quite similar to those in the Mode E.
In this case, a constant current flows from the
battery to the PC-EPC valve, and the valve
detects the oil pressure only.
(1) Normal
(2) Emergency
a The emergency pump drive switch (S) is of the

alternative type. If the machine is operated after
the switch is set to "Emergency (2)" even though
the machine is normal, the user code "E02" will
be shown on the display.
10-130 PC130-7
2. PUMP/VALVE CONTROL FUNCTION
FUNCTION
• The machine is matched to various types of work
properly with the 2-stage relief function to
increase the digging force, etc.
PC130-7 10-131
1) Cut-off function
• When the cut-off function is turned on, the
PC-EPC current is increased to near the
maximum value.
By this operation, the flow rate in the relief
state is lowered to reduce fuel consumption.
• Operating condition for turning on cut-off
function.
Condition
• The average value of the front and rear pres-
sure sensors is above 27.9 MPa {285 kg/cm2}
and the one-touch power maximizing function is
not turned on
The cut-off function does not work, however,
while the machine is traveling in mode A, the
lock switch is turned on.
2) 2-stage relief function

• The relief pressure in the normal work is 31.9
MPa {325 kg/cm2}. If the 2-stage relief func-
tion is turned on, however, the relief pressure
rises to about 34.8 MPa {355 kg/cm2}.
By this operation, the hydraulic force is
increased further.
• Operating condition for turning on 2-stage
relief function
Condition Relief pressure
• During travel
• When swing lock switch is 31.9 MPa
turned on {325 kg/cm2}
• When one-touch power maxi- ⇓
mizing function is turned on 34.8 MPa
• When L mode is operated {355 kg/cm2}
10-132 PC130-7
3. ONE-TOUCH POWER MAXIMIZING FUNCTION
FUNCTION
• Power can be increased for about 8.5 sec. by
operating the left knob switch.
PC130-7 10-133
1) One-touch power maximizing function

• When the operator needs more digging force
to dig up a large rock, etc., if the left knob
switch is pressed, the hydraulic force is
increased about 9% to increase the digging
force.
• If the left knob switch is turned on in working
mode "A" or "E", each function is set auto-
matically as shown below.
⇓
Software cut-off function
Working Engine/Pump
2-stage relief function Operation time
mode control
31.9 MPa {325 kg/cm2}
Matching at rated Automatically
A, E ⇓ Cancel
output point reset at 8.5 sec
34.8 MPa {355 kg/cm2}
10-134 PC130-7
4. AUTO-DECELERATION FUNCTION
FUNCTION
• If the all control levers are set in NEUTRAL while
waiting for a dump truck or work, the engine
speed is lowered to the medium level automati-
cally to reduce the fuel consumption and noise.
• If any lever is operated, the engine speed rises
to the set level instantly.
PC130-7 10-135
OPERATION
When control levers are set in neutral
• If all the control levers are set in NEUTRAL while
the engine speed is above the decelerator oper-
ation level (about 1,400 rpm), the engine speed
lowers instantly to the first deceleration level
about 100 rpm lower than the set speed.
• If 4 more seconds pass, the engine speed lowers
to the second deceleration level (about 1,400
rpm) and keeps at that level until any lever is
operated again.
When any control lever is operated

• If any control lever is operated while the engine
speed is kept at the second deceleration level,
the engine speed rises instantly to the level set
with the fuel control dial.
10-136 PC130-7
5. AUTO-WARM-UP/OVERHEAT PREVENTION FUNCTION
FUNCTION
• After the engine is started, if the engine coolant
temperature is low, the engine speed is raised
automatically to warm up the engine. If the
engine coolant temperature rises too high during
work, the pump load is reduced to prevent over-
heating.
PC130-7 10-137
(3)
1) Auto-warm-up function
• After the engine is started, if the engine cool-
ant water temperature is low, the engine
speed is raised automatically to warm up the
engine.
Operating condition (All) Operated
Coolant temperature: Below 30°C.

Engine speed: Max. 1,200 rpm ⇒ Engine speed: Max. 1,200 rpm
⇓
Resetting condition (Any one) Reset
⇒
Coolant temperature: Above 30°C
Auto
Auto-warm-up operation time: Min. 10 minutes
Engine speed: Any level
Fuel control dial: Kept at 70% of full level for 3 sec. or
Manual
longer
Operating condition Operation/Remedy Resetting condition

Coolant and oil temperature:
Below 105?C
⇒ ⇒
Work mode: Any mode Fuel control dial: Return to low
Coolant and oil tem-
perature: Above
Engine speed: Low idle idle position once.
Monitor alarm lamp: Lights up • Under above condition, control-
105°C
Alarm buzzer: Sounds ler is set to condition before
operation of function. (Manual
reset)

Work mode: Mode A, E,
⇒ ⇒
Below 102°C
Coolant and oil tem- OR B
• Under above condition, control-
perature: Above Engine speed: Keep as is.
ler is set to condition before
102°C Monitor alarm lamp: Lights up.
operation of function. (Auto-
Lower pump discharge.
matic reset)

⇒ ⇒
Work mode: Mode A Below 98°C
Coolant and oil tem- • Under above condition, control-
Engine speed: Keep as is.
perature: Above 98°C ler is set to condition before
Lower pump discharge.
matic reset)

⇒ ⇒
Work mode: Travel Below 95°C
Coolant and oil tem- • Under above condition, control-
Engine speed: Keep as is.
perature: Above 95°C ler is set to condition before
Lower travel speed.
matic reset)
10-138 PC130-7
(3)
6. SWING CONTROL FUNCTION
1. Battery 11. PPC lock solenoid valve

2. Battery relay 12. Swing motor
3. Fusible link 13. L.H. work equipment PPC valve
4. Starting switch 14. Arm IN PPC oil pressure switch
5. Fuse box 15. Swing PPC oil pressure switch
6. Controller 16. Engine
7. Swing holding brake release switch 17. Hydraulic pump
8. Swing lock switch 18. Control valve
9. Monitor panel 18a. Self pressure reducing valve
10. Swing holding brake solenoid valve 18b. Main relief valve
Input/Output Signals e. Solenoid valve drive signal

a. Controller power supply f. Swing PPC oil pressure switch signal
b. Solenoid power supply g. Arm IN PPC oil pressure switch signal
c. Monitor panel power supply
d. S-NET signal
PC130-7 10-139
FUNCTION
Swing lock and swing holding brake Swing Swing
• The swing lock (manual type) is for locking swing lock lock Function Operation
switch monitor
at optional positions. The swing holding brake
(automatic type) interlocks with swing and pre- • When the swing con-
vents hydraulic drift from occurring after stop of trol lever is set to
NEUTRAL, the swing
swing. holding brake works 4
a When the swing lock is released, only the sec. later.
The lamp Swing
hydraulic brake with the safety valve is effective • When the swing con-
OFF goes holding
for swing. So, note that, when a swing stops on trol lever or the arm IN
OUT. brake
a slope, a hydraulic drift may occur sometimes. lever is operated, the
swing holding brake is
a Even during arm IN operation, release the swing released and free
holding brake. swing becomes possi-
ble.
• The swing holding brake
works, and the swing is
locked.
• Even if the swing con-
The lamp Swing
ON trol lever is operated,
turns ON. lock
the swing holding brake
cannot be released,
Release of swing holding brake and no swing is possi-
• If the controller gets out of order and no swing is ble.
possible because the swing holding brake does
not work normally, use the swing holding brake Swing
release switch (S), and the swing holding brake ON OFF
holding
(when the controller (when the controller
will be released and swing will become possible. brake re-
is out of order) is in order)
lease switch
(1) Normal Swing lock
ON OFF ON OFF
(2) Release switch
The
The The The
a Even if the swing holding brake release switch is swing
swing swing swing
set to "ON," the swing holding brake is not be Swing brake holding
lock lock is lock
released while the swing lock switch is set to brake
works. released. works.
works.
"ON."
Input/Output signal time chart
10-140 PC130-7
7. TRAVEL CONTROL FUNCTION
1. Battery 10. R.H. travel motor

2. Battery relay 11. Engine speed sensor
3. Fusible link 12. Pump pressure sensor
4. Starting switch 13. Engine
5. Fuse box 14. Hydraulic pump
6. Controller 15. Control valve
7. Monitor panel 15a. Self pressure reducing valve
8. Travel speed selector solenoid valve 15b. Main relief valve
9. L.H. travel motor
Input/Output signals e. Solenoid valve drive signal

a. Controller power supply f. Engine speed signal
b. Solenoid power supply g. Pump pressure signal
c. Monitor panel power supply
d. S-NET signal
PC130-7 10-141
FUNCTION
Travel Speed Selection Travel speed LOW HIGH
1. Travel Speed "Manual" Change selector switch (low speed) (high speed)
• When the travel speed selector switch is set Motor capacity
to LOW or HIGH, the motor capacity 52.7 33.2
(cc/rev)
changes and travel speeds can be selected.
Travel speed
2.7 5.5
(km/h)
Travel motor swash plate
Maximum Minimum
angle
2. "Automatic"change of travel speed

1) Automatic selection corresponding to engine
speed
• If engine speed drops to 1,500 rpm or
less when travel speed selector switch is
in HIGH and travel speed is HIGH, travel
speed changes to LOW automatically.
• If engine speed becomes 1,700 rpm or
less when travel speed selector switch is
in HIGH and travel speed is LOW, travel
speed changes to HIGH automatically.
a If travel speed selector switch is in LOW,
travel speed is not changed automati-
cally.
2) Automatic selection corresponding to dis-

charge pressure of pump
• If travel pressure of 30.4MPa {310 kg/
cm2} or higher continues for 0.2 seconds
or more when travel speed selector
switch is in HIGH, travel speed changes
to LOW automatically.
• If travel pressure of 16.7MPa {170 kg/
cm2} or lower continues for 0.2 seconds
or more when travel speed selector
switch is in HIGH, travel speed changes
to HIGH automatically.
a If travel speed selector switch is in LOW,
travel speed is not changed automati-
cally.
10-142 PC130-7
(3)
8. PPC LOCK FUNCTION
1. Battery 10. Left work equipment PPC valve

2. Battery relay 11. Right work equipment PPC valve
3. Fusible link 12. Traveling PPC valve
4. Starting switch 13. Blade PPC valve (Blade specification)
5. Fuse box 14. Engine
6. Controller 15. Hydraulic pump
7. Safety lock lever 16. Operation valve
8. PPC lock switch 16a. Self pressure reducing valve
9. PPC lock solenoid valve 16b. Man relief valve
Input/Output signals
a. Power supply of controller
b. Power supply of solenoids
c. Solenoid valve driving signals
Function
• PPC lock switch works with safety lock lever.
Setting safety lock lever to "Lock", PPC lock
switch turns to "OFF".
• Turning PPC lock switch to "OFF" shuts off cur-
rent to PPC lock solenoid valve, making opera-
tion lever on the work equipment disabled.
PC130-7 10-143
SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

1. Error code display/Alarm functions
• Controller always watches electronic devices
which constitutes the system, including con-
troller itself, each potentiometer which issues
input signals, each solenoid valve which
receives output signals, and EPC valves, to
check for they normal operation.
• If an abnormality occurred in any of these
devices, the controller diagnoses it and dis-
play the results on display (1) of monitor
panel as a "USER CODE" or "SERVICE
CODE", sounding alarm buzzer at the same
time to notify the abnormality to operator.
a Refer to the "TROUBLESHOOTING" sec-
tion as for the details of display and mea-
sures to be taken.
2. Error code memory function

• Controller takes in memory the error code
diagnosed about an abnormality which
occurred in advanced system.
a Refer to the "TESTING AND ADJUSTING"
section as for the details of display and how
to reset.
10-144 PC130-7
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
ENGINE SPEED SENSOR
FUNCTION 1. Magnet
• The engine speed sensor is installed on the ring 2. Terminal
gear of the engine flywheel. It electrically counts 3. Case
number of gear teeth that pass its front side and 4. Boots
sends the counting to the controller. 5. Connector
Remarks : Number of ring gear teeth is 127.
• For the count, a magnet is used which generates

current every time a gear tooth passes its front
side.
PC130-7 10-145
PPC HYDRAULIC SWITCH
SPECIFICATION 1. Plug
Contact structre : Normally opened 2. Switch
Operating (ON) pressure : 3. Connector
490 ± 98.1 kPa {5.0 ± 1.0 kg/cm2}
Resetting (OFF) pressure :
294 ± 49.0 kPa {3.0 ± 0.5 kg/cm2}
FUNCTION
• 8 switches installed to junction block sense oper-
ating condetion of each actuator, and send it to
controller.
• 1 switch installed to travel PPC valve sense
travel operating condition, and send it to control-
ler.
10-146 PC130-7
CONTROLLER
PC130-7 10-147
Input/output signals
CN-1 CN-2 CN-3
Pin Signal name
Input/ Pin Signal name
Input/ Pin Signal name
Input/
No. output No. output No. output
1 NC Input 1 NC Output 1 Control power supply Input
2 NC Input 2 Swing prolix switch Input 2 Solenoid power supply Input
3 NC Input 3 NC Input 3 SOL_COM —
4 Signal GND — 4 232C_RxD Input 4 Battery relay drive Output
5 NC Input 5 NC Input 5 Motor drive a (+) Output
6 NC Input Over load caution enable 6 LS_EPC Output
6 Input
switch
7 Overload pressure sensor Input 7 NC Output
7 Machine select 4 Input
8 Pump pressure sensor Input 8 NC Output
8 NC Output
9 NC Input 9 Bucket curl switch Input
9 NC Output
10 Signal GND — 10 Boom ralse switch Input
10 NC Input
11 Knob switch Input 11 Control power supply Input
11 NC Output
12 NC Input 12 Solenoid power supply Input
12 CAN shield —
13 Feed back signal Input 13 SOL_COM —
14 NC Input 14 Key signal Input
14 232C_TxD Output
15 NC Input 15 Motor drive a (-) Output
15 NC Input
16 SENS_PWR Output 16 PC-EPC Output
16 NC Input
17 Start switch (C) Input 17 NC Output
18 NC Input 18 Heater relay solenoid Output
18 NC Output
19 Fuel dial Input 19 Bucket dump switch Input
19 NC Output
20 NC Input 20 Boom lower switch Input
20 NC Input
21 Analog GND — 21 GND —
Input/
21 S_NET Output
22 POT_PWR Output 22 Solenoid power supply Input
22 CANO_L Input/
23 Start switch (Acc) Input Output 23 SOL_COM —
24 NC Input Input/ 24 Key signal Input
23 CAN1_L Output
25 Motor drive b (+) Output
24 Flash memory write enable Input
signal 26 NC Output
25 NC Input 27 Travel speed solenoid Output
26 NC Input 28 2-stage rellef solenoid Output
27 Machine select 2 Input 29 Swing switch Input
28 NC Input 30 Arm curl switch Input
29 Puls GND — 31 GND —
30 NC Input 32 GND —
31 GND (S_NET GND) — 33 GND —
Input/ 34 NC
32 CAN0_H
Output
Input/ 35 Motor drive b (-) Output
33 CAN1_H
Output 36 NC Output
34 GND (232C GND) —
37 Swing brake solenoid Output
35 Service switch —
38 NC Output
36 NC Input
39 Travel switch Input
40 Arm dump switch Input
38 Swing lock switch Input
39 Puls GND —
40 Eng. speed Input
10-148 PC130-7
PUMP PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Plug
2. Sensor
3. Connector
FUNCTION Monitor panel

• Mounted on the inlet circuit of control valve, this a Refer to the section describing the "Monitor Sys-
sensor changes discharging pressure of pump tem".
into voltage, and send it to automatic travel
speed change controller. PC valve
LS valve
PC-EPC valve
a Refer to the section describing the "Hydraulic
Pump (Piston pump)".
LS-EPC valve
a Refer to the section describing the "Hydraulic
Pump (Piston pump)".
PPC lock solenoid valve

2nd speed select solenoid valve
Swing hold brake solenoid valve
2-stage relief solenoid valve
a Refer to the section describing the "Solenoid
Valve".
PC130-7 10-149
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION MONITOR SYSTEM
MONITOR SYSTEM
1. Monitor panel Description

2. Battery • The monitor system monitors conditions of the
3. Controller machine with sensors mounted on its each sec-
4. Sensors and switches tion, processes promptly the information
5. Wiper motor, window washer motor obtained, and displays it on panel to let operator
know the conditions of the machine.
a. Power supply
b. Switch signal
c. Caution signal
d. Sensor/switch signal
e. Sensor/switch signal
f. Output for driving
10-150 PC130-7
MONITOR PANEL
OUTLINE • The monitor's switch section consists of three flat

• The monitor panel has the functions to display a type sheet switches. Pressing any of these
monitor, gauge, service meter and electric sys- switches changes the conditions of the machine,
tem. It has also an alarm buzzer built in. which are shown by LEDs located above the
• A CPU (Central Processing Unit) mounted inside switches turned ON.
processes, displays and outputs information. • The monitor does not give correct display if any
of the monitor panel unit, controller, or the wiring
between monitor-panel and controller is in abnor-
mal condition.
AMP070-12P [CN-P01] AMP040-20P [CN-P02]
Pin No. Signal name I/O signal Pin No. Signal name I/O signal
1 Starting switch (battery) Input 1 Engine coolant temperature Input
2 Starting switch (battery) Input 2 Fuel level Input
3 Window washer motor output Output 3 Radiator coolant level Input
4 Starting switch (C-terminal) Input 4 NC Input
5 Wiper W-contact Input 5 Air cleaner clogging Input
6 GND — 6 NC Input
7 GND — 7 Engine oil pressure Input
8 VB + (24V) Input 8 Engine oil level Input
9 Wiper motor (+) Output 9 S-NET signal Input/Output
10 Wiper motor (–) Output 10 S-NET signal Input/Output
11 Alarm buzzer ON signal Input 11 Battery charge level Input
12 Wiper P-contact Input 12 Hydraulic oil level Input
13 GND (analog signal) —
14 NC —
15 Pull-up window limit switch Input
16 Alarm buzzer cancel Input
17 Swing lock Input
18 Preheating Input
19 Lamp switch Input
20 GND (S-NET) —
PC130-7 10-151
METER DISPLAY
No. Display Display item Display area Display method Display Remarks
category color
Time counting while engine is in operation (al-
1 Service meter 0 – 99999.9 h ternator is generating) (Always lit even if start-
ing switch is OFF)
Count time during engine operates.
[*1] Alphanumerics in 2 Displays 2 digit alphanumerics (user code or Blue LCD
2 Display digits service code) if electric control system is in ab-
normal condition.
3a Gauge See picture above All the segments of the corresponding level and
Coolant lower are turned ON.
Specified tempera- (Level 8 (102°C or higher):Monitor lamp blinks.
3b Caution temperature ture (102°C) or Red LED
Level 9: Monitor lamp blinks and alarm buzzer
higher sounds.)
4a Gauge See picture above All the segments of the corresponding level and Blue LCD
Fuel level Specified level lower are turned on. (Level 1 (42 l or less):
4b Caution (42 l) or lower Monitor lamp blinks.) Red LED
Turned on for about 30 seconds after starting
5 Preheating During preheating switch was turned to "HEAT". It blinks (for about
10 seconds) after preheating was over to notify
it to operator, and then it is turned off.
• Turned on when the swing lock function is ac-
6 Swing lock When swing-lock is tive.
Pilot in operation • Blinks when swing holding brake release Green
switch was turn on.
• Turned ON when specified oil maintenance
periods (125h, 250, and 500h) elapsed. (Also,
[*2] Oil When specified oil- elapsed time and telephone No. of your deal-
7 maintenance maintenance peri- er are shown on service meter.)
ods elapsed • Not turned on if no oil maintenance period
has been specified. Lamp
8 Engine oil level Max. low level
Charge in fault
9 Battery charge (charge voltage <
level battery voltage)
Turned ON when starting switch was turned on;
Air cleaner turned off after engine started running.
10 clogging At clogging
Caution In normal condition : turned OFF Red
Lower than the In abnormal condition : turned ON
Engine oil (As for engine oil pressure, charge and over
11 pressure specified pressure
49 kPa {0.5 kg/cm2} load alarm buzzer sounds if the pressure be-
came abnormal when engine was running.)
Min. specified pres-
12 Over load sure 16.7 MPa {170
kg/cm2}
[*1] As for display and operation, refer to the "Self Diagnosis Function" section.
[*2] As for display and operation, refer to the "Troubleshooting" chapter.
10-152 PC130-7
MONITOR SWITCH
No. Name Function Operation

Used to select a travel speed from two of them.
"Lo" is lit: Travel in low speed.
1 Travel speed selector switch "Hi" is lit: Travel in high speed. Lo Hi
<The speed is locked at Lo when arm crane is used.>
Activates the function to reduce fuel consumption.
Turned ON: The function is active.
2 Auto-deceleration switch Turned OFF: The function is not active. ON OFF
<The function is made inactive when arm crane is (Lit)
used.>
Activates wiper of front glass.
3 Wiper switch "ON" is lit: Wiper works continuously. OFF INT ON
"INT" is lit: Wiper works intermittently. (Not lit) (Intermittent) (Continuous)
Not lit: Wiper is not working.
[When wiper is not working]
ON : Washer fluid is sprayed
and wiper works continu-
ously.
OFF : Wiper works twice and
stops after the switch was
released.
[When wiper is working intermit-
4 Windshield washer switch Sprays washer fluid onto front glass. tently]
ON : Washer fluid is sprayed
and wiper works continu-
ously.
OFF : Wiper works twice and re-
turns to intermittent opera-
tion after the switch was
released.
Sets the movement and force of the working
equipment.
* Operation mode selector "A" is lit: A mode (for heavy duty work)
A E L B
5 switch "E" is lit: E mode (for fuel economical operation)
"L" is lit: L mode (for fine control work)
"B" is lit: B mode (for breaker work)
* You can change the default settings which become active when starting switch is turned on. Refer to the
"TROUBLESHOOTING" chapter.
a Signs written in bold fonts in the "Operation" column above represent the positions switches default to when
starting switched is turned on.
PC130-7 10-153
(3)
SENSORS
• Signal from a sensor is directly entered to the
panel.
• There are two types of sensors, contact type and
resistance type.
• One end of a contact type sensor is connected to
the ground on the machine body.
Display class Sensor type Sensing approach When normal When failed
Caution Engine oil pressure Contact OFF (open) ON (closed)
Coolant temperature Resistance — —
Gauge Fuel level Resistance — —
Hydraulic oil temperature Resistance — —
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Plug 4. Diaphragm
2. Contact ring 5. Spring
3. Contact 6. Terminal
COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Connector
2. Plug
3. Thermistor
10-154 PC130-7
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
1. Float
2. Connector
3. Cover
4. Variable resisto
PC130-7 10-155
20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING
STANDARD VALUE TABLE FOR ENGINE.......... 20- 2

STANDARD VALUE TABLE FOR CHASSIS........ 20- 3
TESTING AND ADJUSTING................................ 20-101
TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................... 20-201
Note the following when making judgements using the standard value tables for testing, adjusting, or trou-
bleshooting.
1. The standard value for a new machine given in the table is the value used when shipping the machine from
the factory and is given for reference. It is used as a guideline for judging the progress of wear after the
machine has been operated, and as a reference value when carrying out repairs.
2. The service limit value given in the tables is the estimated value for the shipped machine based on the
results of various tests. It is used for reference together with the state of repair and the history of operation
to judge if there is a failure.
3. These standard values are not the standards used in dealing with claims.
When carrying out testing, adjusting, or troubleshooting, park the machine on level ground, inset the safety
pins, and use blocks to prevent the machine from moving.
When carrying out work together with other workers, always use signals and do not let unauthorized people
near the machine.
When checking the water level, always wait for the water to cool down. If the radiator cap is removed when
the water is still hot, the water will spurt out and cause burns.
Be careful not to get caught in the fan, fan belt or other rotating parts.
PC130-7 20-1
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLE FOR ENGINE
STANDARD VALUE TABLE FOR ENGINE
Model name PC130-7
Engine SAA4D95LE-3
Item Measurement condition Unit Standard value Permissible value
High idling 2,350 ± 100 2,350 ± 100
Engine speed Low idling rpm 1,100 ± 50 1,100 ± 50
Rated speed 2,200 —
During sharp acceleration Bosch Max. 4.5 Max. 6.5

Exhaust gas color
During high idling index Max. 1.0 Max. 2.0
Valve clearance Intake valve 0.35 —

mm
(Cooled) Exhaust valve 0.50 —
MPa Min. 2.9 2.0
Oil temperature: 40 – 60 °C
Compression pressure {kg/cm2} {Min. 30} {20}
(Engine speed)
(rpm) (320 – 360) (320 – 360)
Coolant temperature:
kPa Max. 0.49 0.98
Blow-by pressure Within operating range
{mmH2O} {Max. 50} {100}
At rated output
Coolant temperature:
Within operating range
0.34 – 0.59 0.25
At high idling (SAE30)
{3.5 – 6.0} {2.5}
MPa 0.29 – 0.54 0.21
Oil pressure At high idling (SAE10W)
{kg/cm2} {3.0 – 5.5} {2.1}
Min. 0.1 0.07
At low idling (SAE30)
{Min. 1.0} {0.7}
Min. 0.08 0.07
At high idling (SAE10W)
{Min. 0.8} {0.7}
Oil temperature Through speed range (In oil pan) °C 90 – 110 120
Fuel injection timing Before top dead center (BTDC) ° 6 ± 0.75 6 ± 0.75
Deflection under finger pressure of

Fan belt tension mm 6 – 10 6 – 10
58.8 N {6 kg}
Air conditioner compres- Deflection under finger pressure of
mm 6 – 10 6 – 10
sor belt tension 58.8 N {6 kg}
20-2 PC130-7
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING STANDARD VALUE TABLE FOR CHASSIS
STANDARD VALUE TABLE FOR CHASSIS
Model name PC130-7
Cate-
gory
• Engine coolant temperature:
• Hydraulic oil temperature: 45 – 55 °C
Pump relief rpm 2,120 ± 100 2,120 ± 100
• Engine speed: High idling
• Working mode: A
Engine speed
• Arm OUT relief

• Engine coolant temperature:
Pump relief + One-
touch power maximiz- rpm 2,180 ± 100 2,180 ± 100
ing
• Arm OUT relief + One-touch power
maximizing switch ON
During auto-decelera-
• Auto-decelerator switch: ON rpm 1,400 ± 100 1,400 ± 100
tion
• All control levers in neutral
Boom control valve • Engine: Stopped 8.0 ± 0.5 8.0 ± 0.5

Control valve spool stroke
IN 9.5 ± 0.5 9.5 ± 0.5

Arm control valve
OUT 8.0 ± 0.5 8.0 ± 0.5
mm
Bucket control valve 8.0 ± 0.5 8.0 ± 0.5
Swing control valve 8.0 ± 0.5 8.0 ± 0.5
Travel control valve 8.0 ± 0.5 8.0 ± 0.5
Boom control lever • Engine: Stopped 85 ± 10 85 ± 10

• Center of lever grip
• Read max. value to stroke end
Control lever stroke
Arm control lever 85 ± 10 85 ± 10

(Exclude play in neutral position).
Bucket control lever 85 ± 10 85 ± 10
mm
Swing control lever 85 ± 10 85 ± 10
Travel control lever 112 ± 15 112 ± 15
Play of control lever 10 ± 15 10 ± 15
• Hydraulic oil temperature: 15.7 ± 3.9 Max. 24.5

Boom control lever
Operating effort of control lever
Within operating range {1.6 ± 0.4} {Max. 2.5}

• Engine speed: High idling 15.7 ± 3.9 Max. 24.5
Arm control lever • Center of lever grip {1.6 ± 0.4} {Max. 2.5}
• Tip of pedal 12.7 ± 2.9 Max. 21.6
Bucket control lever • Read max. value to stroke end
N {1.3 ± 0.3} {Max. 2.2}
{kg} 12.7 ± 2.9 Max. 21.6
Swing control lever
{1.3 ± 0.3} {Max. 2.2}
24.5 ± 5.9 Max. 39.2
Travel control lever
{2.5 ± 0.6} {Max. 4.0}
80.4 ± 20.1 Max. 107.9
Travel control pedal
{8.2 ± 2.0} {Max. 11}
PC130-7 20-3
(1)
Model name PC130-7
Cate-
gory
MPa 2.9 ± 0.5 2.9 ± 0.5
Unload pressure • Working mode: A
{kg/cm2} {30 ± 5} {30 ± 5}
• Pump outlet pressure when all levers
are in neutral
• Hydraulic oil tempera- At normal 31.9 + 2.0
0 33.3 – 36.8
ture: 45 – 55 °C relief {325 + 20
0 } {340 – 375}
Boom relief pressure • Engine speed: At power 34.8 ± 1.0 36.3 – 39.2
High idling max. {355 ± 10} {370 – 400}
• Working mode: A
At normal 31.9 + 2.0
0 33.3 – 36.8
• Pump outlet pressure
relief {325 + 20
0 } {340 – 375}
Arm relief pressure when measured circuit is
relieved At power 34.8 ± 1.0 36.3 – 39.2
max. MPa {355 ± 10} {370 – 400}
At normal {kg/cm2} 31.9 + 2.0
0 33.3 – 36.8
relief {325 + 20
0 } {340 – 375}
Oil pressure
Bucket relief pressure

At power 34.8 ± 1.0 36.3 – 39.2
max. {355 ± 10} {370 – 400}
28.9 ± 1.5 28.9 – 32.9
Swing relief pressure
{295 ± 15} {295– 335}
34.8 ± 1.0 36.3 – 39.2
Travel relief pressure
{355 ± 10} {370 – 400}
Control circuit basic MPa 3.23 ± 0.2 2.84 – 3.43
• Outlet pressure of self-reducing pres-
pressure {kg/cm2} {33 ± 2} {29 – 35}
sure valve when all levers are in neu-
tral
• Hydraulic oil temperature: When all
45 – 55 °C levers are 2.7 +– 1.0
0.7 2.7 +– 1.0
0.7
• Engine speed: High idling in neutral {28 +– 107 } {28 +– 107 }

LS differential pres- MPa
• Working mode: A
sure When {kg/cm2}
• Pump pressure - LS pres- 2.2 ± 0.1 2.2 ± 0.1
travel sys-
sure tem runs {22.5 ± 1} {22.5 ± 1}
idle at Hi
20-4 PC130-7
(1)
Model name PC130-7
Cate-
gory
deg 75 ± 10 Max. 90
Overrun of swing
• Hydraulic oil temperature: 45 – 55 °C (mm) {730 ± 100} (Max. 870)
• Working mode: A
• Quantity of overrun of swing circle
when it stops after 1 turn
• ( ): Qty of overrun of periphery of
swing circle
90° 2.9 ± 0.3 Max. 3.5
Time taken to start

• Hydraulic oil temperature: sec
swinging
45 – 55 °C
• Engine speed: High idling 180° 4.0 ± 0.4 Max. 8.5
• Working mode: A
• Time taken to swing 90° and
180° after starting
Swing
Time taken to swing sec 28.6 ± 4.8 28.6 ± 5.8

• Working mode: A
• Time taken to swing 5 turns after
swinging 1 turn
Hydraulic drift of swing mm 0 0

• Engine: Stopped
• Set upper structure at 90° to machine
body on slope of 15°.
• Make match marks on inner race and
outer race of swing circle.
• Measure deviation of match marks in
15 minutes.
PC130-7 20-5
(1)
Model name PC130-7
Cate-
gory
Swing
Leakage from swing

• Swing lock switch: LOCK l/min Max. 3 Max. 6
motor • Measure leakage for 1 minutes while
swing circuit is relieved.
Lo 46.1 ± 9.2 46.1 ± 9.2
Travel speed (Idle run) sec
• Hydraulic oil temperature:

45 – 55 °C
• Engine speed: High idling Hi 21.9 ± 2.2 23.1 ± 3.0
• Working mode: A
• Measure time taken to rotate
track shoe 5 turns after 1 turn.
Lo 27.6 ± 5.1 27.6 ± 7.1
Travel speed
(Actual travel)
45 – 55 °C
• Working mode: A Hi 13.2 ± 1.2 13.2 ± 1.7
• Hard and level place
Travel
• Measure time taken to travel 20

m after running up 10 m.

• Working mode: A
Travel deviation • Travel speed: Lo mm Max. 200 Max. 220
• Measure travel deviation in travel of
20 m after running up 10 m.
20-6 PC130-7
(1)
Model name PC130-7
Cate-
gory
Hydraulic drift of travel mm 0 0

Travel

• Engine: Stopped
• Stop machine on slope of 12 degrees
with sprocket on upper side.
• Measure hydraulic drift of travel in 5
minutes.
Leakage from travel
• Lock sprocket. l/min Max. 5 Max. 10
motor
• Measure leakage for 1 minutes while
travel circuit is relieved.
Whole work
equipment Max. 460 Max. 700
(Hydraulic drift of tooth tip)
Hydraulic drift of work equipment
Boom cylinder
Max. 10 Max. 12
(Retraction of cylinder)
• Level and flat place mm
• Bucket: Full of dirt and sand or filled
Arm cylinder with rated load (1,080 kg) Max. 80 Max. 90
(Extension of cylinder) • Level boom top, retract arm cylinder
fully, and extract bucket cylinder fully.
Work equipment
• Engine: Stopped
• Work equipment control lever: Neutral
Bucket cylinder • Start measuring hydraulic drift just Max. 22 Max. 40
(Retraction of cylinder) after setting machine and measure
every 5 minutes for 15 minutes.
Work equipment speed
RAISE 3.7 ± 0.4 Max. 4.3
Boom speed • Hydraulic oil temperature: sec

45 – 55 °C
• Working mode: A
• Measure time taken to move LOWER 2.6 ± 0.5 Max. 3.2
bucket between RAISE stroke
end and ground touch point of
bucket.
PC130-7 20-7
(1)
Model name PC130-7
Cate-
gory
CURL 3.2 ± 0.4 Max. 4.4
Arm speed sec

45 – 55 °C
• Working mode: A
Work equipment speed
• Measure time taken to move DUMP 3.1 ± 0.3 Max. 3.7

arm between OUT stroke end
and IN stroke end (between
starting points of cushion).
CURL 2.9 ± 0.3 Max. 3.7

Work equipment
Bucket speed sec

45 – 55 °C
• Working mode: A DUMP 2.3 ± 0.2 Max. 2.9
• Measure time taken to move
bucket between DUMP stroke
end and CURL stroke end
Time lag
Boom time lag sec Max. 3.0 Max. 4.0

• Engine speed: Low idling
• Working mode: A
• Lower boom from RAISE stroke end
and measure time taken to start rais-
ing front of machine after bucket
touches ground.
20-8 PC130-7
(1)
Model name PC130-7
Cate-
gory
Arm time lag sec Max. 2.0 Max. 3.0

• Working mode: A
• Move IN arm from OUT stroke end
and measure time taken to start mov-
ing arm again after it is stopped.
• For measuring posture, see WORK
Time lag
EQUIPMENT 6.
Work equipment
Bucket time lag sec Max. 2.0 Max. 3.0

• Working mode: A
• Curl bucket from DUMP stroke end
and measure time taken to start mov-
ing bucket again after it is stopped.
• For measuring posture, see WORK
EQUIPMENT 7.
Oil leakage
Cylinder • Engine speed: High idling Max. 3.5 Max. 15

• Relieve cylinder to be measured or cc/min
Center swivel joint travel circuit and measure leakage in Max. 10 Max. 50
1 minute.
Compound operation performance
• Working mode: A
• Travel speed: Lo
• Measure travel deviation in travel of
20 m after running up 10 m.
Travel deviation in
compound operation
mm Max. 500 Max. 500
of work equipment and
travel
PC130-7 20-9
(1)
Model name PC130-7
Cate-
gory
• Engine: High idling
PC flow control
• Working mode: A
characteristics
Time taken to swing • Bucket: Filled with rated load

90° in compound oper- • Hard and level place 4.0
sec
ation of raising boom • Set arm vertically and lower back of (Reference value)
and starting swinging bucket to ground.
• Raise boom and start swinging simul-
taneously from above posture and
measure time taken to pass 90° point.
performance
Pump
Hydraulic pump
• See graph. l/min See graph.
capacity
20-10 PC130-7
(1)
Model name PC130-7
Cate-
gory
Hydraulic pump performance
Pump performance
• PC-EPC current: 400 mA

• Pump speed: 2,000 rpm
Test pump discharge Lower limit of
Check point pressure Standard discharge discharge
(MPa{kg/cm2}) (l/min) (l/min)
Q Q
Any point P
(See graph) (See graph)
a Avoid measuring near a broken point of the graph, since the error becomes large at that point.
a When measuring without removing the pump from the machine, if the engine speed cannot be set to the speci-
fied speed with the fuel control dial, calculate the pump discharge pressure at the specified speed from the
engine speed and pump discharge at the time of measurement.
PC130-7 20-11
(1)
TOOLS FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................................... 20-102

TESTING AND ADJUSTING ENGINE SPEED .......................................................................................... 20-104
MEASURING EXHAUST GAS COLOR ..................................................................................................... 20-105
ADJUSTING VALVE CLEARANCE ........................................................................................................... 20-107
MEASURING COMPRESSION PRESSURE ............................................................................................. 20-109
MEASURING BLOW-BY PRESSURE ....................................................................................................... 20-110
MEASURING ENGINE OIL PRESSURE ................................................................................................... 20-111
TESTING AND ADJUSTING FOR FUEL INJECTION TIMING ................................................................ 20-112
ADJUSTING ENGINE SPEED SENSOR .................................................................................................. 20-116
TESTING AND ADJUSTING FAN BELT TENSION .................................................................................. 20-117
TESTING AND ADJUSTING AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR BELT TENSION .............................. 20-118
MEASURING CLEARANCE OF SWING CIRCLE BEARING .................................................................... 20-119
TESTING AND ADJUSTING TRACK SHOE TENSION ............................................................................ 20-120
TESTING AND ADJUSTING OIL PRESSURE IN WORK EQUIPMENT, SWING, AND TRAVEL CIRCUITS....... 20-122
MEASURING CONTROL CIRCUIT BASIC PRESSURE ........................................................................... 20-125
TESTING AND ADJUSTING OIL PRESSURE IN PUMP PC CONTROL CIRCUIT .................................. 20-126
TESTING AND ADJUSTING OIL PRESSURE IN PUMP LS CONTROL CIRCUIT .................................. 20-129
MEASURING SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT PRESSURE ......................................................................... 20-133
MEASURING PPC VALVE OUTPUT PRESSURE .................................................................................... 20-135
ADJUSTING PLAY OF WORK EQUIPMENT AND SWING PPC VALVES ............................................... 20-136
TESTING PARTS WHICH CAUSE HYDRAULIC DRIFT OF WORK EQUIPMENT .................................. 20-137
MEASURING OIL LEAKAGE ..................................................................................................................... 20-139
RELEASING RESIDUAL PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT ............................................................. 20-142
BLEEDING AIR FROM EACH PART ......................................................................................................... 20-143
TESTING PROCEDURE FOR DIODE ...................................................................................................... 20-146
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS OF MONITOR PANEL ......................................................................................... 20-147
PREPARATION WORK FOR TROUBLESHOOTING FOR ELECTRIC SYSTEM .................................... 20-166
PM-CLINIC SERVICE ................................................................................................................................. 20-167
PC130-7 20-101
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING TOOLS FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND TROUBLESHOOTING
TOOLS FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Symbol
Q'ty
Testing and adjusting item Part No. Part name Remarks
Handy smoke
1 799-203-9000 checker 1 Pollution level: 0 – 70% (With standard
Measuring exhaust gas A color)
color Commercially (Pollution level x 1/10 C Bosch index)
2 available Smoke meter 1
B Commercially (Air intake side: 0.35 mm, Exhaust side:

Adjusting valve clearance available Feeler gauge 1 0.50 mm)
795-502-1205 Compression gauge 1 0 – 6.9MPa {0 – 70kg/cm2}
Measuring compression C
pressure 795-502-1370 Adapter 1
For 95E-3 engine
6204-11-3880 Gasket 1
Measuring blow-by pres- D

sure 799-201-1504 Blow-by checker 1 —
Pressure gauge: 2.5,5.9,39.2,58.8MPa

799-101-5002 Hydraulic tester 1 {25,60,400,600kg/cm2}
1
Digital hydraulic
790-261-1203 tester 1 Pressure gauge: 58.8MPa {600kg/cm2}
Measuring engine oil pres- E 2 799-401-2320 Hydraulic tester 1 Pressure gauge: 0.98MPa {10kg/cm2}
sure
3 799-401-3500 Adapter 1 Size: 06
799-101-5220 Nipple 1
4 Size: 10 x 1.25mm
07002-11023 O-ring 1
1 795-102-2103 Spring pusher 1
Measuring fuel injection F For delivery valve method
timing 2 Commercially
available Dial gauge 1
Commercially
Measuring clearance of G available Dial gauge 1 —
swing circle bearing
799-101-5002 Hydraulic tester 1

1 * Same as E1
Testing and adjusting oil Digital hydraulic
pressure in work equip- 790-261-1203 tester 1
H
ment, swing, and travel cir-
cuits 799-101-5220 Nipple 1
2 * Same as E4
07002-11023 O-ring 1

1 * Same as E1
Digital hydraulic
Measuring control circuit 790-261-1203 tester 1
basic pressure J
799-101-5230 Nipple 1
2 Size: 14 x 1.5mm
07002-11423 O-ring 1

1
Testing and adjusting oil 790-261-1203 Digital hydraulic 1
pressure in pump PC con- K tester * Same as H (Only quantity is different)
trol circuit
799-101-5230 Nipple 2
2
07002-11423 O-ring 2
20-102 PC130-7
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING TOOLS FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Symbol
Q'ty
Testing and adjusting item Part No. Part name Remarks

1
Digital hydraulic
790-261-1203 tester 1
Testing and adjusting oil * Same as H (Only quantity is different)
pressure in pump LS con- L 799-101-5230 Nipple 2
trol circuit 2
07002-11423 O-ring 2
3 799-401-2701 Differential pressure

gauge 1 —

1 * Same as E1
Measuring solenoid valve M Digital hydraulic
output pressure 790-261-1203 tester 1
2 799-401-3100 Adapter 1 Size: 03

1 * Same as E1
Measuring PPC valve out- N Digital hydraulic
put pressure 790-261-1203 tester 1
2 799-401-3100 Adapter 1 * Same as M2
P Commercially
Measuring oil leakage available Measuring cylinder 1
Measuring water tempera- —

ture and oil temperature 799-101-1502 Digital thermometer 1 -99.9 – 1,299°C
79A-264-0021 Push-pull scale 1 0 – 294N {0 – 30kg}

Measuring operating effort —
and pressing force 79A-264-0091 Push-pull scale 1 0 – 490N {0 – 50kg}
Measuring stroke and — Commercially

hydraulic drift available Scale 1 —
Measuring work equipment — Commercially

speed available Stopwatch 1 —
Measuring voltage and — Commercially

resistance available Circuit tester 1 —
a For the model names and part Nos. of the T-adapters and boxes used for troubleshooting for the monitor
panel, controllers, sensors, actuators, and wiring harnesses, see TROUBLESHOOTING, Layout of connec-
tors and electric circuit diagram of each system.
PC130-7 20-103
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING TESTING AND ADJUSTING ENGINE SPEED
TESTING AND ADJUSTING 4. Measuring pump relief and one-touch power

maximizing speed
ENGINE SPEED 1) Set the fuel control dial in the high idling
(MAX) position.
MEASURING 2) Relieve the arm circuit by moving the arm IN,
1. Preparation work keeping pressing the one-touch power maxi-
1) Turn the starting switch ON and set the mon- mizing switch, and measure the engine
itor panel in the "Monitoring function [02]" to speed.
prepare for measurement of the engine a The one-touch power maximizing func-
speed. tion is reset automatically in about 8.5
a For the operating method, see "Special seconds even if the switch is kept held.
functions of monitor panel". Accordingly, measure the engine speed
• Monitoring code: 010 (Engine speed) in that period.
a The engine speed is displayed in rpm.
2) Warm up the engine to the following operat- 5. Measuring auto-deceleration speed
ing condition. 1) Start the engine and set the fuel control dial
• Engine coolant temperature: Within oper- in the high idling position (MAX).
ating range 2) Set the work equipment control, swing con-
• Hydraulic oil temperature: 45 – 55°C trol, and travel levers in neutral and measure
a Measure the engine speed with the work- the engine speed.
ing mode switch in the A-mode position. a The engine speed lowers to a certain
level about 5 seconds after all the levers
are set in neutral. This level is the auto-
deceleration speed.
ADJUSTING
Adjusting governor spring
a If the high idling speed is out of the standard
range or the engine speed is unstable (the
engine hunts), adjust the governor spring with
"Governor adjustment function [03]" of the moni-
tor panel.
a For the adjustment procedure, see SPECIAL
FUNCTIONS OF MONITOR PANEL.
1. Measuring low idling speed

1) Set the fuel control dial in the low idling (MIN)
position.
2) Set the work equipment control, swing con-
trol, and travel levers in neutral and measure
the engine speed.
2. Measuring high idling speed

1) Turn the auto-decelerator switch OFF.
2) Set the fuel control dial in the high idling
(MAX) position.
3) Set the work equipment control, swing con-
trol, and travel levers in neutral and measure
the engine speed.
3. Measuring pump relief speed

1) Set the fuel control dial in the high idling
(MAX) position.
2) Relieve the arm circuit by moving the arm IN
and measure the engine speed.
20-104 PC130-7
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING MEASURING EXHAUST GAS COLOR
MEASURING EXHAUST GAS 2. Measuring with smoke meter A2

1) Insert probe [1] of smoke meter A2 in the
COLOR outlet of exhaust pipe (1) and fix it to the
exhaust pipe with a clip.
a Measuring instruments for exhaust gas color
Symbol Part No. Part name
1 799-201-9000 Handy Smoke Checker
A Commercially
2 Smoke Meter
available
k When installing and removing the measuring

instruments, take care not to touch a hot part.
a If an air source and an electric power source are
not available in the field, use handy smoke
checker A1. When recording official data, use
smoke meter A2.
1. Measuring with handy smoke checker A1

1) Stick a sheet of filter paper to smoke checker 2) Connect the probe hose, receptacle of the
A1. accelerator switch, and air hose to smoke
2) Insert the exhaust gas intake pipe in exhaust meter A2.
pipe (1). a Limit the supplied air pressure to 1.5
3) Run the engine. MPa {15 kg/cm2}.
4) Accelerate the engine suddenly or run it at 3) Connect the power cable to a receptacle of
high idling and operate the handle of smoke AC 100 V.
checker A1 so that the filter paper will absorb a Before connecting the cable, check that
the exhaust gas. the power switch of the smoke meter is
turned OFF.
4) Loosen the cap nut of the suction pump and
fit the filter paper.
a Fit the filter paper securely so that the
exhaust gas will not leak.
5) Turn on the power switch of smoke meter
A2.
5) Remove the filter paper and compare it with

the attached scale.
6) After finishing measurement, remove the
measuring instrument and return the
removed parts.
6) Start the engine and heighten the engine

coolant temperature to the operating range.
PC130-7 20-105
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING MEASURING EXHAUST GAS COLOR
7) Accelerate the engine suddenly or run it at

high idling and press the accelerator pedal of
smoke meter A2 and collect the exhaust gas
into the filter paper.
8) Place the contaminated filter paper on the
clean filter paper (at least 10 sheets) in the
filter paper holder and read the indicated
value.
measuring instrument and return the
removed parts.
20-106 PC130-7
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING ADJUSTING VALVE CLEARANCE
ADJUSTING VALVE 4. While the No. 1 cylinder is at the compression

top dead center, adjust the valve clearances
CLEARANCE marked with q in the valve arrangement drawing
according to the following procedure.
a Adjusting instrument for valve clearance
Commercially
B available Feeler gauger
1. Open the engine hood and remove all cylinder

head covers (1).
1) Insert feeler gauge B in clearance (b)

between rocker arm (3) and valve stem (4)
and adjust the clearance with adjustment
screw (5).
a With the feeler gauge inserted, turn the
adjustment screw to a degree that you
can move the filler gauge lightly.
2) Secure adjustment screw (5) and tighten
2. Remove the engine undercover (on the radiator
3 Locknut: 39.2 – 49 Nm {4 – 5 kgm}

locknut (6).
side).
3. Rotate the crankshaft forward to bring the a After tightening the locknut, check the
stamped "1.4TOP" line (a) of the crank pulley to valve clearance again.
pointer (2) and set the No. 1 cylinder to the com- a After adjusting all of the valves marked
pression top dead center. with q, go to the next procedure.
a Crank the crankshaft with the crank pulley
mounting bolt.
a There are 2 stamped "1.4TOP" lines on the
crank pulley. Use the one at the diagonal
position of "2.3TOP".
a When the No. 1 cylinder is at the compres-
sion top dead center, the rocker arm of the
No. 1 cylinder can be moved by the valve
clearance with the hand. If the rocker arm
cannot be moved, the No. 1 cylinder is not at
the compression top dead center. In this
case, rotate the crankshaft one more turn.
5. Rotate the crankshaft forward to bring the

stamped "1.4TOP" line (a) of the crank pulley to
pointer (2) and set the No. 4 cylinder to the com-
pression top dead center.
PC130-7 20-107
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING ADJUSTING VALVE CLEARANCE
6. While the No. 4 cylinder is at the compression

top dead center, adjust the valve clearances
marked with Q in the valve arrangement draw-
ing.
a Adjust the valve clearance according to step
4 above.
7. After finishing adjustment, return the removed
3 Cylinder head cover mounting bolt:

parts.
7.84 – 9.8 Nm {0.8 – 1.0 kgm}
20-108 PC130-7
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING MEASURING COMPRESSION PRESSURE
MEASURING COMPRESSION
PRESSURE
a Measuring instruments for compression pressure
795-502-1205 Compression gauge
C 795-502-1370 Adapter
6204-11-3880 Gasket
a When measuring the compression pressure,

take care not to burn yourself on the exhaust
manifold, muffler, etc. or get caught in a rotating
part.
6. Remove governor spring (2).
1. Adjust the valve clearance.
a See Adjusting valve clearance. 7. Put governor lever (3) of the fuel injection pump
to the STOP side stopper and fix it.
2. Warm up the engine until the engine oil tempera-
ture is 40 – 60°C.
3. Prepare for measuring the engine speed.

a See Testing and adjusting engine speed.
4. Open the engine hood and remove nozzle holder

(1) of the cylinder to measure the compression
pressure.
8. Crank the engine with the starting motor and

measure the compression pressure.
a Read the compression gauge when its
pointer is stabilized.
a When measuring the compression pressure,
measure the engine speed, too, and check
that it is in the measurement condition range.
9. After finishing measurement, remove the mea-

5. Install adapter [1] of compression gauge C to the suring instruments and return the removed parts.
mounting part of the nozzle holder and connect a Check that the fulcrum of the clamping
gauge [2]. holder for the nozzle holder is seated on the
a Install the gasket to the end of the adapter. cylinder head, and then tighten the mounting
a Secure the adapter with the clamping holder
3 Mounting bolt: 39.2 – 49 Nm {4 – 5 kgm}
bolt.
3 Mounting bolt: 39.2 – 49 Nm {4 – 5 kgm}

and mounting bolt for the nozzle holder.
PC130-7 20-109
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING MEASURING BLOW-BY PRESSURE
MEASURING BLOW-BY 5. Run the engine at high idling and measure the
blow-by pressure.
PRESSURE • Working mode: A
• Work equipment, swing, and travel circuit:
a Measuring instruments for blow-by pressure Relieve the travel circuit.
D 799-201-1504 Blow-by checker
1. Remove the engine undercover (on the flywheel

side).
2. Install nozzle [1] of blow-by checker C to the end

of blow-by hose (1) and connect it to gauge [2].

suring instruments and return the removed parts.
3. Start the engine and lock the travel mechanism.
k Put pin [3] between the sprocket and track

frame to lock the travel mechanism
securely.
4. Start the engine and warm it up to the operating

range.
• Engine coolant temperature: Within operat-
ing range
• Hydraulic oil temperature: 45 – 55°C
20-110 PC130-7
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING MEASURING ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
MEASURING ENGINE OIL 5. Measure the oil pressure during low idling and
high idling.
PRESSURE
a Measuring instruments for engine oil pressure
799-101-5002 Hydraulic tester
1
790-261-1203 Digital hydraulic tester
2 799-401-2320 Hydraulic tester
E
3 799-401-3500 Adapter (Size: 06)
799-101-5220 Nipple (10 x 1.25 mm)
4
07002-11023 O-ring
1. Open the pump room cover and disconnect out-

let hose (1) of the engine oil filter. 6. After finishing measurement, remove the mea-
2. Install adapter E3 and connect the disconnected

hose again.
3. Install nipple E4 and connect it to hydraulic tester

E2.
4. Start the engine and heighten the engine coolant

temperature to the operating range.
PC130-7 20-111
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING TESTING AND ADJUSTING FOR FUEL INJECTION TIMING

FOR FUEL INJECTION TIMING
a Testing and adjusting instruments for fuel injec-
tion timing (for delivery valve method)
1 795-102-2103 Spring pusher
F Commercially
2 available Dial gauge
TESTING AND ADJUSTING BY MATCH MARK

METHOD
a After removing and installing the fuel injection
pump without repairing it or when only checking
4. Remove cover (3) of the fuel injection pump
the injection timing, test and adjust the injection
drive shaft.
timing according to the following procedure.
5. Insert pin [1] in the mounting bolt hole of the front
TESTING
cover (on the outside of the engine) to check the
fuel injection timing.
head covers (1).
a Use a pin 4.0 – 4.5 mm in diameter and
about 80 mm in length.
a If the pin enters smoothly to inside of the
drive gear of the fuel injection pump, the fuel
injection timing is normal. In this case, return
the removed parts.
a If the pin touches the drive gear of the fuel
pump, the fuel injection timing is abnormal.
In this case, adjust the fuel injection timing.
2. Remove the engine undercover (on the radiator

side).
3. Rotate the crankshaft forward to bring the

pointer (2) and set the No. 1 cylinder to the com-
pression top dead center.
mounting bolt.
ADJUSTING
a If the fuel injection timing is abnormal, adjust it
position of "2.3TOP".
1. Remove the fuel pump, holder, and drive gear
together.
a See DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY,
Removal, installation of fuel pump assembly.
20-112 PC130-7
(1)
2. Remove bolt (3) and fix drive gear (4) to holder ADJUSTING BY DELIVERY VALVE METHOD
(5) with fixing bolt [2]. a After repairing or replacing the fuel injection
a As fixing bolt [2], use a bolt 6 mm in thread pump or timing gear, adjust the injection timing
diameter and 35 mm in length. according to the following procedure.
a Pass the fixing bolt through the screw hole of
bolt (3) and tighten it into the screw hole of ADJUSTING
the drive gear, and the fuel injection pump is a Apply the delivery valve method to only adjust-
fixed in the fuel injection timing. ment of the injection timing.

head covers (1).
3. Install the fuel injection pump, holder, and drive

gear together.
a See DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY,
Removal, installation of fuel pump assembly. 2. Remove the engine undercover (on the radiator
a After installing the fuel injection pump tempo- side).
rarily, check the fuel injection timing accord-
ing to the above described procedure. 3. Rotate the crankshaft forward to bring the
4. After finishing adjustment, remove the measur- pointer (2) and set the No. 1 cylinder to the com-
ing tools and return the removed parts. pression top dead center.
k Be sure to remove pin [1] and fixing bolt [2].

mounting bolt.

7.84 – 9.8 Nm {0.8 – 1.0 kgm} position of "2.3TOP".
PC130-7 20-113
(1)
4. Remove snap ring (6) of the rocker arm shaft on 8. Install dial gauge F2 on the valve stem of No. 1
the No. 1 cylinder side, and then remove rocker air intake valve (11) and set it to the 0 point.
arm (7) of the No. 1 air intake valve. a Since the No. 1 cylinder is at the compres-
a Remove the valve stem cap, too. sion top dead center, set this point as the 0
point.
9. Rotate the crankshaft about 45° in reverse.
10. Rotate the crankshaft forward slowly so that dial

gauge F2 will indicate fuel injection timing dimen-
sion (a).
a When adjusting the crankshaft to fuel injec-
tion timing dimension (a), be sure to rotate it
forward so that the adjustment will not be
affected by the backlash of the drive gear. (If
the crankshaft passes the adjustment dimen-
sion, return it sufficiently, and then adjust it
again forward.)
5. Using spring pusher F1, remove valve cotter (8) a Fuel injection timing dimension (a) and fuel
of the No. 1 air intake valve. injection timing
Fuel injection timing
6. Loosen spring pusher F1 and remove seat (9) mm 0.42 ± 0.08
dimension (a)
and spring (10).
Fuel injection timing
° 6 ± 0.75
(Reference)
7. While No. 1 air intake valve (11) is in contact with

the top of piston (12), turn the valve stem with
the hand to press No. 1 air intake valve (11)
11. Disconnect all of connected fuel injection tubes
against the piston.
(12), if there are any.
a Since the piston stroke will be measured at
the valve stem top, check that the valve bot-
tom is in contact with the piston top securely.
20-114 PC130-7
(1)
12. Remove delivery valve holder (14) for the No. 1 16. Tighten 4 mounting nuts (19) of fuel injection
cylinder of fuel pump (13), delivery valve (15), pump (13) securely and alternately.
and spring (16), and then install delivery valve
holder (14) again.
17. After finishing adjustment, remove the adjusting

tools and return the removed parts.
13. Remove governor spring (17), and then put the a Replace the O-ring and copper gasket of the
governor lever (18) of the fuel injection pump to delivery valve with new ones.
k Tighten the delivery valve securely in 3
the stopper on the FULL side and fix it.
times. (If it is not tightened sufficiently, the
3 Delivery valve holder:

gasket may be broken.)
3 Fuel injection tube sleeve nut:

39.2 – 44.1 Nm {4 – 4.5 kgm}

19.6 – 24.5 Nm {2 – 2.5 kgm}
7.84 – 9.8 Nm {0.8 – 1.0 kgm}

a After finishing adjustment, if the stamped
lines of the fuel injection pump and holder
are not at the same position or there is not a
stamped line on the fuel injection pump,
stamp a new line to show that the fuel injec-
14. Remove the fixing bracket and lubrication tube of tion timing has been adjusted.
fuel injection pump (13), loosen 4 mounting nuts
(19), and lean the fuel injection pump outward
fully.
a Loosen the mounting nuts to a degree that
the fuel injection pump can be moved in and
out within the range of the oblong hole (Do
not loosen them so much that the fuel injec-
tion pump will have play).
15. Operating priming pump (20) of fuel injection

pump 13, move the injection pump gradually
toward the cylinder block and stop when the fuel
stops flowing out of No. 1 delivery valve holder
(14), and then tighten the mounting nuts tempo-
rarily.
a The position where fuel stops flowing out of
the No. 1 delivery valve holder is the position
to start fuel injection in the No. 1 cylinder
(fuel injection timing).
PC130-7 20-115
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING ADJUSTING ENGINE SPEED SENSOR
ADJUSTING ENGINE SPEED 4. After finishing adjustment, check that the monitor
panel displays the engine speed normally in the
SENSOR "Monitoring mode".
a For the operating method, see "Special func-
a If the engine speed sensor has been removed tions of monitor panel".
and installed or its signal contains an error, • Monitoring code: 010 (Engine speed)
adjust it according to the following procedure.
a Remove engine speed sensor (1) before adjust-
ing it and check that its tip is free from steel chips
(The engine speed sensor is installed to the right
side of the flywheel housing).
1. Screw in sensor (1) until its tip touches the tooth
2 Threads: Gasket sealant (LG-6)

tip of flywheel ring gear (2).
2. Return sensor (1) by the specified angle.

a Returning angle of sensor: 1 ± 1/6 turn
a After this adjustment, clearance (a) between
the sensor tip and gear tooth tip is 1.25 –
1.75 mm.
2 Nut: 49 – 68.6 Nm {5 – 7 kgm}

3. Fixing sensor (1), tighten nut (3).
20-116 PC130-7
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING TESTING AND ADJUSTING FAN BELT TENSION
TESTING AND ADJUSTING ADJUSTING

a If the deflection of the belt is abnormal, adjust it
FAN BELT TENSION according to the following procedure.
TESTING 1. Loosen alternator mounting bolts (1) and (2).

1. Open the engine hood and remove the belt cover
from above the alternator. 2. Adjust the belt tension by moving alternator (5)
with adjustment bolt (4).
2. Press the intermediate point of the belt between a Turn the adjusting belt to left, the belt tension
the fan pulley and alternator pulley with a finger tight.
and measure deflection (a) of the belt.
• Force to press belt: Approx. 58.8 N {6 kg} 3. Tighten locknut (3) and mounting bolts (2) and
• Deflection (a): 6 – 10 mm (1).
a Check breakage of the pulleys, wear of the
V-grooves, and contact of the belts and V-
grooves.
a If a belt is lengthened to the adjustment limit,
cut, or cracked, replace it with new one.
4. After finishing adjustment, return the covers.

a If a V-belt is replaced, adjust its tension again
after 1 operating hour.
PC130-7 20-117
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING AIR CONDITIONER
TESTING AND ADJUSTING COMPRESSOR BELT TENSION

a If the deflection of the belt is abnormal, adjust it
AIR CONDITIONER according to the following procedure.
COMPRESSOR BELT
TENSION 1. Loosen compressor bracket mounting bolts (1)
and (2).
TESTING
1. Open the engine hood and remove the belt cover 2. Adjust the belt tension by moving compressor (3)
from above the air conditioner compressor. and bracket (4) together.
a Use a bar, etc. to move the bracket (Do not
2. Press the intermediate point of the belt between push the compressor directly with a bar, etc.)
the fan pulley and alternator pulley with a finger
and measure deflection "a" of the belt. 3. Tighten mounting bolts (2) and (1).
• Force to press belt: Approx. 58.8 N {6 kg} a Check breakage of the pulleys, wear of the
• Deflection (a): 6 – 10 mm V-grooves, and contact of the belts and V-
grooves.
a If a belt is lengthened to the adjustment limit,
cut, or cracked, replace it with new one.
4. After finishing adjustment, return the covers.

a If a V-belt is replaced, adjust its tension again
after 1 operating hour.
20-118 PC130-7
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING MEASURING CLEARANCE OF SWING CIRCLE BEARING
MEASURING CLEARANCE OF
SWING CIRCLE BEARING
a Measuring instrument for clearance of swing cir-
cle bearing
Commercially
G available Dial gauge
a When measuring the clearance of the swing cir-

cle bearing on the actual machine, observe the
following procedure.
k While measuring, do not put your hands or foot

under the undercarriage. 4. Set the arm at almost a right angle to the ground
and lower the boom until the track shoe at the
1. Fix dial gauge G to outer race (1) or inner race front side of the machine is floated.
(2) of the swing circle and apply the probe to the a At this time, the front end of the upper struc-
end face of inner race (2) or outer race (1) on the ture rises and the rear end lowers.
opposite side.
a Set dial gauge G on the front or at rear side 5. Under this condition, read dial gauge G.
of the machine a Dial gauge G indicates the clearance of the
bearing.
2. Set the work equipment in the maximum reach

posture and set the bucket tip to the height of the 6. Return the machine to the posture of step 2 and
revolving frame bottom. check that dial gauge G indicates 0 again.
a At this time, the front end of the upper struc- a If dial gauge G does not indicate 0, repeat
ture lowers and the rear end rises. steps 3 – 5.
3. Set the dial gauge G to the 0 point. 7. After finishing measurement, remove the mea-
PC130-7 20-119
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING TESTING AND ADJUSTING TRACK SHOE TENSION

a If the track shoe tension is out of the standard
TRACK SHOE TENSION range, adjust it according to the following proce-
dure.
TESTING
1. Running the engine at low idling, move the 1. When tension is too high
machine forward by the length of track on ground 1) Loosen valve (1) gradually to discharge the
and stop slowly. grease.
2. Place straight bar [1] on the track shoe between k Since the valve may jump out because
the idler and the 1st carrier roller. of the high-pressure grease in it, do not
a As straight bar [1], use an L-shape steel, etc. loosen it more than 1 turn.
which will be deflected less. a If the grease is not discharged well, drive
the machine forward and in reverse
3. Measure maximum clearance (a) between slowly.
straight bar [1] and track shoe.
3 Valve: 58.8 – 88.2 Nm {6 – 9 kgm}
2) Tighten valve (1).
• Standard maximum clearance (a):
10 – 30 mm
3) After finishing adjustment, check again that
the track shoe tension is normal according to
the above described procedure.
2. When tension is low

1) Add grease through valve (2).
a If the track shoe is not tensed well, drive
the machine forward and in reverse
slowly.
the track shoe tension is normal according to
the above described procedure.
20-120 PC130-7
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING TESTING AND ADJUSTING TRACK SHOE TENSION
a You may supply grease until distance (b)

between the idler guide and track frame end
is 0 mm. If the tension is still low, the pin and
bushing are worn excessively. In this case,
turn over or replace the pin and bushing.
PC130-7 20-121
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING OIL PRESSURE IN WORK EQUIPMENT,
TESTING AND ADJUSTING SWING, AND TRAVEL CIRCUITS

OIL PRESSURE IN WORK
EQUIPMENT, SWING, AND
TRAVEL CIRCUITS
a Testing and adjusting instruments for oil pressure
in work equipment, swing, and travel circuits

1
H
799-101-5220 Nipple (10 x 1.25 mm)
2
07002-11023 O-ring
2) Install nipple H2 and connect it to oil pres-
a The oil pressure in work equipment, swing, and sure gauge [1] of hydraulic tester H1.
travel circuits (pump discharge pressure) can be a Use the oil pressure gauges of 58.8 MPa
checked with monitoring function [02] of the {600 kg/cm2}.
monitor panel.
• Monitoring code: 011, 012 (Pump discharge
pressure)
a The pump discharge pressure is displayed in 1
kg/cm2.
3) Run the engine and heighten the hydraulic

oil temperature to 45 – 55°C.
MEASURING
1. Preparation work
k Lower the work equipment to the ground

and stop the engine. Operate the control
levers several times to release the residual
pressure in the piping, and then loosen the
oil filler cap of the hydraulic tank slowly to
release the internal pressure of the hydrau-
lic tank.
1) Remove the top cover of the control valve,
and then remove pump pressure pickup plug 2. Measuring unload pressure
(1) from the top of the control valve. 1) Start the engine.
2) Run the engine at high idling and set all the
control levers in neutral and measure the oil
pressure.
a The pressure measured when the unload
valve is unloaded is indicated.
20-122 PC130-7
(1)
3. Measuring work equipment circuit relief pres- ADJUSTING

sure a The unload valve cannot be adjusted.
1) Start the engine and move the cylinder to be
measured to the stroke end. 1. Adjusting main relief pressure (High pres-
2) Run the engine at high idling and relieve the sure setting side)
cylinder and measure the oil pressure. a If the high relief pressure of the work equip-
a The pressure measured when the main relief ment circuit and travel circuit is abnormal,
valve is relieved is indicated. adjust the high pressure setting side of main
a If the one-touch power maximizing switch is relief valve (2) according to the following pro-
released, the main relief valve is relieved at cedure.
low pressure. If the former is pressed, the a The high relief pressure is the pressure
latter is relieved at high pressure. applied when the 2-stage relief solenoid
a If the swing lock switch is set in the LOCK valve is turned ON and the pilot pressure is
position, the 2-stage relief solenoid valve is applied to the selector port.
turned ON and the main relief valve is
relieved at high pressure. Accordingly, keep
the swing lock switch turned OFF.
4. Measuring swing circuit relief pressure

1) Start the engine and set the swing lock
switch in the LOCK position.
2) Run the engine at high idling and relieve the
swing circuit and measure the oil pressure.
a The pressure measured when the swing
motor safety valve is relieved is indicated.
a The swing motor relief pressure is lower than
the main relief pressure.
5. Measuring travel circuit relief pressure 1) Disconnect pilot hose (3).

1) Start the engine and lock the travel mecha- 2) Fixing holder (4), loosen locknut (5).
nism. 3) Turn holder (4) to adjust the pressure.
k Set pin [2] between the sprocket and

a If the holder is
• turned to the right, the pressure
track frame to lock the travel mecha- rises.
nism securely. • turned to the left, the pressure low-
ers.
a Quantity of adjustment per turn of holder:
Approx. 12.6 MPa {Approx. 128 kg/cm2}
3 Locknut: 39.2 – 49 Nm {4 – 5 kgm}

4) Fixing holder (4), tighten locknut (5).

travel circuit and measure the oil pressure.
a The pressure measured when the main relief
valve is relieved is indicated. The travel cir-
cuit is always relieved at high pressure.
5) Connect pilot hose (3).
PC130-7 20-123
(1)
6) After finishing adjustment, check again that the 3. Adjusting swing relief pressure
pressure is normal according to the above a If the relief pressure of the swing circuit is
described measurement procedure. abnormal, adjust swing motor safety valve
a If the high pressure setting side is adjusted, (8) according to the following procedure.
the low pressure setting side changes.
Accordingly, adjust the low pressure setting
side, too.
2. Adjusting main relief pressure (Low pressure

setting side)
a If the low relief pressure of the work equip-
ment circuit is abnormal or the high pressure
setting was adjusted, adjust the low pressure
setting side of main relief valve (2) according
to the following procedure.
a The low relief pressure is the pressure
applied when the 2-stage relief solenoid
valve is turned OFF and the pilot pressure is
not applied to the selector port. 1) Fixing adjustment screw (9), loosen locknut
1) Disconnect pilot hose (3). (10).
2) Fixing holder (6), loosen locknut (7). 2) Turn adjustment screw (9) to adjust the pres-
3) Turn holder (6) to adjust the pressure. sure.
a If the holder is a If the adjustment screw is
• turned to the right, the pressure • turned to the right, the pressure
rises. rises.
• turned to the left, the pressure low- • turned to the left, the pressure low-
ers. ers.
a Quantity of adjustment per turn of holder: a Quantity of adjustment per turn of adjust-
Approx. 12.6 MPa {Approx. 128 kg/cm2} ment screw: Approx. 14 MPa {Approx.
3 Locknut:
4) Fixing holder (6), tighten locknut (7). 143 kg/cm2}
3) Fixing adjustment screw (9), tighten locknut
53.9 – 63.7 Nm {5.5 – 6.5 kgm}
3 Locknut:
(10).
53.9 – 73.5 Nm {5.5 – 7.5 kgm}
5) Connect pilot hose (3).

the pressure is normal according to the
above described measurement procedure.
the pressure is normal according to the
above described measurement procedure.
20-124 PC130-7
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING MEASURING CONTROL CIRCUIT BASIC PRESSURE
MEASURING CONTROL
4. Run the engine at high idling and set all the con-
CIRCUIT BASIC PRESSURE trol levers in neutral and measure the oil pres-
sure.
a Measuring instruments for control circuit basic
pressure
1
J
799-101-5230 Nipple (10 x 1.25 mm)
2
07002-11423 O-ring
k Lower the work equipment to the ground and

stop the engine. Operate the control levers
several times to release the residual pressure
in the piping, and then loosen the oil filler cap of
the hydraulic tank slowly to release the internal
pressure of the hydraulic tank. 5. After finishing measurement, remove the mea-
1. Open the pump room cover and remove control
circuit basic pressure pickup plug (1) under the a Do not adjust the relief valve for the control cir-
hydraulic pump. cuit basic pressure is not adjustable.
2. Install nipple J2 and connect it to oil pressure

gauge [1] of hydraulic tester J1.
a Use the oil pressure gauges of 5.9 MPa {60
kg/cm2}.
3. Run the engine and heighten the hydraulic oil

temperature to 45 – 55°C.
PC130-7 20-125
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING OIL PRESSURE
TESTING AND ADJUSTING IN PUMP PC CONTROL CIRCUIT
TESTING AND ADJUSTING • (2): PC valve output pressure pickup plug (at
top of hydraulic pump)
OIL PRESSURE IN PUMP PC
CONTROL CIRCUIT
in pump PC control circuit

1
K
799-101-5220 Nipple (10 x 1.25 mm)
2
07002-11023 O-ring
MEASURING
Measuring PC valve output pressure (servo pis-
3. Install nipple K2 and connect it to oil pressure
ton inlet pressure)
gauge [1] of hydraulic tester K1.
a Before measuring the PC valve output pressure
a Use the oil pressure gauge of 58.8 MPa {600
(servo piston inlet pressure), check that the oil
pressure in the work equipment, swing, and kg/cm2}.
travel circuits and the basic pressure in the con- • The drawing shows the pump discharge
trol circuit are normal. pressure side.
a Measure the PC valve output pressure (servo
piston inlet pressure) and pump discharge pres-
sure simultaneously and compare them.
pressure of the hydraulic tank.
1. Remove the top cover of the control valve and

open the pump room cover.
2. Remove oil pressure pickup plugs (1) and (2).

• The drawing shows the PC valve output
• (1): Pump discharge pressure pickup plug (at
pressure side.
top of control valve)
4. Run the engine and heighten the hydraulic oil

temperature to 45 – 55°C.
20-126 PC130-7
(1)
ADJUSTING
Adjusting PC valve
a If either of the following phenomena occurs and
the PC valve seems to be defective, adjust PC
valve (3) according to the procedure shown
below.
• As the working load increases, the engine
speed lowers remarkably.
• The engine speed is normal but the work
equipment speed is low.
a The figure shows the hydraulic pump seen from
the front side of the machine.
5. While running the engine at high idling, measure

the pump discharge pressure and PC valve out-
put pressure (servo piston inlet pressure) simul-
taneously.
• Working mode: A
• Swing lock switch: LOCK (2-stage relief
valve is turned ON and relief pressure is set
high)
• Work equipment, swing, and travel circuits:
Relieve arm circuit by moving arm IN.
a Method of judgment:
If the pump discharge pressure and PC valve
output pressure (servo piston output pres-
1. Loosen hose fixing (4).
sure) are in the following ratio, they are nor-
mal. 2. Fixing sleeve (5), loosen locknut (6).
Measured oil pressure Ratio of oil pressure
3. Turn sleeve (5) to the right or left to adjust the
Pump discharge pressure 1
pump absorption torque.
PC valve output pressure a If the sleeve is
(Servo piston inlet Approx. 3/5 • turned to the right, the pump absorption
pressure)
torque increases.
• turned to the left, the pump absorption
a If the PC valve or the servo piston is abnor- torque decreases.
mal, the PC valve output pressure (servo pis- a Limit the turning angle of the sleeve to the
ton inlet pressure) is "the same as the pump following range.
discharge pressure" or "almost 0". • Right turning: Max. 1 turn (360°)
• Left turning: Max. 1/2 turn (180°)
6. After finishing measurement, remove the mea- a Change of servo piston stroke per turn of
suring instruments and return the removed parts. sleeve: 1.5 mm
3 Locknut: 88 – 113 Nm {9 – 11.5 kgm}

4. Fixing sleeve (5), tighten locknut (6).
PC130-7 20-127
(1)
5. Tighten hose fixing nut (4).
6. After finishing adjustment, check that the pres-

sure is normal according to the above described
procedure.
20-128 PC130-7
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING IN PUMP LS CONTROL CIRCUIT
TESTING AND ADJUSTING • (2): LS valve output pressure pickup

plug (at top of hydraulic pump)
OIL PRESSURE IN PUMP LS
CONTROL CIRCUIT
in pump LS control circuit

1
L 799-101-5220 Nipple (10 x 1.25 mm)
2
07002-11023 O-ring
3 799-400-2701 Differential pressure gauge
MEASURING 3) Install nipple L2 and connect it to oil pressure

1. Measuring LS valve output pressure (servo gauge [1] of hydraulic tester L1.
piston inlet pressure) a Use the oil pressure gauge of 58.8 MPa
a Before measuring the LS valve output pres- {600 kg/cm2}.
sure (servo piston inlet pressure), check that • The drawing shows the pump discharge
the oil pressure in the work equipment, pressure side.
swing, and travel circuits and the basic pres-
sure in the control circuit are normal.
a Measure the LS valve output pressure (servo
piston inlet pressure) and pump discharge
pressure simultaneously and compare them.
k Lower the work equipment to the ground
and stop the engine. Operate the control
levers several times to release the residual
pressure in the piping, and then loosen the
oil filler cap of the hydraulic tank slowly to
release the internal pressure of the hydrau-
lic tank.
1) Remove the top cover of the control valve
and open the pump room cover.
2) Remove oil pressure pickup plugs (1) and • The drawing shows the LS valve output
(2). pressure side.
• (1): Pump discharge pressure pickup
plug (at top of control valve)
PC130-7 20-129
(1)

oil temperature to 45 – 55°C, and then push
up the track shoe on either side with the work
equipment.

measuring instruments and return the
removed parts.
5) While running the engine at high idling, mea- 2. Measuring LS differential pressure
sure the pump discharge pressure and LS a Measure the pump discharge pressure and
valve output pressure (servo piston inlet LS pressure (actuator load pressure) simul-
pressure) simultaneously. taneously and calculate the difference
• Working mode: A between them.
• Travel speed switch: Hi 1) Remove the top cover of the control valve
• Work equipment, swing, and travel cir- and remove oil pressure pickup plugs (1) and
cuits: (3).
Set all levers in neutral and run track • (1): Pump discharge pressure pickup
shoe on one side idle. plug
k Checking the safety around the
• (3): LS pressure pickup plug
machine, run the track shoe pushed up
idle.
a Method of judgment:
If the pump discharge pressure and LS
valve output pressure (servo piston out-
put pressure) are in the following ratio,
they are normal.
Pump LS valve
discharge output Ratio of oil pres-
Travel lever pressure pressure
sure
MPa {kg/cm2}
Almost same
2.9±0.5 2.9±0.5
Neutral pressure
{30±5} {30±5}
(1:1)
Full (Idle 7.8±2.0 4.4±1.0 Almost 3/5
running) {80±20} {45±10} (1:0.6)
20-130 PC130-7
(1)
2) Install nipple L2 and connect it to the oil 4) While running the engine at high idling, mea-
pressure gauge of hydraulic tester L1. sure the pump discharge pressure and LS
a When using differential pressure gauge: valve output pressure (servo piston inlet
Connect the pump discharge pressure to pressure) simultaneously.
the high pressure side (back side) and • Working mode: A
connect the LS pressure to the low pres- • Travel speed switch: Hi
sure side (lower side). • Work equipment, swing, and travel cir-
Since the differential pressure gauge cuits:
needs a 12-V power source, connect it to Set all levers in neutral and run track
a battery. shoe on one side idle.
k Checking the safety around the
a When using oil pressure gauge:
Use the oil pressure gauge of 58.8 MPa
machine, run the track shoe pushed up
{600 kg/cm2}. idle.
Since the differential pressure is about a Calculation of LS differential pressure
2.9 MPa {30 kg/cm2} at maximum, mea- (when oil pressure gauge is used):
sure it by installing the same gauge to LS differential pressure = Pump dis-
the pickup plugs alternately. charge pressure - LS pressure
a If the LS differential pressure is as fol-
lows, it is normal.
Travel lever LS differential pressure

LS differential pressure
in neutral
Neutral
(See standard values
table)
Specified LS differential
pressure
Full (Idle running)
(See standard values
table)

oil temperature to 45 – 55°C, and then push
up the track shoe on either side with the work
equipment.

measuring instruments and return the
removed parts.
PC130-7 20-131
(1)
ADJUSTING 6. After finishing adjustment, check that the pres-

Adjusting LS valve sure is normal according to the above described
procedure.
a If the LS differential pressure is abnormal, adjust
LS valve (4) according to the procedure shown
below.
a The figure shows the hydraulic pump seen from
the front side of the machine.
1. Loosen hose sleeve nut (4).
2. Fixing plug (5), loosen locknut (6).
3. Turn plug (5) to adjust the differential pressure.

a If the plug is
• turned to the right, the differential pres-
sure rises.
• turned to the left, the differential pressure
lowers.
a Quantity of adjustment (LS differential pres-
sure) per turn of plug:
1,304 kPa {13.3 kg/cm2}
a Tighten the hose sleeve nut (4) temporarily
and turn the plug, while checking the LS dif-
ferential pressure.
3 Locknut: 98 – 122.5 Nm {10 – 12.5 kgm}

4. Fixing plug (5), tighten locknut (6).
5. Tighten hose sleeve nut (4).
20-132 PC130-7
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING MEASURING SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT PRESSURE
MEASURING SOLENOID a Use the oil pressure gauges of 5.9 MPa {60
kg/cm2}.
VALVE OUTPUT PRESSURE a The figure shows the measuring instruments
connected to the outlet hose of the 2-stage
a Measuring instruments for solenoid valve output
relief solenoid valve.
pressure
1
M 790-261-1203 Digital hydraulic tester
2 799-401-3100 Adapter (Size 02)
a Before measuring the solenoid valve output

pressure, check that the basic pressure in the
control circuit is normal.
the hydraulic tank slowly to release the internal 4. Run the engine and heighten the hydraulic oil
pressure of the hydraulic tank. temperature to 45 – 55°C.
1. Remove the undercover of the control valve and

disconnect outlet hoses (1) – (4) of the solenoid
valves to be measured.
No. Solenoid valve to be measured

1 2-stage relief solenoid valve
2 Swing holding brake solenoid valve
3 Travel speed solenoid valve
4 PPC pressure lock solenoid valve
a Since outlet hose (4) of the PPC pressure

lock solenoid valve has a quick coupler,
measure the output pressure on the PPC 5. Run the engine at high idling, operate the control
valve side. levers and switches to turn the solenoid valve
ON or OFF, and measure the oil pressure.
a For the conditions for turning the solenoid
valve ON and OFF, see the operations table
of each solenoid valve.
a The operating condition of the solenoid valve
can be also checked with the monitoring
function [02] of the monitor panel (excluding
the PPC pressure lock solenoid valve).
a If the output pressure is as follows, the sole-
noid valve is normal.
Solenoid valve Output pressure

OFF
(Deenergized) 0 MPa {0kg/cm2}
2. Install adapter M2 and connect the disconnected Almost same as control basic
hose again. ON (Energized) pressure
(See standard values table)
3. Install nipple [1] of hydraulic tester M1 and con-

nect it to hydraulic gauge [2].
PC130-7 20-133
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING MEASURING SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT PRESSURE

Operation table of 2-stage relief solenoid valve
Operating condition Operation

One-touch power maximizing switch: ON (8.5-sec timer)
Tr avel signal ON
Swing lock switch
Other than above condition OFF
Operation table of swing holding brake solenoid valve
Work equipment, swing, and travel signals Any one is turned ON

ON
Swing holding brake release switch: RELEASE (Upper) position
Other than above condition OFF
Operation table of travel speed brake solenoid valve

Travel speed switch: Lo
Engine speed: Below 1,500 rpm
Auto shift function operates during run at Hi OFF
Pump pressure: Above 30.4 MPa {310 kg/cm2}
Overheat prevention function operates during run
at Hi Hydraulic oil temperature: Above 95°C
Other than above condition ON
Operation table of PPC pressure lock solenoid valve

LOCK position OFF
Safety lock lever
FREE position ON
20-134 PC130-7
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING MEASURING PPC VALVE OUTPUT PRESSURE
MEASURING PPC VALVE

OUTPUT PRESSURE
a Measuring instruments for PPC valve output
pressure
N
a Before measuring the PPC valve output pres-

sure, check that the basic pressure in the control
circuit is normal.
k Lower the work equipment to the ground and a Since PPC oil pressure switches (10) and
stop the engine. Operate the control levers (11) are installed in the battery room, open
several times to release the residual pressure the battery room cover.
pressure of the hydraulic tank.
1. Disconnect PPC oil pressure switches (1) – (4)

of the circuit to be measured.
No. Circuit to be measured No. Circuit to be measured

1 Boom RAISE (S06) 7 Swing RIGHT (S07)
2 Boom LOWER (S02) 8 Swing LEFT (S03)
3 Arm IN (S04) 9 Travel (S30)
1ATT on front side
4 Arm OUT (S04) 10 (S10)
1ATT on rear side

5 Bucket CURL (S08) 11 (S11) 2. Install nipple [1] of hydraulic tester N and con-
6 Bucket DUMP (S01) nect it to oil pressure gauge [2].
a Use the oil pressure gauges of 5.9 MPa {60
a Since PPC oil pressure switches (1) – (8) are kg/cm2}.
installed in the battery room, open the bat- a The figure shows the measuring instruments
tery room cover. installed to the mounting part of the swing
LEFT PPC pressure switch.
a Since PPC oil pressure switch (9) is installed

on the under side of the floor frame, remove 3. Run the engine and heighten the hydraulic oil
the cab undercover (on the front side). temperature to 45 – 55°C.
PC130-7 20-135
(1)
MEASURING SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT PRESSURE,
TESTING AND ADJUSTING ADJUSTING PLAY OF WORK EQUIPMENT AND SWING PPC VALVES
ADJUSTING PLAY OF WORK

EQUIPMENT AND SWING PPC
VALVES
a If the work equipment and swing levers have
large play, adjust them according to the following
procedure.
1. Remove the work equipment and swing PPC

valve assembly.
2. Remove bellows (1).
3. Loosen locknut (2) and tighten disc (3) until it

4. Run the engine at high idling and measure the oil touches the heads of 4 pistons (4).
pressure while the control lever or pedal of the a Do not move the piston at this time.
measured circuit is in neutral and while it is oper-
ated to the stroke end. 4. Fix disc (3) and tighten locknut (2) to the speci-
a If the PPC valve output pressure is as fol- fied torque.
lows, the solenoid valve is normal. 3 Locknut: 69 – 88 Nm {7 – 9 kgm}
Lever/Pedal Output pressure
5. Install bellows (1).
In neutral 0 MPa {0kg/cm2}
Almost same as control basic 6. Install the work equipment and swing PPC valve
Operated to assembly.
pressure (See standard values
stroke end
table)

20-136 PC130-7
(1)
TESTING PARTS WHICH CAUSE HYDRAULIC DRIFT OF
TESTING AND ADJUSTING WORK EQUIPMENT
TESTING PARTS WHICH

CAUSE HYDRAULIC DRIFT OF
WORK EQUIPMENT
a If the work equipment (cylinder) drifts hydrauli-
cally, check to see if the cause is on the cylinder
packing side or control valve side or hydraulic
drift prevention valve side (if equipped) accord-
ing to the following procedure.
1. Testing boom cylinder and bucket cylinder

1) Set the machine in the position of measuring
hydraulic drift and stop the engine.
a Fill the bucket with a rated load or with
dirt and sand. 2) Operate the arm control lever in the IN posi-
tion.
• If the lowering speed is increased at this
time, the cylinder packing is defective.
• If the lowering speed does not change at
this time, the control valve is defective.
a Operate the control lever while the start-
ing switch is in the ON position.
a If the pressure in the accumulator is lost,
run the engine for about 10 seconds to
heighten the pressure in the accumula-
tor.
[Reference]
2) When testing the boom cylinder, set the Reason why the lowering speed is increased by
boom control lever in the RAISE position. the above operation when the cylinder packing is
When testing the bucket cylinder, set the the cause of the hydraulic drift:
bucket control lever in the CURL position. 1) If the machine is set in the above position (where
• If the lowering speed is increased at this the holding pressure is applied to the bottom
time, the cylinder packing is defective. side), the oil leaks from the bottom side to the
• If the lowering speed does not change at head side. Since the volume on the head side is
this time, the control valve or hydraulic less than that on the bottom side by the volume
drift prevention valve (if equipped) is of the rod, the pressure in the head side is
defective. increased by the oil flowing in from the bottom
a Operate the control lever while the start- side.
ing switch is in the ON position. 2) As the pressure in the head side is increased, it
a If the pressure in the accumulator is lost, is balanced at a certain level (which depends on
run the engine for about 10 seconds to the leakage), and then the lowering speed is low-
heighten the pressure in the accumula- ered.
tor. 3) If the circuit on the head side is opened to the
drain circuit by the above operation of the lever
2. Testing arm cylinder (the bottom side is closed by the check valve at
1) Stop the arm cylinder about 100 mm before this time), the oil on the head side flows in the
the IN stroke end and stop the engine. drain circuit. As a result, the pressure is unbal-
anced and the lowering speed is increased.
PC130-7 20-137
(1)
TESTING PARTS WHICH CAUSE HYDRAULIC DRIFT OF
TESTING AND ADJUSTING WORK EQUIPMENT
3. Testing PPC valve

While the pressure in the accumulator is high,
set the safety lock lever in the LOCK/FREE posi-
tion and measure the lowering distance.
a Operate the control lever while the starting
switch is in the ON position.
a If the pressure in the accumulator is lost, run
the engine for about 10 seconds to heighten
the pressure in the accumulator.
a If there is a difference in the lowering dis-
tance between the LOCK position and FREE
position, the PPC valve is defective (it has an
internal defect).
20-138 PC130-7
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING MEASURING OIL LEAKAGE
MEASURING OIL LEAKAGE 2. Measuring oil leakage from arm cylinder

1) Run the engine and raise the engine oil tem-
perature to 45 – 55°C, and then move the
a Measuring instruments fro oil leakage
arm cylinder to the IN stroke end.
k Release the residual pressure in the
P Commercially Measuring cylinder piping on the arm cylinder head side.
available
For details, see RELEASING RESID-
UAL PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC CIR-
1. Measuring oil leakage from boom cylinder CUIT (Operate the lever in the arm IN
1) Run the engine and heighten the engine oil direction only, however).
temperature to 45 – 55°C, and then move 2) Disconnect hose (2) on the cylinder head
the boom cylinder to the RAISE stroke end.
side and block the hose side with a plate.
k Take care not to disconnect the hose on
piping on the boom cylinder head side. the cylinder bottom side.
For details, see RELEASING RESID- a Use the following part to block the hose
UAL PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC CIR- side.
CUIT (Operate the lever in the boom 07376-50522 (Plug No. 05)
RAISE direction only, however).
2) Disconnect hose (1) on the cylinder head
the cylinder bottom side.
a Use the following part to block the hose
side.
07376-50422 (Plug No. 04)

arm circuit by moving the arm IN.
k Take care not to "move the arm OUT".
4) Measure the oil leakage for 1 minute after 30
seconds since relieving is started.
5) After finishing measurement, return the
removed parts.

boom circuit by raising the boom.
k Take care not to "lower the boom".
removed parts.
PC130-7 20-139
(1)
3. Measuring oil leakage from bucket cylinder 4. Measuring oil leakage from swing motor
1) Run the engine and raise the engine oil tem- 1) Run the engine and raise the engine oil tem-
perature to 45 – 55°C, and then move the perature to 45 – 55°C.
bucket cylinder to the CURL stroke end and 2) Disconnect drain hose (4) and block the
stop the engine. hose side with a plug.
side.
piping on the bucket cylinder head side.
07376-50522 (Plug No. 05)
For details, see RELEASING RESID-
UAL PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC CIR-
CUIT (Operate the lever in the arm
CURL direction only, however).
2) Disconnect hose (3) on the cylinder head
the cylinder bottom side.
side.
07376-50422 (Plug No. 04)
3) Turn the swing lock switch ON.

swing circuit by swinging.
a Measure the oil leakage for 1 minute
after 30 seconds since relieving is
started.
a After measuring 1 time, swing 180°, and
then measure again.
removed parts.

bucket circuit by curling the bucket.
k Take care not to "dump the bucket".
removed parts.
20-140 PC130-7
(1)
5. Measuring oil leakage from travel motor

1) Run the engine and raise the engine oil tem-
perature to 45 – 55°C, and then remove the
travel motor cover.
2) Run the engine and lock the travel system.
k Put pin [1] between the sprocket and
track frame to lock the travel system
securely.
3) Disconnect drain hose (5) of the travel motor

and block the hose side with a plug.
side.
07376-50422 (Plug No. 04)
4) Run the engine at high idling, relieve the

travel circuit, and measure the oil leakage.
k Wrong operation of the lever can cause
an accident. Accordingly, make signs
and checks securely.
a Measure the oil leakage for 1 minute
after 30 seconds since r elieving is
started.
a Measure several times, moving the
motor a little (changing the position of the
valve plate and cylinder and that of the
cylinder and piston) each time.
removed parts.
PC130-7 20-141
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING RELEASING RESIDUAL PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
RELEASING RESIDUAL 4) Repeat steps 2) and 3) above 2 – 3 times,

and the residual pressure in the piping is
PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC released completely.
CIRCUIT
3. Releasing residual pressure in swing motor
1. Releasing residual pressure in hydraulic tank circuit
k Since the hydraulic tank is enclosed and
a The residual pressure in the swing motor cir-
cuit can be released by performing the oper-
pressurized, release the residual pressure
ation for RELEASING RESIDUAL
in it when removing a hose or a plug con-
PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
nected to it.
CIRCUIT (Operate the lever in the swing
1) Lower the work equipment to the ground in a
direction only, however).
stable position and stop the engine.
2) Loosen oil filler cap (1) of the hydraulic tank
4. Releasing residual pressure in travel motor
gradually to release the air in the tank.
circuit
a If you open the pump room cover, you
a Since the control valve spool of the travel
can loosen the oil filler cap from the right
motor circuit is open, the pressure in this cir-
side of the machine.
cuit can be released by performing RELEAS-
ING RESIDUAL PRESSURE IN
HYDRAULIC TANK.
2. Releasing residual pressure in hydraulic cyl-

inder circuit
k When disconnecting a pipe between a
hydraulic cylinder and the control valve,
release the residual pressure in the piping
1) Release the residual pressure in the hydrau-
lic tank. For details, see RELEASING
RESIDUAL PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC
TANK.
a Keep the oil filler cap of the hydraulic
tank removed.
2) Turn the starting switch ON and set the
safety lock lever in the FREE position, and
then operate the work equipment control
levers on both sides forward, backward, to
the right, and to the left.
a The control valve is operated by the
pressure in the accumulator. The pres-
sure in the accumulator is used up, how-
ever, after the control valve is operated 2
– 3 times.
3) Run the engine at low idling for 10 seconds
to heighten the pressure in the accumulator.
20-142 PC130-7
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING BLEEDING AIR FROM EACH PART
BLEEDING AIR FROM EACH PART
Air bleeding procedure
Air bleeding item 1 2 3 4 5 6
Bleeding air Checking oil

Bleeding air Bleeding air
from Starting Bleeding air level and
from swing from travel
Contents of work hydraulic engine from cylinder starting
motor motor
pump operation
q q
• Replacing hydraulic oil
• Cleaning strainer q q q q
(See note) (See note)
• Replacing return filter element q q

• Replacing and repairing hydraulic
pump q q q q
• Removing suction piping
• Replacing and repairing control valve
• Removing control valve piping q q q
• Replacing and repairing cylinder
• Removing cylinder piping q q q
• Replacing and repairing swing motor
• Removing swing motor piping q q q
• Replacing and repairing travel motor
• Removing travel motor piping q q q
• Replacing and repairing swivel joint
• Removing swivel joint piping q q
Note: Bleed air from the swing motor and travel motor only when the oil in the motor cases is drained.
1. Bleeding air from hydraulic pump

1) Open the pump room cover, loosen bleeder
(1), and check that oil flows out.
2) If the oil does not flow out, disconnect drain
hose (2) and fill the pump case with oil
through the drain port.
a Fix the drain hose adapter to a place
higher than the oil level in the hydraulic
tank.
a Fill the pump case with oil until oil con-
taining no bubbles flows out of the
bleeder.
3) After oil containing no bubbles flows out of
3 Air bleeder:
bleeder (1), tighten the bleeder.
7.8 – 9.8 Nm {0.8 – 1.0 kgm} 2. Starting engine

a If the drain hose has been disconnected, When running the engine after performing step
connect it after tightening the bleeder. 1, keep its speed at low idling for 10 minutes.
a If the engine coolant temperature is low and
the automatic warm-up operation is started,
stop the engine temporarily and reset the
automatic warm-up operation with the fuel
control dial (Set the starting switch in the ON
position and hold the fuel control dial in the
MAX position for 3 seconds, and the auto-
matic warm-up operation is reset).
PC130-7 20-143
(1)
3. Bleeding air from cylinder 5. Bleeding air from travel motor

a If a cylinder was replaced, bleed air from it 1) Remove the travel motor cover and run the
before connecting the work equipment. In engine at low idling.
particular, the boom cylinder does not move 2) Loosen drain hose (4) and check that oil
to the lowering stroke end, if it is installed to oozes out, and then tighten the drain hose.
the work equipment.
1) Run the engine at low idling for about 5 min-
utes.
2) Running the engine at low idling, raise and
lower the boom 4 – 5 times.
a Stop the piston rod about 100 mm before
each stroke end. Do not relieve the oil.
3) Running the engine at high idling, perform
step 2).
4) Running the engine at low idling, move the
piston rod to the stroke end and relieve the
oil.
5) Bleed air from the arm cylinder and bucket
cylinder according to steps 2) – 4).
4. Bleeding air from swing motor 3) Running the engine at low idling and using
1) Run the engine at low idling. the work equipment, raise the track shoe on
2) Loosen air bleeding plug (3) and check that either side.
the oil oozes out, and then tighten the air
3 Air bleeding plug:

bleeding plug.
25.5 – 34.3 Nm {2.5 – 3.5 kgm}

3) If the oil does not oozes out, remove air
bleeding plug (3) and fill the pump case with
oil.
4) Running the engine at low idling, run the

raised track shoe idle slowly for about 2 min-
utes.
a Run the track shoe forward and in
reverse as evenly as possible.
a Run the track shoe on the opposite side
idle similarly.
4) Run the engine at low idling and swing slowly
2 turns or more in each direction.
20-144 PC130-7
(1)
6. Checking oil level and starting work

1) Run the engine, retract the arm cylinder and
bucket cylinder to the stroke ends, lower the
work equipment to the ground, and stop the
engine.
2) Check the oil level by sight gauge (5) on the

side of the hydraulic tank.
a If the oil level is between lines H and L, it
is normal.
a If the oil level is below line L, add new oil.
PC130-7 20-145
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING TESTING PROCEDURE FOR DIODE
TESTING PROCEDURE FOR

DIODE
a Test an assembled-type diode (18-pin) or a diode
(2-pin) according to the following procedure.
a The conductive direction of an assembled-type
diode is shown in the following figure.
2. When using an analog circuit tester

1) Set the circuit tester in the resistance range.
2) Apply the test pins as shown below and
check movement of the pointer.
i) Apply the red (+) test pin to the anode (P)
side of the diode and the black (-) test pin
to the cathode (N) side.
a The conductive direction of a diode is marked on ii) Apply the red (+) test pin to the cathode
its surface. (N) side of the diode and the black (-) test
pin to the anode (P) side.
3) Judge the condition of the diode from move-
ment of the pointer.
• The pointer does not move in i) above
but moves in ii): Normal (Moving angle
(Resistance) depends on the type and
measurement range of the circuit tester,
however)
• The pointer moves in both i) and ii):
Defective (Internal short circuit)
• The pointer does not move in either of i)
and ii): Defective (Internal disconnection)
1. When using a digital circuit tester

1) Set the circuit tester in the diode range and
check the indicated value.
a If an ordinary tester is used, the voltage
of the battery in itself is indicated.
2) Apply the red (+) test pin to the anode (P)
side of the diode and the black (-) test pin to
the cathode (N) side and read the indicated
value.
3) Judge the condition of the diode from the
indicated value.
• The indicated value does not change:
There is not continuity (Defective).
• The indicated value changes: There is
continuity (Normal) (Note).
Note) In the case of a silicon diode, the cir-
cuit tester indicates a value of 460 –
600.
20-146 PC130-7
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING SPECIAL FUNCTIONS OF MONITOR PANEL
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS OF MONITOR PANEL
Section to display spe- Section to operate special function 1 Section to operate special function 2
cial functions (Basic operation) (Selecting operation and special
1. Display section 3. Caution buzzer stop switch operation)
2. Service meter section 4. Auto-decelerator switch 7. Working mode selector switch (UP)
5. Setting switch (Black switch) 8. Working mode selector switch
6. Travel speed shifting switch (DOWN)
9. Swing lock switch
PC130-7 20-147
(1)
Ordinary functions and special functions of monitor panel

The monitor panel has the ordinary functions and special functions and displays various pieces of information
on display section (1) and service meter section (2).
Some items are displayed automatically according to the internal setting of the monitor panel and the others are
displayed by operating switches.
1. Ordinary functions: Operator menu
The items in this menu are displayed normally or displayed automatically when a trouble occurs.
2. Special functions: Service menu
The items in this menu are not displayed normally. Each serviceman can display them by operating special
switches. These functions are used for special setting, testing, adjusting, or troubleshooting.
Flow of each function
Ordinary functions (Operator menu) <Operation of switch> O Special functions (Service menu)
1 Function of displaying service meter 3 Function of displaying error code [01]
O <Automatic> 4 Monitoring function [02]
2 Function of displaying user code 5 Function of adjusting governor [03]
6 Function of selecting maintenance period [04]
7 Function of selecting default working mode [05]
8 Special function of monitoring replacement of engine oil
a Each number in [ ] is a code No. displayed in the service meter section when the menu is selected.
20-148 PC130-7
(3)
Display of operator menu 2. Function of displaying user code

If the machine has any trouble, the correspond-
a Only outline of the operator menu is described in
ing user code is displayed automatically in dis-
this section. For details of each menu, see
play section (1) and the caution buzzer is turned
O P E R AT I O N M A N U A L o r t h e v o l u m e o f
ON to urge the operator to take a proper remedy,
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION.
depending on the degree of the trouble.
a Service meter section (2) continues display-
1. Function of displaying service meter
ing the service meter.
While the machine is used normally, the monitor
a For displayed user codes and the remedies
panel displays the following information.
shown to the operator, see "User codes and
• Display section (1): Nothing is displayed
remedies shown to operator".
• Service meter section (2): Service meter
a Each user code simply shows occurrence of
a trouble to the operator. To find out the
cause of the trouble, a serviceman must
check the error code with the "Function of
displaying error code [01]" in the service
menu.
<Reference>
A user code is displayed only when a serious trouble
occurs.
Even if a user code is not displayed, a trouble may
have occurred. If you feel any abnormality, be sure
to check for an error code with the "Function of dis-
playing error code [01]" in the service menu.
PC130-7 20-149
(1)
a User codes and remedies shown to operator
User Caution
Error mode Remedy (shown to operator)
code buzzer
If the emergency pump drive switch is set in the upper posi-

E02 Error in pump control system tion, the machine can operate normally. Have the machine q
inspected immediately, however.
Set the swing holding brake release switch in the upper posi-
tion to release the brake. Apply the swing brake manually
E03 Error in swing brake system with the swing lock switch, if necessary. The brake may not q
be released, depending on the cause of the failure. In any
case, have the machine inspected immediately.
E05 Error in governor system Have the machine inspected immediately. q
20-150 PC130-7
(1)
Operation and display of service menu 3) Selecting menu

Holding caution buzzer stop switch (3), operate
How to select service menu
working mode selector switches (7) and (8) to
a When using the general functions in the service
select a menu you will use.
menu, perform the following switch operation to
• UP switch (7): Menu No. increases.
change the screen of the monitor panel.
• DOWN switch (8): Menu No. decreases.
3. Function of displaying error code [01] Menu Service menu
4. Monitoring function [02] No. (Excluding special functions)
5. Function of adjusting governor [03]
6. Function of selecting maintenance period 01 Function of displaying error code
[04] 02 Monitoring function
7. Function of selecting default working
mode [05] 03 Function of adjusting governor
Function of selecting maintenance

1) Operating switches 04
period
Holding caution buzzer stop switch (3), hold auto
decelerator switch (4) for 2.5 seconds. Function of selecting default working
05
mode
4) Executing menu
Select a menu you will use and press set switch
(5), and the menu is executed.
2) Displaying display section and service meter

section
If the switches are operated as shown above, the
first menu No. [01] (Monitoring function) is dis-
played in service meter section (2).
a Nothing is displayed in display section (1). 5) Finishing service menu
Holding caution buzzer stop switch (3), hold auto
decelerator switch (4) for 2.5 seconds (similarly
to the selecting operation).
a The service menu is finished and the ordi-
nary screen appears.
a The service menu can be also finished by
turning the starting switch OFF while the ser-
vice menu is selected. (In this case, the ordi-
nary screen appears when the starting
switch is turned ON again.)
a To use the special functions in the service menu,

you must operate the switches differently from
the above. See details of each menu.
8. Function of adjusting service meter
9. Special function of monitoring replace-
ment of engine oil
PC130-7 20-151
(1)
3. Function of displaying error code [01]

With this function, you can check the error code
of a trouble which is occurring at present or has
occurred in the past.
3) Information displayed in display section and

service meter section 2 (When error code is
not recorded)
1) Selecting and executing function If an error code is not recorded, display sec-
i) Select menu No. [01] in the menu selection (1) and service meter section (2) display
tion mode. as shown below.
ii) Press set switch (5) to execute this func-
tion.

service meter section 1 (When error code is
recorded)
If an error code is recorded, the following
information is displayed in display section (1)
and service meter section (2).
(a): Error code
(b): Service meter reading increased after
trouble occurred
(c): Mark [E] to indicate that trouble is occur-
ring at present
a Mark [E] to indicate that a trouble is 4) Number of recorded error codes and display
occurring at present indicates that the order of them
error code is being detected now. It is This function can record up to 20 error
not displayed if the trouble has been codes, which are displayed in order from the
repaired or the error code is not latest one.
detected. a If a new trouble occurs while 20 error
a For the error codes which the monitor codes are recorded, the oldest error
panel and governor and pump controller code is deleted and the error code of the
can detect, see the "Error codes table". new trouble is recorded.
20-152 PC130-7
(1)
5) Change of displayed error codes

Holding caution buzzer stop switch (3), oper-
ate working mode selector switches (7) and
(8) to change the displayed error codes.
• UP switch (7): Next error code appears.
• DOWN switch (8): Previous error code
appears.
6) How to delete error code

i) Holding caution buzzer stop switch (3),
turn the starting switch OFF and keep
holding caution buzzer stop switch (3).
ii) Under the above condition, turn the start-
ing switch ON again and hold caution
buzzer stop switch (3) for 5 seconds.
a An error code having the mark [E] cannot
be deleted.
PC130-7 20-153
(1)
Error codes table
User code Error code Trouble
— 104 Clogging of air cleaner
— 108 Overheating of engine coolant
— 112 Short circuit in wiper motor drive forward system
— 113 Short circuit in wiper motor drive reverse system
— 114 Short circuit in windshield washer drive system
— 115 Trouble in operation of windshield wiper
— 116 Trouble in storage of windshield wiper
E03 203 Short circuit in swing holding brake solenoid
— 205 Short circuit in 2-stage relief solenoid
— 206 Short circuit travel speed shifting solenoid
E03 213 Disconnection in swing holding brake solenoid
— 215 Disconnection in 2-stage relief solenoid
— 216 Disconnection travel speed shifting solenoid
— 217 Abnormality in input model code
— 218 Disconnection in S-NET signal line
— 222 Short circuit in LS-EPC solenoid
— 223 Disconnection in LS-EPC solenoid
— 224 Abnormality in pump pressure sensor
— 226 Abnormality in pressure sensor power supply
— 227 Abnormality in engine speed sensor
E02 232 Short circuit in PC-EPC solenoid
E02 233 Disconnection in PC-EPC solenoid
— 251 Abnormality in overload pressure sensor
— 301 Engine low idling speed out of standard range
— 302 Engine high idling speed out of standard range
— 306 Abnormality in governor potentiometer
E05 308 Abnormality in fuel control dial
— 315 Short circuit in battery relay output line
— 316 Step-out of governor motor
E05 317 Disconnection in phases A and B of governor motor
E05 318 Short circuit in phases A and B of governor motor
20-154 PC130-7
(1)
4. Monitoring function [02]

With this function, you can monitor the revolution
speed, oil pressure, current, voltage, input condi-
tion, output condition, etc. in real time by the sig-
nals from the sensors, switches, and solenoids
installed to various parts of the machine.

service meter section 1 (When numeral code
is displayed)
If a numeral monitoring code is selected, the
following information is displayed in display
section (1) and service meter section (2).
1) Selecting and executing function (a): Monitoring code
i) Select menu No. [02] in the menu selec- (b): Monitoring information (Value is dis-
tion mode. played)
tion.
2) Selecting and executing monitoring code

Holding caution buzzer stop switch (3), oper-
ate working mode selector switches (7) and
(8) to select a monitoring code displayed in
service meter section (1).
• UP switch (7): Code No. increases.
• DOWN switch (8): Code No. decreases.
a This function displays monitoring code
[001] and its information first.
a For the items and code Nos. which you
can monitor, see the "Monitoring codes
table".
PC130-7 20-155
(1)

service meter section 2 (When 6-bit code is
displayed)
If a 6-bit monitoring code is selected, the fol-
lowing information is displayed in display
section (1) and service meter section (2).
(a): Monitoring code
(b): Monitoring information (6 pieces of infor-
mation are displayed in bits)
a In the 6-bit display mode, only the top
and bottom of the 7-segment mark are
used to display. "Solid black" indicates
the ON state, and "white on black back-
ground" indicates the OFF state.
a For the No. of each bit, see the "Monitor-
ing codes table" and the drawing
attached to it.
20-156 PC130-7
(1)
Monitoring codes table
Code Monitoring item Unit Remarks

001 Monitor panel model code Numeral
002 Governor and pump controller model code (Pump side) Numeral
003 Governor and pump controller model code (Engine throttle side) Numeral
008 Connecting condition of network Numeral
010 Engine speed 10rpm
011 Pump discharge pressure kg/cm2
012 Pump discharge pressure kg/cm2

013 PC-EPC solenoid output current 10mA
015 LS-EPC solenoid output current 10mA
016 2nd throttle speed 10rpm
018 (Unused) —
019 (Unused) —
a Swing oil pressure switch (ON) (6bit)
b Travel oil pressure switch (ON) (6bit)
c Boom LOWER oil pressure switch (ON) (6bit)
020 Input condition of switch 1
d Boom RAISE oil pressure switch (ON) (6bit)
e Arm IN oil pressure switch (ON) (6bit)
f Arm OUT oil pressure switch (ON) (6bit)
a Bucket CURL oil pressure switch (ON) (6bit)
b Bucket DUMP oil pressure switch (ON) (6bit)
c (Unused) (6bit)
d Service oil pressure switch (ON) (6bit)
e (Unused) (6bit)
f (Unused) (6bit)
a (Unused) (6bit)
b (Unused) (6bit)
c One-touch power maximizing switch (ON) (6bit)
d Swing holding brake release switch (RELEASE) (6bit)
e Swing lock switch (LOCK) (6bit)
f (Unused) (6bit)
a (Unused) (6bit)
b (Unused) (6bit)
Drive condition of sole- c Swing holding brake solenoid (ON) (6bit)

023
noid valve d (Unused) (6bit)
e 2nd relief solenoid (ON) (6bit)
f Travel speed shifting solenoid (ON) (6bit)
PC130-7 20-157
(1)

024 (Unused) —
a Model selection 1 (Connected to ground) (6bit)
b Model selection 2 (Connected to ground) (6bit)
Input condition of model c Model selection 3 (Connected to ground) (6bit)

027
selection signal d Model selection 4 (Connected to ground) (6bit)
e Model selection 5 (Connected to ground) (6bit)
f (Unused) (6bit)
030 Fuel control dial input voltage 10mV
031 Governor potentiometer input voltage 10mV
032 Controller power source voltage 100mV
033 Governor motor phase A output current 10mA
034 Governor motor phase B output current 10mA

035 Battery relay BR output voltage 100mV
a (Unused) (6bit)
b (Unused) (6bit)
c (Unused) (6bit)
036 Input condition of signal
d (Unused) (6bit)
e Starting switch signal C (START) (6bit)
f (Unused) (6bit)
a Battery relay (DRIVEN) (6bit)
b (Unused) (6bit)
c (Unused) (6bit)
037 Output condition of signal
d (Unused) (6bit)
e (Unused) (6bit)
f (Unused) (6bit)
041 Engine coolant sensor input voltage 10mV
042 Fuel level sensor input voltage 10mV
043 Alternator input voltage 10mV
044 (Unused) —
a Starting switch signal ACC (ON) (6bit)
b Starting switch signal C (START) (6bit)
c Starting switch signal R1 (HEAT) (6bit)
045 Input condition 4 of switch
d Lamp switch (ON) (6bit)
e (Unused) (6bit)
f (Unused) (6bit)
20-158 PC130-7
(1)

a Air cleaner clogging switch (OPEN) (6bit)
b (Unused) (6bit)
c Engine oil pressure switch (OPEN) (6bit)
046 Input condition of sensor
d Engine oil level switch (OPEN) (6bit)
e (Unused) (6bit)
f Alternator (Normal generation) (6bit)
a Swing lock switch (LOCK) (6bit)
b Caution buzzer stop switch (ON) (6bit)
c Windows limit switch (ON) (6bit)
049 Input condition 5 of switch
d Wiper contact W (ON) (6bit)
e Wiper contact P (ON) (6bit)
f (Unused) (6bit)
200 Monitor panel program version Numeral
201 Governor and pump controller program version Numeral
Display of numeral code Display of 6bit
PC130-7 20-159
(1)
5. Function of adjusting governor [03] 3) Adjusting governor lever stroke

This function is used to adjust the governor lever a The turning direction of the governor
stroke after the governor actuator, fuel injection spring described below is the direction
pump, or governor spring is removed and when the governor actuator is seen from
installed or replaced, or when the high idling the fuel injection pump side.
speed is low or engine speed is not stabilized. i) Keep the fuel control dial in the MAX
position.
ii) Loosen locknut (2) on the governor actu-
ator side of governor spring (1).
iii) Turn governor spring (1) clockwise to
reduce its installed length (a) and return
governor lever (3) of the fuel injection
pump to a position where it does not
touch the full stopper.
iv) Turn governor spring (1) counterclock-
wise to increase its installed length (a)
and stop it when governor lever (3) of the
fuel injection pump touches the full stop-
per.
• Standard installed length (a) (Refer-
1) Selecting and executing function ence): 262 mm
i) Select menu No. [03] in the menu selec- v) Turn governor spring (1) counterclock-
tion mode. wise further by 2.5 turns to compress the
ii) Press set switch (5) to execute this func- spring in governor spring (1).
tion. a Since the inside spring is com-
pressed, only the outer cylinder of
2) Condition of governor motor governor spring (1) moves toward
If this function is executed, all the governor the fuel injection pump by about 3.1
control functions are cancelled, and then the mm (the installed length does not
operating angle of the governor actuator fol- change).
lows up only the operation signal of the fuel vi) Fixing governor spring (1), tighten lock-
control dial. nut (2) on the governor actuator side.
a While this function is executed, [GOV] is a Before fixing the locknut, check that
displayed in display section (1) and the water drain hole of the governor
[gSET] is displayed in service meter sec- spring is directed down. If the water
tion (2). drain hole is not directed down,
loosen locknut (4) on the fuel injec-
tion pump side and turn the whole
governor spring to adjust (Take care
not to change the adjustment dimen-
3 Locknut:
sion of the governor spring).
11.8 – 19.6 Nm {1.2 – 2.0 kgm}
20-160 PC130-7
(1)
vii) Return the fuel control dial to the MIN

position, and then turn it again slowly
toward the MAX position. At this time,
check that governor spring is com-
pressed by about 3.1 mm after governor
lever (3) reaches the full stopper.
PC130-7 20-161
(1)
6. Function of selecting maintenance period

[04]
With this function, you can adjust the mainte-
nance period of the engine oil for the function of
the engine oil replacement monitor.
3) Settling maintenance period

The display or maintenance period becomes
effective when it is selected. Accordingly,
perform the ordinary finishing operation.
1) Selecting and executing function <Special functions of engine oil replacement moni-
i) Select menu No. [04] in the menu selector>
tion mode. a For the method of displaying the engine oil
ii) Press set switch (5) to execute this func- replacement monitor, method of checking the
tion. elapsed time after replacement of engine oil,
method of clearing the elapsed time, and method
2) Selecting maintenance period of displaying demonstration mode, see "9. Spe-
The current display mode or maintenance cial functions of engine oil replacement monitor".
period is displayed in service meter section
(2). Press set switch (5) to select a mainte-
nance period.
a Nothing is displayed in display section
(1).
a Each time the set switch is pressed, the
display mode or maintenance period
changes in the following order.
Display Display mode/Maintenance period
0 Reset maintenance function
125 125-hour interval
d Demonstration mode
20-162 PC130-7
(1)
7. Function of selecting default working mode 3) Settling default working mode

[05] Press set switch (5) to settle the selected
With this function, you can freely select the work- working mode.
ing mode which is set automatically when the
starting switch is turned ON (When the machine
is delivered, mode A is set).
1) Selecting and executing function

i) Select menu No. [05] in the menu selec-
tion mode.
tion.
2) Selecting default working mode

The currently set working mode is displayed
in service meter section (2). Press working
mode selector switches (7) and (8) to select
a working mode.
• UP switch (7): Next mode is displayed.
• DOWN switch (8): Previous mode is dis-
played.
a Nothing is displayed in display section
(1).
a The working mode changes in the follow-
ing order.
AoEoB
a Mode L cannot be set as the default.
PC130-7 20-163
(1)
8. Special functions of engine oil replacement

monitor
1) Ordinary display of engine oil replacement
monitor
If the rest of time before the set engine oil
replacement time is 10 hours or shorter,
engine oil replacement monitor (10) lights up
and display the elapsed time in service meter
section for 20 seconds each time the starting
switch is turned ON.
4) Function of demonstration mode

If the demonstration mode is selected, you
can perform demonstration of the oil mainte-
nance function when teaching the operation
to a customer.
The functions and display of the demonstra-
tion mode are as follows.
1. The internally set interval is recognized

as 250 hours and the elapsed time is rec-
2) Checking elapsed time ognized as 240 hours.
To check the elapsed time while engine oil 2. When the starting switch is turned ON
replacement monitor (10) is OFF, turn the after the demonstration mode is set, the
starting switch OFF and press set switch (5) ordinary display is repeated up to 3 times
and then turn the starting switch ON and (number of the times of turning the start-
keep holding set switch (5). ing switch ON).
3. After the demonstration is finished, reset-
ting of maintenance setting [0] is recog-
nized.
a When the demonstration is repeated 3
times, resetting of maintenance setting is
recognized. If setting is necessary at this
time, see "Function of selecting mainte-
nance period".
3) Clearing elapsed time

To clear the elapsed time after replacing the
engine oil, hold set switch (5) for 3 seconds
while the elapsed time is displayed.
a If the above operation is performed, the
elapsed time in the monitor panel is set
to 0 hour.
20-164 PC130-7
(3)
PREPARATION WORK FOR TROUBLESHOOTING FOR
TESTING AND ADJUSTING ELECTRIC SYSTEM
PREPARATION WORK FOR 2. Governor and pump controller

a The governor and pump controller is installed
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR in the cover at the rear of the operator's seat.
ELECTRIC SYSTEM 1) Remove the 3 mounting bolts and cover (3).
a When carrying out troubleshooting for an electric

circuit related to the monitor panel and governor
and pump controller, expose the related connec-
tors according to the following procedure.
1. Monitor panel
1) Remove cover (1)
a The cover is fixed with 2 clips at the top
and bottom. Just pull it up to remove it.
a If the daylight sensor of the air condi-
tioner is installed, disconnect connector
P15 on the back side of the cover.
2) Insert or connect testing T-adapters in or to

connectors C01, C02, and C03 of governor
and pump controller (4).
a Since the connectors are secured with
screws, loosen those screws before dis-
connecting.
a When connecting the connectors again,
tighten their screws to the specified
torque.
3 Screw: 2.82 Nm {0.288 kgm}
2) Remove the 3 mounting screws, and then

remove monitor panel (2) from the mount.
a Take care not to drop the mounting
screws into the console.
3) Insert or connect testing T-adapters in or to
connectors P01 and P02 of the monitor
panel.
a Connector P70 clamped near the above
connectors is not used.
PC130-7 20-165
(3)
Pm-Clinic Service
Model Serial No. Service meter
PC130-7 h
User's name Date of inspection Inspector
Specifications
Main parts Attachments Shoe width
Boom Standard ( ) 1 att. ( ) 500 mm ( )
Arm Standard ( ) Blade ( ) 600 mm
Bucket Standard ( ) 2-piece boom 700 mm
Check of oil and coolant levels

Radiator coolant When necessary
Engine oil Damper case oil Final drive case oil
Hydraulic oil Machinery case oil ( )
Max. range of engine coolant temperature Max. range of hydraulic oil temperature Ambient temperature
(Top) (Bottom) Altitude
Operator's opinion
Visual inspection result
Error code history
Memo
PC130-7 20-167
(2)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING PM-CLINIC SERVICE
Items related to engine
20-168 PC130-7
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING PM-CLINIC SERVICE
Items related to hydraulic equipment
PC130-7 20-169
(1)
Model Serial No. Service meter User's name Date of inspection Inspector
(1)
20-170
1. Engine
Condition Standard value
Measured
No. Fuel control Working Auto One-touch power Operation of work Measured item Unit Standard value for Service limit Judgment
value
dial mode decelerator max. switch equipment new machine value
1 Full (MAX) A OFF OFF All levers in neutral Engine speed rpm 2,250 – 2,450 2,250 – 2,450 Good/Bad
2 Full (MAX) A OFF OFF All levers in neutral Engine oil pressure MPa{kg/cm2} 0.34–0.54{3.5–5.5} 0.25 {2.5} Good/Bad
3 Low (MIN) A OFF OFF All levers in neutral Engine speed rpm 1,050 – 1,150 1,050 – 1,150 Good/Bad
4 Low (MIN) A OFF OFF All levers in neutral Engine oil pressure 2 Min. 0.18{Min. 1.8} 0.15 {1.5}
MPa{kg/cm }
5 Full (MAX) A OFF ON Arm DUMP relief Engine speed rpm 2,080 – 2,280 2,080 – 2,280
6 Full (MAX) A OFF ON Arm DUMP relief Blow-by pressure kPa{mmH2O} Max. 0.49{Max. 50} 0.98 {100}
7 Full (MAX) A ON OFF All levers in neutral Engine speed rpm 1,300 – 1,500 1,300 – 1,500
2. Work equipment, switch, and travel speed Hydraulic oil temperature: 45 – 55 °C

Measured
No. Fuel control Working Measured item Unit Standard value for Service limit Judgmen
Position of work equipment value
dial mode new machine value
1 Full (MAX) A Max. reach, no load Boom RAISE (*1) 3.3 – 4.1 Max. 4.3
2 Full (MAX) A Boom top on level, no load Arm OUT (*1) 2.8 – 3.4 Max. 3.7
3 Full (MAX) A Boom top on level, no load Arm IN (*1) 2.8 – 3.6 Max. 4.4
4 Full (MAX) E Boom top on level, no load Arm IN (*1) 3.0 – 3.8 Max. 4.6
5 Full (MAX) L Boom top on level, no load Arm IN (*1) 3.7 – 5.1 Max. 5.4
6 Full (MAX) A Arm top and boom foot on level, no load Bucket CURL 2.6 – 3.2 Max. 3.7
sec
Right 23.8 – 33.4 22.8 – 34.4
7 Full (MAX) A Max. reach Swing (5 turns)
Left 23.8 – 33.4 22.8 – 34.4
Right 36.9 – 55.3 36.9 – 55.3

Lo
Left 36.9 – 55.3 36.9 – 55.3
8 Full (MAX) A Push up track shoe 1 side by 1 Travel (5 turns)
Right 19.7 – 24.1 20.1 – 26.1
Hi
Left 19.7 – 24.1 20.1 – 26.1
*1: Until cylinder cushion starts working
PC130-7
3. Hydraulic drift of work equipment Hydraulic oil temperature: 45 – 55 °C
PC130-7
Measured
No. Fuel control Working Measured item Unit Standard value Service limit Judgment
Position of work equipment value
dial mode for new machine value
Arm top and boom foot on level, Lowering distance of bucket

1 Engine stopped mm Max. 460 Max. 700 Good/Bad
rated load on bucket tip (in 15 min)
4. Oil pressure Hydraulic oil temperature: 45 – 55 °C (1) (2) (3) (4)
Condition 600kg/cm2 600kg/cm2 600kg/cm2 60kg/cm2 Point

Measured item
No. Unit (Service limit
Fuel control Working Auto One-touch power Operation of work (Tested part) Pump Servo inlet Control basic
LS pressure value)
dial mode decelerator max. switch equipment pressure pressure pressure
Control basic pressure 2.84–3.43MPa

1 Full (MAX) A OFF OFF All levers in neutral
(Self-reducing pressure valve) {29–35kg/cm2}
Pump relief pressure (Main 33.3–37.0MPa

Full (MAX) A OFF OFF Arm DUMP relief
relief valve: Low pressure) {343–378kg/cm2}
2
Pump relief pressure (Main 36.3–39.2MPa
Full (MAX) A OFF ON Arm DUMP relief
relief valve: High pressure) {370–400kg/cm2}
LS differential pressure 1.96–3.7MPa

Full (MAX) A OFF OFF All levers in neutral
(LS valve: Neutral) {21–38kg/cm2}
3
Idle travel LS differential pressure 2.1–2.3MPa
Full (MAX) A OFF OFF MPa
(With shoe raised) (LS valve: Operated) {21.5–23.5kg/cm2}
{kg/cm2}
Swing lock Swing relief pressure Right 28.9–32.9MPa
4 Full (MAX) A OFF OFF
(Switch: LOCK) (Motor safety valve) Left {295–335kg/cm2}
Right front
Travel relief pressure Right rear 36.3–39.2MPa
Travel lock
5 Full (MAX) A OFF OFF (Main relief valve)
(With sprocket fixed) {370–400kg/cm2}
(Motor safety valve) Left front
Left rear
Swing lock PC control pressure

6 Full (MAX) A OFF OFF (1):(3)=1:0.5
(Switch: LOCK) (PC valve)
(1)
20-171
TROUBLESHOOTING
POINTS TO REMEMBER WHEN TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................................................... 20-202

SEQUENCE OF EVENTS IN TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................ 20-203
POINTS TO REMEMBER WHEN CARRYING OUT MAINTENANCE ...................................................... 20-204
INSPECTION BEFORE TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................................ 20-212
CLASSIFICATION OF AND PROCEDURES FOR TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................... 20-213
CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT DRAWING AND ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF EACH SYSTEM ....... 20-217
CONNECTION TABLE FOR CONNECTOR PIN NUMBERS .................................................................... 20-234
T-BRANCH BOX AND T-BRANCH TABLE ............................................................................................... 20-257
PC130-7 20-201
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING POINTS TO REMEMBER WHEN TROUBLESHOOTING
POINTS TO REMEMBER WHEN TROUBLESHOOTING

k Stop the machine in a level place, and check that the safety pin, blocks, and parking brake are securely fitted.
k When carrying out the operation with two or more workers, keep strictly to the agreed signals, and do not
allow any unauthorized person to come near.
k If the radiator cap is removed when the engine is hot, hot water may spurt out and cause burns, so wait for
the engine to cool down before starting troubleshooting.
k Be extremely careful not to touch any hot parts or to get caught in any rotating parts.
k When disconnecting wiring, always disconnect the negative (–) terminal of the battery first.
k When removing the plug or cap from a location which is under pressure from oil, water, or air, always release
the internal pressure first. When installing measuring equipment, be sure to connect it properly.
The aim of troubleshooting is to pinpoint the basic cause of the failure, to carry out repairs swiftly, and to
prevent reoccurrence of the failure.
When carrying out troubleshooting, and important point is of course to understand the structure and func-
tion.
However, a short cut to effective troubleshooting is to ask the operator various questions to form some idea
of possible causes of the failure that would produce the reported symptoms.
1. When carrying out troubleshooting, do not hurry 5) Other maintenance items can be checked
to disassemble the components. externally, so check any item that is consid-
If components are disassembled immediately ered to be necessary.
any failure occurs:
• Parts that have no connection with the failure 4. Confirming failure
or other unnecessary parts will be disassem- • Confirm the extent of the failure yourself, and
bled. judge whether to handle it as a real failure or
• It will become impossible to find the cause of as a problem with the method of operation,
the failure. etc.
It will also cause a waste of manhours, parts, or a When operating the machine to reenact
oil or grease, and at the same time, will also lose the troubleshooting symptoms, do not
the confidence of the user or operator. carry out any investigation or measure-
For this reason, when carrying out troubleshoot- ment that may make the problem worse.
ing, it is necessary to carry out thorough prior
investigation and to carry out troubleshooting in 5. Troubleshooting
accordance with the fixed procedure. • Use the results of the investigation and in-
spection in Items 2 – 4 to narrow down the
2. Points to ask user or operator causes of failure, then use the troubleshoot-
1) Have any other problems occurred apart ing flowchart to locate the position of the fail-
from the problem that has been reported? ure exactly.
2) Was there anything strange about the a The basic procedure for troubleshooting
machine before the failure occurred? is as follows.
3) Did the failure occur suddenly, or were there 1) Start from the simple points.
problems with the machine condition before 2) Start from the most likely points.
this? 3) Investigate other related parts or
4) Under what conditions did the failure occur? information.
5) Had any repairs been carried out before the
failure? 6. Measures to remove root cause of failure
When were these repairs carried out? • Even if the failure is repaired, if the root
6) Has the same kind of failure occurred cause of the failure is not repaired, the same
before? failure will occur again.
To prevent this, always investigate why the
3. Check before troubleshooting problem occurred. Then, remove the root
1) Check the oil level cause.
2) Check for any external leakage of oil from
the piping or hydraulic equipment.
3) Check the travel of the control levers.
4) Check the stroke of the control valve spool.
20-202 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING SEQUENCE OF EVENTS IN TROUBLESHOOTING
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS IN TROUBLESHOOTING
PC130-7 20-203
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING POINTS TO REMEMBER WHEN CARRYING OUT MAINTENANCE
POINTS TO REMEMBER WHEN CARRYING OUT MAINTENANCE

To maintain the performance of the machine over a long period, and to prevent failures or other troubles before
they occur, correct operation, maintenance and inspection, troubleshooting, and repairs must be carried out.
This section deals particularly with correct repair procedures for mechatronics and is aimed at improving the
quality of repairs. For this purpose, it gives sections on “Handling electric equipment“ and “Handling hydraulic
equipment” (particularly gear oil and hydraulic oil).
1. Points to remember when handling electric

equipment
1) Handling wiring harnesses and connectors

Wiring harnesses consist of wiring connecting
one component to another component, connec-
tors used for connecting and disconnecting one
wire from another wire, and protectors or tubes
used for protecting the wiring.
Compared with other electrical components fit-
ted in boxes or cases, wiring harnesses are
more likely to be affected by the direct effects of
rain, water, heat, or vibration. Furthermore, dur-
ing inspection and repair operations, they are
frequently removed and installed again, so they
are likely to suffer deformation or damage. For
this reason, it is necessary to be extremely care-
ful when handling wiring harnesses.
Main failures occurring in wiring harness

1) Defective contact of connectors (defective
contact between male and female)
Problems with defective contact are likely to
occur because the male connector is not
properly inserted into the female connector,
or because one or both of the connectors is
deformed or the position is not correctly
aligned, or because there is corrosion or
oxidization of the contact surfaces.
2) Defective crimping or soldering of connec-

tors
The pins of the male and female connectors
are in contact at the crimped terminal or sol-
dered portion, but if there is excessive force
brought to bear on the wiring, the plating at
the joint will peel and cause improper con-
nection or breakage.
20-204 PC130-7
(1)
3) Disconnections in wiring
If the wiring is held and the connectors are
pulled apart, or components are lifted with a
crane with the wiring still connected, or a
heavy object hits the wiring, the crimping of
the connector may separate, or the solder-
ing may be damaged, or the wiring may be
broken.
4) High-pressure water entering connector

The connector is designed to make it diffi-
cult for water to enter (drip-proof structure),
but if high-pressure water is sprayed directly
on the connector, water may enter the con-
nector, depending on the direction of the
water jet.
As already said, the connector is designed
to prevent water from entering, but at the
same time, if water does enter, it is difficult
for it to be drained. Therefore, if water
should get into the connector, the pins will
be short-circuited by the water, so if any
water gets in, immediately dry the connector
or take other appropriate action before
passing electricity through it.
5) Oil or dirt stuck to connector

If oil or grease are stuck to the connector
and an oil film is formed on the mating sur-
face between the male and female pins, the
oil will not let the electricity pass, so there
will be defective contact.
If there is oil or grease stuck to the connec-
tor, wipe it off with a dry cloth or blow it dry
with compressed air and spray it with a con-
tact restorer.
a When wiping the mating portion of the
connector, be careful not to use exces-
sive force or deform the pins.
a If there is oil or water in the compressed
air, the contacts will become even dirtier,
so remove the oil and water from the
compressed air completely before
cleaning with compressed air.
PC130-7 20-205
(1)
2) Removing, installing, and drying connectors

and wiring harnesses
• Disconnecting connectors
1) Hold the connectors when disconnecting.
When disconnecting the connectors, hold
the connectors and not the wires. For con-
nectors held by a screw, loosen the screw
fully, then hold the male and female connec-
tors in each hand and pull apart. For con-
nectors which have a lock stopper, press
down the stopper with your thumb and pull
the connectors apart.
a Never pull with one hand.
2) When removing from clips

When removing a connector from a clip, pull
the connector in a parallel direction to the
clip.
a If the connector is twisted up and down
or to the left or right, the housing may
break.
3) Action to take after removing connectors

After removing any connector, cover it with a
vinyl bag to prevent any dust, dirt, oil, or
water from getting in the connector portion.
a If the machine is left disassembled for a
long time, it is particularly easy for im-
proper contact to occur, so always cover
the connector.
20-206 PC130-7
(1)
• Connecting connectors
1) Check the connector visually.
1) Check that there is no oil, dirt, or water
stuck to the connector pins (mating por-
tion).
2) Check that there is no deformation,
defective contact, corrosion, or damage
to the connector pins.
3) Check that there is no damage or break-
age to the outside of the connector.
a If there is any oil, water, or dirt stuck to
the connector, wipe it off with a dry cloth.
If any water has got inside the connec-
tor, warm the inside of the wiring with a
dryer, but be careful not to make it too
hot as this will cause short circuits.
a If there is any damage or breakage, re-
place the connector.
2) Fix the connector securely.

Align the position of the connector correctly,
then insert it securely.
For connectors with lock stopper, push in
the connector until the stopper clicks into
position.
3) Correct any protrusion of the boot and any

misalignment of the wiring harness
For connectors fitted with boots, correct any
protrusion of the boot. In addition, if the wir-
ing harness is misaligned, or the clamp is
out of position, adjust it to its correct posi-
tion.
a If the connector cannot be corrected
easily, remove the clamp and adjust the
position.
4) If the connector clamp has been removed,

be sure to return it to its original position.
Check also that there are no loose clamps.
• Connecting connectors (DT type connector)

Since the DT 8-pole and 12-pole DT type con-
nectors have 2 latches respectively, push them
in until they click 2 times.
1. Male connector, 2. Female connector
• Normal locking state (Horizontal): a, b, d
• Incomplete locking state (Diagonal): c
PC130-7 20-207
(1)
• Drying wiring harness

If there is any oil or dirt on the wiring harness,
wipe it off with a dry cloth. Avoid washing it in
water or using steam. If the connector must be
washed in water, do not use high-pressure
water or steam directly on the wiring harness.
If water gets directly on the connector, do as fol-

lows.
1) Disconnect the connector and wipe off the
water with a dry cloth.
a If the connector is blown dry with com-
pressed air, there is the risk that oil in the
air may cause defective contact, so re-
move all oil and water from the com-
pressed air before blowing with air.
2) Dry the inside of the connector with a dryer.

If water gets inside the connector, use a
dryer to dry the connector.
a Hot air from the dryer can be used, but
regulate the time that the hot air is used
in order not to make the connector or re-
lated parts too hot, as this will cause de-
formation or damage to the connector.
3) Carry out a continuity test on the connector.

After drying, leave the wiring harness dis-
connected and carry out a continuity test to
check for any short circuits between pins
caused by water.
a After completely drying the connector,
blow it with contact restorer and reas-
semble.
20-208 PC130-7
(1)
3) Handling control box

1) The control box contains a microcomputer
and electronic control circuits. These control
all of the electronic circuits on the machine,
so be extremely careful when handling the
control box.
2) Do not open the cover of the control box
unless necessary.
3) Do not place objects on top of the control

box.
4) Cover the control connectors with tape or a
vinyl bag.
Never touch the connector contacts with
your hand.
5) During rainy weather, do not leave the con-
trol box in a place where it is exposed to
rain.
6) Do not place the control box on oil, water, or

soil, or in any hot place, even for a short
time.
(Place it on a suitable dry stand).
7) Precautions when carrying out arc welding
When carrying out arc welding on the body,
disconnect all wiring harness connectors
connected to the control box. Fit an arc
welding ground close to the welding point.
2. Points to remember when troubleshooting electric circuits

1) Always turn the power OFF before disconnecting or connect connectors.
2) Before carrying out troubleshooting, check that all the related connectors are properly inserted.
a Disconnect and connect the related connectors several times to check.
3) Always connect any disconnected connectors before going on to the next step.
a If the power is turned ON with the connectors still disconnected, unnecessary abnormality displays
will be generated.
4) When carrying out troubleshooting of circuits (measuring the voltage, resistance, continuity, or current),
move the related wiring and connectors several times and check that there is no change in the reading
of the tester.
a If there is any change, there is probably defective contact in that circuit.
PC130-7 20-209
(1)
3. Points to remember when handling hydraulic

equipment
With the increase in pressure and precision of

hydraulic equipment, the most common cause of
failure is dirt (foreign material) in the hydraulic cir-
cuit. When adding hydraulic oil, or when disassem-
bling or assembling hydraulic equipment, it is
necessary to be particularly careful.
1) Be careful of the operating environment.

Avoid adding hydraulic oil, replacing filters, or
repairing the machine in rain or high winds, or
places where there is a lot of dust.
2) Disassembly and maintenance work in the

field
If disassembly or maintenance work is carried
out on hydraulic equipment in the field, there is
danger of dust entering the equipment. It is also
difficult to confirm the performance after repairs,
so it is desirable to use unit exchange. Disas-
sembly and main-tenance of hydraulic equip-
ment should be carried out in a specially
prepared dustproof workshop, and the perfor-
mance should be confirmed with special test
equipment.
3) Sealing openings
After any piping or equipment is removed, the
openings should be sealed with caps, tapes, or
vinyl bags to prevent any dirt or dust from enter-
ing. If the opening is left open or is blocked with
a rag, there is danger of dirt entering or of the
surrounding area being made dirty by leaking oil
so never do this.
Do not simply drain oil out on to the ground, col-
lect it and ask the customer to dispose of it, or
take it back with you for disposal.
4) Do not let any dirt or dust get in during refill-

ing operations.
Be careful not to let any dirt or dust get in when
refilling with hydraulic oil. Always keep the oil
filler and the area around it clean, and also use
clean pumps and oil containers. If an oil clean-
ing device is used, it is possible to filter out the
dirt that has collected during storage, so this is
an even more effective method.
20-210 PC130-7
(1)
5) Change hydraulic oil when the temperature

is high.
When hydraulic oil or other oil is warm, it flows
easily. In addition, the sludge can also be
drained out easily from the circuit together with
the oil, so it is best to change the oil when it is
still warm. When changing the oil, as much as
possible of the old hydraulic oil must be drained
out. (Drain the oil from the hydraulic tank; also
drain the oil from the filter and from the drain
plug in the circuit.) If any old oil is left, the con-
taminants and sludge in it will mix with the new
oil and will shorten the life of the hydraulic oil.
6) Flushing operations
After disassembling and assembling the equip-
ment, or changing the oil, use flushing oil to
remove the contaminants, sludge, and old oil
from the hydraulic circuit.
Normally, flushing is carried out twice: primary
flushing is carried out with flushing oil, and sec-
ondary flushing is carried out with the specified
hydraulic oil.
7) Cleaning operations
After repairing the hydraulic equipment (pump,
c o n tr o l v a lv e , e t c .) o r wh e n r u n ni n g t he
machine, carry out oil cleaning to remove the
sludge or contaminants in the hydraulic oil cir-
cuit.
The oil cleaning equipment is used to remove
the ultrafine (about 3µ) particles that the filter
built into the hydraulic equipment cannot
remove, so it is an extremely effective device.
PC130-7 20-211
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING INSPECTION BEFORE TROUBLESHOOTING
INSPECTION BEFORE TROUBLESHOOTING
Item Criterion Remedy
1. Check of level and type of fuel — Add fuel

2. Check of fuel for foreign matter — Clean or drain
Lubricating oil/Coolant
3. Check of fuel filter cartridge for clogging — Replace

4. Check of level and type of oil in engine oil pan — Add oil
5. Check of engine oil filter for clogging — Replace
6. Check of coolant level — Add coolant
7. Check of air cleaner for clogging — Clean or replace
8. Check of level and type of hydraulic oil — Add oil
9. Check of hydraulic oil strainer for clogging — Clean or drain
10. Check of hydraulic oil filter for clogging — Replace
11. Check of level and type of swing machinery oil — Add oil
12. Check of level and type of final drive oil — Add oil
equipment
Electrical
1. Check of battery terminal wires for looseness and corrosion — Retighten or replace
2. Check of alternator terminal wires for looseness and corrosion — Retighten or replace
3. Check of starting motor terminal wires for looseness and corrosion — Retighten or replace
Hydraulic and
mechanical
equipment
1. Check for abnormal sound and smell — Repair

2. Check for oil leakage — Repair
3. Air bleeding operation — Bleed air
1. Check of battery voltage (with engine stopped) 20 – 30V Charge or replace

2. Check of electrolyte level — Add distilled water
or replace electro-
lyte
3. Check of wires for discoloration, burn, and removal of covers — Replace
4. Check of wires for removal of clamps and looseness — Repair
Electrical parts
5. Check of wires for wetting with water (Particularly check connectors and — Disconnect and dry
terminals for wetting) connectors
6. Check of fuses for breakage and corrosion — Replace
7. Check of alternator voltage (with engine at medium or higher speed) Must be 27.5 - Replace
29.5 V after
operation of
several min-
utes.
8. Check of operating sound of battery relay (when starting switch is — Replace
turned OFF and ON)
20-212 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING CLASSIFICATION OF AND PROCEDURES FOR TROUBLESHOOTING
CLASSIFICATION OF AND PROCEDURES FOR

TROUBLESHOOTING
Classification of troubleshooting
Mode Contents
Code display Troubleshooting when error code is displayed
E-mode Troubleshooting for electric system
H-mode Troubleshooting for hydraulic and mechanical system
S-mode Troubleshooting for engine unit
Procedure for troubleshooting

If a phenomenon looking like a trouble occurs in the machine, select a proper troubleshooting No. according to
the following procedure, and then go to the corresponding troubleshooting section.
1. Procedure for troubleshooting to be taken when user code is displayed on monitor panel:
If a user code is displayed on the monitor panel, display the error code by using the error code display func-
tion of the monitor panel.
Carry out the troubleshooting for the corresponding "Code display" according to the displayed error code.
2. Procedure for troubleshooting when electrical system error code or mechanical system error code
is recorded in error history:
If a user code is not displayed on the monitor panel, check the error code with the error code display func-
tion of the monitor panel.
If the error code is recorded, carry out troubleshooting for the corresponding "Code display" according to
the displayed error code.
a If error codes are recorded, delete all of them and reproduce them, and then see if the trouble is still de-
tected.
a If an error code is still output, the mark of "E" is displayed at the left end of the lower line.
3. Procedure for troubleshooting to be taken when user code is not displayed and error history is not
recorded:
If a user code is not displayed in the monitor panel and an error code is not recorded, a trouble that the
machine cannot find out by itself may have occurred in the electrical system or hydraulic and mechanical
system.
In this case, check the phenomenon looking like a trouble again and select the same phenomenon from the
table of "Phenomena looking like troubles and troubleshooting Nos.", and then carry out troubleshooting
related to that phenomenon in the "E mode", "H mode", or "S mode".
PC130-7 20-213
(1)
Phenomena looking like troubles and troubleshooting Nos.
Troubleshooting
No. Phenomenon looking like trouble Code
E-mode H-mode S-mode
display
Phenomena related to user code or error code
1 User codes are displayed on monitor panel Accord-
ing to dis-
2 If error code display function is checked, error codes are displayed played
code
Phenomena related to engine
3 Engine does not start easily (It always takes time to start) S-1
4 Engine does not crank E-1 S-2 a)
Engine cranks but exhaust smoke
5 does not come out S-2 b)
Engine does not start
(Fuel is not injected)
Exhaust smoke comes out but engine
6 S-2 c)
does not start (Fuel is injected)
7 Engine speed does not rise sharply (Follow-up performance is low) S-3
8 Engine stops during operation E-2 S-4
9 Engine rotation is abnormal (Engine hunts) E-3 S-5
10 Output is insufficient (Power is low) S-6
11 Exhaust gas color is bad (Incomplete combustion) S-7
12 Oil is consumed much (or exhaust gas color is bad) S-8
13 Oil becomes dirty quickly S-9
14 Fuel is consumed much S-10
15 Coolant contains oil (or it blows back or reduces) S-11
16 Engine oil pressure caution lamp lights up (Oil pressure lowers) S-12
17 Oil level rises (Water or fuel is mixed in oil) S-13
18 Water temperature rises too high (Overheating) S-14
19 Abnormal sound comes out S-15
20 Vibration is excessive S-16
21 Engine does not stop E-4
22 Auto-decelerator does not operate E-5 H-5
23 Automatic warm-up system does not operate E-6
24 Preheater does not operate E-7
Phenomena related to work equipment, swing, and travel
25 Speed or power of whole work equipment, travel, and swing is low H-1 S-6
26 Engine speed lowers extremely or engine stalls H-2 S-4
27 Work equipment, travel, and swing systems do not work E-8 H-3
28 Abnormal sound comes out from around hydraulic pump H-4
29 Fine control performance or response is low H-6
20-214 PC130-7
(1)
Troubleshooting
display
Phenomena related to work equipment
30 Speed or power of boom is low H-7
31 Speed or power of arm is low H-8
32 Speed or power of bucket is low H-9
33 Work equipment does not move singly H-10
34 Hydraulic drift of work equipment is large H-11
35 Time lag of work equipment is large H-12
36 One-touch power maximizing function does not work E-9 H-13
Phenomena related to compound operation
In compound operation of work equipment, speed of part loaded
37 H-14
more is low
When machine swings and raises boom simultaneously, boom rising
38 H-15
speed is low
When machine operates work equipment or swings and travels
39 H-16
simultaneously, travel speed lowers largely
Phenomena related to travel
40 Machine deviates during travel H-17
41 Travel speed is low H-18
42 Machine is not steered well or steering power is low H-19
43 Travel speed does not change H-20
44 Travel motor does not work (only 1 side) H-21
45 Travel alarm does not sound or does not stop sounding E-33
Phenomena related to swing
46 Upper structure does not swing H-22
47 Swing acceleration or swing speed is low H-23
48 Upper structure overruns remarkably when it stops swinging H-24
49 Large shock is made when upper structure stops swinging H-25
50 Large sound is made when upper structure stops swinging H-26
51 Hydraulic drift of swing is large H-27
Phenomena related to monitor panel (Operator menu: Ordinary screen)
52 No items are displayed on monitor panel E-10
53 7-segment LED's of monitor panel display partially E-11
54 Monitor lamp of monitor panel is different from mounted model E-12
When starting switch is turned ON, basic check items light up or
55 E-13
flash
56 While engine is running, caution items flash E-14
57 While engine is running, emergency stop items flash E-15
58 Engine coolant thermometer does not display normally E-16
59 Fuel level gauge does not display normally E-17
60 Swing lock monitor does not display normally E-18
PC130-7 20-215
(1)
Troubleshooting
display
When monitor switches are operated, display by lamps does not
61 E-19
change
62 Windshield wiper or windshield washer does not operate E-20
63 Lower wiper does not operate E-21
64 Caution buzzer cannot be stopped E-22
Phenomena related to monitor panel (Service menu: Special function screen)
65 Monitoring function does not display "Boom RAISE" normally E-23
66 Monitoring function does not display "Boom LOWER" normally E-24
67 Monitoring function does not display "Arm IN" normally E-25
68 Monitoring function does not display "Arm OUT" normally E-26
69 Monitoring function does not display "Bucket CURL" normally E-27
70 Monitoring function does not display "Bucket DUMP" normally E-28
71 Monitoring function does not display "Swing" normally E-29
72 Monitoring function does not display "Travel" normally E-30
73 Monitoring function does not display "Service" normally E-31
Other phenomena
Air conditioner does not operate (Troubleshooting for air conditioner
74 E-32
system)
20-216 PC130-7
(1)
CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT DRAWING AND ELECTRIC
TROUBLESHOOTING CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF EACH SYSTEM

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF EACH SYSTEM
Connectors list
a The address of each connector roughly shows the place of the connector in
the connectors stereogram and the circuit diagram of each system.
Address
Connector No. of
Type Name of device Stereo- M- G- P-
No pins
gram circuit circuit circuit
A01 X 4 Intermediate connector S-1 H-7 I-8 H-8
A02 X 4 Intermediate connector T-1 H-7 I-8 H-7
A03 DT 12 Intermediate connector N-3 H-6 I-6 H-7
A04 SWP 6 Intermediate connector N-1 H-7
A05 SWP 14 Intermediate connector T-1 H-6 H-6
A06 SWP 14 Intermediate connector N-1 H-6 H-5
A07 SWP 16 Intermediate connector S-1 H-4 I-7 H-5
A09 SWP 8 Intermediate connector N-2 H-5
A10 Terminal 1 Revolving frame ground I-1 I-1 G-1 I-1
A11 Terminal 1 Revolving frame ground I-2 I-1
A12 Terminal 1 Revolving frame ground I-2 I-1
A13 Terminal 1 Revolving frame ground I-2 I-1 G-1 I-1
A14 Terminal 1 Revolving frame ground L-1 I-1 H-1
A15 Terminal 1 Revolving frame ground J-2 I-1 J-1
A16 Terminal 1 Revolving frame ground J-2 I-1 J-1
A20 Terminal 1 Battery relay (Terminal E) L-2 J-3 J-4
A21 Terminal 1 Battery relay (Terminal BR) L-2 J-2 J-3
A22 Terminal 1 Battery relay (Terminal M) K-2 J-2 K-4
A23 Terminal 1 Battery relay (Terminal B) K-3 J-2 K-3
A25 Terminal 1 Heater relay (Coil) K-1 K-3 K-7
A26 Terminal 1 Heater relay (Contact) K-1 K-3 K-7
A27 X 2 Starting motor safety relay (Terminals S, R) L-1 K-3 K-5
A29 Terminal 1 Starting motor safety relay (Terminals C) K-2 K-3 L-5
A31 D 2 Air cleaner clogging switch L-7 K-5
A33 X 2 Radiator coolant level sensor L-5 K-5
A34 L 2 Fusible link (65A) L-3 K-7 L-3
A35 M 2 Fusible link (30A) L-3 K-7 L-3
A41 090-II 1 Horn G-1
A42 X 1 Intermediate connector G-9 G-2
A43 X 2 Travel alarm (If equipped) I-9 K-5
One-pin
A44 1 Working lamp (Right front) D-9 H-1
connector
A50 X 2 Intermediate connector E-9
A50 KES0 2 Windshield washer motor (Tank) E-9 K-6
A51 D 3 Pump oil pressure sensor I-9 K-6
A60 X 1 Fuel level sensor G-9 K-5
A61 D 2 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor K-9 K-6
A70 D 3 Overload alarm pressure sensor (If equipped) G-9 A-70
A71K D 2 Fuel priming pump (If equipped) G-1
A80 — 4 Spare connector R-1
A95 D 2 Spare connector K-8
A96 D 2 Spare connector K-8
A97 D 2 Spare connector L-8
A98 D 2 Spare connector L-8
A99 SWP 8 Intermediate connector N-2 H-3 H-4
PC130-7 20-217
(1)
Address
Connector No. of
No pins
C01 DRC 24 Governor and pump controller U-9 A-4 A-8 A-8
C02 DRC 40 Governor and pump controller V-9 A-3 A-7 A-7
C03 DRC 40 Governor and pump controller W-9 A-3 A-4 A-4
C09 S 8 Model selection connector U-9 C-8
D01 SWP 8 Concentrated diode W-9 A-8 D-1 G-8
D02 SWP 8 Concentrated diode W-8 A-8 D-1
D03 SWP 8 Concentrated diode W-3 L-3
E01 Terminal 1 Electrical intake air heater J-9 L-7
E02 Terminal 1 Engine oil pressure switch K-8 L-4
E03 D 2 Engine oil level switch K-8 K-6
E04 D 2 Engine speed sensor H-9 K-9
E05 D 2 Engine coolant temperature sensor K-8 K-5
E06 M 3 Fuel control dial O-8 F-1
E06 X 1 Air conditioner compressor magnetic clutch J-8
E08 X 2 Intermediate connector L-7 K-4 I-1
E10 D 3 Governor potentiometer J-9 K-6
E11 D 4 Governor motor J-8 K-6
E12 X 2 Alternator [35-A alternator specification] J-2 K-2 L-2
F02A SWP 2 Intermediate connector AA-9
F02B DT 2 Rotary lamp (If equipped) AA-9
FB1 — — Fuse box U-2 J-9 B-1 D-3
H07 M 2 Intermediate connector Y-5
H08 M 8 Intermediate connector W-6 J-8
H09 S 8 Intermediate connector W-6 J-8
H10 S 16 Intermediate connector S-9 C-7 I-9
H11 S 16 Intermediate connector S-9 C-6 I-9 B-9
H12 S 12 Intermediate connector S-9 C-5 I-8
H15 090 20 Intermediate connector N-7 C-3 C-3
J01 J 20 Junction connector (Black) T-9 C-9 D-9 C-9
J02 J 20 Junction connector (Black) V-3 C-9 D-9 D-9
J03 J 20 Junction connector (Green) V-3 D-9 D-9
J04 J 20 Junction connector (Green) V-3 D-9 E-9 E-9
J05 J 20 Junction connector (Pink) V-3 E-9 E-9 E-9
J06 J 20 Junction connector (Orange) W-3 E-9
J07 J 20 Junction connector (Orange) W-4 F-9 F-9 E-9
J08 J 20 Junction connector (Pink) W-4
J09 J 20 Junction connector (Pink) W-3 F-9 E-9
J10 J 20 Junction connector (Orange) W-3 G-9
K19 M 2 Pump resistor (For driving pump in emergency) W-3 G-8
K30 DT 3 CAN terminal resistance W-7 A-3 C-1
K31 DT 3 CAN terminal resistance N-4 A-4 L-8
M07 M 3 Light switch P-8 B-1
M09 M 1 Working lamp (Boom front) F-9 G-1
M13 — 2 Speaker (Right) AC-8
M19 — 2 Cigarette lighter N-3
M21 PA 9 Radio (If equipped) U-2
M22 090 6 Right lever knob switch N-7
M23 090 8 Left lever knob switch T-1 B-8
M26 SWP 12 Intermediate connector W-4
M27 — 16 Air conditioner unit W-5
M29 040 20 Air conditioner control panel U-2
20-218 PC130-7
(1)
Address
Connector No. of
No pins
M30 — 16 Air conditioner control panel U-2
M31 M 2 Optional power supply (2) W-6
M31B M 2 Heated seat (If equipped) U-2
M32 M 2 Optional power supply (1) Y-5
M32B M 2 Heated seat (If equipped) V-2
M33 M 2 Heated seat switch (If equipped) W-2
M33 SWP 8 Air conditioner unit W-6
M40 SWP 2 Headlamp (Left) Z-8 K-8
M40A SWP 2 Intermediate connector AA-8 K-8
M40B SWP 2 Rear lamp (If equipped) AC-8 K-8
M41 SWP 2 Headlamp (Right) Y-7 K-7
M42 X 1 Intermediate connector I-9 H-2
M43 M 1 Working lamp (Rear) (If equipped) I-9 H-1
M45 D 12 Network bus connector W-8
M46 090 4 RS232C junction connector V-9 B-9
M50 AMP 8 Radio cassette (If equipped) AD-8
M51 AMP 8 Radio cassette (If equipped) AD-8
M71 M 2 Room lamp Z-8
M72 M 4 DC/DC converter W-7
M73 — 2 Speaker (Left) AD-7
M91 M 1 Working lamp (Left front) (If equipped) H-1 H-8
M92 KES0 4 Lower wiper motor H-1 H-8
P01 070 12 Monitor panel N-6 A-7 L-9
P02 040 20 Monitor panel N-5 A-6 L-9 A-9
P03 M 2 Caution buzzer stop switch P-9 B-1
P05 M 2 Rotary lamp switch (If equipped) W-2
P06 M 2 Lower wiper switch W-1 F-1
P15 Y050 2 Air conditioner daylight sensor (If equipped) N-6
P17 — 2 Air conditioner high/low pressure switch N-4
P70 040 16 Monitor panel N-5 A-5 L-9
R10 R 5 Light relay (1) O-8 D-1
R11 R 5 Starting motor cutout relay (PPC lock) P-8 D-1 B-9
R13 R 5 Starting motor cutout relay (Personal code) Q-9 D-1
R16 R 5 Light relay (2) T-9 E-1
R17 R 5 12-V selector relay W-4
R18 R 5 Lower wiper relay T-9 E-1
R20 R 5 Spare connector T-9 C-9
R22 R 5 Spare connector U-9 C-9
R30 R 5 Air conditioner blower relay W-6
R31 R 5 Air conditioner compressor relay W-5
S01 X 2 Bucket CURL pressure switch L-6 K-4
S02 X 2 Boom LOWER oil pressure switch L-4 K-4
S03 X 2 Swing LEFT oil pressure switch L-7 K-3
S04 X 2 Arm IN pressure switch L-5 K-4
S05 X 2 Bucket DUMP oil pressure switch L-6 K-3
S06 X 2 Boom RAISE oil pressure switch L-4 K-5
S07 X 2 Swing RIGHT oil pressure switch L-6 K-3
S08 X 2 Arm OUT oil pressure switch L-5 K-4
S09 X 2 Intermediate connector L-3 H-3
S10 X 2 Service 1 (Front) oil pressure switch (If equipped) L-3 G-2
S11 X 2 Service 1 (Rear) oil pressure switch (If equipped) K-3 G-2
PC130-7 20-219
(1)
Address
Connector No. of
No pins
S14 M 3 Safety lock switch T-1 K-9 F-8
S21 Terminal 6 Emergency pump drive switch R-9 E-2
S21 X 2 Service 2 (Front) oil pressure switch (If equipped) K-3 G-1
S22 Terminal 6 Swing holding brake release switch R-9 F-2
S22 X 2 Service 2 (Rear) oil pressure switch (If equipped) K-3 G-1
S25 090 16 Intermediate connector Q-9 E-3
S30 X 2 Travel oil pressure switch O-1 A-1
S31 X 2 Spare connector P-1 A-1
SC Terminal 1 Starting motor (Terminal C) J-8
T05 Terminal 1 Floor frame ground V-2
T06 Terminal 1 Radio body ground U-2
T06A M 1 Intermediate connector T-2
T11 Terminal 1 Cab ground AD-3
T13 D 1 Intermediate connector K-8 K-4 I-2
V01 D 2 PPC lock solenoid valve J-2 K-8
V04 D 2 Travel speed shifting solenoid valve J-2 K-7
V05 D 2 Swing holding brake solenoid valve J-3 K-7
V06 D 2 2-stage relief solenoid K-3 K-7
V21 D 2 PC-EPC solenoid valve K-9 K-9
V22 D 2 LS-EPC solenoid valve K-9 K-8
V30 X 2 Spare connector N-2 A-1
W03 X 2 Window rear limit switch AB-9 K-8
W04 M 6 Wiper motor Y-3 A-9
X05 M 4 Swing lock switch Q-9 C-1 C-2
20-220 PC130-7
(1)
STEREOGRAM OF CONNECTORS
20-222 PC130-7
(1)
PC130-7 20-223
(1)
20-224 PC130-7
(1)
PC130-7 20-225
(1)
20-226 PC130-7
(1)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF MONITOR PANEL SYSTEM (M-CIRCUIT)
20-228 PC130-7
(1)
a This circuit diagram is made by excerpting the monitor panel system, engine preheating/starting/charging
system, lower wiper system, and light system from the general electric circuit diagram.
PC130-7 20-229
(3)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF ENGINE THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM OF GOVERNOR AND

PUMP CONTROLLER (G-CIRCUIT)
20-230 PC130-7
(1)
a This circuit diagram is made by excerpting the governor and pump controller system (engine throttle/power
supply/model selection/communication system) from the general electric circuit diagram.
PC130-7 20-231
(1)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF PUMP CONTROL SYSTEM OF GOVERNOR AND PUMP CON-

TROLLER (P-CIRCUIT)
20-232 PC130-7
(1)
a This circuit diagram is made by excerpting the governor and pump controller system (pump control), PPC
lock system, and travel alarm system from the general electric circuit diagram.
PC130-7 20-233
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING CONNECTION TABLE FOR CONNECTOR PIN NUMBERS
CONNECTION TABLE FOR CONNECTOR PIN NUMBERS

a The terms male and female refer to the pins, while the terms male housing and female housing refer to the
mating portion of the housing.
X type connector
No.of
pins T-adapter
Male (female housing) Female (male housing)
Part No.
1 Part No.: 08055-00181 Part No.: 08055-00191 799-601-7010
2 799-601-7020
Part No.: 08055-00282 Part No.: 08055-00292
3 799-601-7030
Part No.: 08055-00381 Part No.: 08055-00391
4 799-601-7040
Part No.: 08055-00481 Part No.: 08055-00491

Terminal part No.: 79A-222-3370 Terminal part No.: 79A-222-3390
• Electric wire size: 0.85 • Electric wire size: 0.85
— —
• Grommet: Black • Grommet: Black
• Q’ty: 20 • Q’ty : 20
— —
• Grommet: Red • Grommet: Red
• Q’ty: 20 • Q’ty: 20
20-234 PC130-7
(1)
SWP type connector

No.of
pins T-adapter
Part No.
6 799-601-7050
Part No.: 08055-10681 Part No.: 08055-10691
8 799-601-7060
Part No.: 08055-10881 Part No.: 08055-10891
12 799-601-7310
Part No.: 08055-11281 Part No.: 08055-11291
14 799-601-7070
Part No.: 08055-11481 Part No.: 08055-11491
PC130-7 20-235
(1)
SWP type connector

No. of
pins T-adapter
Part No.
16 799-601-7320
Part No.: 08055-11681 Part No.: 08055-11691

Terminal part No.: Terminal part No.:
— —
• Grommet: Black • Grommet: Black
• Q’ty: 20 • Q’ty: 20
Terminal part No.: Terminal part No.:
— —
• Grommet: Red • Grommet: Red
• Q’ty: 20 • Q’ty: 20
20-236 PC130-7
(1)
M type connector
No.of
pins T-adapter Part
No.
1 Part No.: 08056-00171 Part No.: 08056-00181 799-601-7080
2 799-601-7090
Part No.: 08056-00271 Part No.: 08056-00281
3 799-601-7110
Part No.: 08056-00371 Part No.: 08056-00381
4 799-601-7120
Part No.: 08056-00471 Part No.: 08056-00481
6 799-601-7130
Part No.: 08056-00671 Part No.: 08056-00681
8 799-601-7340
Part No.: 08056-00871 Part No.: 08056-00881
PC130-7 20-237
(1)
S type connector
No.of
pins T-adapter
Part No.
8 799-601-7140
Part No.: 08056-10871 Part No.: 08056-10881
10
799-601-7150
(White)
Part No.: 08056-11071 Part No.: 08056-11081
12
799-601-7350
(White)
Part No.: 08056-11271 Part No.: 08056-11281
16
799-601-7330
(White)
Part No.: 08056-11671 Part No.: 08056-11681
20-238 PC130-7
(1)
S type connector
No.of
pins T-adapter
Part No.
10
—
(Blue)
— —
12
799-601-7160
(Blue)
Part No.: 08056-11272 Part No.: 08056-11282
16
799-601-7170
(Blue)
Part No.: 08056-11672 Part No.: 08056-11682
PC130-7 20-239
(1)
MIC type connector

No.of
pins T-adapter Part
No.
7 Body part No.: 79A-222-2640 (Q’ty: 5) Body part No.: 79A-222-2630 (Q’ty: 5) —
11 Body part No.: 79A-222-2680 (Q’ty: 5) Body part No.: 79A-222-2670 (Q’ty: 5) —
5 799-601-2710
Body part No.: 79A-222-2620 (Q’ty: 5) Body part No.: 79A-222-2610 (Q’ty: 5)
9 799-601-2950
13 799-601-2720
20-240 PC130-7
(1)
MIC type connector

No.of
pins T-adapter Part
No.
17 799-601-2730
21 799-601-2740
—
(Q’ty: 50) (Q’ty: 50)
PC130-7 20-241
(1)
AMP040 type connector

No.of
pins T-adapter Part
No.
8 799-601-7180
— Housing part No.: 79A-222-3430 (Q’ty: 5)
12 799-601-7190
16 799-601-7210
20 799-601-7220
a Terminal part No.: 79A-222-3470 (No relation with number of pins)
20-242 PC130-7
(1)
AMP070 type connector

No.of
pins T-adapter Part
No.
10 799-601-7510
— Part No.: 08195-10210
12 799-601-7520
— Part No.: 08195-12210
14 799-601-7530
— Part No.: 08195-14210
18 799-601-7540
— Part No.: 08195-18210
20 799-601-7550
— Part No.: 08195-20210
PC130-7 20-243
(1)
L type connector
No.of
pins T-adapter Part
No.
2 —
— —
Connector for PA
No.of
pins T-adapter Part
No.
9 —
— —
Bendix MS connector
No.of
pins T-adapter Part
No.
10 799-601-3460
— —
20-244 PC130-7
(1)
KES 1 (Automobile) connector

No.of
pins T-adapter Part
No.
2 —
Part No.: 08027-10210 (Natural color) Part No.: 08027-10260 (Natural color)
08027-10220 (Black) 08027-10270 (Black)
3 —
Part No.:08027-10310 Part No.:08027-10360
4 —
08027-10420 (Black) 08027-10470 (Black)
6 —
08027-10620 (Black) 08027-10670 (Black)
PC130-7 20-245
(1)
KES 1 (Automobile) connector

No.of
pins T-adapter Part
No.
8 —
08027-10820 (Black) 08027-10870 (Black)
Connector for relay (Socket type)

No.of
pins T-adapter Part
No.
5 799-601-7360
— —
6 799-601-7370
— —
20-246 PC130-7
(1)
F type connector
No.of
pins T-adapter
Part No.
4 —
— —
PC130-7 20-247
(1)
[The pin No. is also marked on the connector (electric wire insertion end)]
Type HD30 Series connector

(shell
size T-adapter
Body (plug) Body (receptacle)
code) Part No.
Pin (male terminal) Pin (female termial)
799-601-9210
Part No.: 08191-11201, 08191-11202, Part No.: 08191-14101, 08191-14102,

18-8 08191-11205, 08191-11206 08191-14105, 08191-14106
(1) Pin (female terminal) Pin (male termial)
799-601-9210
Part No.: 08191-12201, 08191-12202, Part No.: 08191-13101, 08191-13102,

08191-12205, 08191-12206 08191-13105, 08191-13106
799-601-9220
Part No.: 08191-21201, 08191-12202, Part No.: 08191-24101, 08191-24102,

18-14 08191-21205, 08191-12206 08191-24105, 08191-24106
799-601-9220
Part No.: 08191-22201, 08191-22202, Part No.: 08191-23101, 08191-23102,

08191-22205, 08191-22206 08191-23105, 08191-23106
20-248 PC130-7
(1)

(shell
size T-adapter
code) Part No.
799-601-9230
18-20 Part No.:08191-31201, 08191-31202 Part No.:08191-34101, 08191-34102

799-601-9230
Part No.:08191-32201, 08191-32202 Part No.:08191-33101, 08191-33102

799-601-9240
18-21 Part No.:08191-41201, 08191-42202 Part No.:08191-44101, 08191-44102

799-601-9240
Part No.:08191-42201, 08191-42202 Part No.:08191-43101, 08191-43102
PC130-7 20-249
(1)

(shell
size T-adapter
code) Part No.
799-601-9250
24-9 Part No.:08191-51201, 08191-51202 Part No.:08191-54101, 08191-54102

799-601-9250
Part No.:08191-52201, 08191-52202 Part No.:08191-53101, 08191-53102

799-601-9260
Part No.: 08191-61201, 08191-62202, Part No.: 08191-64101, 08191-64102,

24-16 08191-61205, 08191-62206 08191-64105, 08191-64106
799-601-9260
Part No.: 08191-62201, 08191-62202, Part No.: 08191-63101, 08191-63102,

08191-62205, 08191-62206 08191-63105, 08191-63106
20-250 PC130-7
(1)

(shell
size T-adapter
code) Part No.
799-601-9270
Part No.: 08191-71201, 08191-71202, Part No.: 08191-74101, 08191-74102,

24-21 08191-71205, 08191-71206 08191-74105, 08191-74106
799-601-9270
Part No.: 08191-72201, 08191-72202, Part No.: 08191-73101, 08191-73102,

08191-72205, 08191-72206 08191-73105, 08191-73106
799-601-9280
Part No.: 08191-81201, 08191-81202 Part No.: 08191-84101, 08191-84102

08191-81203, 08191-81204 08191-84103, 08191-84104
24-22 08191-81205, 08191-80206 08191-84105, 08191-84106
799-601-9280
Part No.: 08191-82201, 08191-82202 Part No.: 08191-83101, 08191-83102

08191-82203, 08191-82204 08191-83103, 08191-83104
08191-82205, 08191-82206 08191-83105, 08191-83106
PC130-7 20-251
(1)

(shell
size T-adapter
code) Part No.
Pin (male termial) Pin (female terminal)
799-601-9290
Part No.: 08191-91203, 08191-91204, Part No.: 08191-94103, 08191-94104,

24-31 08191-91205, 08191-91206 08191-94105, 08191-94106
799-601-9290
Part No.: 08191-92203, 08191-92204, Part No.: 08191-93103, 08191-93104,

08191-92205, 08191-92206 08191-93105, 08191-93106
20-252 PC130-7
(1)
DT Series connector
No.of
pins Body (receptacle) T-adapter
Body (plug)
Part No.
2 799-601-9020
Part No.: 08192-12200 (normal type) Part No.: 08192-12100 (normal type)
08192-22200 (fine wire type) 08192-22100 (fine wire type)
3 799-601-9030
4 799-601-9040
6 799-601-9050
PC130-7 20-253
(1)
No.of DT Series connector

pins Body (plug) Body (receptacle) T-adapter Part No.
8GR: 799-601-9060
8B: 799-601-9070
8
8G: 799-601-9080
8BR: 799-601-9090
12GR: 799-601-9110
12B: 799-601-9120
12
12G: 799-601-9130
12BR: 799-601-9140
20-254 PC130-7
(1)
DTM Series connector

No.of
pins T-adapter Part
No.
799-601-9010
2
Part No.: 08192-02200 Part No.: 08192-02100
DTHD Series connector

No.of
pins T-adapter Part
No.
2 —
Part No.: 08192-31200 (Contact size#12) Part No.: 08192-31100 (Contact size#12)
08192-41200 (Contact size #8) 08192-41100 (Contact size #8)
08192-51200 (Contact size #4) 08192-51100 (Contact size #4)
PC130-7 20-255
(1)
DRC26 Series connector

No.of
pins T-adapter Part
No.
24 799-601-9360
— Part No.: 7821-93-3110
40
799-601-9350
(A)
— Part No.: 7821-93-3120
40
799-601-9350
(B)
— Part No.: 7821-93-3130
20-256 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING T-BRANCH BOX AND T-BRANCH TABLE
T-BRANCH BOX AND T-BRANCH TABLE

a The vertical column shows part number of T-Branch Box or T-Branch, and horizontal column shows part
number of Harness Checker Ass'y.
799-601-2500
799-601-2700
799-601-2800
799-601-2900
799-601-3000
799-601-5500
799-601-6000
799-601-6500
799-601-7000
799-601-7100
799-601-7400
799-601-7500
799-601-8000
799-601-9000
799-601-9100
799-601-9200
799-601-9300
Connector type or
—
Part No. No. of pins
part name
799-601-2600 Measurement box Econo-21P

799-601-3100 Measurement box MS-37P
799-601-3200 Measurement box MS-37P
799-601-3300 Measurement box Econo-24P
799-601-3360 Plate For MS box
799-601-3410 BENDIX (MS) 24P
799-601-3420 BENDIX (MS) 24P
799-601-3430 BENDIX (MS) 17P
799-601-3440 BENDIX (MS) 17P
799-601-3450 BENDIX (MS) 5P
799-601-3460 BENDIX (MS) 10P
799-601-3510 BENDIX (MS) 5P
799-601-3520 BENDIX (MS) 14P
799-601-3530 BENDIX (MS) 19P
799-601-2910 BENDIX (MS) 14P
799-601-3470 Case
799-601-2710 MIC 5P
799-601-2720 MIC 13P
799-601-2730 MIC 17P
799-601-2740 MIC 21P
799-601-2950 MIC 9P
799-601-2750 ECONO 2P
799-601-2760 ECONO 3P
799-601-2770 ECONO 4P
799-601-2780 ECONO 8P
799-601-2790 ECONO 12P
799-601-2810 DLI 8P
799-601-2820 DLI 12P
799-601-2830 DLI 16P
799-601-2840 Additional cable
799-601-2850 Case
799-601-7010 X 1P
799-601-7020 X 2P
799-601-7030 X 3P
799-601-7040 X 4P
799-601-7050 SWP 6P
799-601-7060 SWP 8P
799-601-7310 SWP 12P
799-601-7070 SWP 14P
799-601-7320 SWP 16P
799-601-7080 M 1P
799-601-7090 M 2P
799-601-7110 M 3P
799-601-7120 M 4P
799-601-7130 M 6P
799-601-7340 M 8P
PC130-7 20-257
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING T-BRANCH BOX AND T-BRANCH TABLE
799-601-2500
799-601-2700
799-601-2800
799-601-2900
799-601-3000
799-601-5500
799-601-6000
799-601-6500
799-601-7000
799-601-7100
799-601-7400
799-601-7500
799-601-8000
799-601-9000
799-601-9100
799-601-9200
799-601-9300
Connector type or
—
Part No. No. of pins
part name
799-601-7140 S 8P
799-601-7150 S 10P-White
799-601-7160 S 12P-Blue
799-601-7170 S 16P-Blue
799-601-7330 S 16P-White
799-601-7350 S 12P-White
799-601-7180 AMP040 8P
799-601-7190 AMP040 12P
799-601-7210 AMP040 16P
799-601-7220 AMP040 20P
799-601-7230 Short connector X-2
799-601-7240 Case
799-601-7270 Case
799-601-7510 070 10P
799-601-7520 070 12P
799-601-7530 070 14P
799-601-7540 070 18P
799-601-7550 070 20P
799-601-7360 Relay connector 5P
799-601-7370 Relay connector 6P
799-601-7380 JFC connector 2P
799-601-9010 DTM 2P
799-601-9020 DT 2P
799-601-9030 DT 3P
799-601-9040 DT 4P
799-601-9050 DT 6P
799-601-9060 DT 8P-Gray
799-601-9070 DT 8P-Black
799-601-9080 DT 8P-Green
799-601-9090 DT 8P-Brown
799-601-9110 DT 12P-Gray
799-601-9120 DT 12P-Black
799-601-9130 DT 12P-Green
799-601-9140 DT 12P-Brown
799-601-9210 HD30 18-8
799-601-9220 HD30 18-14
799-601-9230 HD30 18-20
799-601-9240 HD30 18-21
799-601-9250 HD24 24-9
799-601-9260 HD30 24-16
799-601-9270 HD30 24-21
799-601-9280 HD30 24-23
799-601-9290 HD30 24-31
799-601-9310 Plate For HD30
799-601-9320 Measurement box For DT, HD
799-601-9330 Case
799-601-9340 Case
799-601-9350 DRC 40P
799-601-9360 DRC 24P
799-601-9410 For NE, G sensor 2P
For fuel, boost
799-601-9420 3P
press.
799-601-9430 PVC socket 2P
20-258 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
WHEN ERROR CODE IS DISPLAYED
(DISPLAY OF ERROR CODE)
BEFORE CARRYING OUT TROUBLESHOOTING WHEN CODE IS DISPLAYED .................................. 20-302
INFORMATION IN TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE .................................................................................... 20-307
Error code [104] (Clogging of air cleaner) .................................................................................................. 20-310
Error code [108] (Overheating of engine coolant) .......................................................................................20-311
Error code [112] (Short circuit in wiper motor drive forward system) ......................................................... 20-312
Error code [113] (Short circuit in wiper motor drive reverse system) ......................................................... 20-314
Error code [114] (Short circuit in windshield washer drive system) ............................................................ 20-316
Error code [115] (Trouble in operation of windshield wiper) ....................................................................... 20-318
Error code [116] (Trouble in storage of windshield wiper) .......................................................................... 20-320
Error code [203] (Short circuit in swing holding brake solenoid) ................................................................ 20-322
Error code [205] (Short circuit in 2-stage relief solenoid) ........................................................................... 20-324
Error code [206] (Short circuit in travel speed shifting solenoid) ................................................................ 20-326
Error code [213] (Disconnection in swing holding brake solenoid) ............................................................ 20-328
Error code [215] (Disconnection in 2-stage relief solenoid) ....................................................................... 20-330
Error code [216] (Disconnection in travel speed shifting solenoid) ............................................................ 20-332
Error code [217] (Abnormality in input model code) ................................................................................... 20-334
Error code [218] (Disconnection in S-NET signal line) ............................................................................... 20-336
Error code [222] (Short circuit in LS-EPC solenoid) ................................................................................... 20-338
Error code [223] (Disconnection in LS-EPC solenoid) ............................................................................... 20-339
Error code [224] (Abnormality in pump pressure sensor) .......................................................................... 20-340
Error code [226] (Abnormality in pressure sensor power supply) .............................................................. 20-342
Error code [227] (Abnormality in engine speed sensor) ............................................................................. 20-344
Error code [232] (Short circuit in PC-EPC solenoid) .................................................................................. 20-346
Error code [233] (Disconnection in PC-EPC solenoid) .............................................................................. 20-348
Error code [251] (Abnormality in overload pressure sensor) ..................................................................... 20-350
Error code [301] (Engine low idling speed out of standard range) ............................................................. 20-352
Error code [302] (Engine high idling speed out of standard range) ............................................................ 20-352
Error code [306] (Abnormality in governor potentiometer) ......................................................................... 20-354
Error code [308] (Abnormality in fuel control dial) ...................................................................................... 20-356
Error code [315] (Short circuit in battery relay output line) ......................................................................... 20-358
Error code [316] (Step-out of governor motor) ........................................................................................... 20-360
Error code [317] (Disconnection in phases A and B of governor motor) .................................................... 20-362
Error code [318] (Short circuit in phases A and B of governor motor) ....................................................... 20-364
PC130-7 20-301
(1)
(1)
116
115
114
113
112
318
317
316
315
308
306
302
301
251
233
232
227
224
226
223
222
218
217
216
215
213
206
205
203
108
104
code
Error
q
Defective battery relay
20-302
Defective fuse or fusible link
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
Defective monitor panel
DISPLAYED
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
Defective governor and pump controller
TROUBLESHOOTING
q
q
q
Defective sensor power supply (5 V)
q
q
q
q
Defective wiper motor
q
Defective windshield washer motor
q
Defective swing lock switch
q
q
Defective emergency pump drive switch
q
q
q
Defective fuel control dial
q
q
q
Defective governor motor
Error codes and possible causes of them
q
q
q
Defective governor potentiometer
Defective engine speed sensor
q
(including adjustment)
q
Defective engine coolant temperature sensor
Possible causes
Defective air cleaner clogging switch
q
q
Defective mechanical system of engine
q
Defective adjustment of governor lever
q
Defective fuel control of engine
Overheating of engine
q
Clogging of air cleaner
q
q
Defective PC-EPC solenoid
q
q
Defective LS-EPC solenoid
q
q
q Defective swing holding brake solenoid

q
q Defective 2-stage relief solenoid valve

q
Defective travel speed shifting solenoid

BEFORE CARRYING OUT TROUBLESHOOTING WHEN CODE IS DISPLAYED
PC130-7
BEFORE CARRYING OUT TROUBLESHOOTING WHEN CODE IS
q
q
Pump pressure sensor
q
q
Overload pressure sensor
PC130-7
q
Defective assembled-type diode
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
Disconnection in wiring harness
Possible causes
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
Grounding fault in wiring harness
TROUBLESHOOTING
Short circuit with power source in wiring har-
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
ness
(1)
BEFORE CARRYING OUT TROUBLESHOOTING WHEN CODE IS DISPLAYED
20-303
TROUBLESHOOTING BEFORE CARRYING OUT TROUBLESHOOTING WHEN CODE IS DISPLAYED
Connection table of fuse box

a This connection table shows the devices to which each power supply of the fuse box (FB1) supplies power
(A switch power supply is a device which supplies power while the starting switch is at the ON position and
a constant power supply is a device which supplies power while the starting switch is at the OFF position).
a When carrying out troubleshooting related to the electrical system, you should check the fuse box and fus-
ible link to see if the power is supplied normally.
Type of power
Fuse No. Fuse capacity Destination of power
supply
Governor and pump controller (Controller power supply)
PC-EPC solenoid (Emergency pump drive switch circuit)

1 10A
Swing holding brake solenoid (Swing holding brake release
switch circuit)
2 20A Governor and pump controller (Solenoid power supply)
PPC oil pressure lock solenoid

3 10A
Starting motor cutout relay (For PPC lock)
Cigarette lighter
4 10A
Windshield washer motor
5 10A Horn
6 10A Lower wiper motor [If equipped]
7 10A Rotary lamp [If equipped], DC/DC converter [If equipped]

Switch power supply Working lamp (Boom and right front)
(Fusible link: A34) 8 10A
Working lamp (Left front and rear) [If equipped]
9 10A One-touch power maximizing switch circuit
10 10A Fuel priming pump [If equipped]
11 20A Air conditioner unit
Starting motor cutout relay (For personal code)

12 20A
Monitor panel (Switch power supply)
Light relay 1
13 20A Light relay 2
Panel night light signal circuit
14 10A Heated seat [If equipped]
Heated seat [If equipped]

15 10A
Travel alarm [If equipped]
16 10A Radio back up (Constant power supply)
17 20A Monitor panel (Constant power supply)

Constant power
supply (Fusible link: 18 10A Starting switch
A35)
19 10A Room lamp
20 10A (Spare)
20-304 PC130-7
(3)
Troubles which occur when controller power supply of governor and pump controller
is defective
a The controller power supply (FB1-1) of the governor and pump controller drives the controller system.
a Accordingly, if the controller power supply is turned off, the controller cannot control the governor motor and
battery relay and the following troubles occur.
1) The engine can be started but cannot be stopped.
2) The engine speed cannot be controlled with the fuel control dial.
a If the above problems occur, check the related fuse (FB1-1) and "green LED" of the governor and pump
controller to see if the power is supplied normally.
• Lighting: The controller power is supplied (There is not an error and the power supply is normal).
• Flashing: The controller power is supplied (There is an error).
• Put out: The controller power is not supplied.
a Green LED of governor and pump controller (GREEN)
PC130-7 20-305
(1)
Troubles which occur when solenoid power supply of governor and pump controller is
defective
a The solenoid power supply (FB1-2) of the governor and pump controller is used by the controller to drive the
solenoids and relays.
a Accordingly, if the solenoid power supply is turned off, when the controller outputs the power to the sole-
noids or relays, the power is not supplied to any of the solenoids and relays and all or some of the following
error codes are displayed simultaneously.
• [E213]: Disconnection in swing holding brake solenoid
• [E215]: Disconnection in 2-stage relief solenoid
• [E216]: Disconnection in travel speed shifting solenoid
• [E222]: Disconnection in LS-EPC solenoid
• [E223]: Disconnection in PC-EPC solenoid
a If the above problems occur, check the related fuse (FB1-2) and inlet voltage of the governor and pump con-
troller.
1) Disconnect connector C03 of the controller and connect a T-adapter to the wiring harness side.
2) Turn the starting switch ON.
3) Measure the voltage between each of pins (2) and (12) and each of pins (31), (32), and (33).
• Pins (2) and (3) are the power supply pins and pins (31), (32), and (33) are the ground pins.
• Pins (2) and (3) are the power supply and pins (31), (32), and (33) are the chassis ground.
• If the voltage is 20 – 30 V, it is normal.
a Power supply connector (C03) of governor and pump controller
20-306 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION IN TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE
INFORMATION IN TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE

a The following information is summarized in the troubleshooting table and the related electrical circuit dia-
gram. Before carrying out troubleshooting, understand that information fully.
User code Error code
Trouble Trouble indicated by error code
Display on panel Display on panel
Contents of
Condition at the time when the monitor panel or controller detects the trouble
trouble
Action of monitor
The action taken by the monitor panel or controller to protect the system or devices when the monitor
panel or
panel or controller detects the trouble
controller
Problem that
The problem that appears on the machine as a result of the action taken by the monitor panel or control-
appears on
ler (shown above)
machine
Related
Information related to the detected trouble or troubleshooting
information
Cause Standard value in normal state/Remarks on troubleshooting

<Contents of description>
• Standard value in normal state to judge possible causes
• Remarks on judgment
1
<Troubles in wiring harness>
• Disconnection
Connector is connected imperfectly or harness is broken.
• Grounding fault
Harness which is not connected to chassis ground circuit is in con-
tact with chassis ground circuit.
• Short circuit with power source
2 Harness which is not connected to power source (24-V) circuit is in
contact with power source (24-V) circuit.
Possible causes
and standard Possible causes of trouble
value in normal (Given numbers are refer- <Precautions for troubleshooting>
state ence numbers, which do not 1) Method of indicating connector No. and handling of T-adapter
indicate priority) Insert or connect T-adapter as explained below for troubleshooting,
unless otherwise specified.
3 • If connector No. has no marks of "male" and "female", disconnect
connector and insert T-adapters in both male side and female
side.
• If connector No. has marks of "male" and "female", disconnect
connector and connect T-adapter to only male side or female
side.
2) Entry order of pin Nos. and handling of circuit tester leads
Connect positive (+) lead and negative (-) lead of circuit tester as
4 explained below for troubleshooting, unless otherwise specified.
• Connect positive (+) lead to pin No. or harness entered on front
side.
• Connect negative (-) lead to pin No. or harness entered on rear
PC130-7 20-307
(1)
Related circuit diagram
This is a circuit diagram of the part related to troubleshooting.

• Connector No.: Shows the "Type-Number of pin" and "Color".
• Branching/Merging point: Shows that there is a branching/merging point in the electric circuit to be
checked.
• Arrow ( ): Roughly shows the location on the machine.
20-308 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING [104]
Error code [104] (Clogging of air cleaner)

Trouble Clogging of air cleaner(Monitor panel system)
– 104
Contents of • The signal circuit of the air cleaner clogging switch is opened (disconnected from the chassis ground)
trouble while the engine is running.
Action of
• None in particular.
monitor panel
Problem that
appears on • If the machine is operated as it is, the engine may be damaged.
machine
• If the air cleaner clogging monitor of the monitor panel flashes while the engine is running, this error
Related code is recorded.
information • The input state (ON/OFF) from the air cleaner clogging switch can be checked with the monitoring func-
tion. (Code: 046, Right of upper line)

1 Check the air cleaner. If it is clogged, clean or replace it.
(When system is normal)
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then start engine and carry out trou-
Defective air cleaner clog- bleshooting.
2 ging switch (Internal dis- A31 (male) Air cleaner Resistance
connection) When normal Max.1 z
Between (1) and (2)
Possible causes When clogged Min.1 Mz
and standard aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting with-
value in normal Disconnection in wiring out turning starting switch.
state harness (Disconnection in Wiring harness between P02 (female) (5) and
3 Resistance Max.1 z
wiring harness or defective A31 (female) (1)
contact in connector) Wiring harness between P11 (female) (2) and
Resistance Max.1 z
chassis ground (A15)
bleshooting.
4 Defective monitor panel P02 Air cleaner Voltage
Between (5) and When normal Max. 1 V
chassis ground When clogged 20 – 30 V
Circuit diagram related to air cleaner clogging switch
20-310 PC130-7
(1)
Error code [108] (Overheating of engine coolant)

Trouble Overheating of engine coolant (Monitor panel system)
– 108
Contents of • The signal circuit of the engine coolant temperature sensor inputs 99 o or higher temperature while the
trouble engine is running.
Action of
• None in particular.
monitor panel
Problem that
appears on • If the machine is operated as it is, the engine may be seized.
machine
• If the engine coolant temperature monitor of the monitor panel flashes while the engine is running, this
Related error code is recorded.
information • The input state (ON/OFF) from the engine coolant temperature sensor can be checked with the moni-
toring function. (Code: 041, by 10 mV)

Overheating of engine The engine may have overheated. Find the cause and check the
1
(When system is normal) engine for damage, and then repair.
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting with-
out turning starting switch.
Defective engine coolant Engine coolant
E05 (male) Resistance
2 temperature sensor (Inter- temperature
nal short circuit) Between (1) and (2) 3.5k – 90 kz
Possible causes Between (2) and 10 – 100 °C
Min. 1 Mz
and standard chassis ground
value in normal Short circuit with chassis aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting with-
state ground in wiring harness out turning starting switch.
3
(Contact with ground cir- Between P02 (female) (1) – E05 (female) (2)
Resistance Min. 1 Mz
cuit) wiring harness and chassis ground
Engine coolant
P02 Resistance
4 Defective monitor panel temperature
Between (1) and (13) 3.5k – 90 kz
Between (1) and 10 – 100 °C
Min. 1 Mz
chassis ground
Circuit diagram related to engine coolant temperature sensor
PC130-7 20-311
(1)
Error code [112] (Short circuit in wiper motor drive forward system)
User code Error code Short circuit in wiper motor drive forward system
Trouble
– 112 (Monitor panel system)
Contents of
• When the signal is output to the wiper motor drive forward circuit, an abnormal current flows.
trouble
Action of
• Turns the output to the wiper motor drive forward circuit OFF.
monitor panel
Problem that
appears on • Windshield wiper stops.
machine
Related
information

Defective wiper motor out turning starting switch.
1 (Internal short circuit or W04 (male) Continuity/Resistance
grounding fault) Between (3) and (1) There is continuity
Between (3) and chassis ground Min. 1 Mz
Possible causes
Short circuit with chassis aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting with-
and standard
ground in wiring harness out turning starting switch.
value in normal 2
(Contact with ground cir- Between P01 (female) (9) – W03 (female) (3)
state Resistance Min. 1 Mz
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and car-
ry out troubleshooting.
P01 Wiper switch Resistance
3 Defective monitor panel
OFF Max. 3 V
Between (9) and
chassis ground Max. 3 V 20 – 30 V
ON
(Constant period)
20-312 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to wiper motor
PC130-7 20-313
(1)
Error code [113] (Short circuit in wiper motor drive reverse system)
User code Error code Short circuit in wiper motor drive reverse system
Trouble
Contents of
• When the signal is output to the wiper motor drive reverse circuit, an abnormal current flows.
trouble
Action of
• Turns the output to the wiper motor drive reverse circuit OFF.
monitor panel
Problem that
appears on • Windshield wiper stops.
machine
Related
information

1 (Internal short circuit or W04 (male) Continuity/Resistance
grounding fault) Between (1) and (3) There is continuity
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal 2
(Contact with ground cir- Between P01 (female) (10) – W03 (female) (1)
P01 Wiper switch Resistance
OFF Max. 3 V
Between (10) and
chassis ground Max. 3 V 20 – 30 V
ON
(Constant period)
20-314 PC130-7
(1)
PC130-7 20-315
(1)
Error code [114] (Short circuit in windshield washer drive system)
User code Error code Short circuit in windshield washer drive system
Trouble
Contents of • When the windshield washer drive circuit is connected to the ground circuit (the output is turned ON),
trouble an abnormal current flows.
Action of
• Turns the ground output of the windshield washer motor circuit OFF.
monitor panel
Problem that
appears on • The windshield washer stops.
machine
Related
information

Defective washer motor out turning starting switch.
1
(Internal short circuit) A50 (male) Resistance
Between (1) and (2) 5 – 20 z
Possible causes ry out troubleshooting.
Short circuit with power
and standard
2 source in wiring harness Between P01 (female) (3) – A50 (female) (2) or
value in normal
(Contact with 24-V circuit) D02 (female) (8) wiring harness and chassis Voltage Max. 1 V
state
ground
Windshield washer
3 Defective monitor panel P01 Voltage
switch
Between (3) and OFF 20 – 30 V
chassis ground ON Max. 1 V
20-316 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to windshield washer motor
PC130-7 20-317
(1)
Error code [115] (Trouble in operation of windshield wiper)

Trouble Trouble in operation of windshield wiper (Monitor panel system)
– 115
Contents of
• When the wiper operates, the W-signals of both ends of the operating range are not input.
trouble
Action of
• Turns the operation signal to the wiper motor OFF.
monitor panel
Problem that
appears on • The windshield wiper does not operate.
machine
Related • The input state (ON/OFF) from the W-signals of the wiper operating range can be checked with the
information monitoring function. (Code: 049, Center of lower line)

Defective wiper motor W04 (male) Wiper blade Resistance
1
(Internal disconnection) Top of operating range Max. 1 z
Between (6) and (5) Other than top of
Min. 1 Mz
operating range
Possible causes out turning starting switch.
and standard Disconnection in wiring
harness (Disconnection in Wiring harness between P01 (female) (5) and
value in normal 2 Resistance Max. 1 z
state wiring harness or defective W04 (female) (6)
contact in connector) Wiring harness between W04 (female) (5) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
chassis ground (A11, A12)
P01 Wiper blade Voltage
Top of operating range Max. 1 V
Between (5) and
chassis ground Other than top of
20 – 30 V
operating range
20-318 PC130-7
(1)
PC130-7 20-319
(1)
Error code [116] (Trouble in storage of windshield wiper)

Trouble Trouble in storage of windshield wiper (Monitor panel system)
– 116
Contents of
• When the wiper stored, the P-signals of the storage range is not input.
trouble
Action of
• Turns the storage signal to the wiper motor OFF.
monitor panel
Problem that
appears on • The wiper is not stored.
machine
Related • The input state (ON/OFF) from the P-signals of the wiper operating range can be checked with the mon-
information itoring function. (Code: 049, Left of upper line)

Defective wiper motor W04 (male) Wiper blade Resistance
1
(Internal disconnection)
Between (4) and (5) Storage range Max. 1 z
Operating range Min. 1 Mz
and standard Disconnection in wiring
harness (Disconnection in Wiring harness between P01 (female) (12) and
state wiring harness or defective W04 (female) (4)
contact in connector) Wiring harness between W04 (female) (5) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
chassis ground (A11, A12)
3 Defective monitor panel P01 Wiper blade Voltage
Between (12) and Storage range Max. 1 V
chassis ground Operating range 20 – 30 V
20-320 PC130-7
(1)
PC130-7 20-321
(1)
Error code [203] (Short circuit in swing holding brake solenoid)
User code Error code Short circuit in swing holding brake solenoid
Trouble
E03 203 (Governor and pump controller system)
Contents of
• When the signal is output to the swing holding brake solenoid circuit, an abnormal current flows.
trouble
• Turns the output to the swing holding brake solenoid circuit OFF.
Action of
• Even if the cause of the failure disappears, the system does not reset itself until the starting switch is
controller
turned OFF.
Problem that
appears on • The machine cannot swing (The swing holding brake is not released).
machine
• The operation state (ON/OFF) of the swing holding brake solenoid can be checked with the monitoring
function. (Code: 023, Center of upper line)
Related
• If the solenoid and wiring harness are normal, the machine can swing by setting the swing holding brake
information
release switch in the FREE position. (The swing holding brake does not operate when the machine
stops swinging, however.)

Defective swing holding out turning starting switch.
1 brake solenoid (Internal V05 (male) Resistance
short circuit) Between (1) and (2) 20 – 60 z
Possible causes Short circuit with chassis out turning starting switch.
and standard ground in wiring harness
value in normal 2 Between C03 (female) (37) – D01 – J02 – X05
(Contact with ground cir-
state cuit) – V05 (female) (1) or S25 (female) (8) wiring Resistance Min. 1 Mz
harness and chassis ground
bleshooting.
Defective governor and Left work equipment
3 C03 Voltage
pump controller control lever
Between (37) and Neutral position Max. 1 V
chassis ground Swing position 20 – 30 V
20-322 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to swing holding brake solenoid
PC130-7 20-323
(1)
Error code [205] (Short circuit in 2-stage relief solenoid)
User code Error code Short circuit in 2-stage relief solenoid

Trouble
– 205 (Governor and pump controller system)
Contents of
• When the signal is output to the 2-stage relief solenoid circuit, an abnormal current flows.
trouble
• Turns the output to the 2-stage relief solenoid circuit OFF.
Action of
controller
turned OFF.
Problem that
• The one-touch power maximizing function does not work (The main relief valve is not set to high pres-
appears on
sure).
machine
Related • The operation state (ON/OFF) of the 2-stage relief solenoid can be checked with the monitoring func-
information tion. (Code: 023, Left of upper line)

Defective 2-stage relief out turning starting switch.
1 solenoid (Internal short cir- V06 (male) Resistance
cuit) Between (1) and (2) 20 – 60 z
Possible causes
and standard 2
value in normal (Contact with ground cir- Between C03 (female) (28) – V06 (female) (1)
state cuit) wiring harness and chassis ground
One-touch power max-
Defective governor and C03 Voltage
3 imizing switch
pump controller
Released Max. 1 V
Between (37) and
chassis ground 20 – 30 V
Kept pressed
(With 8.5-sec timer)
20-324 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to 2-stage relief solenoid
PC130-7 20-325
(1)
Error code [206] (Short circuit in travel speed shifting solenoid)
User code Error code Short circuit travel speed shifting solenoid
Trouble
Contents of
• When the signal is output to the travel speed shifting solenoid circuit, an abnormal current flows.
trouble
• Turns the output to the travel speed shifting solenoid circuit OFF.
Action of
controller
turned OFF.
Problem that
appears on • The travel speed is not set to HI (The swash plate angle of the travel motor is not set to the minimum).
machine
Related • The operation state (ON/OFF) of the travel speed shifting solenoid can be checked with the monitoring
information function. (Code: 023, Left of lower line)

Defective travel speed out turning starting switch.
1 shifting solenoid (Internal V04 (male) Resistance
Possible causes Short circuit with chassis aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting with-
and standard ground in wiring harness out turning starting switch.
value in normal 2
(Contact with ground cir- Between C03 (female) (27) – V04 (female) (1)
bleshooting.
Defective governor and Travel speed switch
3 C03 Voltage
pump controller and travel lever
Between (27) and Lo + Neutral Max. 1 V
chassis ground Hi + Travel position 20 – 30 V
20-326 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to travel speed shifting solenoid
PC130-7 20-327
(1)
Error code [213] (Disconnection in swing holding brake solenoid)
User code Error code Disconnection in swing holding brake solenoid

Trouble
Contents of
• When the signal is output to the swing holding brake solenoid circuit, no current flows.
trouble
Action of • None in particular (Since no current flows, the solenoid does not operate).
controller • If the cause of the failure disappears, the system resets itself.
Problem that
appears on • The machine cannot swing (The swing holding brake is not released).
machine
• The operation state (ON/OFF) of the swing holding brake solenoid can be checked with the monitoring
function. (Code: 023, Center of upper line)
• If the solenoid and wiring harness are normal, the machine can swing by setting the swing holding brake
release switch in the FREE position. (The swing holding brake does not operate when the machine
Related stops swinging, however.)
information • During troubleshooting, keep the swing lock switch in the OFF position and the swing holding brake re-
lease switch in the RELEASE position.
• Since the controller detects disconnection while the solenoid output is turned ON, be sure to turn the
solenoid output ON when checking for reproduction of the failure after repair. (For the method of turn-
ing the solenoid output ON and OFF, see troubleshooting for error code [203].)

Defective swing holding out turning starting switch.
1 brake solenoid (Internal
V05 (male) Resistance
disconnection)
Between (1) and (2) 20 – 60 z
Defective swing lock switch X05 (female) Swing lock switch Resistance
2
OFF Max. 1 z
Between (3) and (4)
ON Min. 1 Mz
Defective assembled-type out turning starting switch.
3 diode D01 (Internal discon-
D01 (male) Digital circuit tester Continuity
nection)
Between (7) and (3) Diode mode There is continuity
Possible causes aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting with-
and standard out turning starting switch.
value in normal Wiring harness between C03 (female) (37) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
state Disconnection in wiring D01 (female) (7)
harness (Disconnection in Wiring harness between D01 (female) (3) and
4 Resistance Max. 1 z
wiring harness or defective J02 and X05 (male) (3)
contact in connector) Wiring harness between X05 (male) (4) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
V05 (female) (1)
Wiring harness between C03 (female) (3), (13),
Resistance Max. 1 z
(23) and V05 (female) (2)
Short circuit with power ry out troubleshooting.
5 source in wiring harness
(Contact with 24-V circuit) Between C03 (female) (37) – D01 (female) (7)
Voltage Max. 1 V
wiring harness and chassis ground
Defective governor and
6 C03 (female) Disconnect D01 and Resistance
pump controller
Between (37) and (3), connect (3) and (7) on
female side. 20 – 60 z
(13), (23)
20-328 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to swing holding brake solenoid
PC130-7 20-329
(1)
Error code [215] (Disconnection in 2-stage relief solenoid)
User code Error code Disconnection in 2-stage relief solenoid

Trouble
Contents of
• When the signal is output to the 2-stage relief solenoid circuit, no current flows.
trouble
Problem that
• The one-touch power maximizing function does not work (The main relief valve is not set to high pres-
appears on
sure).
machine
• The operation state (ON/OFF) of the 2-stage relief solenoid can be checked with the monitoring func-
tion. (Code: 023, Left of upper line)
Related
information

Defective 2-stage relief out turning starting switch.
1 solenoid (Internal short cir-
cuit)
Between (1) and (2) 20 – 60 z
Disconnection in wiring out turning starting switch.
harness (Disconnection in Wiring harness between C03 (female) (28) and
Possible causes 2 Resistance Max. 1 z
wiring harness or defective V06 (female) (1)
and standard contact in connector) Wiring harness between C03 (female) (3), (13),
value in normal Resistance Max. 1 z
state (23) and V06 (female) (2)
(Contact with 24-V circuit) Between C03 (female) (28) – V06 (female) (1)
Voltage Max. 1 V
Defective governor and out turning starting switch.
4
pump controller C03 (female) Resistance
Between (37) and (3), (13), (23) 20 – 60 z
20-330 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to 2-stage relief solenoid
PC130-7 20-331
(1)
Error code [216] (Disconnection in travel speed shifting solenoid)
User code Error code Disconnection in travel speed shifting solenoid

Trouble
Contents of
• When the signal is output to the travel speed shifting solenoid circuit, no current flows.
trouble
Problem that
appears on • The travel speed is not set to HI (The swash plate angle of the travel motor is not set to the minimum).
machine
• The operation state (ON/OFF) of the travel speed shifting solenoid can be checked with the monitoring
function. (Code: 023, Left of lower line)
Related
information

Defective travel speed out turning starting switch.
1 shifting solenoid (Internal
disconnection)
Between (1) and (2) 20 – 60 z
state (23) and V04 (female) (2)
Voltage Max. 1 V
4
pump controller C03 (female) Resistance
Between (27) and (3), (13), (23) 20 – 60 z
20-332 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to travel speed shifting solenoid
PC130-7 20-333
(1)
Error code [217] (Abnormality in input model code)
User code Error code Abnormality in input model code

Trouble
Contents of
• A model code signal for a model which is not registered in the controller is input.
trouble
• Uses the default model (PC200-7) for control.
Action of
controller
turned OFF.
Problem that
appears on • The engine does not output sufficient power or may stall.
machine
• The model name (number) recognized by the controller can be checked with the monitoring function.
Related (Code: 002, 003)
information • The input state (ON/OFF) of the model selection signal can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 027, Other than left of lower line)

Defective model selection out turning starting switch.
1 connector (Internal discon- C09 (female) Resistance
nection or short circuit) Between (1), (2) and (8) Max. 1 z
Between (3), (4), (7) and (8) Min. 1 Mz
Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between C02 (female) (37) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
harness (Disconnection in C09 (male) (1)
2
wiring harness or defective Wiring harness between C02 (female) (27) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
contact in connector) C09 (male) (2)
Wiring harness between C09 (female) (8) and
Possible causes Resistance Max. 1 z
and standard
value in normal aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting with-
state out turning starting switch.
Short circuit with chassis Between C02 (female) (17) – C09 (male) (3)
ground in wiring harness wiring harness and chassis ground
3
(Contact with ground cir- Between C02 (female) (7) – C09 (male) (4) wir-
cuit) ing harness and chassis ground
Between C02 (female) (13) – C09 (male) (7)
C02 (female) Voltage
4 Between (7), (13), (17) and
pump controller 20 – 20 V
chassis ground
Between (27), (37), and chassis
Max. 1 V
ground
20-334 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to model selection connector
PC130-7 20-335
(1)
Error code [218] (Disconnection in S-NET signal line)
User code Error code Disconnection in S-NET signal line

Trouble
Contents of • A trouble has occurred in the S-NET communication between the monitor panel and controller (It has
trouble been repaired when this error code is displayed).
• Uses the following default items for control until the trouble is repaired.
1) Working mode: E
Action of 2) Travel speed: Lo
controller 3) Auto-decelerator: ON
turned OFF.
• The working mode cannot be changed (The working mode displayed in the monitor panel changes
normally).
Problem that
• The travel speed cannot be changed (The travel speed displayed in the monitor panel changes
appears on
normally).
machine
• The auto-decelerator cannot be reset (The auto-decelerator displayed in the monitor panel is reset
normally.)
• This error code is displayed to notify the operator that a trouble has occurred when the S-NET commu-
Related nication between the monitor panel and governor and pump controller becomes normal.
information • The system is normal when the error code is displayed. Check the related devices and circuits and
remove the cause of the trouble, however, to prevent reoccurrence of the trouble.

harness (Disconnection in Wiring harness between P02 (female) (9), (10)
1 Resistance Max. 1 z
wiring harness or defective and C02 (female) (21).
contact in connector) Wiring harness between P02 (female) (20) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
C02 (female) (31)
2
(Contact with ground cir- Between P02 (female) (9), (10) – C02 (female)
Possible causes Resistance Min. 1 Mz
cuit) (21) wiring harness and chassis ground
and standard aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and car-
value in normal Short circuit with power ry out troubleshooting.
state 3 source in wiring harness
(Contact with 24-V circuit) Between P02 (female) (9), (10) – C02 (female)
Voltage Max. 1 V
(21) wiring harness and chassis ground
P02 Voltage
Between (9), (10) and (20) 6–9V
Defective governor and ry out troubleshooting.
5
pump controller C02 Voltage
Between (21) and (31) 6–9V
20-336 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to S-NET
PC130-7 20-337
(1)
Error code [222] (Short circuit in LS-EPC solenoid)
User code Error code Short circuit in LS-EPC solenoid

Trouble
Contents of
• An abnormal current flows in the LS-EPC solenoid circuit
trouble
• Reduces the output to the LS-EPC solenoid circuit 0.
Action of
controller
turned OFF.
Problem that
• The travel speed is fast at Lo. Amount of flow is large at model B. (The set pressure of the LS valve
appears on
cannot be controlled)
machine
Related • The output state (current) to the LS-EPC solenoid can be checked with the monitoring function.
information (Code: 015, by 10 mA)

Defective LS-EPC sole- V22 (male) Resistance
1
noid (Internal short circuit)
Between (1) and (2) 7 – 14 z
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal 2
state (Contact with ground cir- Between C03 (female) (6) – V22 (female) (1)
Defective governor and C03 Resistance
3
pump controller
Between (6) and (3), (13), (23) 7 – 14 z
Circuit diagram related to LS-EPC solenoid
20-338 PC130-7
(1)
Error code [223] (Disconnection in LS-EPC solenoid)
User code Error code Disconnection in LS-EPC solenoid

Trouble
Contents of
• No current flows in the LS-EPC solenoid circuit
trouble
Problem that
• The travel speed is fast at Lo. Amount of flow is large at model B. (The set pressure of the LS valve
appears on
cannot be controlled)
machine
Related • The output state (current) to the LS-EPC solenoid can be checked with the monitoring function.

Defective LS-EPC sole- out turning starting switch.
1
noid (Internal short circuit) V22 (male) Resistance
Between (1) and (2) 7 – 14 z
state (23), and V22 (female) (2)
Voltage Max. 1 V
4
pump controller C03 Resistance
Between (6) and (3), (13), (23) 7 – 14 z
Circuit diagram related to LS-EPC solenoid
PC130-7 20-339
(1)
Error code [224] (Abnormality in pump pressure sensor)
User code Error code Abnormality in pump pressure sensor

Trouble
Contents of
• The signal voltage from the pump pressure sensor is below 0.3 V or above 4.72 V.
trouble
Action of • Sets the pump pressure to 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2} for control.
Problem that
• The travel speed does not change automatically (The travel load pressure cannot be sensed).
appears on
• Cut-off function dose not work (The work equipment pressure can not be detected.)
machine
• If the 5-V circuit (B) and ground circuit (A) of the pressure sensor are connected inversely, the pressure
Related sensor will be broken. Accordingly, take extreme care when checking.
information • The input state (ON/OFF) from the pump pressure sensor can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 011, 012, by 1 kg/cm2)

Defective sensor power
1 If error code [226] is displayed, carry out troubleshooting for it first.
supply
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then hold starting switch ON or start
engine and carry out troubleshooting.
A51 Voltage
Defective pump pressure Between (B) and (A) Power supply 4.5 – 5.5 V
2 sensor (Internal defect) Between (C) and (A) Signal 0.5 – 4.5 V
The pressure sensor voltage is measured with the wiring harness con-
nected. Accordingly, if the voltage is abnormal, check the wiring har-
ness and controller, too, for another cause of the trouble, and then
judge.
Resistance Max. 1 z
harness (Disconnection in J07 and A51 (female) (B)
Possible causes 3
and standard Resistance Max. 1 z
contact in connector) A51 (female) (A)
value in normal
state Resistance Max. 1 z
A51 (female) (C)
4
(Contact with ground cir- Between C01 (female) (8) – A51 (female) (C)
Between C01 (female) (22) – J07 – A51
5 source in wiring harness Voltage Max. 1 V
(female) (B) wiring harness and chassis ground
(Contact with 24-V circuit)
Between C01 (female) (8) – A51 (female) (C)
Voltage Max. 1 V
6
pump controller
Between (22) and (10) Power supply 4.5 – 5.5 V
Between (8) and (10) Signal 0.5 – 4.5 V
20-340 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to pump pressure sensor
PC130-7 20-341
(1)
Error code [226] (Abnormality in pressure sensor power supply)
User code Error code Abnormality in pressure sensor power supply

Trouble
Contents of
• An abnormal current flows in the power supply (5 V) circuit of the pressure sensor or potentiometer.
trouble
• Turns the output to the power supply (5 V) circuit OFF.
Action of
controller
turned OFF.
Problem that • The signals of the pressure sensor and potentiometer are not input normally.
appears on • The error codes of abnormality in the pressure sensor and abnormality in the potentiometer are dis-
machine played simultaneously.
Related
information

aDisconnect connector with starting switch OFF, then turn starting
switch ON and carry out troubleshooting.
Fuel control dial Connector E06
Defective pressure sensor Disconnect the devices Governor
at right in order. If the Connector E10
1 or potentiometer (Internal potentiometer
short circuit) error code disappears
when a device is dis- Pump pressure
Connector A51
connected, that device sensor
has a defect in it. Overload pressure
Connector A70
sensor (If installed)
Possible causes Between C01 (female) (22) – J07 – E06
and standard (female) (1) wiring harness and chassis ground Resistance Min. 1 Mz
value in normal [Fuel control dial system]
state Short circuit with chassis Between C01 (female) (22) – J07 – E10
ground in wiring harness (female) (A) wiring harness and chassis ground Resistance Min. 1 Mz
2
(Contact with ground cir- [Governor potentiometer system]
cuit) Between C01 (female) (22) – J07 – A51
(female) (B) wiring harness and chassis ground Resistance Min. 1 Mz
[Pump pressure sensor system]
(female) (B) wiring harness and chassis ground Resistance Min. 1 Mz
[Overload pressure sensor system: If installed]
Defective governor and ry out troubleshooting.
3
pump controller C01 Voltage
Between (22) and (10) 4.5 – 5.5 V
20-342 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to sensor power supply
PC130-7 20-343
(1)
Error code [227] (Abnormality in engine speed sensor)
User code Error code Abnormality in engine speed sensor

Trouble
Contents of
• Normal pulse signals are not input to the signal circuit of the engine speed sensor.
trouble
Action of • Controls as if in the E-mode.
Problem that
appears on • The output power is a little low (The engine speed cannot be sensed).
machine
Related • The input state (ON/OFF) from the engine speed sensor can be checked with the monitoring function.
information (Code: 010, by 10 rpm)

Defective engine speed out turning starting switch.
1 sensor (Internal short cir- E04 (male) Resistance
cuit or disconnection) Between (1) and (2) 500 – 1,000 z
Defective adjustment of
2 See TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Adjusting engine speed sensor.
engine speed sensor
Possible causes
and standard 3 Resistance Max. 1 z
wiring harness or defective E04 (female) (1)
value in normal
contact in connector) Wiring harness between C01 (female) (29),
(39) and E04 (female) (2)
(Contact with 24-V circuit) Between C01 (female) (40) – E04 (female) (1)
Voltage Max. 1 V
Defective governor and C02 Resistance
5
pump controller
Between (40) and (29), (39) 500 – 1,000 z
20-344 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to engine speed sensor
PC130-7 20-345
(1)
Error code [232] (Short circuit in PC-EPC solenoid)
User code Error code Short circuit in PC-EPC solenoid

Trouble
Contents of
• An abnormal current flows in the PC-EPC solenoid circuit.
trouble
• Turns the output to the LS-EPC solenoid circuit OFF.
Action of
controller
turned OFF.
Problem that
• If the pump load increases, the engine speed lowers largely and the engine may stall (The pump ab-
appears on
sorption torque cannot be controlled).
machine
Related • The output state (current) to the PC-EPC solenoid can be checked with the monitoring function.

Defective PC-EPC solenoid V21 (male) Resistance
1
(Internal short circuit)
Between (1) and (2) 7 – 14 z
Defective emergency pump Emergency pump drive
S25 (male) Resistance
2 drive switch (Internal short switch
Possible causes circuit or disconnection) Between (3) and (4) Min. 1 Mz
and standard Between (3) and Normal
value in normal Min. 1 Mz
chassis ground
state aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting with-
Short circuit with chassis out turning starting switch.
ground in wiring harness Between C03 (female) (16) – S25 (female) (3)
3 Resistance Min. 1 Mz
(Contact with ground cir- wiring harness and chassis ground
cuit) Between S25 (female) (2) – V21 (female) (1)
Defective governor and C03 (female) Resistance
4
pump controller
Between (16) and (3), (13), (23) 7 – 14 z
20-346 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to PC-EPC solenoid
PC130-7 20-347
(1)
Error code [233] (Disconnection in PC-EPC solenoid)
User code Error code Disconnection in PC-EPC solenoid

Trouble
Contents of
• No current flows in the PC-EPC solenoid circuit.
trouble
Problem that
• If the pump load increases, the engine speed lowers largely and the engine may stall (The pump ab-
appears on
sorption torque cannot be controlled).
machine
Related • The output state (current) to the PC-EPC solenoid can be checked with the monitoring function.

Defective PC-EPC solenoid out turning starting switch.
1
(Internal short circuit) V21 (male) Resistance
Between (1) and (2) 7 – 14 z
Emergency pump drive
Defective emergency pump S25 (male) Resistance
switch
2 drive switch (Internal short Normal Max. 1 z
circuit or disconnection) Between (2) and (3)
Emergency Min. 1 Mz
Normal Max. 1 z
Between (5) and (6)
Emergency Min. 1 Mz
Possible causes Wiring harness between C03 (female) (16) and
and standard Resistance Max. 1 z
Disconnection in wiring S25 (female) (3)
value in normal
harness (Disconnection in Wiring harness between S25 (female) (2) and
state 3 Resistance Max. 1 z
contact in connector) Wiring harness between C03 (female) (3), (13),
Resistance Max. 1 z
(23) and S25 (female) (6)
Wiring harness between S25 (female) (5) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
V21 (female) (2)
Between C03 (female) (16) – S25 (female) (3)
Between S25 (female) (2) – V21 (female) (1)
Voltage Max. 1 V
5 C03 (female) Resistance
pump controller
Between (16) and (3), (13),
7 – 14 z
and (23)
20-348 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to PC-EPC solenoid
PC130-7 20-349
(1)
Error code [251] (Abnormality in overload pressure sensor)
User code Error code Abnormality in overload pressure sensor

Trouble
Contents of
• The signal voltage from the overload pressure sensor is below 0.3 V or above 4.72 V.
trouble
Action of • Sets the boom cylinder bottom pressure to 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2} for control.
Problem that
• The overload caution function does not operate (The load pressure on the boom cylinder bottom side
appears on
cannot be sensed).
machine
Related aIf the 5-V circuit (B) and ground circuit (A) of the pressure sensor are connected inversely, the pressure
information sensor will be broken. Accordingly, take extreme care when checking.

supply system
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then hold starting switch ON or start
engine and carry out troubleshooting.
A70 Voltage
Defective overload pres- Between (B) and (A) Power supply 4.5 – 5.5V
2 sure sensor (Internal Between (C) and (A) Signal 0.5 – 4.5V
defect)
The pressure sensor voltage is measured with the wiring harness con-
nected. Accordingly, if the voltage is abnormal, check the wiring har-
ness and controller, too, for another cause of the trouble, and then
judge.
Resistance Max. 1 z
harness (Disconnection in J07 and A70 (female) (B)
Possible causes 3
and standard contact in connector) Resistance Max. 1 z
A70 (female) (A)
value in normal
A70 (female) (C)
Short circuit with chassis aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and car-
ground in wiring harness ry out troubleshooting.
4
(Contact with ground cir- Between C01 (female) (7) - A70 (female) (C)
(female) (B) wiring harness and chassis ground
Between C01 (female) (7) – A70 (female) (C)
Voltage Max. 1 V
6
pump controller
20-350 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to overload pressure sensor
PC130-7 20-351
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING [301], [302]
Error code [301] (Engine low idling speed out of standard range)
User code Error code Engine low idling speed out of standard range
Trouble
Contents of
• Engine speed below 500 rpm is sensed for continuous 10 seconds while the engine is running.
trouble
Action of • None in particular.
Problem that
machine
Related • The input state (rpm) from the engine speed sensor can be checked with the monitoring function.

Check for external and internal factors that have lowered the engine low
Possible causes Abnormality in mechanical
1 idling speed, and then carry out troubleshooting for the mechanical sys-
and standard system of engine
tem of the engine.
value in normal
state Troubleshooting cannot be carried out since the defect is in the gover-
2 nor and pump controller. (If there is not any visible trouble in the
pump controller
machine, the controller may be used as it is.)
Error code [302] (Engine high idling speed out of standard range)
User code Error code Engine high idling speed out of standard range
Trouble
Contents of
• Engine speed above 2,600 rpm is sensed for continuous 10 seconds while the engine is running.
trouble
Problem that
machine
Related • The input state (rpm) from the engine speed sensor can be checked with the monitoring function.

Check for external and internal factors that have heightened the engine
Possible causes Abnormality in mechanical
1 high idling speed, and then carry out troubleshooting for the mechanical
and standard system of engine
system of the engine.
value in normal
state Troubleshooting cannot be carried out since the defect is in the gover-
2 nor and pump controller. (If there is not any visible trouble in the
pump controller
machine, the controller may be used as it is.)
20-352 PC130-7
(1)
Error code [306] (Abnormality in governor potentiometer)
User code Error code Abnormality in governor potentiometer

Trouble
Contents of
• The signal voltage from the governor potentiometer is below 0.4 V or above 4.6 V.
trouble
• Calculates the motor position from the voltage just before occurrence of the trouble and uses it for con-
Action of trol.
controller • Even if the cause of the failure disappears, the system does not reset itself until the starting switch is
turned OFF.
• The high idling speed is not obtained (it is a little low).
Problem that • The low idling speed is not obtained (it is a little high).
appears on • The auto-decelerator or automatic warm-up system does not operate.
machine • The engine stalls.
• The engine does not stop.
Related • The input state (voltage) from the governor potentiometer can be checked with the monitoring function.
information (Code: 031, by 10 mV)

supply system
Defective governor potenti- E10 (male) Resistance
2
ometer (Internal defect) Between (A) and (C) 4.0 – 6.0 z
Between (B) and (A) 0.25 – 5.0 z
Between (B) and (C) 0.25 – 5.0 z
Resistance Max. 1 z
harness (Disconnection in J07 and E10 (female) (A)
3
Resistance Max. 1 z
Possible causes contact in connector) E10 (female) (C)
and standard Wiring harness between C01 (female) (13) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
value in normal E10 (female) (B)
state aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and car-
Short circuit with chassis
4
(Contact with ground cir- Between C01 (female) (13) – E10 (female) (B)
Between C01 (female) (22) – J07 – E10
(female) (A) wiring harness and chassis ground
Between C01 (female) (13) – E10 (female) (B)
Voltage Max. 1 V
6
pump controller
20-354 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to governor motor and potentiometer
PC130-7 20-355
(1)
Error code [308] (Abnormality in fuel control dial)
User code Error code Abnormality in fuel control dial

Trouble
Contents of
• The signal voltage from the fuel control dial is below 0.23 V or above 4.77 V.
trouble
• Calculates the fuel control dial position from the voltage just before occurrence of the trouble and uses
Action of
it for control.
controller
• If the cause of the failure disappears, the system resets itself.
• If the output was set in the full mode before occurrence of the failure, it is not set in the partial mode.
Problem that
• If the output was set in the partial mode before occurrence of the failure, it is not set in the full mode.
appears on
• The engine hunts.
machine
• The high idling speed is not obtained and the output is insufficient.
Related • The input state (voltage) from the fuel control dial can be checked with the monitoring function.

supply system
Defective fuel control dial E06 (male) Resistance
2
(Internal defect) Between (A) and (C) 4.0 – 6.0 z
Resistance Max. 1 z
harness (Disconnection in J07 and E06 (female) (1)
3
Resistance Max. 1 z
Possible causes contact in connector) E06 (female) (3)
Resistance Max. 1 z
value in normal E06 (female) (2)
state aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and car-
4
(Contact with ground cir- Between C01 (female) (19) – E06 (female) (2)
Between C01 (female) (22) – J07 – E06
(female) (1) wiring harness and chassis ground
Between C01 (female) (19) – E06 (female) (2)
Voltage Max. 1 V
6
pump controller
20-356 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to fuel control dial
PC130-7 20-357
(1)
Error code [315] (Short circuit in battery relay output line)
User code Error code Abnormality in battery relay output

Trouble
Contents of
• When the signal is output to the battery relay drive circuit, an abnormal current flows.
trouble
• Turns off the output to the battery relay drive circuit OFF.
Action of
controller
turned OFF.
Problem that
appears on • The engine does not stop (The controller power supply cannot be maintained until the engine stops).
machine
Related • The operation state (ON/OFF) of the battery relay can be checked with the monitoring function.
information (Code: 037, Right of upper line)

Defective battery relay Battery relay (unit) Resistance
1
(Internal short circuit) Between A21 (BR) and A20 (E) Approx. 100 z
Between A21 (BR) and
Min. 1 Mz
chassis ground
Possible causes
and standard Short circuit with chassis aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting with-
value in normal ground in wiring harness out turning starting switch.
2
state (Contact with ground cir- Between C03 (female) (4) – D01 – J01 – A21
cuit) (BR) wiring harness and chassis ground
Defective governor and C03 Starting switch Voltage
3
pump controller Between (4) and
20 – 30 V
chassis ground ON o OFF
(For 4 – 7sec)
20-358 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to battery relay
PC130-7 20-359
(1)
Error code [316] (Step-out of governor motor)
User code Error code Step-out of governor motor

Trouble
Contents of
• The input signal from the governor potentiometer is much different from the set value in the controller.
trouble
• Repeats the control operation (steps out).
Action of
controller
turned OFF.
Problem that • The engine speed cannot be controlled.
appears on • The engine hunts.
machine • The engine does not stop.
Related
information

Defective fuel control dial
system
Defective governor potenti-
ometer system
Defective governor motor
Possible causes system (Disconnection)
and standard Defective governor motor
value in normal 4 If error code [318] is displayed, carry out troubleshooting for it first.
system (Short circuit)
state Defective adjustment of
5 See TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Special functions of monitor panel
governor lever
Defective fuel control sys-
6 See Shop Manual for 95-3 Series engine.
tem of engine
Troubleshooting cannot be carried out since the defect is in the control-
7 ler (If none of causes 1 – 6 is the cause of the trouble, the controller is
pump controller
defective).
20-360 PC130-7
(1)
Error code [317] (Disconnection in phases A and B of governor motor)
User code Error code Disconnection in phases A and B of governor motor

Trouble
Contents of
• When the signal is output to the governor motor, no current flows.
trouble
• The engine speed is set to low idling.
Problem that
appears on
machine
• The governor motor steps out.
Related • The operation state (current) of the governor motor can be checked with the monitoring function.
information (Code: 033 - Phase A, 034 - Phase B, by 10 mA)

Defective governor motor E11 (male) Resistance
1
Between (1) and (2) 2.5 – 7.5 z
Between (3) and (4) 2.5 – 7.5 z
Disconnection in wiring E11 (female) (1)
and standard
state wiring harness or defective E11 (female) (2)
contact in connector) Wiring harness between C03 (female) (25) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
E11 (female) (3)
Resistance Max. 1 z
E11 (female) (4)
Defective governor and C03 (female) Resistance
3
pump controller
Between (5) and (15) 2.5 – 7.5 z
Between (25) and (35) 2.5 – 7.5 z
20-362 PC130-7
(1)
PC130-7 20-363
(1)
Error code [318] (Short circuit in phases A and B of governor motor)
User code Error code Short circuit in phases A and B of governor motor
Trouble
Contents of
• When the signal is output to the governor motor, an abnormal current flows.
trouble
• The engine speed cannot be controlled.
Problem that
• The engine speed is set to low idling.
appears on
machine
Related • The operation state (current) of the governor motor can be checked with the monitoring function.
information (Code: 033 - Phase A, 034 - Phase B, by 10 mA)

E11 (male) Resistance
Defective governor motor Between (1) and (2) 2.5 – 7.5 z
1
Between (3) and (4) 2.5 – 7.5 z
Short circuit with chassis wiring harness and chassis ground
Possible causes ground in wiring harness Between C03 (female) (15) – E11 (female) (2)
and standard 2 Resistance Min. 1 Mz
(Contact with ground cir- wiring harness and chassis ground
value in normal cuit)
state Between C03 (female) (25) – E11 (female) (3)
C03 (female) Resistance
Between (5) and (15) 2.5 – 7.5 z
Defective governor and Between (25) and (35) 2.5 – 7.5 z
3
pump controller
20-364 PC130-7
(1)
PC130-7 20-365
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
(E-MODE)
BEFORE CARRYING OUT TROUBLESHOOTING WHEN CODE IS DISPLAYED................................... 20-402
INFORMATION IN TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE ..................................................................................... 20-403
E- 1 Engine does not start......................................................................................................................... 20-404
E- 2 Engine stops during operation........................................................................................................... 20-408
E- 3 Engine speed is unstable or engine hunts......................................................................................... 20-410
E- 4 Engine does not stop......................................................................................................................... 20-412
E- 5 Auto-decelerator does not operate .................................................................................................... 20-414
E- 6 Automatic warm-up system does not operate ................................................................................... 20-415
E- 7 Preheater does not operate............................................................................................................... 20-416
E- 8 Work equipment, swing, and travel system do not operate ............................................................... 20-418
E- 9 One-touch power maximizing system does not operate.................................................................... 20-420
E-10 No items of monitor panel light up ..................................................................................................... 20-421
E-11 7-segment LED's of monitor panel does not light up partially............................................................ 20-422
E-12 Monitor lamp of monitor panel is different from mounted model........................................................ 20-422
E-13 When starting switch is turned ON, basic check items light up or flash ............................................ 20-423
E-14 While engine is running, caution items flash ..................................................................................... 20-424
E-15 While engine is running, emergency stop items flash ....................................................................... 20-428
E-16 Engine coolant thermometer is abnormal.......................................................................................... 20-430
E-17 Fuel level gauge is abnormal............................................................................................................. 20-431
E-18 Swing lock monitor is abnormal......................................................................................................... 20-432
E-19 When monitor switch is operated, display by lamp does not change ................................................ 20-434
E-20 Windshield wiper and windshield washer do not operate.................................................................. 20-436
E-21 Lower windshield wiper does not operate ......................................................................................... 20-440
E-22 Caution buzzer does not stop............................................................................................................ 20-442
E-23 Monitoring function does not display "Boom RAISE" normally .......................................................... 20-444
E-24 Monitoring function does not display "Boom LOWER" normally ....................................................... 20-446
E-25 Monitoring function does not display "Arm IN" normally .................................................................... 20-448
E-26 Monitoring function does not display "Arm OUT" normally ................................................................ 20-450
E-27 Monitoring function does not display "Bucket CURL" normally ......................................................... 20-452
E-28 Monitoring function does not display "Bucket DUMP" normally ........................................................ 20-454
E-29 Monitoring function does not display "Swing" normally ..................................................................... 20-456
E-30 Monitoring function does not display "Travel" normally ..................................................................... 20-458
E-31 Monitoring function does not display "service" normally.................................................................... 20-460
E-32 Troubleshooting of air conditioner ..................................................................................................... 20-464
E-33 Travel alarm does not sound or does not stop sounding................................................................... 20-475
PC130-7 20-401
(1)
BEFORE CARRYING OUT TROUBLESHOOTING WHEN CODE IS

DISPLAYED
Connection table of fuse box
a This connection table shows the devices to which each power supply of the fuse box (FB1) supplies power
(A switch power supply is a device which supplies power while the starting switch is at the ON position and
a constant power supply is a device which supplies power while the starting switch is at the OFF position).
a When carrying out troubleshooting related to the electrical system, you should check the fuse box and fus-
ible link to see if the power is supplied normally.
Type of power
Fuse No. Fuse capacity Destination of power
supply
Governor and pump controller (Controller power supply)
PC-EPC solenoid (Emergency pump drive switch circuit)
1 10A
Swing holding brake solenoid
(Swing holding brake release switch circuit)
2 20A Governor and pump controller (Solenoid power supply)
Switch power supply
(Fusible link: A34) PPC oil pressure lock solenoid
3 10A
Starting motor cutout relay (For PPC lock)
Cigarette lighter
4 10A
Windshield washer motor
5 10A Horn
6 10A Lower wiper motor [If equipped]
7 10A Rotary lamp [If equipped]
Switch power supply Working lamp (Boom and right front)

8 10A
(Fusible link: A34) Working lamp (Left front and rear) [If equipped]
9 10A One-touch power maximizing switch circuit
10 10A Fuel priming pump [If equipped]
11 20A Air conditioner unit
Starting motor cutout relay (For personal code)
12 20A
Monitor panel (Switch power supply)
Light relay 1
Switch power supply
13 20A Light relay 2
(Fusible link: A34)
Panel night light signal circuit
14 10A Heated seat [If equipped]
Heated seat [If equipped]
15 10A
Travel alarm [If equipped]
16 10A DC/DC converter (Power supply to 12-V devices)
17 20A Monitor panel (Constant power supply)
Constant power
supply 18 10A Starting switch
(Fusible link: A35)
19 10A Room lamp
20 10A (Spare)
20-402 PC130-7
(1)

a The following information is summarized in the troubleshooting table and the related electrical circuit dia-
gram. Before carrying out troubleshooting, understand that information fully.
Trouble Trouble which occurred in the machine
Related
Information related to the detected trouble or troubleshooting
information
<Contents of description)
1
<Troubles in wiring harness>
• Disconnection
Connector is connected imperfectly or wiring harness is broken.
• Grounding fault
Wiring harness which is not connected to chassis ground circuit is in
contact with chassis ground circuit.
• Short circuit with power source
2 Wiring harness which is not connected to power source (24-V) circuit
is in contact with power source (24-V) circuit.
Possible causes
<Precautions for troubleshooting>
value in normal (Given numbers are
1) Method of indicating connector No. and handling of T-adapter
state reference numbers, which
Insert or connect T-adapter as explained below for troubleshoot-
do not indicate priority)
ing, unless otherrwise specified.
• If connector No. has no marks of "male" and "female", disconnect
3 connector and insert T-adapters in both male side and female
side.
• If connector No. has marks of "male" and "female", disconnect
connector and connect T-adapter to only male side or female
side.
2) Entry order of pin Nos. and handling of circuit tester leads
Connect positive (+) lead and negative (-) lead of circuit tester as
explained below for troubleshooting, unless otherwise specified.
4 • Connect positive (+) lead to pin No. or harness entered on front
side.
• Connect negative (-) lead to pin No. or harness entered on rear
side.
Related circuit diagram
This is a circuit diagram of the part related to troubleshooting.

• Connector No.: Shows the "Type-Number of pin" and "Color".
• Branching/Merging point: Shows that there is a branching/merging point in the electric circuit to be
checked.
• Arrow ( ): Roughly shows the location on the machine.
PC130-7 20-403
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING E-1
E-1 Engine does not start
Trouble • Engine does not start

Related
• The engine starting circuit is equipped with the start lock function of safety lock lever type.
information

Battery voltage Electrolyte specific gravity
1 Low charge level of battery
Min. 24 V Min. 1.26
If the fuse is broken, the circuit probably has a grounding fault, etc.
(See Cause 10.)
2 Defective fuse No. 3 or 18
If the fuse is not broken and the monitor panel does not light up, check
the power supply circuit between the battery and fuse box, too.
Defective starting switch
3 H15 (male) Starting switch Resistance
OFF Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) and (4)
START Max. 1 z
Defective safety lock switch
4 S14 (female) Safety lock lever Resistance
Free Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) and (3)
Lock Max. 1 z
Defective starting motor out turning starting switch.
cutout relay R11 or R13 R11 (female), R12 Resistance
5
(Internal disconnection or Between (1) and (2) 100 – 500 z
short circuit) Between (3) and (5) Min. 1 Mz
Possible causes Between (3) and (6) Max. 1 z
and standard aPrepare with starting switch OFF (Disconnect only terminal C), then
value in normal turn starting switch to START position and carry out troubleshooting.
state Starting
Relay terminal, A27 Voltage/Resistance
switch
Between B and Power
20 – 30 V
chassis ground supply
Between E and
GND Max. 1 z
Defective starting motor chassis ground
6 safety relay Between A27 (2) and Genera-
START Max. 1 V
(Internal defect) chassis ground tion signal
Between A27 (1) and Starting
20 – 30 V
chassis ground input
Between C and Starting
20 – 30 V
chassis ground output
If the power supply, GND, generation signal, and starting input are nor-
mal and the starting output is not normal, the starting motor safety relay
is defective.
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch to START
position and carry out troubleshooting.
Starting
Starting motor Voltage
switch
Defective starting motor Between B and Power
7 20 – 30 V
(Internal defect) chassis ground supply
START
Between C and Starting
20 – 30 V
chassis ground output
If the power supply and starting signal are normal and the starting motor
does not rotate, the starting motor is defective.
20-404 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING E-1

aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch to ON or
Defective alternator START position and carry out troubleshooting.
8
(Internal defect) E12 (male) Resistance
Between (1) and chassis ground Max. 1 V
Wiring harness between FB1-18 outlet and H15
Resistance Max. 1 z
(female) (1)
Wiring harness between H15 (female) (4) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
J01 and R11 (female) (5)
Wiring harness between R11 (female) (3) and
Disconnection in wiring Resistance Max. 1 z
A27 (female) (1)
harness
Wiring harness between starting safety relay C
9 (Disconnection in wiring Resistance Max. 1 z
and starting motor C
harness or defective
Wiring harness between FB1-3 outlet and S14
contact in connector) Resistance Max. 1 z
(male) (1)
Wiring harness between S14 (male) (3) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
R11 (female) (1)
Resistance Max. 1 z
R13 (female) (6)
and standard J04 and chassis ground (A10)
Between FB1-18 outlet – H15 (female) (1) wir-
ing harness and chassis ground
Between H15 (female) (4) – J01 – R11 (female)
(5) or P01 (female) (4) or C01 (female) (17) or
other related circuit wiring harness and chassis
Short circuit with chassis ground
ground in wiring harness Between R11 (female) (3) – A27 (female) (1) Resistance Min. 1 Mz
10 wiring harness and chassis ground
(Contact with ground
circuit) Between starting safety relay C – starting motor
C wiring harness and chassis ground
Between FB1-3 outlet – S14 (male) (1) wiring
harness and chassis ground
Between S14 (male) (3) – R11 (female) (1) wir-
ing harness and chassis ground
Between P02 (female) (14) – J05 – R13
11 source in wiring harness Between A27 (female) (2) – E08 (male) (1) or
(Contact with 24-V circuit) J02 or D01 (female) (6) or P02 (female) (11) or
Voltage Max. 1 V
other related circuit wiring harness and chassis
ground
PC130-7 20-405
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING E-1
Circuit diagram related to engine preheating, starting, charging, and stopping functions
20-406 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING E-2
E-2 Engine stops during operation

Trouble • Engine stops during operation.
Related • The input state (Voltage) from the governor potentiometer can be checked with the monitoring function.

Defective governor E10 (male) Resistance
1 potentiometer
Between (A) and (C) 4.0 – 6.0 z
(Internal defect)
Disconnection in wiring aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting with-
harness out turning starting switch.
Possible causes
2 (Disconnection in wiring
value in normal
harness or defective con- Resistance Max. 1 z
tact in connector) E10 (female) (B)
state
3
(Contact with ground Between C01 (female) (13) – E10 (female) (B)
circuit) wiring harness and chassis ground
4
pump controller
20-408 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING E-2
BWP13362
PC130-7 20-409
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING E-3
E-3 Engine speed is unstable or engine hunts

(1) Low idling speed is unstable.
Trouble (2) Engine hunts.
(3) High idling speed is low.
• Since the governor and pump controller normally performs the following controls, the set opening angle
of the fuel control dial does not always conform accurately to the control angle of the governor motor.
1) Governor control by selecting working mode
2) Governor control by setting automatic decelerating function
3) Governor control according to operating condition of control lever
4) Governor control by automatic warm-up function in cold state
Related
5) Governor control by turbocharger protecting function when engine is started
information
Accordingly, when checking the operation of the fuel control dial and governor motor, be sure to select
GOVERNOR ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION [03]. (Since the governor control function does not operate
in this mode, the set opening angle of the fuel control dial always conforms to the control angle of the
governor motor.)
• The engine speed can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 010, by 10 rpm)

aTurn starting switch ON and carry out troubleshooting (monitoring).
Monitoring code Item Normal display
Defective governor
002 Governor and pump
1 potentiometer 130
(Internal defect) 003 controller model code
If the monitoring display is abnormal, carry out troubleshooting for error
code [217].
Defective adjustment of
2 See TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Special functions of monitor panel.
governor lever
aTurn starting switch ON or start engine and carry out troubleshooting.
Malfunction of governor When the following operation is performed, if the governor motor lever
3 moves smoothly, the governor motor is normal.
motor
Possible causes • Operate the fuel control dial between low idling and high idling.
and standard • Stop the engine by turning the starting switch OFF.
value in normal Defective fuel control
4 See the Shop Manual for 95-3 Seriese, Engine.
state system of engine
harness or defective con- Resistance Max. 1 z
tact in connector) J07 and H15 (female) (5)
ground in wiring harness
6 Between C01 (female) (23) – J07 – H15
(female) (5) or other related circuit wiring har- Resistance Min. 1 z
circuit)
ness and chassis ground
Troubleshooting cannot be carried out since the defect is in the gover-
7 nor and pump controller (If none of causes 1 – 6 is the cause of the trou-
pump controller
ble, the governor and pump controller is defective).
20-410 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING E-3
PC130-7 20-411
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING E-4
E-4 Engine does not stop

Trouble • Engine does not stop.
• The governor and pump controller holds the battery relay for 4 seconds at shortest and 7 seconds at
longest to secure the drive power for the governor motor after the starting switch is turned to the OFF
Related
position until the engine stops.
information
• The drive state (ON/OFF) of the battery relay can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 037, Right of upper line)

1 When the starting switch is operated as follows, if the battery relay con-
(Internal defect)
tacts make operating sounds, the battery relay is normal.
• Starting switch OFF o ON o OFF
2 diode D01
D01 (male) Digital circuit tester Continuity
Between (5) and (1) Diode mode There is continuity
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between C03 (female) (4) and
state harness Resistance Max. 1 z
D01 (female) (5)
Wiring harness between D01 (female) (1) and
harness or defective Resistance Max. 1 z
contact in connector) J01 and A21 (BR)
Wiring harness between A20 (E) and chassis
Resistance Max. 1 z
ground (A14)
4 C03 Starting switch Voltage
pump controller
Between (4) and 20 – 30 V
ON o OFF
chassis ground (4 – 7 sec)
20-412 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING E-4
PC130-7 20-413
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING E-5
E-5 Auto-decelerator does not operate
Trouble • Auto-decelerator does not operate.

• Since the auto-decelerator is set to 1,400 rpm, it does not operate if the fuel control dial is not set above
Related this level.
information • Check the display on the monitor panel while the engine is running.
Monitoring code When lever is
6-bit display operated: ON
(Center of lower line)
1 Defective boom RAISE 020 When lever is in
signal neutral: OFF
If the display on the monitor panel is abnormal, carry out troubleshooting
for E-23.
When lever is
Monitoring code operated: ON
6-bit display
Defective boom LOWER (Center of upper line) When lever is in
2 signal 020 neutral: OFF
for E-24.
(Left of upper line) When lever is in
3 Defective arm IN signal 020
neutral: OFF
for E-25.
When lever is
6-bit display
(Left of lower line) When lever is in
4 Defective arm OUT signal 020 neutral: OFF
for E-26.
Possible causes (Right of upper line)
5 Defective bucket CURL 021 When lever is in
and standard signal neutral: OFF
value in normal If the display on the monitor panel is abnormal, carry out troubleshooting
state for E-27.
When lever is
6-bit display
Defective bucket DUMP (Right of lower line) When lever is in
6 signal 021 neutral: OFF
for E-28.
(Right of upper line) When lever is in
7 Defective swing signal 020
neutral: OFF
for E-29.
When lever is
6-bit display
(Right of lower line) When lever is in
8 Defective travel signal 020 neutral: OFF
for E-30.
(Center of lower line)
9 Defective attachment 021 When lever is in
signal neutral: OFF
IIf the display on the monitor panel is abnormal, carry out troubleshoot-
ing for E-31.
10 Defective governor and nor and pump controller (If none of causes 1 – 9 is the cause of the trou-
pump controller ble, the governor and pump controller is defective).
20-414 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING E-6
E-6 Automatic warm-up system does not operate
Trouble • Automatic warm-up system does not operate.

• When the engine coolant temperature is below 30°C, the automatic warm-up system raises the engine
Related speed to 1,200 rpm.
information • If the fuel control dial is opened more than 70% for 3 seconds when the starting switch is turned ON or
after the engine is started, the automatic warm-up system is turned OFF.

Possible causes Defective engine coolant Engine coolant Approx. 480 – 440
1 041 temperature sensor (Coolant temperature:
and standard temperature sensor system
value in normal voltage (Unit: 10 mV) 0 – 30 °C)
state If the display on the monitor panel is abnormal, carry out troubleshooting
for E-16.
2 nor and pump controller (If none of the above causes is the cause of the
pump controller
trouble, the governor and pump controller is defective).
PC130-7 20-415
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING E-7
E-7 Preheater does not operate
Trouble (1) When the starting switch is set in the HEAT position, the preheating monitor does not light up.
• The preheater monitor lights up when the starting switch is turned to the HEAT position and starts flash-
ing about 30 seconds after to notify the operator of completion of preheating (It stops flashing about 10
Related
seconds after).
information
• The input state (ON/OFF) of the preheating signal can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 045, Center of upper line)
1 Defective starting switch If the engine is not preheated (the heater unit does not become hot),
carry out troubleshooting for trouble (2).
Possible causes harness out turning starting switch.
and standard 2 (Disconnection in wiring
Wiring harness between P02 (female) (18) and
value in normal harness or defective Resistance Max. 1 z
contact in connector) J02 (male) (7)
state
aPrepare with starting switch OFF.
P02 Starting switch Voltage
Between (17) and OFF Max. 1 V
chassis ground HEAT 20 – 30 V
Trouble (2) When the starting switch is turned to the HEAT position, the heater unit does not become hot.
Related • If the engine is started while the temperature is low (the coolant temperature is below 30°C), the gov-
information ernor and pump controller drives the heater relay automatically to preheat the engine.

H15 (male) Starting switch Resistance
1 Defective starting switch
OFF Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) and (3)
HEAT Max. 1 z
Heater relay Starting switch Continuity/Resistance
Defective heater relay Between A25 and
2 OFF There is continuity
(Internal disconnection) chassis ground
Possible causes
Between contact
and standard HEAT Max. 1 z
value in normal terminals
Defective electrical intake out turning starting switch.
3 air heater
Electrical intake air heater Continuity
Between E01 and chassis ground There is continuity
harness Wiring harness between H15 (female) (3) and
J02 and A25
contact in connector) Wiring harness between A22 and heater relay Resistance Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between A26 and E01 Resistance Max. 1 z
20-416 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING E-7
PC130-7 20-417
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING E-8
E-8 Work equipment, swing, and travel system do not operate
Trouble • Work equipment, swing, and travel system do not operate

Related
information
1 Defective fuse No. 3 If the fuse is broken, the circuit probably has a grounding fault, etc.
(See cause 6.)
Defective safety lock switch S14 (female) Safety lock lever Resistance
2
(Internal disconnection) Lock Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) and (2)
Free Max. 1 z
Defective PPC lock aPrepare with starting switch OFF.
solenoid V01 (male) Resistance
3
(Internal disconnection or Between (1) and (2) 20 – 60 z
short circuit) Between (1) and chassis ground Min. 1 Mz
Possible causes 4 diode D01
D01 (male) Resistance (Continuity)
and standard (Internal short circuit)
Between (4) and (8) Min. 1 Mz (No continuity)
value in normal
Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between FB1-3 outlet and S14
harness Resistance Max. 1 z
(male) (1)
Wiring harness between S14 (male) (2) and
contact in connector) J02 and V01 (female) (1)
Wiring harness between V01 (female) (2) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
chassis ground
Between FB1-3 outlet – S14 (male) (1) wiring
ground in wiring harness Resistance Min. 1 Mz
6 harness and chassis ground
circuit) Between S14 (male) (2) – J02 – V01 (female)
(1) or D01 (female) (4) wiring harness and Resistance Min. 1 Mz
chassis ground
20-418 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING E-8
Circuit diagram related to PPC lock solenoid
PC130-7 20-419
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING E-9
E-9 One-touch power maximizing system does not operate
Trouble • One-touch power maximizing system does not operate.

Related • The input state (ON/OFF) from the one-touch power maximizing switch (left knob switch) can be
information checked with the monitoring function. (Code: 022, Center of upper line)
(See cause 4.)
Defective one-touch power One-touch power
2 maximizing switch M23 (male) Resistance
maximizing switch
Released Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) and (4)
Pressed Max. 1 z
harness
Wiring harness between FB1-9 outlet and M23
Possible causes 3 (Disconnection in wiring Resistance Max. 1 z
(female) (1)
and standard harness or defective
Wiring harness between M23 (female) (4) and
value in normal contact in connector) Resistance Max. 1 z
C01 (female) (1)
state
ground in wiring harness Between FB1-9 outlet – M23 (female) (1) wiring
(Contact with ground harness and chassis ground
circuit) Between M23 (female) (4) – C01 (female) (1)
Defective governor and One-touch power
5 C01 Voltage
pump controller maximizing switch
Between (11) and Released Max. 1 V
chassis ground Pressed 20 – 30 V
Circuit diagram related to one-touch power maximizing switch
20-420 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING E-10
E-10 No items of monitor panel light up
When the starting switch is turned ON, no items of monitor

Trouble • No items of monitor panel light up.
panel light up.
Related
information

1 Defective fuse No.12 (See cause 3.)
harness
Wiring harness between FB1-12 outlet and J07
2 (Disconnection in wir Resistance Max. 1 z
and P01 (female) (1), (2)
ing harness or defective
Wiring harness between P01 (female) (6), (7)
Possible causes
and chassis ground (A11)
value in normal
state 3
(Contact with ground Between FB1-12 outlet – J07 – P01 (female)
circuit) (1), (2) wiring harness and chassis ground
P01 (female) Starting switch Voltage/Resistance
4 Defective monitor panel Between (1), (2) and
ON 20 – 30 V
chassis ground
Between (6), (7) and
OFF Max. 1 z
chassis ground
Circuit diagram related to monitor panel power supply
PC130-7 20-421
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING E-11, E-12
E-11 7-segment LED's of monitor panel does not light up partially
• 7-segment LED's of monitor panel does When the starting switch is turned ON, 7-segment LED's of
Trouble
not light up partially. monitor panel does not light up partially.
Related
information
Possible causes Cause Standard value in normal state/Remarks on troubleshooting

and standard
value in normal Troubleshooting cannot be carried out since the defect is in the monitor
state panel (The LCD that does not light up may be defective).
E-12 Monitor lamp of monitor panel is different from mounted model
• Monitor lamp of monitor panel is different When the starting switch is turned ON, the monitor panel
Trouble
from mounted model which lights up totally is different from the mounted model.
Related
information

Possible causes Defective model code Monitor panel
and standard 1 001 130
signal model code
value in normal
state
for error code [217].
Troubleshooting cannot be carried out since the defect is in the monitor
2 Defective monitor panel panel (If none of the above causes is the cause of the trouble, the moni-
tor panel is defective).
20-422 PC130-7
(1)
E-13 When starting switch is turned ON, basic check items light up or flash
Trouble (1) Engine oil level monitor flashes.

• When the starting switch is turned ON, if the engine oil level monitor detects lowering of the engine oil
Related level, it flashes.
information • The input state (ON/OFF) from the engine oil level switch can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 046, Center of lower line)

Low engine oil level
1 Check the engine oil level. If it is low, add new oil.
Defective engine oil level out turning starting switch.
2 switch E03 (male) Engine oil level Resistance
(Internal disconnection) Between (1) and When normal Max. 1 z
Possible causes chassis ground When low Min. 1 Mz
and standard Disconnection in wiring aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting with-
value in normal harness out turning starting switch.
state 3 (Disconnection in wiring
contact in connector) E03 (female) (1)
4 Defective monitor panel P02 Engine oil level Voltage
chassis ground When low 20 – 30 V
Circuit diagram related to engine oil level switch
Trouble (2) Engine oil replacement monitor lights up.

Related • When the starting switch iResistances turned ON near the engine oil replacement period, the engine oil
information replacement monitor lights. (Set up Machine only)

Engine oil replacement
Possible causes It is near the engine oil replacement period. Check the elapsed time
1 period
and standard and replace the oil.
value in normal
state If the time before the set engine oil replacement period is longer than 10
2 Defective monitor panel hours, the monitor panel is defective (Troubleshooting cannot be carried
out since the defect is in the monitor panel).
PC130-7 20-423
(1)
E-14 While engine is running, caution items flash
Trouble (1) Battery charge level monitor flashes.

• While the engine is running, if the battery charge level monitor detects lowering of the charge voltage,
it flashes.
Related
• The generation state (Voltage) of the alternator and the input state (ON/OFF) of the generation signal
information
can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 043, by 10 mV, left of lower line)

bleshooting.
Defective alternator
1 E08 (female) Engine speed Voltage
(Defective charge)
Between (1) and Above medium
20 – 30 V
chassis ground (half) speed
Possible causes harness or defective Resistance Max. 1 z
contact in connector) J02 and E08 (male) (1)
and standard
state Short circuit with chassis out turning starting switch.
ground in wiring harness Between P02 (female) (11) – J02 – E08 (male)
3
(Contact with ground (1) or A27 (female) (2) or D01 – J01 – D01
circuit) (female) (1) or H15 (female) (2) or A21 (BR)
4 Defective monitor panel E08 (female) Engine speed Voltage
Between (1) and Above medium
20 – 30 V
chassis ground (half) speed
20-424 PC130-7
(1)
PC130-7 20-425
(1)
Trouble (2) Fuel level monitor flashes.

Related • While the engine is running, if the fuel level monitor detects lowering of the fuel level (Fuel level gauge:
information Red range), it flashes.

Possible causes Low fuel level
1 Check the fuel level gauge. If the fuel level is low, add fuel.
and standard (When system is normal)
value in normal If the monitor flashes while the fuel level gauge is not in the red range
state 2 Defective monitor panel (level 1), the monitor panel is defective (Troubleshooting cannot be car-
ried out since the defect is in the monitor panel).
20-426 PC130-7
(1)
Trouble (3) Air cleaner clogging monitor flashes.

• While the engine is running, if the air cleaner clogging monitor detects clogging of the air cleaner, it
Related flashes.
information • The input state (ON/OFF) from the air cleaner clogging switch can be checked with the monitoring func-
tion. (Code: 046, Right of upper line)

1 Check the air cleaner. If it is clogged, clean or replace it.
Defective air cleaner bleshooting.
2 clogging switch A31 (male) Air cleaner Resistance
(Internal disconnection) When normal Max. 1 z
Between (1) and (2)
When clogged Min. 1 Mz
Possible causes
a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting with-
and standard Disconnection in wiring out turning starting switch.
value in normal harness
state 3 (Disconnection in wiring Resistance Max. 1 z
A31 (female) (1)
bleshooting.
4 Defective monitor panel P02 Air cleaner Voltage
chassis ground When clogged 20 – 30 V
Circuit diagram related to air cleaner clogging switch
PC130-7 20-427
(1)
E-15 While engine is running, emergency stop items flash
Trouble (1) Engine coolant temperature monitor flashes.

Related • If the engine coolant temperature monitor detects a rise of engine coolant temperature (Coolant ther-
information mometer: Red range), it flashes.

Possible causes Engine overheating Check the engine coolant thermometer. If the engine coolant tempera-
1
and standard (When system is normal) ture is high, run the engine at low idling to cool it down.
value in normal If the monitor flashes while the engine coolant thermometer is not in the
state 2 Defective monitor panel red range (level 8, 9), the monitor panel is defective (Troubleshooting
cannot be carried out since the defect is in the monitor panel).
20-428 PC130-7
(1)
Trouble (2) Engine oil pressure monitor flashes.

• If the engine oil pressure monitor detects lowering of the engine oil pressure, it flashes.
Related
• The input state (ON/OFF) from the engine oil pressure switch can be checked with the monitoring func-
information
tion. (Code: 046, Center of upper line)

Lowering of engine oil
1 pressure Check the engine oil pressure. If it is low, repair the troubled parts.
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then hold starting switch OFF and
Defective engine oil start engine and carry out troubleshooting.
2 pressure switch E02 Engine Resistance
(Internal short circuit) Between terminal and When stopped Max. 1 z
Possible causes chassis ground When operated Min. 1 Mz
and standard
3
(Contact with ground Between P02 (female) (7) – E02 wiring harness
Resistance Max. 1 z
circuit) and chassis ground
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then hold starting switch ON and
start engine and carry out troubleshooting.
P02 Engine Voltage
When stopped
Between (7) and Max. 1 V
(Starting switch ON)
chassis ground
When operated 20 – 30 V
Circuit diagram related to engine oil pressure switch
PC130-7 20-429
(2)
E-16 Engine coolant thermometer is abnormal
(1) While engine coolant temperature is rising normally, thermometer does not rise from white range (C).
Trouble
(2) While engine coolant temperature is stabilized normally, thermometer rises to red range (H).
Related • The input state (ON/OFF) from the engine coolant temperature sensor can be checked with the moni-
information toring function. (Code: 041, by 10 mV)

Defective engine coolant Engine coolant
temperature sensor E05 (male) Resistance
1 temperature
(Internal disconnection or
short circuit) Between (1) and (2) 3.5 k – 90 kz
Min. 1 Mz
chassis ground
harness
E05 (female) (2)
Possible causes contact in connector) Resistance Max. 1 z
E05 (female) (1)
and standard
3
(Contact with ground Between P02 (female) (1) – E05 (female) (2)
(Contact with 24-V circuit) Between P02 (female) (1) – E05 (female) (2)
Voltage Max. 1 V
Engine coolant
P02 Resistance
5 Defective monitor panel temperature
Between (1) and (13) 3.5 k – 90 kz
Min. 1 Mz
chassis ground
Circuit diagram related to engine coolant temperature sensor
20-430 PC130-7
(1)
E-17 Fuel level gauge is abnormal
(1) While fuel level is high, gauge does not rise from red range (E).
Trouble
(2) While fuel level is low, gauge does not lower from green range (F).
Related • The input state (ON/OFF) from the fuel level sensor can be checked with the monitoring function.

Defective fuel level sensor out turning starting switch.
1 (Internal disconnection or A60 (male) Fuel level Resistance
short circuit) Between (1) and FULL (Upper limit) Approx. 12 z
chassis ground EMPTY (Lower limit) 85 – 120 z
contact in connector) A60 (female) (1)
Possible causes
and standard Short circuit with chassis aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting with-
value in normal ground in wiring harness out turning starting switch.
3
state (Contact with ground Between P02 (female) (2) – A60 (female) (1)
(Contact with 24-V circuit) Between P02 (female) (2) – A60 (female) (1)
Voltage Max. 1 V
6 Defective monitor panel P02 Fuel level Resistance
Between (2) and FULL (Upper limit) Approx. 12 z
chassis ground EMPTY (Lower limit) 85 – 120 z
Circuit diagram related to fuel level sensor
PC130-7 20-431
(1)
E-18 Swing lock monitor is abnormal
(1) When swing lock switch is set in LOCK position, swing lock monitor does not light up.
Trouble
(2) When swing lock switch is set in OFF position, swing lock monitor does not go off.
• If the swing holding brake release switch is set in the RELEASE position, the swing lock monitor flashes.
Related
• The input state (ON/OFF) from the swing lock switch can be checked with the monitoring function.
information
(Code: 022, Left of upper line, 049, Right of upper line)

Defective swing lock switch out turning starting switch.
1 (Internal disconnection or X05 (female) Swing lock switch Resistance
short circuit) OFF Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) and (2)
LOCK Max. 1 z
harness
J02 and X05 (male) (1)
Wiring harness between X05 (male) (2) and
J05 and chassis ground (A13)
Possible causes
value in normal ground in wiring harness
state 3 Between P02 (female) (17) – J02 – X05 (male)
circuit) (1) or C02 (female) (38) wiring harness and Resistance Min. 1 Mz
chassis ground
4 source in wiring harness Between P02 (female) (17) – J02 – X05 (male)
(Contact with 24-V circuit) (1) or C02 (female) (38) wiring harness and Voltage Max. 1 V
chassis ground
5 Defective monitor panel P02 Swing lock switch Voltage
Between (17) and OFF 20 – 30 V
chassis ground LOCK Max. 1 V
20-432 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to swing lock switch
PC130-7 20-433
(1)
E-19 When monitor switch is operated, display by lamp does not change
Trouble • When monitor switch is operated, display by lamp does not change.
Related
information

and standard
value in normal 1 Defective monitor panel Troubleshooting cannot be carried out since the defect is in the monitor
panel.
state
20-434 PC130-7
(1)
E-20 Windshield wiper and windshield washer do not operate
Trouble (1) Windshield wiper does not operate.

Related • The input state (ON/OFF) from the window rear limit switch can be checked with the monitoring function.
information (Code: 049, Center of upper line)

Defective window rear limit out turning starting switch.
switch W03 (male) Front window Resistance
1
short circuit) When installed to front Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) and (2)
When stored in rear Max. 1 z
2
(Internal disconnection) W04 (female) Continuity
Between (3) and (1) There is continuity
harness
W04 (male) (3)
Possible causes Wiring harness between P01 (female) (10) and
and standard
W04 (male) (1)
4
(Contact with ground Between P02 (female) (15) – W03 (female) (1)
Defective monitor panel ry out troubleshooting.
(Window rear limit switch P02 Front window Voltage
system) Between (15) and When installed to front 20 – 30 V
chassis ground When stored in rear Max. 1 V
5 aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting with-
P01 Wiper switch Voltage
Defective monitor panel
(Wiper motor system) Between (9) and OFF Max. 1 V
chassis ground
Between (10) and Max. 1 V 20 – 30 V
ON
chassis ground (Constant period)
20-436 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to wiper motor and window rear limit switch
PC130-7 20-437
(1)
Trouble (2) Windshield washer does not operate.

Related
information

1 Defective fuse No. 4
(See cause 4.)
Defective washer motor out turning starting switch.
2 (Internal disconnection or A50 (male) Resistance
harness
Wiring harness between FB1 – 4 and J03 and
J06 and A50 (female) (1)
Possible causes Wiring harness between A50 (female) (2) and
and standard
J04 and P01 (female) (3)
Short circuit with chassis Between FB1-4 – J03 – J06 – A50 (female) (1)
ground in wiring harness or D02 (female) (4) wiring harness and chassis Resistance Min. 1 Mz
4
(Contact with ground ground
circuit) Between A50 (female) (2) – J04 – P01 (female)
(3) or D02 (female) (8) wiring harness and Resistance Min. 1 Mz
chassis ground
Windshield washer
switch
Between (3) and When OFF 20 – 30 V
chassis ground When ON Max. 1 V
20-438 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to windshield washer motor
PC130-7 20-439
(1)
E-21 Lower windshield wiper does not operate
Trouble • Lower windshield wiper does not operate.

Related
information
(See cause 6.)
Defective lower wiper out turning starting switch.
2 switch P06 (female) Lower wiper switch Resistance
(Internal disconnection) When OFF Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) and (2)
When ON Max. 1 z
M92 (female) Lower wiper switch Resistance
Between (1) and
20 – 30 V
chassis ground
Defective lower wiper Between (2) and
Max. 1 z
3 motor chassis ground
(Internal disconnection) ON
Between (3) and
20 – 30 V
chassis ground
Between (4) and
Max. 1 V
chassis ground
If the voltage and resistance are normal and the lower windshield wiper
does not operate, the lower wiper motor is defective.
aReplace relay while starting switch is OFF, then turn starting switch ON
Defective lower wiper relay and carry out troubleshooting.
4
Possible causes (Internal disconnection) When the right lower wiper relay is replaced with another
R18
and standard one, if the condition becomes normal, the relay is defective.
and M92 (female) (3) or R18 (female) (5) or Resistance Max. 1 z
P06 (male) (1)
Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between R18 (female) (1) and
P06 (male) (2)
harness or defective Wiring harness between M92 (female) (2), D03
contact in connector) (female) (5), R18 (female) (2) and J09 and Resistance Max. 1 z
chassis ground (T05)
Resistance Max. 1 z
D03 (female) (1) or M92 (female) (1)
Resistance Max. 1 z
M92 (female) (6)
Between FB1-6 outlet – J10 – M92 (female) (3)
or R18 (female) (5) or P06 (male) (1) wiring har- Resistance Min. 1 Mz
Short circuit with chassis ness and chassis ground
ground in wiring harness Between R18 (female) (1) – P06 (male) (2) wir-
(Contact with ground ing harness and chassis ground
circuit) Between R18 (female) (3) – D03 (female) (1) or
M92 (female) (1) wiring harness and chassis Resistance Min. 1 Mz
ground
Between R18 (female) (6) – M92 (female) (6)
20-440 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to lower windshield wiper
PC130-7 20-441
(1)
E-22 Caution buzzer does not stop
Trouble • Caution buzzer does not stop.

Related • The input state (ON/OFF) from the caution buzzer stop switch can be checked with the monitoring func-
information tion. (Code: 045, Right of upper line)

Defective caution buzzer Caution buzzer
1 stop switch P03 (female) Resistance
stop switch
Released Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) and (2)
Pressed Max. 1 z
harness
Possible causes 2 (Disconnection in wiring Resistance Max. 1 z
P03 (male) (1)
and standard harness or defective
Wiring harness between P03 (male) (2) and
value in normal contact in connector) Resistance Max. 1 z
state J05 and chassis ground (A13)
(Contact with 24-V circuit) Between P02 (female) (16) – P03 (male) (1)
Voltage Max. 1 V
Caution buzzer
stop switch
Between (16) and Released 20 – 30 V
chassis ground Pressed Max. 1 V
20-442 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to caution buzzer stop switch
PC130-7 20-443
(1)
E-23 Monitoring function does not display "Boom RAISE" normally
• Monitoring function does not display The monitoring function (special function) of the monitor
Trouble
"Boom RAISE" normally. panel does not display "Boom RAISE" normally.
Related
• 6-bit position of boom RAISE oil pressure switch (Code: 020, Center of lower line)
information

Defective boom RAISE oil bleshooting.
pressure switch Right work equipment
1 S06 (male) Resistance
(Internal disconnection or control lever
short circuit) Neutral position Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) and (2)
Boom RAISE position Max. 1 z
harness
S06 (female) (1)
and standard
3
(Contact with ground Between C03 (female) (10) – S06 (female) (1)
(Contact with 24-V circuit) Between C03 (female) (10) – S06 (female) (1)
Voltage Max. 1 V
bleshooting.
Defective governor and Right work equipment
5 C03 Voltage
Between (10) and Neutral position 20 – 30 V
chassis ground Boom RAISE position Max. 1 V
20-444 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to boom RAISE oil pressure switch
PC130-7 20-445
(1)
E-24 Monitoring function does not display "Boom LOWER" normally
Trouble
"Boom LOWER" normally. panel does not display "Boom LOWER" normally.
Related
• 6-bit position of boom LOWER oil pressure switch (Code: 020, Center of upper line)
information

Defective boom LOWER oil bleshooting.
Between (1) and (2)
Boom LOWER position Max. 1 z
harness
S02 (female) (1)
and standard
3
Voltage Max. 1 V
bleshooting.
5 C03 Voltage
chassis ground Boom LOWER position Max. 1 V
20-446 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to boom LOWER oil pressure switch
PC130-7 20-447
(1)
E-25 Monitoring function does not display "Arm IN" normally
• Monitoring function does not display "Arm The monitoring function (special function) of the monitor
Trouble
IN" normally. panel does not display "Arm IN" normally.
Related
• 6-bit position of arm IN oil pressure switch (Code: 020, Left of upper line)
information

Defective arm IN oil bleshooting.
pressure switch Left work equipment
Between (1) and (2)
Arm IN position Max. 1 z
harness
S04 (female) (1)
and standard
3
Voltage Max. 1 V
bleshooting.
5 C03 Voltage
chassis ground Arm IN position Max. 1 V
20-448 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to arm IN oil pressure switch
PC130-7 20-449
(1)
E-26 Monitoring function does not display "Arm OUT" normally
• Monitoring function does not display "Arm The monitoring function (special function) of the monitor
Trouble
OUT" normally. panel does not display "Arm OUT" normally.
Related
• 6-bit position of arm OUT oil pressure switch (Code: 020, Left of lower line)
information

Defective arm OUT oil bleshooting.
Between (1) and (2)
Arm OUT position Max. 1 z
harness
S08 (female) (1)
and standard
3
Voltage Max. 1 V
bleshooting.
5 C03 Voltage
chassis ground Arm OUT position Max. 1 V
20-450 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to arm OUT oil pressure switch
PC130-7 20-451
(1)
E-27 Monitoring function does not display "Bucket CURL" normally
Trouble
"Bucket CURL" normally. panel does not display "Bucket CURL" normally.
Related
• 6-bit position of bucket CURL oil pressure switch (Code: 021, Right of upper line)
information

Defective bucket CURL oil bleshooting.
Between (1) and (2)
Bucket CURL position Max. 1 z
harness
S01 (female) (1)
and standard
3
Voltage Max. 1 V
bleshooting.
5 C03 Voltage
chassis ground Bucket CURL position Max. 1 V
20-452 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to bucket CURL oil pressure switch
PC130-7 20-453
(1)
E-28 Monitoring function does not display "Bucket DUMP" normally
Trouble
"Bucket DUMP" normally. panel does not display "Bucket DUMP" normally.
Related
• 6-bit position of bucket DUMP oil pressure switch (Code: 021, Right of lower line)
information

Defective bucket DUMP oil bleshooting.
Between (1) and (2)
Bucket DUMP position Max. 1 z
harness
S05 (female) (1)
and standard
3
Voltage Max. 1 V
bleshooting.
5 C03 Voltage
chassis ground Bucket DUMP position Max. 1 V
20-454 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to bucket DUMP oil pressure switch
PC130-7 20-455
(1)
E-29 Monitoring function does not display "Swing" normally
Trouble
"Swing" normally. panel does not display "Swing" normally.
Related
• 6-bit position of swing oil pressure switch (Code: 0201, Right of upper line)
information

Defective swing LEFT oil bleshooting.
Between (1) and (2)
Swing LEFT position Max. 1 z
Defective swing RIGHT oil bleshooting.
Between (1) and (2)
Swing RIGHT position Max. 1 z
S03 (female) (1) or S07 (female) (1)
Possible causes 3 Disconnection in wiring
and standard harness or defective Resistance Max. 1 z
contact in connector) chassis ground (A16)
value in normal
4 Between C03 (female) (29) – S03 (female) (1)
ircuit) or S07 (female) (1) wiring harness and chassis Resistance Min. 1 Mz
ground
5 source in wiring harness Between C03 (female) (29) – S03 (female) (1)
(Contact with 24-V circuit) or S07 (female) (1) wiring harness and chassis Voltage Max. 1 V
ground
bleshooting.
Left work equipment
6 control lever
pump controller
Neutral position 20 – 30 V
Between (29) and
chassis ground Swing LEFT or RIGHT
Max. 1 V
position
20-456 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to swing LEFT oil pressure switch and RIGHT oil pressure switch
PC130-7 20-457
(1)
E-30 Monitoring function does not display "Travel" normally
Trouble
"Travel" normally. panel does not display "Travel" normally.
Related
• 6-bit position of travel oil pressure switch (Code: 020, Right of lower line)
information

Defective travel oil pres- bleshooting.
sure switch S30 (male) Travel lever Resistance
1
(Internal disconnection or Neutral position Min. 1 Mz
short circuit) Between (1) and (2) Forward or reverse
Max. 1 z
operation
harness
S30 (female) (1)
Possible causes chassis ground (A13)
value in normal Short circuit with chassis out turning starting switch.
state ground in wiring harness
3 Between C03 (female) (39) – J01 – S30
circuit) (female) (1) and A43 (female) (2) wiring har- Resistance Min. 1 Mz
ness and chassis ground
(Contact with 24-V circuit) Between C03 (female) (39) – J01 – S30
Voltage Max. 1 V
bleshooting.
Defective governor and C03 Travel lever Voltage
5
pump controller Neutral position 20 – 30 V
Between (39) and
chassis ground Forward or reverse
Max. 1 V
operation
20-458 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to travel oil pressure switch and travel alarm
PC130-7 20-459
(1)
E-31 Monitoring function does not display "service" normally

When 1 attachment is installed
Trouble
"Service" normally. panel does not display "Service" normally.
Related
• 6-bit position of service oil pressure switch (Code: 0201, Center of lower line)
information

Defective service 1 (front) bleshooting.
oil pressure switch S10 (male) Service pedal 1 Resistance
1
Between (1) and (2)
Front position Max. 1 z
Defective service 1 (rear) bleshooting.
2
Between (1) and (2)
Rear position Max. 1 z
S10 (female) (1) or S11 (female) (1)
Possible causes 3 (Disconnection in wiring
and standard harness or defective Resistance Max. 1 z
value in normal
circuit) or S11 (female) (1) wiring harness and chassis Resistance Min. 1 Mz
ground
(Contact with 24-V circuit) or S11 (female) (1) wiring harness and chassis Voltage Max. 1 V
ground
bleshooting.
Defective governor and C02 Service pedal 1 Voltage
6
pump controller
chassis ground Front or rear position Max. 1 V
20-460 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to service 1 oil pressure switches (front and rear)
PC130-7 20-461
(1)
When 2 attachments are installed

Trouble
"Service" normally. panel does not display "Service" normally.
Related
• 6-bit position of service oil pressure switch (Code: 0201, Center of lower line)
information

1
Between (1) and (2)
2
Between (1) and (2)
3
Between (1) and (2)
4
Between (1) and (2)
value in normal S10 (female) (1) or S11 (female) (1) or S21 Resistance Max. 1 z
state (female) (1) or S22 (female) (1)
Disconnection in wiring
harness Wiring harness between S10 (female) (2) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
5 (Disconnection in wiring chassis ground (A16)
harness or defective Wiring harness between S11 (female) (2) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
Resistance Max. 1 z
Resistance Max. 1 z
circuit) or S11 (female) (1) or S21 (female) (1) or S22 Resistance Min. 1 Mz
(Contact with 24-V circuit) or S11 (female) (1) or S21 (female) (1) or S22 Voltage Max. 1 V
bleshooting.
Defective governor and C02 Service pedals 1 and 2 Voltage
8
pump controller
chassis ground Front or rear position Max. 1 V
20-462 PC130-7
(1)
Circuit diagram related to service 1 oil pressure switches (front and rear) and service 2 oil pressure
switches (front and rear)
PC130-7 20-463
(1)
E-32 Troubleshooting of air conditioner

Troubleshooting procedure for air conditioner system
a The control panel of the air conditioner constantly monitors the sensors and other devices in the system.
When it detects any abnormality, it displays "Self-diagnosis notice" on the display monitor by operating
switches specially.
a If you feel any abnormality in the air conditioner system, check the "Self-diagnosis notice" first according to
the procedure for "Troubleshooting by self-diagnosis notice", and then;
• If the "Self-diagnosis notice" is displayed, continue the "Troubleshooting by self-diagnosis notice".
• If the "Self-diagnosis notice" is not displayed, carry out the "Troubleshooting by trouble".
Troubleshooting by self-diagnosis notice

a Check the "Self-diagnosis notice" on the control
panel according to the following procedure.
• How to display "Self-diagnosis notice"

1) Turn the starting switch ON.
2) Press OFF switch (1) and check that any-
thing is not displayed on display monitor (2).
3) Hold the UP switch ( ) and DOWN switch
( ) of temperature setting switch (3) simulta-
neously for 3 seconds.
4) Check the "Self-diagnosis notice" displayed
on display monitor (2).
• How to select "Self-diagnosis notice"

If multiple "Self-diagnosis notices" are recorded, Self-diagnosis notice Trouble mode
press the UP switch ( ) or DOWN switch ( ) of
temperature setting switch (3) to select another E-- No trouble
notice. E11 Disconnection in internal air sensor
• How to delete "Self-diagnosis notice" E12 Short circuit in internal air sensor
When reproducing the "Self-diagnosis notices" Disconnection in water tempera-
or after removing the cause of a trouble, press E15
ture sensor
the switches on both sides of EXTERNAL/
INTERNAL air changeover switch (4) simulta- Short circuit in water temperature
E16
neously for 3 seconds, and all the "Self-diagno- sensor
sis notices" are deleted. E18 Short circuit in daylight sensor
• Finishing display of "Self-diagnosis notice" E43 Abnormality in air outlet damper

To finish display of the "Self-diagnosis notice",
E44 Abnormality in air mix damper
press OFF switch (1) or turn the starting switch
OFF. Abnormality in internal and exter-
E45
nal air damper
20-464 PC130-7
(1)
Self-diagnosis
notice Trouble Disconnection in internal air sensor
E11
Contents of
• Disconnection in the internal air sensor is detected.
trouble
• Fixes the internal air temperature for control.
Action of • If the following condition is satisfied, the trouble is reset.
controller <Completion of removal of cause> + <Deletion of self-diagnosis notice> +
<Turning starting switch OFF and ON> + <Starting air conditioner>
Related
information

Defective internal air out turning starting switch.
1 sensor
TH1 (male) Resistance
Between (1) and (2) 300 z – 430 kz
TH1 (female) (2)
TH1 (female) (1)
If neither of causes 1 and 2 is the cause of the trouble, the air condi-
Defective air conditioner
3 tioner system may be defective. See Shop Manual for Chassis Compo-
system
nents, Troubleshooting for air conditioner.
Self-diagnosis
notice Trouble Short circuit in internal air sensor
E12
Contents of
• Short circuit in the internal air sensor is detected.
trouble
• Fixes the internal air temperature for control.
Related
information

Defective internal air out turning starting switch.
1 sensor
TH1 (male) Resistance
Between (1) and (2) 300 z – 430 kz
TH1 (female) (2)
TH1 (female) (1)
system
PC130-7 20-465
(1)
Self-diagnosis
notice Trouble Disconnection in water temperature sensor
E15
Contents of
• Disconnection in the water temperature sensor is detected.
trouble
• Ignores the warm-up control and fixes the water temperature at 60 °C for control.
Related
information

Defective water out turning starting switch.
1 temperature sensor
THw (male) Resistance
Between (1) and (2) 95 z – 455 kz
THw (female) (2)
THw (female) (1)
system
Self-diagnosis
notice Trouble Short circuit in water temperature sensor
E16
Contents of
• Short circuit in the water temperature sensor is detected.
trouble
• Ignores the warm-up control and fixes the water temperature at 60 °C for control.
Related
information

Defective water tempera- out turning starting switch.
1 ture sensor
THw (male) Resistance
Between (1) and (2) 95 z – 455 kz
THw (female) (2)
THw (female) (1)
system
20-466 PC130-7
(1)
Self-diagnosis
notice Trouble Short circuit in daylight sensor
E18
Contents of
• Short circuit in the daylight sensor is detected.
trouble
• Assumes that the daylight sensor is not installed for control.
Related
information

Defective daylight sensor
1 The daylight sensor may be defective. Check it directly.
Possible causes Disconnection in wiring out turning starting switch.
and standard harness
value in normal P15 (female) (2)
state harness or defective
P15 (female) (1)
system
Self-diagnosis
notice Trouble Abnormality in air outlet damper
E43
Contents of
• Abnormality in the air outlet servomotor system is detected.
trouble
• Stops the servomotor.
Related aDo not connect the power cables to the motor terminals directly to drive the motor. Doing so can dam-
information age the motor output shaft and break the motor coils.

Defective air outlet
1 The air outlet servomotor may be defective. Check it directly.
servomotor (Internal defect)
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting without
turning starting switch.
Wiring harness between Mv1 (female) (1) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
M30 (female) (3)
Possible causes Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between Mv1 (female) (3) and
and standard M29 (female) (11)
value in normal 2 (Disconnection in wiring
state harness or defective Resistance Max. 1 z
contact in connector) M30 (female) (9)
Resistance Max. 1 z
M29 (female) (8)
Resistance Max. 1 z
M29 (female) (9)
If neither of causes 1 and 2 is the cause of the trouble, the air conditioner
3 system may be defective. See Shop Manual for Chassis Components,
system
Troubleshooting for air conditioner.
PC130-7 20-467
(1)
Self-diagnosis
notice Trouble Abnormality in air mix damper
E44
Contents of
• Abnormality in the air mix servomotor system is detected.
trouble
• Stops the air mix servomotor.

Defective air mix
1 servomotor The air mix servomotor may be defective. Check it directly.
(Internal defect)
turning starting switch.
Wiring harness between MAM (female) (1) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
M29 (female) (11)
Possible causes Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between MAM (female) (3) and
and standard harness Resistance Max. 1 z
M30 (female) (3)
value in normal 2 (Disconnection in wiring
state harness or defective Resistance Max. 1 z
Resistance Max. 1 z
M29 (female) (4)
Resistance Max. 1 z
M29 (female) (5)
system
20-468 PC130-7
(1)
Self-diagnosis
notice Trouble Abnormality in air mix damper
E45
Contents of
• Abnormality in the internal and external air servomotor is detected.
trouble
• Stops the internal and external air servomotor.

Defective internal and
The internal and external air servomotor may be defective. Check it
1 external air servomotor
directly.
(Internal defect)
If the fuse (in the unit) is broken, the circuit probably has a grounding
2 Defective fuse (in unit)
fault, etc. Check the related circuits.
Possible causes turning starting switch.
and standard Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between MRF (female) (1) and
value in normal harness Resistance Max. 1 z
state M29 (female) (6)
Wiring harness between MRF (female) (3) and
Wiring harness between MRF (female) (7) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
fuse in unit and M33 (male) (3)
system
PC130-7 20-469
(1)
Circuit diagram related to air conditioner
20-470 PC130-7
(1)
Troubleshooting by trouble
Trouble (1) Air conditioner does not operate at all.

Related
information

(See cause 3.)
Wiring harness between FB1-11 outlet and M33
Disconnection in wiring Resistance Max. 1 z
(female) (3)
harness
M30 (female) (6)
Resistance Max. 1 z
Possible causes Short circuit with chassis out turning starting switch.
and standard ground in wiring harness Between FB1-11 outlet – M33 (female) (3) wir-
value in normal 3 Resistance Min. 1 Mz
(Contact with ground ing harness and chassis ground
state circuit) Between M27 (female) (14) – M30 (female) (6)
Defective air conditioner M33 Voltage
4
unit Between (2) and (3) 20 – 30 V
If the above voltage is normal and the air conditioner unit does not oper-
ate, the air conditioner unit is defective.
M30, M29 Voltage
5 Defective control panel
Between M30 (6) and M29 (12) 20 – 30 V
If the above voltage is normal and the control panel does not operate,
the control panel is defective.
PC130-7 20-471
(1)
Trouble (2) Air does not come out (Air flow is insufficient).
Related
information

Defective blower relay out turning starting switch.
2
(coil side) R30 (male) Resistance
Between (1) and (3) 140 – 340 z
Defective blower relay
3 R30 Fan switch Voltage
(contact side)
Between (4) and ON (Operation)
20 – 30 V
chassis ground position
Defective power transistor
4 Fan switch If air flow changes as fan switch is
(Internal defect)
Operate between Low and Medium operated, power transistor is nor-
and High. mal.
MB (female) Fan switch Voltage
Defective blower motor
5 ON (Operation)
Possible causes (Internal defect) Between (1) and (2) 20 – 30 V
position
and standard
If the above voltage is normal and the blower motor does not rotate, the
value in normal
blower motor is defective.
state
Wiring harness between FB1-11 outlet and fuse
in unit and R30 (female) (3) or R31 (female) (1) Resistance Max. 1 z
or M30 (female) (6)
Resistance Max. 1 z
R30 (female) (1)
Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between M29 (female) (12) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
harness chassis ground (A13)
6 (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between MB (female) (1) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
harness or defective R30 (female) (4)
contact in connector) Wiring harness between MB (female) (2) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
PTR (female) (3)
Wiring harness between PTR (female) (1) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
Resistance Max. 1 z
M30 (female) (7)
Resistance Max. 1 z
M30 (female) (8)
If none of causes 1 – 6 is the cause of the trouble, the air conditioner
system
20-472 PC130-7
(1)
Trouble (3) Air is not cooled (Cooling performance is insufficient).

Related
information

Defective compressor relay out turning starting switch.
2
(coil side) R31 (male) Resistance
Between (1) and (2) 140 – 340 z
ry out troubleshooting. (Set temperature: Max. cooling)
Defective compressor relay
3 R31 Fan switch Voltage
(contact side)
Between (4) and ON (Operation)
20 – 30 V
chassis ground position
Defective thermostat
4 The thermostat may be defective. Check it directly.
(Internal defect)
Defective high/low out turning starting switch.
5 pressure switch
P17 (male) Resistance
Between (1) and (2) Max. 1 z
Defective compressor
Possible causes 6 The compressor clutch may be defective. Check it directly.
(Internal defect)
and standard
Defective compressor
value in normal 7 The compressor may be defective. Check it directly.
(Internal defect)
state
Resistance Max. 1 z
P17 (female) (1)
Resistance Max. 1 z
J04 and chassis ground (A12)
Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between FB1-11 outlet and R31
harness (female) (2) or fuse in unit and R31 (female) (1) Resistance Max. 1 z
8 (Disconnection in wiring or M30 (female) (6)
harness or defective Wiring harness between ST1 (female) (1) and
R31 (female) (3)
Resistance Max. 1 z
ST1 (female) (2)
Resistance Max. 1 z
Resistance Max. 1 z
E06 (female) (1)
If none of causes 1 – 8 is the cause of the trouble, the air conditioner
system
PC130-7 20-473
(1)
Circuit diagram related to air conditioner
20-474 PC130-7
(1)
E-33 Travel alarm does not sound or does not stop sounding
When travel alarm is installed
(1) Alarm does not sound while machine is traveling.

Trouble
(2) Alarm sounds while machine is stopped.
Related
information

(See cause 4.)
aStart engine and carry out troubleshooting (Travel lever).
When lever is
Monitoring code
2 Defective travel signal 6-bit display operated: ON
(Right of lower line) When lever is in
020
neutral: OFF
Possible causes Disconnection in wiring out turning starting switch.
and standard harness
value in normal 3 (Disconnection in wiring Resistance Max. 1 z
and A43 (female) (1)
state harness or defective
Wiring harness between A43 (female) (2) and
J01 (male) (19)
4 Between FB1-15 outlet – J03 – A43 (female)
circuit) (1) or other related circuit wiring harness and Resistance Min. 1 Mz
chassis ground
Troubleshooting cannot be carried out since the defect is in the travel
5 Defective travel alarm alarm (If none of the above causes 1 – 4 is the cause of the trouble, the
travel alarm is defective).
PC130-7 20-475
(1)
Circuit diagram related to travel oil pressure switch and travel alarm
20-476 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR HYDRAULIC AND
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
(H-MODE)
INFORMATION IN TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE .................................................................................... 20-502
HYDRAULIC AND MECHANICAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM ............................................................................ 20-504
H- 1 Speed or power of whole work equipment, swing, and travel is low ................................................ 20-506
H- 2 Engine speed lowers extremely or engine stalls .............................................................................. 20-507
H- 3 Work equipment, swing, and travel systems do not work ................................................................ 20-508
H- 4 Abnormal sound comes out from around hydraulic pump ................................................................ 20-508
H- 5 Auto-decelerator does not operate ................................................................................................... 20-509
H- 6 Fine control performance or response is low ................................................................................... 20-509
H- 7 Speed or power of boom is low ........................................................................................................ 20-510
H- 8 Speed or power of arm is low ........................................................................................................... 20-511
H- 9 Speed or power of bucket is low ...................................................................................................... 20-512
H-10 Work equipment does not move singly ............................................................................................ 20-513
H-11 Hydraulic drift of work equipment is large ........................................................................................ 20-514
H-12 Time lag of work equipment is large ................................................................................................ 20-515
H-13 One-touch power maximizing function does not work ...................................................................... 20-515
H-14 In compound operation of work equipment, speed of part loaded more is low ................................ 20-516
H-15 When machine swings and raises boom simultaneously, boom rising speed is low ........................ 20-516
H-16 When machine operates work equipment or swings and travels simultaneously,
travel speed lowers largely .............................................................................................................. 20-516
H-17 Machine deviates during travel ........................................................................................................ 20-517
H-18 Travel speed is low ......................................................................................................................... 20-518
H-19 Machine is not steered well or steering power is low ....................................................................... 20-519
H-20 Travel speed does not change ......................................................................................................... 20-519
H-21 Travel motor does not work (only one side) ..................................................................................... 20-520
H-22 Upper structure does not swing ....................................................................................................... 20-521
H-23 Swing acceleration or swing speed is low ........................................................................................ 20-522
H-24 Upper structure overruns remarkably when it stops swinging .......................................................... 20-523
H-25 Large shock is made when upper structure stops swinging ............................................................. 20-524
H-26 Large sound is made when upper structure stops swinging ............................................................ 20-524
H-27 Hydraulic drift of swing is large ........................................................................................................ 20-525
PC130-7 20-501
(1)

a The following information is summarized in the troubleshooting table. Before carrying out troubleshooting,
understand that information fully.
Trouble • Trouble which occurred in the machine
Related
• Information related to the detected trouble or troubleshooting
information
2
Possible causes
<Contents of description>
value in normal (Given numbers are refer-
state ence numbers, which do not
indicate priority)
3
20-502 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING HYDRAULIC AND MECHANICAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
HYDRAULIC AND MECHANICAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
20-504 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING HYDRAULIC AND MECHANICAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
a This system diagram is a rough general hydraulic circuit diagram made as reference material for trouble-
shooting of the hydraulic and mechanical systems.
PC130-7 20-505
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING H-1
H-1 Speed or power of whole work equipment, swing, and travel is low
Trouble • Speed or power of whole work equipment, swing, and travel is low.
Related
• Carry out the troubleshooting in working mode A.
information

aPrepare with engine stopped, then run engine at high idling and carry
out troubleshooting.
1 Defective unload valve Control levers Unload pressure
2.4 – 3.4 MPa
All levers in neutral
{25 – 35 kg/cm2}
out troubleshooting
Control levers Main relief pressure
Defective adjustment or
33.6 – 37.0 MPa
2 malfunction of main relief Arm-IN circuit relieved
valve {343 – 378 kg/cm2}
If the oil pressure does not become normal after adjustment, the main
relief valve may have a malfunction or a defect in it. Check the main
relief valve directly.
out troubleshooting
Defective self-reducing Control levers Control circuit basic pressure
3
pressure valve
2.84 – 3.43 MPa
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
out troubleshooting
Possible causes
Measured pump Measurement
and standard Oil pressure ratio
discharge pressure conditions
value in normal
state Pump discharge
Defective adjustment or Swing lock switch: 1
4 pressure
malfunction of PC valve LOCK
PC valve output Arm-IN circuit relieved 0.6 (3/5)
pressure
If the oil pressure does not become normal after adjustment, the PC
valve may have a malfunction or a defect in it. Check the PC valve
directly.
out troubleshooting
Oil pressure ratio
Measured pump
discharge pressure Either track shoe
driven idle (Full stroke)
Defective adjustment or Pump discharge
5 1
malfunction of LS valve pressure
Almost same pressure
LS valve output
0.6 (3/5)
pressure
If the oil pressure does not become normal after adjustment, the LS
valve may have a malfunction or a defect in it. Check the LS valve
directly.
6 Malfunction of servo piston The servo piston may have a malfunction. Check it directly.
If none of above causes is the cause of the trouble, the cause may be
7 Defective piston pump lowering performance, malfunction, or internal defect of the piston
pump.
20-506 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING H-2
H-2 Engine speed lowers extremely or engine stalls
Trouble • Engine speed lowers extremely or engine stalls.

Related
information

Defective adjustment or
33.6 – 37.0 MPa
1 malfunction of main relief Arm-IN circuit relieved
valve {343 – 378 kg/cm2}
If the oil pressure does not become normal after adjustment, the main
Measurement
Measured oil pressure Oil pressure ratio
conditions
Pump discharge
Defective adjustment or Swing lock switch: 1
2 pressure
malfunction of PC valve LOCK
PC valve output Arm-IN circuit relieved
Possible causes 0.6 (3/5)
pressure
and standard
value in normal If the oil pressure does not become normal after adjustment, the PC
state valve may have a malfunction or a defect in it. Check the PC valve
directly.
Oil pressure ratio
Measured oil pressure Either track shoe
driven idle (Full stroke)
Defective adjustment or Pump discharge
3 1
malfunction of LS valve pressure
LS valve output
0.6 (3/5)
pressure
directly.
Clogging of orifice or filter The orifices or filters in the pump servo devices may be clogged. Check
4
in serve devices them directly.
5 Malfunction servo piston The servo piston may have a malfunction. Check it directly.
PC130-7 20-507
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING H-3, H-4
H-3 Work equipment, swing, and travel systems do not work
Trouble • Work equipment, swing, and travel systems do not work.

Related
information

Safety lock lever Solenoid valve output pressure
Malfunction of PPC lock 0 MPa
1
solenoid valve LOCK
{0 kg/cm2}
2.84 – 3.43 MPa
FREE
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Possible causes
and standard aPrepare with engine stopped, then run engine at high idling and carry
value in normal out troubleshooting.
Malfunction of self-reduc- Control levers Control circuit basic pressure
state 2
ing pressure valve
2.84 – 3.43 MPa
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
The piston pump may have a malfunction or has an internal defect.
Check it by the following method.
3 Malfunction of piston pump
• Remove the pump discharge pressure pickup plug and crank the en-
gine. If the oil flows out at this time, the piston pump is normal.
The pump shaft may not rotate because of an defect in the damper.
4 Defective damper
Check the damper directly.
H-4 Abnormal sound comes out from around hydraulic pump
Trouble • Abnormal sound comes out from around hydraulic pump.

Related
information

Lowering of hydraulic oil
1 Check it directly.
level
Possible causes 2 Defective hydraulic oil Hydraulic oil may contain air. Check hydraulic oil directly.
and standard
value in normal Clogging of hydraulic tank Negative pressure may be applied to the hydraulic tank because of clog-
3
state cap ging of the hydraulic tank cap. Check the cap directly.
Clogging of hydraulic tank Negative pressure may be applied to the suction circuit because of clog-
4
strainer ging of the hydraulic tank strainer. Check the strainer directly.
5 Defective piston pump The piston pump may have a defect in it. Check it directly.
20-508 PC130-7
(1)
H-5 Auto-decelerator does not operate
Trouble • Auto-decelerator does not operate.

• Apply this troubleshooting if the auto-decelerator does not operate when the travel lever is operated.
Related (The shuttle valve (in the PPC valve) is installed between the PPC valve and oil pressure switch of only
information in the travel circuit.)

Possible causes
and standard Travel lever PPC valve output pressure
value in normal Malfunction of travel PPC 0 MPa
1
state valve (shuttle valve) Neutral position
{0 kg/cm2}
2.84 – 3.43 MPa
Travel position
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
H-6 Fine control performance or response is low
Trouble • Fine control performance or response is low.

Related
information

Clogging of LS circuit
1 The LS circuit may be clogged. Check it directly.
orifice
Oil pressure ratio
Possible causes Measured oil pressure Either track shoe
and standard driven idle (Full stroke)
value in normal Defective adjustment or Pump discharge
state 2 1
malfunction LS valve pressure
LS valve output
0.6 (3/5)
pressure
directly.
3 Defective servo piston The servo piston may have a malfunction. Check it directly.
PC130-7 20-509
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING H-7
H-7 Speed or power of boom is low
Trouble • Speed or power of boom is low.

Related
information

Right work equipment control lever PPC valve output pressure
Malfunction of right PPC 0 MPa
1
valve (boom circuit) Neutral position
{0 kg/cm2}
Boom RAISE position 2.84 – 3.43 MPa
Boom LOWER position {29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of boom con- The spool of the boom control valve may have a malfunction. Check it
2
trol valve (spool) directly.
Malfunction of boom con-
The pressure compensation valve of the boom control valve may have a
3 trol valve (pressure com-
malfunction. Check it directly.
Possible causes pensation valve)
and standard Malfunction of boom con-
The regeneration valve of the boom control valve may have a malfunc-
value in normal 4 trol valve (regeneration
tion or a defective seal. Check it directly.
state valve)
Malfunction or defective
The suction valve of the boom control valve may have a malfunction or a
5 seal of boom control valve
defective seal. Check it directly.
(suction valve)
The centralized safety-suction valve may have a malfunction or a defec-
tive seal. Check it directly.
6 seal of centralized safety-
(A trouble of the centralized safety-suction valve have bad effects on the
suction valve
arm and bucket.)
Malfunction of boom cylin- The lock valve of the boom cylinder may have a malfunction. Check it
7
der (lock valve) directly.
Malfunction of boom cylin- out troubleshooting.
8
der (cylinder unit) Boom cylinder Leakage from cylinder
Relieved in RAISE position 15 cc/min
20-510 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING H-8
H-8 Speed or power of arm is low
Trouble • Speed or power of arm is low.

Related
information

Left work equipment control lever PPC valve output pressure
Malfunction of left PPC 0 MPa
1 Neutral position
valve (boom circuit)
{0 kg/cm2}
Arm IN position 2.84 – 3.43 MPa
Arm OUT position {29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of arm control The spool of the arm control valve may have a malfunction. Check it
2
valve (spool) directly.
Possible causes
Malfunction of arm control
and standard The pressure compensation valve of the arm control valve may have a
3 valve (pressure compensa-
value in normal malfunction. Check it directly.
tion valve)
state
The suction valve of the arm control valve may have a malfunction or a
4 seal of arm control valve
defective seal. Check it directly.
(suction valve)
suction valve
boom and bucket.)
Malfunction of arm cylinder out troubleshooting.
6
(cylinder unit) Arm cylinder Leakage from cylinder
Relieved in IN position 15 cc/min
PC130-7 20-511
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING H-9
H-9 Speed or power of bucket is low
Trouble • Speed or power of bucket is low.

Related
information

Malfunction of right PPC 0 MPa
1 Neutral position
valve (bucket circuit)
{0 kg/cm2}
Bucket CURL position 2.84 – 3.43 MPa
Bucket DUMP position {29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of bucket con- The spool of the bucket control valve may have a malfunction. Check it
2
Possible causes
Malfunction of bucket con-
and standard The pressure compensation valve of the bucket control valve may have
value in normal a malfunction. Check it directly.
pensation valve)
state
The suction valve of the bucket control valve may have a malfunction or
4 seal of bucket control valve
a defective seal. Check it directly.
(suction valve)
suction valve
boom and arm.)
Malfunction of bucket cylin- out troubleshooting.
6
der (cylinder unit) Bucket cylinder Leakage from cylinder
Relieved in CURL position 15 cc/min
20-512 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING H-10
H-10 Work equipment does not move singly
(1) Boom does not move singly.

Trouble (2) Arm does not move singly.
(3) Bucket does not move singly.
Related
information

Work equipment control lever PPC valve output pressure
Possible causes
and standard 1 Malfunction of PPC valve 0 MPa
Neutral
value in normal {0 kg/cm2}
state 2.84 – 3.43 MPa
Operated
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of control valve
2 The spool of the control valve may have a malfunction. Check it directly.
(spool)
PC130-7 20-513
(1)
H-11 Hydraulic drift of work equipment is large
Trouble (1) Hydraulic drift of boom is large.

Related
information

Possible causes out troubleshooting.
Defective boom cylinder
and standard 1
(cylinder unit) Boom cylinder Leakage from cylinder
value in normal
state Relieved in RAISE position 15 cc/min
Defective seal of boom cyl- The seal of the lock valve of the boom cylinder may be defective. Check
2
inder (lock valve) it directly.
Trouble (2) Hydraulic drift of arm is large.

Related
information

Defective arm cylinder (cyl- out troubleshooting.
1
inder unit) Arm cylinder Leakage from cylinder
Relieved in IN position 15 cc/min
Possible causes
and standard Defective seal of arm con- The seal of the arm control valve spool may be defective. Check it
2
value in normal trol lever (spool) directly.
state Defective seal of arm con- The seal of the suction valve of the arm control valve may be defective.
3
trol lever (suction valve) Check it directly.
The seal of the centralized safety-suction valve of the control valve may
Defective seal of central- defective. Check it directly.
4
ized safety-suction valve (A trouble of the centralized safety-suction valve have bad effects on
bucket.)
Trouble (3) Hydraulic drift of bucket is large.

Related
information

Defective bucket cylinder out troubleshooting.
1
(cylinder unit) Bucket cylinder Leakage from cylinder
Relieved in CURL position 15 cc/min
Possible causes Defective seal of bucket The seal of the bucket control valve spool may be defective. Check it
and standard 2
control valve (spool) directly.
value in normal
Defective seal of bucket
state The seal of the suction valve of the bucket control valve may be defec-
3 control valve (suction
tive. Check it directly.
valve)
The seal of the centralized safety-suction valve of the control valve may
Defective seal of central- defective. Check it directly.
4
ized safety-suction valve (A trouble of the centralized safety-suction valve have bad effects on
arm.)
20-514 PC130-7
(1)
H-12 Time lag of work equipment is large
Trouble • Time lag of work equipment is large.

Related
information

Possible causes Malfunction of control valve
The regeneration valve of the control valve may have a malfunction.
and standard 1 (regeneration valve) [Only
Check it directly.
value in normal boom]
state Malfunction of control valve The suction valve of the control valve may have a malfunction. Check it
2
(Suction valve) directly.
H-13 One-touch power maximizing function does not work
Trouble • One-touch power maximizing function does not work.

Related
• Carry out installation in the reverse order to removal.
information

Swing lock switch Solenoid valve output pressure
Possible causes
Malfunction of 2-stage 0 MPa
and standard 1 OFF
relief solenoid valve
value in normal {0 kg/cm2}
state 2.84 – 3.43 MPa
LOCK
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of main relief The main relief valve of the control valve may have a malfunction.
2
valve Check it directly.
PC130-7 20-515
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING H-14, H-15, H-16
H-14 In compound operation of work equipment, speed of part loaded more is low
Trouble • In compound operation of work equipment, speed of part loaded more is low.
Related
information

The pressure compensation valve of the control valve on the less load
side may have a malfunction. Check it directly.
Possible causes Larger Less load
Compound operation
and standard load side side
Malfunction of pressure
value in normal 1 compensation valve on Boom RAISE + Arm IN Boom Arm
state less load side Boom RAISE + Arm OUT Arm Boom
Boom RAISE + Bucket CURL Boom Bucket
Arm OUT + Bucket CURL Arm Bucket
Boom LOWER + Arm OUT Arm Boom
H-15 When machine swings and raises boom simultaneously, boom rising speed is
low
Trouble • When machine swings and raises boom simultaneously, boom rising speed is low.
Related
information

and standard
value in normal Malfunction of defective The LS selector valve of the control valve may have a malfunction or a
1
state seal of LS selector valve defective seal. Check it directly.
H-16 When machine operates work equipment or swings and travels simultaneously,
travel speed lowers largely
• When machine operates work equipment or swings and travels simultaneously, travel speed lowers
Trouble
largely.
Related
information

Malfunction of work equip-
The pressure compensation valve of the work equipment control valve
1 ment control valve (pres-
may have a malfunction. Check it directly.
Possible causes sure compensation valve)
and standard Malfunction of swing con-
value in normal The pressure compensation valve of the swing control valve may have a
state malfunction. Check it directly.
pensation valve)
Malfunction of travel control
The pressure compensation valve of the travel control valve may have a
tion valve)
20-516 PC130-7
(1)
H-17 Machine deviates during travel
Trouble • Machine deviates during travel.

Related
information

1
ing pressure valve
2.84 – 3.43 MPa
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Travel lever PPC valve output pressure
Malfunction of travel PPC 2.84 – 3.43 MPa
2
valve FORWARD or REVERSE position
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Possible causes Max. 0.4 MPa
Difference between right and left of
and standard
above {Max. 4 kg/cm2}
value in normal
state Malfunction of travel junc- The travel junction valve of the control valve may have a malfunction.
3
tion valve Check it directly.
Malfunction of travel control The spool of the travel control valve may have a malfunction. Check it
4
Defective seal of center
5 The seal of the center swivel joint may be defective. Check it directly.
swivel joint
6 Defective travel motor
Travel lever Relieved in TRAVEL position
Leakage from travel motor Max. 10 l/min
The final drive may have a defect in it. Check it directly. (It may be
7 Defective final drive checked by abnormal sound, abnormal heating, metal chips in drain oil,
etc.)
PC130-7 20-517
(1)
H-18 Travel speed is low
Trouble • Travel speed is low.

Related
information

1
ing pressure valve
2.84 – 3.43 MPa
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of travel PPC 2.84 – 3.43 MPa
2
valve FORWARD or REVERSE position
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Difference between right and left of Max. 0.4 MPa
above {Max. 4 kg/cm2}
Possible causes Malfunction of main relief 36.3 – 39.2 MPa
3 Relieved in TRAVEL position
and standard valve {370 – 400 kg/cm2}
value in normal
state If the oil pressure does not become normal after adjustment, the main
Malfunction of travel control The spool of the travel control valve may have a malfunction. Check it
4
tion valve)
Malfunction of travel control The suction valve of the travel control valve may have a malfunction.
6
valve (suction valve) Check it directly.
Defective seal of center
7 The seal of the center swivel joint may be defective. Check it directly.
swivel joint
Travel lever Leakage from travel motor
Relieved in TRAVEL position Max. 10 l/min
etc.)
20-518 PC130-7
(1)
H-19 Machine is not steered well or steering power is low
Trouble • Machine is not steered well or steering power is low.

Related
information

Malfunction of travel PPC 0 MPa
1 Neutral position
valve
{0 kg/cm2}
2.84 – 3.43 MPa
FORWARD or REVERSE position
Possible causes {29 – 35 kg/cm2}
and standard Malfunction of travel junc- The travel junction valve of the control valve may have a malfunction.
2
value in normal tion valve Check it directly.
state Malfunction of travel control The spool of the travel control valve may have a malfunction. Check it
3
tion valve)
Malfunction of travel control The suction valve of the travel control valve may have a malfunction.
5
valve (suction valve) Check it directly.
Malfunction of travel motor The safety-suction valve of the travel motor may have a malfunction.
6
(safety-suction valve) Check it directly.
H-20 Travel speed does not change
Trouble • Travel speed does not change.

Related
information

Solenoid valve output
Travel speed switch Travel lever
Possible causes pressure
Malfunction of travel speed
and standard 1 0 MPa
shifting solenoid valve Lo position Neutral position
value in normal
{0 kg/cm2}
state
FORWARD or 2.84 – 3.43 MPa
Hi position
REVERSE position {29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of travel motor The speed shifting section of the travel motor may have a malfunction.
2
(speed shifting section) Check it directly.
PC130-7 20-519
(1)
H-21 Travel motor does not work (only one side)
Trouble • Travel motor does not work (only one side).

Related
information

Defective seal of travel
The seal of the suction valve of the travel control valve may be defec-
1 control valve
(suction valve)
Malfunction of travel motor The counterbalance valve of the travel motor may have a malfunction.
2
(counterbalance valve) Check it directly.
Possible causes Malfunction of travel motor The safety-suction valve of the travel motor may have a malfunction.
and standard 3
(safety-suction valve) Check it directly.
value in normal
state aPrepare with engine stopped, then run engine at high idling and carry
Travel lever Leakage from travel motor
Relieved in TRAVEL position Max. 10 l/min
etc.)
20-520 PC130-7
(1)
H-22 Upper structure does not swing
Trouble (1) Upper structure does not swing in either direction.

Related
information

Right work equipment control lever Solenoid valve output pressure
Malfunction of swing hold- 0 MPa
1 Neutral position
ing brake solenoid valve
{0 kg/cm2}
2.84 – 3.43 MPa
SWING position
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of swing motor The parking brake of the swing motor may have a malfunction. Check it
2
(parking brake) directly.
Possible causes aPrepare with engine stopped, then run engine at high idling and carry
and standard out troubleshooting.
value in normal Malfunction of swing motor Left work equipment
3 Swing lock switch Swing relief pressure
state (safety valve) control lever
Relieved in SWING 28.9 – 32.9 MPa
LOCK
position {295 – 335 kg/cm2}
Defective swing motor Left work equipment
(motor unit) control lever
Relieved in SWING
LOCK Max. 6 l/min
position
The swing machinery may have a defect in it. Check it directly. (It may
5 Defective swing machinery be checked by abnormal sound, abnormal heating, metal chips in drain
oil, etc.)
Trouble (2) Upper structure swings only in 1 direction.

Related
information

Malfunction of swing PPC 0 MPa
Possible causes 1 Neutral position
valve
and standard {0 kg/cm2}
value in normal 2.84 – 3.43 MPa
state SWING position
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of swing con- The spool of the swing control valve may have a malfunction. Check it
2
Defective seal of swing The seal of the suction valve of the swing motor may be defective.
3
motor (suction valve) Check it directly.
PC130-7 20-521
(1)
H-23 Swing acceleration or swing speed is low
Trouble (1) Swing acceleration or swing speed is low in both directions.

Related
information

Malfunction of swing con-
The pressure compensation valve of the swing control valve may have a
pensation valve)
Malfunction of swing bleed The swing bleed valve of the control valve may have a malfunction.
2
valve Check it directly.
Malfunction of swing motor The parking brake of the swing motor may have a malfunction. Check it
3
(parking brake) directly.
Possible causes Left work equipment
Malfunction of swing motor Swing lock switch Swing relief pressure
and standard 4 control lever
(safety valve)
value in normal
state Relieved in SWING 28.9 – 32.9 MPa
LOCK position
Defective swing motor Left work equipment Leakage from swing
5 Swing lock switch
(motor unit) control lever motor
Relieved in SWING
LOCK position Max. 6 l/min
position
oil, etc.)
Trouble (2) Swing acceleration or swing speed is low in only 1 direction.

Related
information

1 In NEUTRAL position
valve
Possible causes {0 kg/cm2}
and standard 2.84 – 3.43 MPa
value in normal In SWING position
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
state
Clogging of swing PPC
2 The swing PPC slow return valve may be clogged. Check it directly.
slow return valve
3
trol valve (spool) directly (including the stroke limiting mechanism).
4
20-522 PC130-7
(1)
H-24 Upper structure overruns remarkably when it stops swinging
Trouble (1) Upper structure overruns remarkably when it stops swinging in both directions.
Related
information

Malfunction of swing motor Left work equipment
(safety valve) control lever
Possible causes 28.9 – 32.9 MPa
Relieved in SWING
and standard LOCK position
value in normal
state aPrepare with engine stopped, then run engine at high idling and carry
Defective swing motor Left work equipment Leakage from swing
2 Swing lock switch
(motor unit) control lever motor
Relieved in SWING
LOCK position Max. 6 l/min
position
Trouble (2) Upper structure overruns remarkably when it stops swinging in only 1 direction.
Related
information

valve
Possible causes {0 kg/cm2}
and standard 2.84 – 3.43 MPa
value in normal In SWING position
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
state
Clogging of swing PPC
2 The swing PPC slow return valve may be clogged. Check it directly.
slow return valve
3
4
PC130-7 20-523
(1)
H-25 Large shock is made when upper structure stops swinging
Trouble • Large shock is made when upper structure stops swinging.

Related
information

Possible causes 1 In NEUTRAL position
valve
and standard {0 kg/cm2}
value in normal 2.84 – 3.43 MPa
state In SWING position
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of swing PPC The swing PPC slow return valve may have a malfunction. Check it
2
slow return valve directly.
Malfunction of swing motor The shockless valve of the swing motor may have a malfunction. Check
3
(shockless valve) it directly.
H-26 Large sound is made when upper structure stops swinging
Trouble • Large sound is made when upper structure stops swinging.

Related
information

Malfunction of back-pres- The back-pressure check valve may have a malfunction. Check it
1
sure check valve directly.
The swing motor (safety valves) may have a malfunction. Check it
Malfunction of swing motor
Possible causes 2 directly. (It may be checked by exchanging both valves and seeing the
(safety valve)
and standard change of phenomenon.)
value in normal The swing motor (suction valves) may have a malfunction. Check it
state Malfunction of swing motor
3 directly. (It may be checked by exchanging both valves and seeing the
(suction valve)
change of phenomenon.)
oil, etc.)
20-524 PC130-7
(1)
H-27 Hydraulic drift of swing is large
Trouble (1) When swing holding brake is applied

• When the swing lock switch is in the LOCK position or when the swing holding brake release switch is
Related in the normal position, the swing holding brake operates and the upper structure is fixed with the disc
information brake.

Right work equipment control lever Solenoid valve output pressure
Possible causes Malfunction of swing hold- 0 MPa
and standard ing brake solenoid valve
{0 kg/cm2}
value in normal
state 2.84 – 3.43 MPa
In SWING position
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction or internal
The parking brake of the swing motor may have a malfunction or a
2 defect of swing motor
defect in it. Check it directly.
(parking brake)
Trouble (2) When swing holding brake is released

• When the swing holding brake release switch is in the RELEASE position, the swing brake is released
Related
and the upper structure is secured by only hydraulic pressure.
information

Defective seal of swing The seal of the spool of the swing control valve may be defective.
1
control valve (spool) Check it directly.
Defective seal of swing The seal of the safety valve of the swing control valve may be defective.
Possible causes 2
control valve (safety valve) Check it directly.
and standard
value in normal Defective seal of swing
The seal of the suction valve of the swing control valve may be defec-
state 3 control valve (suction
valve)
Defective seal of swing
The seal of the shockless valve of the swing control valve may be defec-
4 control valve (shockless
valve)
PC130-7 20-525
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING OF ENGINE
(S-MODE)
Method of using troubleshooting charts ...................................................................................................... 20-602

S-1 Starting performance is poor (Starting always takes time)................................................................ 20-606
S-2 Engine does not start ........................................................................................................................ 20-608
(1) Engine does not turn ................................................................................................................ 20-608
(2) Engine turns but no exhaust smoke comes out (Fuel is not being injected)............................. 20-609
(3) Exhaust smoke comes out but engine does not start (Fuel is being injected).......................... 20-610
S-3 Engine does not pick-up smoothly (Follow-up is poor) ......................................................................20-611
S-4 Engine stops during operations ........................................................................................................ 20-612
S-5 Engine does not rotate smoothly (Hunting)....................................................................................... 20-613
S-6 Engine lacks output (or lacks power) ................................................................................................ 20-614
S-7 Exhaust smoke is black (Incomplete combustion) ............................................................................ 20-615
S-8 Oil consumption is excessive (or exhaust smoke is blue) ................................................................ 20-616
S-9 Oil becomes contaminated quickly ................................................................................................... 20-617
S-10 Fuel consumption is excessive ......................................................................................................... 20-618
S-11 Oil is in cooling water, or water spurts back, or water level goes down ............................................ 20-619
S-12 Oil pressure caution lamp lights up (Drop in oil pressure) ................................................................ 20-620
S-13 Oil level rises (Water, fuel in oil)........................................................................................................ 20-621
S-14 Water temperature becomes too high (Overheating)........................................................................ 20-622
S-15 Abnormal noise is made ................................................................................................................... 20-623
S-16 Vibration is excessive ....................................................................................................................... 20-624
PC130-7 20-601
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING METHOD OF USING TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS
METHOD OF USING TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS

This troubleshooting chart is divided into three sec-
tions: questions, check items, and troubleshoot-
ing. The questions and check items are used to
pinpoint high probability causes that can be located
from the failure symptoms or simple inspeciton with-
out using troubleshooting tools.
Next, troubleshooting tools or direct inspection are
used to check the high probability causes to make
final confirmation.
[Questions]
Sections (A) + (B) in the chart on the right corre-
sponds to the items where answers can be
obtained from the user. The items in (B) are
items that can be obtained from the user,
depending on the user's level.
[Check items]
The serviceman carries out simple inspection to
narrow down the causes. The items under (C) in
the chart on the right correspond to this.
The serviceman narrows down the causes from
information (A) that he has obtained from the
user and the results of (C) that he has obtained
from his own inspection.
[Troubleshooting]
Troubleshooting is carried out in the order of
probability, starting with the causes that have
been marked as having the highest probability
from information gained from [Questions] and
[Check items].
20-602 PC130-7
(1)
The basic method of using the troubleshooting chart

is as follows.
Items listed for [Questions] and [Check items] that
have a relationship with the Cause items are marked
with Q, and of these, causes that have a high proba-
bility are marked with w.
Check each of the [Questions] and [Check items] in
turn, and marked the Q or w in the chart for items
where the problem appeared. The vertical column
(Causes) that has the highest number of points is the
most probable cause, so start troubleshooting for that
item to make final confirmation of the cause.
*1. For [Confirm recent repair history] in the

[Questions] Section, ask the user, and mark
the Cause column with E to use as refer-
ence for locating the cause of the failure.
Defective injection pump (excessive injection)

However, do not use this when making cal-
culations to narrow down the causes.
*2. Use the E in the Cause column as refer-
ence for [Degree of use (Operated for long
Seized turbocherger, interference
Clogged, seized injection nozzle

period)] in the [Questions] section as refer-
Clogged air cleaner element

ence. As a rule, do not use it when calculat-
Worn piston ring, cylinder
Improper injection timing

ing the points for locating the cause, but it
can be included if necessary to determine
the order for troubleshooting.
*1 Confirm recent repair history

*2 Degree of use Operated for long period
PC130-7 20-603
(1)
• Example of troubleshooting when exhaust gas is black

Let us assume that [Clogged air cleaner] is taken to be the cause of black exhaust gas. Three symptoms
have causal relationship with this problem: [Exhaust gas slowly became black], [Power slowly became
weaker], and [Dust indicator is red].
If we look from these three symptoms to find the causes, we find that there is a relationship with five causes.
Let us explain here the method of using this causal relationship to pinpoint the most probable cause.
S-7 Exhaust gas is black (incomplete combustion)

General causes why exhaust gas is black
• Insufficient intake of air
• Improper condition of fuel injection
• Excessive injection of fuel
Legend
: Possible causes (judging from Questions and Check items)
: Most probable causes (judging from Questions and Check items)
: Possible causes due to length of use (used for a long period)
: Items to confirm the cause.
20-604 PC130-7
(1)
Five causes
Step 1
Clarify the relationship between the three symptoms in

the [Questions] and [Check items] section and the five
Cause items in the vertical column.
Three symptoms
Step 2
Add up the total of and marked where the
horizontal limes for the three symptoms and the vertical
columns for the causes intersect.
(1) Clogged air cleaner element:
(2) Air leakage between turbocharger
and cyl. head:
(3) Clogged, seized injection nozzle:
(4) Defective contact of valve, valve seat:
(5) Worn piston ring, cylinder:
Step 3
The calculation in Step 2 show that the closest
relationship is with [Clogged air cleaner element]. Follow
this column down to the troubleshooting area and carry
out the troubleshooting item marked .
The Remedy is given as [Clean], so carry out cleaning,
and the exhaust gas color should return to normal.
PC130-7 20-605
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING S-1
S-1 Starting performance is poor

(Starting always takes time)
General causes why exhaust smoke comes out but engine takes time to start
• Defective electrical system
• Insufficient supply of fuel
• Insufficient intake of air Causes
• Improper selection of fuel
(At ambient temperature of –10°C or below,
ASTM D975 No. 2 diesel fuel is used)
a Battery charging rate and gravity
Defective contact of valve, valve seat

Charging rate
Clogged feed pump gauze filter

Ambient 100 % 90 % 80 % 75 % 70 %
temperature

Clogged fuel filter, strainer
Electrical intake air heater

20°C 1.28 1.26 1.24 1.23 1.22
0°C 1.29 1.27 1.25 1.24 1.23
–0°C 1.30 1.28 1.26 1.25 1.24
• The specific gravity should exceed the value for the charging
rate of 70% in the above table.
• In cold areas the specific gravity must exceed the value for the
charging rate of 75% in the above table.
Confirm recent repair history
Degree of use of machine Operated for long period
Gradually became worse
Ease of starting
Starts when warm
Questions
Indicator lamp does not light up

Engine oil must be added more frequently
Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to operation Manual
Non-specified fuel has being used
Dust indicator lamp is red
Battery charge lamp is ON
Starting motor cranks engine slowly
When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting engine,
temperature of some cylinders is low
Engine does not pick up smoothly, and combustion is irregular
Blow-by gas is excessive
Check items
Timing lock on fuel injection pump does not match

Mud is stuck to fuel tank cap
When engine is cranked with starting motor,
1) Little fuel comes out even when injection pump piping sleeve nut is loosened
2) Little fuel comes out even when fuel filter air bleed plug is loosened
Leakage from fuel piping
There is hunting from engine (rotation is irregular)
When compression pressure is measured, it is found to be low

When air cleaner element is inspected directly, it is found to be clogged
When fuel filter, strainer are inspected directly, they are found to be clogged
Troubleshooting
When feed pump strainer is inspected directly, it is found to be clogged

Heater mount does not become warm
Is voltage 26–30V between alternator terminal B and terminal E Yes
with engine at low idling? No
Either specific gravity of electrolyte or voltage of battery is low
Speed does not change when operation of certain cylinders is stopped
When control rack is pushed, it is found to be heavy or does not return
(check after removing fuel injection pump)
When fuel tank cap is inspected directly, it is found to be clogged
Replace
Replace
Correct
Clean
Clean
Clean
Remedy
Use a test stand when adjusting.
20-606 PC130-7
(1)
Replace Defective regulator
Replace Defective alternator
Replace Defective or deteriorated battery
PC130-7
Replace Defective injection nozzle
Adjust Defetive injection timing
Replace Defetive injection pump (rack, plunger stuck)
Causes
Correct Leakage, clogging, air in fuel piping
Clean Clogged air breather hole in fuel tank
TROUBLESHOOTING
Replace Defective feed pump

Replace Defective boost compensator cancel
(1)
S-1
20-607
TROUBLESHOOTING S-2
S-2 Engine does not start
(1) Engine does not turn
General causes why engine does not turn

Causes
• Internal parts of engine seized
a If internal parts of the engine are seized, carry

out troubleshooting for “Engine stops during
operations”.
Defective safety relay or safety switch
Defective battery terminal connection

Defective wiring of starting circuit
Defective or deteriorated battery
• Defective electrical system
• Failure in power train
Defective fuel cut solenoid

Defective starting switch
Defective starting motor

Broken ring gear
Questions
Condition of horn when Horn sounds

starting switch is turned ON Horn volume is low
Speed of rotation is low
When starting switch is Makes grating noise
turned to START, pinion
Soon disengages pinion again
moves out, but
Makes rattling noise and does not turn
When starting switch is turned to START, pinion does not move out
Check items
When starting switch is turned to ON, there is no clicking sound

Battery terminal is loose
When starting switch is turned ON, linkage is not actuated
When battery is checked, battery electrolyte is found to be low
Troubleshooting of defective wiring in starting circuit
Specific gravity of electrolyte, voltage of battery is low

For the following conditions 1) - 5), turn the starting switch
OFF, connect the cord, and carry out troubleshooting
1) When terminal B and terminal C of starting switch are connected,
engine starts
2) When terminal B and terminal C of starting motor are connected,
engine starts
Troubleshooting
3) When terminal B and terminal C of safety relay are connected,

engine starts
4) When terminal of safety switch and terminal B of starting motor are

connected, engine starts
5) There is no 24V between battery relay terminal b and terminal E
When ring gear is inspected directly, tooth surface is found to be
chipped
Cannot be moved by hand even when linkage of fuel cut solenoid is

disconnected
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Remedy —
20-608 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING S-2
(2) Engine turns but no exhaust smoke comes out

(Fuel is not being injected)
General causes why engine turns but no exhaust smoke

comes out
Causes
• Supply of fuel impossible
• Supply of fuel is extremely small
• Improper selection of fuel (particularly in winter)
Defective injection pump (rack, plunger seized)

a Standards for use of fuel
Broken injection pump drive shaft, key
Clogged air breather hole in fuel tank

AMBIENT TEMPRATURE
KIND OF
Seized, broken feed pump piston

FLUID -4 14 32 50 68°F
-20 -10 0 10 20°C
Clogged feed pump strainer
Clogged, leaking fuel piping

Defective fuel cut solenoid

ASTM D975 No.2
Insufficient fuel in tank

Diesel fuel
Improper fuel used

ASTM D975 No.1

Questions

Exhaust smoke suddenly stops coming out (when starting again)
Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to Operation
Manual
Fuel tank is found to be empty

There is leakage from fuel piping
When starting switch is turned ON, linkage is not actuated
Check items
When fuel filter is drained, fuel does not come out

1) No fuel comes out even when fuel filter air bleed plug is
loosened
2) No fuel spurts out even when injection pump piping sleeve nut is
loosened
Rust and water are found when fuel tank is drained
Inspect injection pump directly

When control rack is pushed, it is found to be heavy, or does
not return
Troubleshooting
Inspect feed pump directly

When fuel filter, strainer are inspected directly, they are found to be
clogged
When feed pump strainer is inspected directly, it is found

to be clogged
When fuel cap is inspected directly, it is found to be clogged
Cannot be moved by hand even when linkage of fuel cut
solenoid is disconnected
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Remedy
PC130-7 20-609
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING S-2
(3) Exhaust smoke comes out but engine does not

start (Fuel is being injected)
General causes why exhaust smoke comes out but

engine not start
Causes
Defective, broken valve system (valve, rocker lever, etc.)

• Lack of rotating force due to defective electrical
system
Defective injection pump (rack, plunger stuck)

Clogged air breather hole in fuel tank cap

Clogged injection nozzle, defective spray
• Improper selection of fuel and oil
Leakage, clogging, air in fuel system

Defective electrical intake air heater
Defective or deteriorated battery
Worn piston ring, cylinder liner

Improper fuel used

Suddenly failed to start
Questions
When engine is cranked, abnormal noise is heard from

around cylinder head
Non-specified fuel is being used
Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to
Operation Manual
Indicator lamp does not light up
Starting motor cranks engine slowly
When fuel lever is placed at FULL position, it does not contact stopper
Check items

1) Little fuel comes out even when injection pump piping
sleeve nut is loosened
2) No fuel comes out even when fuel filter air bleed plug is
loosened
When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting
engine, temperature of some cylinders is low
When fuel filter is drained, no fuel comes out
Remove head cover and check directly

When control rack is pushed, it is found to be heavy, or
does not return
When fuel filter, strainer are inspected directly, they are
Troubleshooting
found to be clogged
When feed pump strainer is inspected directly, it is found to
be clogged
When air cleaner element is inspected directly, it is found to be clogged
Heater mount does not become warm
Either specific gravity of electrolyte or voltage of battery is low
When feed pump is operated, there is no response, or
operation is too heavy
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Clean
Clean
Clean
Clean
Clean
Remedy
20-610 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING S-3
S-3 Engine does not pick-up smoothly

(Follow-up is poor)
General causes why engine does not pick up smoothly

Causes
• Improper condition of fuel injction
• Improper fuel used
Clogged air breather hole in fuel tank cap
Defective contact of valve and valve seat

Seized turbocharger, interference

Seized injection pump plunger

Improper valve clearance

Questions
Operation Manual
Engine pick-up suddenly became poor
Noise of interference is heard from around turbocharger
Blue under light load
Color of exhaust gas
Black
Clanging sound is heard from around cylinder head
Check items

High idling speed under no load is normal, but speed
suddenly drops when load is applied
When air cleaner element is inspected directly, it is found to

be clogged
found to be clogged
When feed pump strainer is inspected directly, it is found to be
Troubleshooting
clogged
Speed does not change when operation of certain cylinders
is stopped
When control rack is pushed, it is found to be heavy, or does not return
When turbocharger is rotated by hand, it is found to be heavy
When valve clearance is checked directly, it is found to be
outside standard value
When feed pump is operated, operation is too light or too heavy
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Adjust
Clean
Clean
Clean
Clean
Remedy
PC130-7 20-611
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING S-4
S-4 Engine stops during operations
General causes why engine stops during operations

• Seized parts inside engine
Causes
Broken dynamic valve system (valve, rocker lever, etc.)

• Overheating
a If there is overheating and the engine stops,
Defective injection pump (rack, plunger stuck)

carry out troubleshooting for overheating.
• Failure in power train
a If the engine stops because of a failure in the
Broken, seized piston, connecting rod

Broken, seized crankshaft bearing
Broken pump auxiliary equipment

Broken fuel pump drive shaft, key
power train, carry out troubleshooting for the
Broken, seized feed pump piston

chassis.

Broken, seized gear train
Failure in power train

Abnormal noise was heard and
engine stopped suddenly
Condition when engine
Questions
Engine overheated and stopped

stopped
Engine stopped slowly
There was hunting and engine stopped
Replacement of filters has not been carried out according
to Operation Manual
Fuel level lamp lights up
Engine rotates, but stops when power train is operated
Check items
Does not turn at all

When it is attempted to Turns in opposite direction
turn by hand using
barring tool Moves amount of backlash
Shaft does not turn
Metal particles are found when oil is drained
Troubleshooting of chassis
Remove oil pan and inspect directly

Remove head cover and inspect directly
Troubleshooting
When gear train is inspected, it does not turn

Rotates when pump auxiliary equipment is removed
found to be clogged
When feed pump strainer is inspected directly, it is found to
be clogged
Inspect feed pump directly
does not return
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Clean
Clean
Clean
Remedy —
Add
20-612 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING S-5
S-5 Engine does not rotate smoothly

(Hunting)
General causes why engine does not rotate smoothly
• Air in fuel system

Causes
• Defective governor mechanism
Clogged, air in circuit between fuel tank and feed pump

• Defective electric governor mechanism
Clogged, air in circuit between feed pump and nozzle

(engine with electric governor)
a If hunting stops when electric governor rod is

disconnected, carry out troubleshooting for

Defective operation of control rack
the chassis.
Defective adjustment of governor

Defective operation of governor

Low idling speed is too low

Occurs at a certain speed range
Questions
Occurs at low idling

Condition of hunting
Occurs even when speed is raised
Occurs on slopes
to Operation Manual
Rust, water are found when fuel tank is drained
When feed pump is operated,
Check items
1) No response, light, return is quick

2) No response, light, return is normal
Engine speed sometimes rises too far
Engine is sometimes difficult to stop
Seal on injection pump has come off
When governor lever is moved it is found to be stiff

When injection pump is tested, governor is found to be
Troubleshooting
improperly adjusted
does not return
When feed pump strainer is inspected directly, it is
found to be clogged
found to be clogged
Correct
Correct
Adjust
Adjust
Adjust
Adjust
Clean
Clean
Clean
Remedy
Add
PC130-7 20-613
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING S-6
S-6 Engine lacks output

(or lacks power)
General causes why engine lacks output

Causes

Bent fuel lever linkage, defective adjustment

• Improper fuel used
Defective boost compensator diaphragm

(if non-specified fuel is used, output drops)

• Lack of output due to overtaking
Defective westgate diaphragm

Seized injection pump plunger

a If there is overheating and lack of output, carry


out troubleshooting for overheating.

Suddenly
Power was lost
Gradually
Questions

to Operation Manual
Black
Engine pickup is poor and combustion is irregular
Check items
High idling speed under no load is normal, but speed

suddenly drops when load is applied
High idling speed of engine is low
When air cleaner element is inspected directly, it is found to be

clogged
found to be clogged
Troubleshooting
When feed pump strainer is inspected directly, it is found to be

clogged
is stopped
does not return
When valve clearance is checked directly, it is found to be
When lever is placed at FULL position, it does not contact stopper
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Adjust
Adjust
Clean
Clean
Clean
Clean
Remedy
20-614 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING S-7
S-7 Exhaust smoke is black

(Incomplete combustion)
General causes why exhaust smoke is black

Causes
Leakage of air between turbocharger and head



Crushed, clogged muffler
Improper injection timing
Suddenly became black
Color of exhaust gas Gradually became black
Questions

Suddenly
Power was lost
Gradually
Engine pickup is poor and combustion is irregular
When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after
starting engine, temperature of some cylinders is low
Check items
Timing lock on fuel injection pump does not match

Exhaust noise is abnormal
Muffler is crushed
Leakage of air between turbocharger and head, loose clamp

When air cleaner element is inspected directly, it is found to be
clogged
Troubleshooting

is stopped
When check is made using delivery method, injection timing
is found to be incorrect
Injection pump test shows that injection amount is incorrect
When valve clearance is checked directly it is found to be
When muffler is removed, exhaust color returns to normal
does not return
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Adjust
Adjust
Adjust
Clean
Remedy
PC130-7 20-615
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING S-8
S-8 Oil consumption is excessive

(or exhaust smoke is blue)
a Do not run the engine at idling for more than 20

minutes continuously. (Both low and high idling)
Causes
General causes why oil consumption is excessive
Turbocharger
• Abnormal combustion of oil
• External leakage of oil
Worn piston ring, cylinder (liner less engine)

• Wear of lubrication system
Worn valve (stem, guide), broken seal

Leakage from oil pan or cylinder head
Worn, broken rear seal, seal surface

Clogged breather or breather hose
Dust sucked in from intake system

Leakage from oil filter or oil cooler
Leakage from oil drain plug
Worn seal at turbine end

Worn seal at blower end
Leakage from oil piping
Broken piston ring
Broken oil cooler

Oil consumption suddenly increased
Questions

Engine oil becomes contaminated quickly
Exhaust smoke is blue under light load
Excessive
Amount of blow-by gas
None
Area around engine is dirty with oil
There is oil in engine cooling water
Check items
When exhaust pipe is removed, inside is found to be dirty with oil

When turbocharger air supply pipe is removed, inside is
found to be dirty with oil
Oil level in clutch or TORQFLOW transmission damper
chamber rises
Clamps for intake system are loose

When breather element is inspected, it is found to be
clogged with dirty oil
Troubleshooting
There is external leakage of oil from engine

Pressure-tightness test of oil cooler shows there is leakage
Excessive play of turbocharger shaft
Inspect rear seal directly
When intake manifold is removed, dust is found inside
When intake manifold is removed, inside is found to be
dirty with oil
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Correct
Correct
Correct
Correct
Correct
Clean
Remedy
20-616 PC130-7
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING S-9
S-9 Oil becomes contaminated quickly
General causes why oil becomes contaminated quickly
• Entry of exhaust gas due to internal wear Causes

• Clogging of lubrication passage
• Improper fuel
• Improper oil used
• Operation under excessive load
Defective seal at turbocharger turbine end

Clogged turbocharger oil drain tube
Clogged breather, breather hose
Worn valve, valve guide
Exhaust smoke is black

Clogged oil cooler
Clogged oil filter
Questions

Non-specified oil is being used
Black
Excessive
Carry out troubleshooting for “Exhaust smoke is black”.

Amount of blow-by gas
Check items
None
When oil filter is inspected, metal particles are found
When exhaust pipe is removed, inside is found to be dirty
with oil
Engine oil temperature rises quickly

When breather element is inspected directly, hose is
broken or is found to be clogged with dirty oil
Troubleshooting
When oil filter is inspected directly, it is found to be clogged

When oil cooler is inspected directly, it is found to be clogged
Turbocharger oil drain tube is clogged
Excessive play of turbocharger shaft
When safety valve is directly inspected, spring is found to
be catching or broken
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Clean
Clean
Clean
Remedy —
PC130-7 20-617
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING S-10
S-10 Fuel consumption is excessive
General causes why fuel consumption is excessive
• Leakage of fuel Causes

Defective oil seal inside feed pump (piston)

Defective adjustment of fuel control linkage
External leakage from fuel piping, fuel filter
Leakage of fuel inside head cover
Defective injection pump plunger
Defective nozzle holder spray
Defective fuel injection timing

Questions

More than for other machines of same
Condition of fuel model
consumption Gradually increased
Suddenly increased
Black
Exhaust smoke color
White
There is irregular combustion
Check items
When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting engine,

temperature of some cylinders is low
Match mark on injection pump is misaligned
There is external leakage of fuel from engine
Engine oil level rises and smells of diesel fuel
Engine low idling and high idling speeds are high
Injection pump measurement shows that injection amount is excessive

Troubleshooting
When control rack is pushed, it is found to be heavy, or does not return

When check is made using delivery method, injection timing is found
to be incorrect
Remove feed pump and inspect directly
When engine speed is measured, low idling and high idling speeds
are found to be high
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Correct
Adjust
Adjust
Adjust
Remedy
20-618 PC130-7
(1)
S-11 Oil is in cooling water, or water spurts

back, or water level goes down
General causes why oil is in cooling water
• Internal leakage in lubrication system

Causes
• Internal leakage in cooling system
Broken cylinder head, head gasket
Internal cracks in cylinder block

Broken oil cooler core, O-ring
Broken power train oil cooler

Holes caused by pitting
Questions

Suddenly increased
Oil level
Gradually increased
Hard water is being used as cooling water
Engine oil level has risen, oil is cloudy white
Check items
Excessive air bubbles inside radiator, spurts back

Hydraulic oil, transmission oil is cloudy white
When hydraulic oil, transmission oil is drained, water is
found
shooting
Trouble-

Pressure-tightness test of cylinder head shows there is leakage
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Remedy
PC130-7 20-619
(1)
S-12 Oil pressure caution lamp lights up

(Drop in oil pressure)
General causes why oil pressure lamp lights up
• Leakage, clogging, wear of lubricating system

• Defective oil pressure control
Causes
• Improper oil used (improper viscosity)
• Deterioration of oil due to overheating
a Standards for engine oil selection

Selection of SAE No. according to
Type of oil ambient temperature
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40°C
Leaking, crushed hydraulic piping

Clogged strainer inside oil pan
Clogged oil pipe inside oil pan
SAE30CD
Defective oil pressure sensor

Broken suction pipe brazing
Defective oil level sensor

Defective regulator valve
SAE10WCD
Worn bearing, journal
Defective relief valve

Lack of oil in oil pan
Engine oil
Defective oil pump

SAE10W-30CD
Water, fuel in oil

Clogged oil filter
SAE15W-40CD

Questions

Operation Manual
Caution lamp lights up
Lights up at low idling
Condition when oil Lights up at low, high idling
pressure lamp lights up
Lights up on slopes
Sometimes lights up
Check items
There is crushing, leakage from hydraulic piping (external)

Oil level sensor lamp lights up
When oil level in oil pan is inspected, it is found to be low
Metal particles are stuck to oil filter element
Oil is cloudy white or smells of diesel oil
Carry out troubleshooting
When oil filter is inspected, it is found to be clogged

Troubleshooting

for “Oil level rises”.
Oil pump rotation is heavy, there is play

There is catching of relief valve or regulator valve, spring or
valve guide is broken
When oil level sensor is replaced, oil level sensor lamp goes out
When oil pressure is measured, it is found to be within
standard value
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Adjust
Adjust
—
Clean
Clean
Clean
Clean
Remedy
Add
20-620 PC130-7
(1)
S-13 Oil level rises (Water, fuel in oil)
a If there is oil in the cooling water, carry out trou-

bleshooting for “Oil is in cooling water”.
General causes why oil level rises Causes
• Water in oil (milky white)

• Fuel in oil (diluted, and smells of diesel fuel)
Leakage of fuel from piping inside head cover

• Entry of oil from other component
Defective pump auxiliary equipment seal
Defective part inside injection pump

Worn, damaged rear seal surface
Defective nozzle holder sleeve
Broken oil cooler core, O-ring
Cracks inside cylinder block

Holes made by pitting
Defective thermostat
Questions

There is oil in radiator cooling water
Fuel must be added more frequently
Exhaust smoke is white
When engine is first started, drops of water come from
muffler
Leave radiator cap open. When engine is run at idling,
Check items
an abnormal number of bubbles appear, or water spurts back

Oil level goes down in clutch, TORQFLOW transmission,
or damper chamber
Oil level goes down in hydraulic tank
Engine oil smells of diesel fuel
Water temperature is low

Pressure-tightness test of cylinder head shows there is leakage
Troubleshooting

Inspect rear seal directly
When pump auxiliary equipment is removed, seal is found to
be damaged
Remove injection pump and inspect directly
Defective contact with thermostat seal valve
Remove oil pan and check directly
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Correct
Remedy
PC130-7 20-621
(1)
S-14 Water temperature becomes too high

(Overheating)
General causes why water temperature becomes too

high
• Lack of cooling air (deformation, damage of fan) Causes

• Drop in heat dissipation efficiency
• Defective cooling circulation system
• Rise in oil temperature in power train
a Carry out troubleshooting for chassis.
Rise in torque converter oil temperature

Defective thermostat (does not open)
Defective water temperature gauge

Fan belt slipping, worn fan pulley
Clogged, crushed radiator fins
Clogged, broken oil cooler

Defective pressure valve
Holes made by pitting

Clogged radiator core
Lack of cooling water

Broken water pump
Questions
Suddenly overheated
Condition of overheating
Always tends to overheat
Water temperature Rises quickly

gauge Does not go down from red range
Radiator water level sensor lights up
Fan belt whines under sudden load
Cloudy white oil is floating on cooling water
Cooling water flows out from overflow hose
Excessive air bubbles inside radiator, water spurts back
Engine oil level has risen, oil is cloudy white
Check items
There is play when fan pulley is rotated

Radiator shroud, inside of underguard are clogged with dirt or mud
When light bulb is held behind radiator, no light passes through
Water is leaking because of cracks in hose or loose clamps
When belt tension is inspected, it is found to be loose
Power train oil temperature enters red range faster than
engine water temperature
Temperature difference between top and bottom radiator tanks

is excessive
Carry out troubleshooting for chassis.
Temperature difference between top and bottom radiator tanks

is slight
Troubleshooting
When water filler port is inspected, core is found to be clogged

When function test is carried out on thermostat, it does not
open even at cracking temperature
When water temperature is measured, it is found to be normal
When oil cooler is inspected directly, it is found to be clogged
When measurement is made with radiator cap tester, set
pressure is found to be low
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Correct
Remedy —
Add
20-622 PC130-7
(1)
S-15 Abnormal noise is made
a Judge if the noise is an internal noise or an external

noise.
General causes why abnormal noise is made

Causes
Broken dynamic valve system (valve, rocker lever, etc.)
Leakage of air between turbocharger and cylinder head

Excessive wear of piston ring, cylinder (liner less engine)
• Abnormality due to defective parts
Defect inside muffler (dividing board out of position)

• Abnormal combustion

• Air sucked in from intake system
Defective adjustment of valve clearance

Deformed fan, fan belt interference
Clogged, seized injection nozzle
Improper gear train backlash

Missing, seized bushing
Questions
Condition of abnormal Gradually occurred

noise Suddenly occurred
Black
Metal particles are found in oil filter
Engine pickup is poor and combustion is abnormal
Check items

Abnormal noise is loud when accelerating engine
Leakage of air between turbocharger and cylinder head, loose clamp
Vibrating noise is heard from around muffler

Remove gear cover and inspect directly
Speed does not change when operation of certain cylinders is
Troubleshooting
stopped
When control rack is pushed, it is found to be heavy, or does
not return
Fan is deformed, belt is loose
When valve clearance is checked, it is found to be outside
standard value
Remove cylinder head cover and inspect directly
When muffler is removed, abnormal noise disappears
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Correct
Remedy
PC130-7 20-623
(1)
S-16 Vibration is excessive
a If there is abnormal noise together with the vibra-

tion, carry out troubleshooting also for “Abnormal
noise is made”.
General causes why vibration is excessive Causes
Defective dynamic valve system (valve, rocker lever, etc. stuck)

• Defective parts (abnormal wear, breakage)
• Improper alignment
Defective injection pump (excessive fuel injection)

• Abnormal combustion
Loose engine mounting bolts, broken cushion
Center of engine and power train misaligned

Broken part inside output shaft (damper)
Worn connecting rod, main bearing
Improper gear train backlash

Worn cam bushing
Questions
Suddenly increased
Condition of vibration
Gradually increased
Metal particles are found in oil filter
Oil pressure is low at low idling
Check items
Vibration occurs at mid-range speed

Vibration follows engine speed
Exhaust smoke is black

Remove side cover and inspect directly
Troubleshooting
Inspect directly for loose engine mounting bolts, broken cushion

Inspect inside of output shaft (damper) directly
When face runout and radial runout are inspected, they are
found to be incorrect
Remove front cover and inspect directly
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Adjust
Remedy
20-624 PC130-7
(1)
30 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL ................................................................................................................ 30- 2

PRECAUTIONS WHEN PERFORMING OPERATION .............................................................................. 30- 4
SPECIAL TOOL LIST ................................................................................................................................. 30- 6
SKETCH OF SPECIAL TOOL ................................................................................................................... 30- 9
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FUEL INJECTION PUMP ASSEMBLY .......................................... 30- 10
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY....................................................... 30- 13
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF RADIATOR ASSEMBLY ................................................................ 30- 18
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF AFTERCOOLER ASSEMBLY ........................................................ 30- 19
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF HYDRAULIC OIL COOLER ASSEMBLY ....................................... 30- 21
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF ENGINE AND HYDRAULIC PUMP ASSEMBLY ........................... 30- 23
EXPANSION AND INSTALLATION OF TRACK SHOE ASSEMBLY ........................................................ 30- 28
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SPROCKET .................................................................................... 30- 30
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY ............................................................. 30- 31
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF IDLER ASSEMBLY ....................................................................... 30- 32
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF RECOIL SPRING........................................................................... 30- 35
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF TRACK ROLLER ASSEMBLY ...................................................... 30- 39
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF CARRIER ROLLER ASSEMBLY .................................................. 30- 40
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SWING MOTOR AND SWING MACHINERY ASSEMBLY ............. 30- 41
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF SWING MOTOR AND SWING MACHINERY ASSEMBLY .......... 30- 42
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CENTER SWIVEL JOINT................................................................ 30- 48
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF CENTER SWIVEL JOINT ASSEMBLY ......................................... 30- 50
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF WORK EQUIPMENT ASSEMBLY ................................................... 30- 51
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF REVOLVING FRAME ..................................................................... 30- 54
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SWING CIRCLE ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 30- 56
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF HYDRAULIC TANK ASSEMBLY .................................................... 30- 57
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY ..................................................... 30- 60
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY ................................................... 30- 63
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF HYDRAULIC PUMP ASSEMBLY ................................................... 30- 65
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF HYDRAULIC PUMP INPUT SHAFT OIL SEAL .............................. 30- 68
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF HYDRAULIC CYLINDER ASSEMBLY ......................................... 30- 69
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF COUNTERWEIGHT ASSEMBLY ................................................... 30- 75
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF AIR CONDITIONER UNIT ASSEMBLY ......................................... 30- 76
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF OPERATOR'S CAB ........................................................................ 30- 79
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF OPERATOR'S CAB GLASS (STUCK GLASS) .............................. 30- 83
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FRONT WINDOW ASSEMBLY ...................................................... 30- 94
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF MONITOR PANEL ASSEMBLY ..................................................... 30-101
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY .......................................................... 30-102
PC130-7 30-1
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF ASSEMBLIES
SPECIAL TOOLS INSTALLATION OF PARTS
• Special tools that are deemed necessary for • Except where otherwise instructed, install parts
removal or installation of parts are listed. is the reverse order of removal.
• List of the special tools contains the following • Instructions and precautions for installing part
kind of information are shown with [*1] mark in the INSTALLATION
1) Necessity Section, identifying which step the instructions
t: Special tools which cannot be substi- are intended for.
tuted, should always be used. • Marks shown in the INSTALLATION Section
q: Speciall tools which are very useful if stand for the following.
k
available, can be substituted with com-
This mark indicates safety-related pre-
mercially available tools.
cautions, which must be followed when
2) Distinction of new and existing special tools. doing the work.
N: Tools with new part numbers, newly a This marks gives guidance or precau-
developed for this model. tions when doing the procedure.
2 This mark stands for a specific coating

R: Tools with upgraded part numbers,
remodeled from already available tools
for other models. agent to be used.
3 This mark indicates the specified torque.

Blank: Tools already available for other models,
used without any modification.
5
3) Circle mark (Q) in sketch column.
A circle mark means that a sketch of the spe- This mark indicates an amount of oil or
cial tool is presented in the section of water to be added.
Sketches for Special Tools.
a Part No. of special tools starting with 79*T SKETCHES OF SPECIAL TOOLS
means that they are locally made parts and as
such not interchangeable with those made by • Various special tools are illustrated for the con-
Komatsu in Japan e.g. 79*T---×××---××××. venience of local manufacture.
REMOVAL OF PARTS
• The REMOVAL Section contains procedures,

precautions and the amount of oil or water to be
drained.
• Various symbols used in the REMOVAL Section
are explained and listed below.
k This mark indicates safety-related pre-
doing the work.
a This mark gives guidance or precautions
when doing the procedure.
[*1] This mark shows that there are instruc-
tions or precautions for installing parts.
6 This mark shows oil or water be drained.
4 This mark shows the weight of a part or a

device.
30-2 PC130-7
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF ASSEMBLIES
SPECIAL TOOLS
• Special tools which are deemed necessary for ASSEMBLY

disassembly and assembly are listed in this sec-
tion. • Section titled ASSEMBLY contain procedures,
• List of the special tools contains the following precautions and the know-how for the work, as
kind of information. well as the amount of oil or water to be added.
1) Necessity • Various symbols used in the ASSEMBLY Section
t: Special tools which cannot be substi- are explained and listed below.
k
tuted, should always be used.
This mark indicates safety-related pre-
q: Speciall tools which are very useful if
available, can be substituted with com-
doing the work.
mercially available tools.
a This marks gives guidance or precau-
2) Distinction of new and existing special tools. tions when doing the procedure.
2 This mark stands for a specific coating
N: Tools with new part numbers, newly
developed for this model.
agent to be used.
3 This mark indicates the specified torque.
R: Tools with upgraded part numbers,
remodeled from already available tools
5
for other models.
Blank: Tools already available for other models, This mark indicates an amount of oil or
used without any modification. water to be added.
3) Circle mark (Q) in sketch column.
A circle mark means that a sketch of the spe-
cial tool is presented in the section of SKETCHES OF SPECIAL TOOLS
Sketches for Special Tools.
4) Part No. of special tools starting with 79*T 1) Vartious special tools are illustrated for the
means that they are locally made parts and convenience of local manufacture.
as such not interchangeable with those
made by Komatsu in Japan e.g. 79*T---×××--
-××××.
DISASSEMBLY
• The DISASSEMBLY Section contains proce-

dures, precautions and the amount of oil or water
to be drained.
• Various symbols used in the DISASSEMBLY
Section are explained and listed below.
k This mark indicates safety-related precau-
tions which must be followed when doing
the work.
a This mark gives guidance or precautions
when doing the procedure.
6 This mark shows oil or water to be

drained.
PC130-7 30-3
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY PRECAUTIONS WHEN PERFORMING OPERATION
PRECAUTIONS WHEN PERFORMING OPERATION

Be sure to follow the general precautions given below when performing removal or installation (disassmbly or
assembly) of units.
1. Precautions when performing removal work
• If the engine coolant water contains antifreeze, dispose of it correctly.
• After disconnecting hoses or tubes, cover them or install blind plugs to prevent dirt or dust from entering.
• When draining oil, prepare a container of adequate size to catch the oil.
• Confirm the match marks showing the installation position, and make match marks in the necessary
places before removal to prevent any mistake when assembling.
• To avoid loosening any wire contacts, do not pull on the wires. In-order to prevent excessive force to the
wiring, hold onto the connectors when disconnecting them.
• Fasten tags to wires and hoses to identify and show their installation position and help to prevent any
mistakes when re-installing.
• Count and check the number and thickness of the shims, and keep them in a safe place.
• When raising or lifting components, be sure to use proper lifting equipment of ample strength and safety.
• When using forcing screws to remove any components, tighten the forcing screws uniformly in turn.
• Before removing any unit, clean the surrounding area and install a cover to prevent any dust or dirt from
entering after removal.
a Precautions when handling piping during disassembling
Fit the following blind plugs into the piping after disconnecting it during disassembly operations.
A. Face seal type hoses and tubes

Nominal
Plug (nut end) Nut (elbow end)
number
02 07376-70210 02789-00210
03 07376-70315 02789-00315
04 07376-70422 02789-00422
05 07376-70522 02789-00522
06 07376-70628 02789-00628
B. Split flange type hoses and tubes

Nominal
Flange (hose end) Sleeve head (tube end) Split flange
number
04 07379-00400 07378-10400 07371-30400
05 07379-00500 07378-10500 07371-30500
C. If the part is not under hydraulic pressure, the following corks can be used.
Nominal Dimensions
Part Number
number D d L
06 07049-00608 6 5 8
08 07049-00811 8 6.5 11
10 07049-01012 10 8.5 12
12 07049-01215 12 10 15
14 07049-01418 14 11.5 18
16 07049-01620 16 13.5 20
18 07049-01822 18 15 22
20 07049-02025 20 17 25
22 07049-02228 22 18.5 28
24 07049-02430 24 20 30
27 07049-02734 27 22.5 34
30-4 PC130-7
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY PRECAUTIONS WHEN PERFORMING OPERATION
2. Precautions when carrying out installation work

• Tighten all bolts and nuts (sleeve nuts) to the specified (KES) torque.
• Install the hoses without twisting or interference.
• Replace all gaskets, O-rings, cotter pins, and lock plates with new parts.
• Bend the cotter pins or lock plate securely.
• When coating with adhesive, clean the part and remove all oil and grease, then coat the threaded por-
tion with tow or three drops of adhesive.
• When coating with gasket sealant, clean the surface and remove all oil and grease, check that there is
no dirt or damage, then coat uniformly with gasket sealant.
• Clean all parts, and correct any damage, dents, burrs, or rust.
• Coat rotating parts and sliding parts with engine oil.
• When press fitting parts, coat the surface with anti-friction compound (LM-P).
• After installing snap rings, check that the snap ring is installed securely in the ring groove.
• When connecting wiring connectors, clean the connector to remove all oil, dirt, or water, then connect
securely.
• When using eyebolts, check that there is no deformation or deterioration, screw them in fully, and align
the direction of the hook.
• When tightening split flanges, tighten uniformly in turn to prevent excessive tightening on one side.
a When operating the hydraulic cylinders for the first time after reassembling cylinders, pumps and other
hydraulic equipment removed for repair, always bleed the air as follows:
1. Start the engine and run it at low idle.
2. Operate the work equipment control lever to operate the hydraulic cylinders, 4 – 5 times, stopping the
cylinder 100 mm from the end of their stroke.
3. Next, operate the hydraulic cylinder 3 – 4 times to the end of its stroke.
4. After doing this, run the engine at normal speed.
a When using the machine for the first time after repair or long storage, follow the same procedure.
3. Precautions when completing the operations

• If the engine coolant water has been drained, tighten the drain valve, and add coolant water to the spec-
ified level. Run the engine to circulate the coolant water through the system. Then check the coolant
water level again.
• If the hydraulic equipment has been removed and installed again, add engine oil to the specified level.
Run the engine to circulate the oil through the system. Then check the oil level again.
• If the piping or hydraulic equipment have been removed for repair, Bleed the air from the system after
reassembling the parts.
a For details, see TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Bleeding air.
• Add the specified amount of grease (molybdenum disulphide grease) to the work equipment parts.
PC130-7 30-5
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY SPECIAL TOOL LIST
SPECIAL TOOL LIST

a Tools with part number 79 T- - cannot be supplied (they must be locally manufactured).
a Necessity: t...........Cannot be substituted, should always be installed (used)
q...........Extremely useful if available, can be substituted with commercially available part.
a New/Remodel:N ...........Tools with new part numbers, newly developed for this model.
:R ...........Tools with upgraded part numbers, remodeled from items already available for other
models.
:Blank.....Tools already available for other models, used without any modification
a Tools marked in the Sketch column are tools introduced in the sketches of the special tools (See
SKETCHES OF SPECIAL TOOLS).
Necessity
Remodel
Sketch
New/
Q’ty
Work item Symbol Part No. Part Name Contents of work
Removal and installation

of cylinder head assembly
A 790-331-1110 Wrench t 1 Tightening of cylinder head
bolt
790-101-2501 Push puller q 1
• 790-101-2510 • Block 1
• 790-101-2520 • Screw 1
• 791-112-1180 • Nut 1
Disassembly and assem-
bly of center swivel joint C • 790-101-2540 • Washer 1 Disassembly of center swivel
assembly joint assembly
• 790-101-2630 • Leg 2
• 790-101-2570 • Plate 4
• 790-101-2560 • Nut 2
• 790-101-2650 • Adapter 2
of engine and hydraulic
pump assembly
D 796-460-1210 Oil stopper t 1 Stopping of oil
of hydraulic pump assem-
bly
790-101-2501 Push puller KIT q 1
• 790-101-2510 • Block 1
• 790-101-2550 • Leg 2
1 • 790-101-2560 • Nut 2 Removal of bearing
• 790-101-2570 • Plate 2
bly of swing machinery F 790-101-3101 Bearing puller q 1
assembly
790-101-4200 Puller q 1
796T-426-1140 Push tool t 1 Q

2 Press fitting of oil seal
790-201-2680 Plate t 1
1 790-201-2850 Spacer q 1
3 Press fitting of bearing inner
race
2 790-201-2750 Spacer q 1
30-6 PC130-7
(2)
Necessity
Remodel
Sketch
New/
Q’ty
790-101-5401 Push tool KIT q 1 Press fitting of bearing outer

race
• 790-101-5461 • Plate 1 For main bearing
4 • 790-101-5441 • Plate 1 For sub bearing

bly of swing machinery F • 790-101-5421 • Grip 1
assembly
• 01010-51240 • Bolt 1
790-201-2850 Spacer q 1
5 Removal of 2-piece collar
790-201-2650 Plate q 1
1 790-502-1003 Cylinder repair

stand t 1 Disassembly and assembly of
hydraulic cylinder assembly
790-102-4300 Wrench assembly t 1
2 Removal and installation of
piston
790-102-4310 Pin t 2
3 790-720-1000 Expander q 1
796-720-1660 Ring
(For boom and arm) q 1
07281-01159 Clamp
(For boom and arm) q 1 Installation of piston ring
4
796-720-1650 Ring (For bucket) q 1
07281-01029 Clamp (For bucket) q 1
790-201-1702 Push tool KIT t 1
Disassembly and assem- • 790-101-5021 • Grip 1

bly of hydraulic cylinder H
assembly • 01010-50816 • Bolt 1
5 Press fitting of cylinder head
• Push tool bushing
• 790-201-1811 (For boom) 1
• 790-201-1821 • Push tool 1

(For arm)
• 790-201-1791 • Push tool 1
(For bucket)
790-201-1500 Push tool KIT t 1
• 790-201-5021 • Grip 1
• 01010-50818 • Bolt 1
6 Installation of dust seal
• 790-201-1620 • Plate (For boom) 1
• 790-201-1630 • Plate (For arm) 1
• 790-201-1610 • Plate (For bucket) 1

791-600-2001
Disassembly and assem- or Compressor t 1
bly of recoil spring assem- J 1 791-685-8006 Disassembly and assembly
bly of recoil spring assembly
790-201-2780 Spacer t 1
PC130-7 30-7
(2)
Necessity
Remodel
Sketch
New/
Q’ty
791-635-3160 Extension t 1
1 790-101-1300 Cylinder t 1 Disassembly and assembly

of recoil spring assembly
790-101-1102 Pump t 1
Disassembly and assem- 790-201-1500 Push tool KIT q 1

bly of recoil spring assem- J
bly • 790-201-1590 • Plate 1
2 • 790-101-5021 • Grip 1 Installation of dust seal
• 790-101-5021 • Grip 1
• 01010-50816 • Bolt 1
bly of idler assembly
1 791-675-1510 Installer t 1
Installation of floating seal
2 790-434-1650 Installer t 1
bly of track roller assembly
L 3 791-601-1000 Oil pump q 1 Filling with oil
Disassembly and assem- 4 790-434-1660 Installer t 1 Installation of floating seal

bly of carrier roller assem-
bly 5 791-601-1000 Oil pump q 1 Filling with oil
791-616-1040 Remover and
or installer
t 1
Development and installa- 791-620-7000
Removal and press fitting of
tion of track shoe assem-
bly
M 790-105-1100 Cylinder t 1 master pin
790-101-1102 Pump t 1
Removal and installation 791-463-1141 Push tool t 1

of hydraulic pump input N Press fitting of oil seal
shaft oil seal 790-201-2740 Spacer t 1
799-703-1200 Service KIT t 1
799-703-1100 Vacuum pump

(For 100 V) t 1
799-703-1110 Vacuum pump

(For 220 V) t 1
Filling with air conditioner
of air conditioner unit Q 799-703-1120
Vacuum pump
(For 240 V) t 1 refrigerant (gas)
assembly
799-703-1401 Gas leak detector t 1
Adapter (When
799-703-1300
vacuum pump for
refrigerant R12 is t 1
used)
792-785-1100 Remover t 1
of work equipment assem- R 790-101-4000 Puller t 1 Removal of boom foot pin
bly
790-101-1102 Pump t 1
Removal and installation 1 793-498-1210 Lifter (Suction cup) t 2

of operator's cab glass X Fixing of window glass
(stuck glass) 2 20Y-54-13180 Adapter t 2
30-8 PC130-7
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY SKETCH OF SPECIAL TOOL
SKETCH OF SPECIAL TOOL

NOTE: Komatsu cannot accept any responsibility for special tools manufactured according to these sketches.
F2 Push tool
PC130-7 30-9
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY FUEL INJECTION PUMP
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 4. Disconnect connector E05 (6) and remove clamp
(7).
OF FUEL INJECTION PUMP
ASSEMBLY 5. Loosen bolts (8) and (9) and remove air condi-
tioner compressor belt (10). [*1]
REMOVAL
k Disconnect the cable from the negative (–) ter-

6. Remove bolts (8) and (9) and spacer (11).
Remove air conditioner compressor and bracket
minal of the battery. assembly (12) and move them toward the coun-
terweight.
1. Remove hood assembly (1). a Do not separate the piping.
4 Hood assembly: 30 kg
7. Remove heater hose (13).

8. Disconnect fuel hoses (14) and (15).
2. Remove covers (2) – (4). a Plug the hoses to prevent the fuel from leak-
ing.
9. Remove fuel filter and bracket assembly (16).
3. Remove fan guard (5).
30-10 PC130-7
(2)
10. Disconnect hose (17). 15. Remove lubrication tube (23).
11. Remove tube (18).
12. Remove governor spring mounting nut (19).
16. Check that the fuel injection timing is normal.

Testing and adjusting fuel injection timing, Test-
ing and adjusting by match mark method. [*3]
13. Remove 4 fuel tubes (20). [*2]
17. Remove 5 mounting bolts (24), (25), and (26),
rear mounting bracket, and fuel injection pump
assembly (27). [*3]
a Remove the above parts together with holder
(28).
a After removing the above parts, remove bolt
(29) and fix drive gear (30) to holder (28) with
fixing bolt [1] to prevent a change of the fuel
injection timing.
a As fixing bolt [1], use a bolt 6 mm in diameter
and at least 35 mm in length.
14. Disconnect fuel hoses (21) and (22).

a Plug the hoses to prevent the fuel from leak-
ing.
PC130-7 30-11
(2)
INSTALLATION Bleeding Air
• Carry out installation in the reverse order to • Bleed air from the fuel piping according to the fol-
removal. lowing procedure.
[*1] 1. Fill the fuel tank with fuel (up to the maximum ris-
• Adjust the tension of the air conditioner coming position of the float).
pressor belt. For details, see TESTING AND
ADJUSTING, Testing and adjusting tension 2. Loosen eyebolt (31).
of air conditioner compressor belt.
3. Remove cap (32). Loosen the feed pump knob
3 Fuel tube sleeve nut:

[*2] and move it up and down to let fuel flow out of
the mounting part of eyebolt (23) until bubbles do
19.6 – 24.5 Nm {2 – 2.5 kgm} not come out any more.
[*3] 4. Tighten eyebolt (31).
k After installing the fuel injection pump assem-

bly, remove fuel injection timing adjustment pin
(See TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Testing
and adjusting fuel injection timing) and fixing
bolt [1] without fail.
5. Start the engine and check that fuel does not

leak from the fuel system.
a Adjust the governor lever stroke. For details, see

TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Special functions
of monitor panel, 5. Governor adjusting mecha-
nism 03.
30-12 PC130-7
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY CYLINDER HEAD
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 4. Remove bracket (6) and covers (7) and (8).
OF CYLINDER HEAD
ASSEMBLY
SPECIAL TOOL
New/Remodel
Symbol
Necessity
Part No. Part name
Sketch
Q'ty
A 790-331-1110 Wrench t 1
REMOVAL 5. Remove fan guard (9) and hose (10). [*1]

minal of the battery.
1. Remove hood assembly (1).
6. Remove fan guard (11).
7. Disconnect connector E05 (12) and remove

clamp (13).
8. Loosen bolts (14) and (15) and remove air condi-

2. Drain the coolant.
6 Coolant: 13.4 l 9. Remove bolts (14) and (15) and spacer (17).
3. Remove covers (2) – (5). assembly (18) and move them toward the coun-
terweight.
a Do not separate the piping.
PC130-7 30-13
(2)
10. Remove heater hose (19). 14. Remove air conditioner compressor bracket (26).
a Remove the connector on the underside
11. Remove fuel filter and bracket assembly (20) from the clamp.
and move it to a place where it will not be an
obstacle. 15. Remove heat insulation plate (27).
16. Remove clamp (28). [*4]
12. Remove hoses (21) and (22), tube (23), and ter-
minal (24).
17. Remove cover (28a).
13. Remove fuel tube (25). [*3]

18. Remove muffler drain tube (29).
a The muffler drain tube is fixed by the hydrau-
lic pump assembly mounting bolts.
30-14 PC130-7
(2)
19. Remove muffler and bracket assembly (30). 25. Remove cooling fan (41).
26. Remove hoses (42) and (43) and water pump

assembly (44). [*9]
20. Remove air intake hose (31) and air intake con-
nector (32) from the turbocharger. [*5]
21. Remove exhaust outlet (33). [*6] 27. Remove tube (45).
22. Remove cylinder head cover (34). [*7] 28. Remove the 2 mounting bolts on the turbo-
charger side of tube (46) and the clamp mount-
ing bolt.
29. Remove exhaust manifold and turbocharger

assembly (47). [*10]
23. Remove alternator mounting bolts (35) and (36).
24. Loosen locknut (37), move alternator (39) with

adjustment nut (38), and remove fan belt (40).
[*8]
PC130-7 30-15
(2)
30. Loosen locknut (48), and then loosen adjustment INSTALLATION

screw (49) by 2 – 3 turns. [*11]
a Perform this work at all of the 8 places. • Carry out installation in the reverse order to
removal.
31. Remove 5 mounting bolts (50), 3 mounting nuts
[*1]
3 Hose clamp:
(51), and rocker arm and shaft assembly (52).
[*12]
10.5 ± 0.5 Nm {107 ± 5 kgcm}
32. Remove 8 push rods (53).
[*2]
33. Remove the (17) mounting bolts and lift off cylin- a Adjust the belt tension. For details, see
der head and air intake manifold assembly (54). TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Testing and
[*13] adjusting air conditioner compressor belt ten-
4 Cylinder head and air intake manifold sion.
assembly: 40 kg
[*3]
3 Fuel tube sleeve nut:
19.6 – 24.5 Nm {2 – 2.5 kgm}
[*4]
3 Clamp mounting bolt:
1st time: 39.2 – 49 Nm {4 – 5 kgm}
2nd time: 68.6 – 122.5 Nm {7 – 12.5 kgm}
[*5]
3 Clamp of air intake hose (31):
8.8 ± 0.5 Nm {0.9 ± 0.05 kgm}
[*6]
3 Mounting nut:
27 – 34 Nm {2.8 – 3.5 kgm}
[*7]
3 Mounting bolt:
7.84 – 9.8 Nm {0.8 – 1.0 kgm}
[*8]
a Adjust the belt tension. For details, see
TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Testing and
adjusting fan belt tension.
[*9]
3 Hose clamp:
8.8 ± 0.5 Nm {0.9 ± 0.05 kgm}
[*10]
3 Mounting bolt:
34.3 – 53.9 Nm {3.5 – 5.5 kgm}
a If the turbocharger assembly was removed
from the exhaust manifold, tighten its nuts to
the following torque.
3 Mounting nut:
27 – 34 Nm {2.8 – 3.5 kgm}
30-16 PC130-7
(2)
[*11]
a Adjust the valve clearance. For details, see
TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Adjusting valve
clearance.
[*12]
3 Mounting bolt and nut:
19.6 – 29.4 Nm {2 – 3 kgm}
[*13]
a Tighten all of the cylinder head mounting
bolts according to the following procedure.
a Numbers (1) – (4) in the figure denote the fol-
lowing.
• (1): Exhaust side (2): Intake side 7) After tightening each bolt, make a punch
(3): Front (4): Rear mark on it.
a If there are 5 punch marks on a bolt,
1) Clean the screw holes on the cylinder do not use that bolt any more but
block side. replace it.
2) Apply molybdenum disulfide grease (LM- a If the air intake manifold was removed,
P) to the threads and end of each bolt apply a string of gasket sealant (LG-7)
and the bottom of each cylinder head 1 mm in diameter to the rim of each air
hole. intake port as shown in the following
3) Rotate the bolts with the hand in the figure.
numeric order shown in the figure until
each of them catch 2 – 3 threads of the
screw hole of the cylinder head.
4) Tighten the bolts to the torque of 68.6 ±
9.8 Nm {7 ± 1 kgm} in the numeric order
shown in the figure.
5) Tighten the bolts to the torque of 107.8 ±
4.9 Nm {11 ± 0.5 kgm} in the numeric
order shown in the figure.
+ 30 °
6) Using tool A, tighten the bolts by 90 0
in the numeric order shown in the figure.
(Angle tightening)
a When not using tool A, make marks
with paint on the bolt heads and cyl- a If the nozzle holder was removed,
inder head, and then tighten the bolts tighten it to the following torque.
3 Mounting bolt:
so that the mark of each of them will
be at the above angle to the mark of
39.2 – 49 Nm {4 – 5 kgm}
the cylinder head.
• Refilling with coolant
Add coolant through the coolant filler to
the specified level. Run the engine to cir-
culate the coolant through the system.
Then, check the coolant level again.
5 Coolant: 13.4 l
• Bleeding air
Bleed air from the fuel circuit. For details,
see Removal and installation of fuel injec-
tion pump assembly.
PC130-7 30-17
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY RADIATOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

OF RADIATOR ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
1. Remove the undercover and drain the coolant.
6 Coolant: 13.4 l
2. Disconnect hoses (1) and (2) and remove plate

(3). [*1]
6. Remove the 2 mounting bolts and lift off radiator

assembly (9).
a You can remove the radiator assembly with
your hands.
a Take care not to damage the radiator core.
4 Radiator assembly: 8 kg
INSTALLATION
• Carry out installation in the reverse order to
removal.
[*1]
a Tighten the clamp of hose (1) with the bolt
4. Disconnect hoses (5) and (6). [*2] right down.
5. Remove plates (7) and (8). 3 Clamp of hose (2):
8.8 ± 0.5 Nm {0.9 ± 0.05 kgm}
[*2]
3 Clamp of hose (5):
8.8 ± 0.5 Nm {0.9 ± 0.05 kgm}

a Add coolant through the coolant filler to the spec-
ified level. Run the engine to circulate the cool-
ant through the system. Then, check the coolant
level again.
5 Coolant: 13.4 l
30-18 PC130-7
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY AFTERCOOLER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 3. Remove the 3 mounting bolts of connector (3).
OF AFTERCOOLER 4. Loosen the 4 mounting nuts of clips (4). [*2]

ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect hose (2). [*1]
5. Remove the undercover and disconnect hose

(5). [*3]
6. Remove the mounting bolts of plate (6) and

move the plate toward the rear of the machine.
PC130-7 30-19
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY AFTERCOOLER
7. Disconnect hose (7). [*4] INSTALLATION

8. Remove plates (8) and (9). • Carry out installation in the reverse order to
removal.
[*1]
3 Hose clamp:
8.8 ± 0.5 Nm {0.9 ± 0.05 kgm}
[*2]
3 Mounting nut:
10.8 – 26.5 Nm {1.1 – 2.7 kgm}
[*3]
a Tighten the hose clamp with the bolt right
down.
9. Remove the 2 mounting bolts and lift off after- 3 Hose clamp:
cooler assembly (10). 10.5 ± 0.5 Nm {107 ± 5 kgcm}
a You can remove the aftercooler assembly
3 Hose clamp:
with your hands. [*4]
a Take care not to damage the aftercooler
core. 10.5 ± 0.5 Nm {107 ± 5 kgcm}
4 Aftercooler assembly: 7 kg
30-20 PC130-7
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY HYDRAULIC OIL COOLER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 4. Remove 4 nuts (5).
OF HYDRAULIC OIL COOLER

ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
5. Remove 2 bolts (6), 2 nuts (7), and 2 bolts (8)

and (9).
2. Remove plates (2) and (3).
6. Remove tube mounting bolts (10) under the

hydraulic oil cooler.
3. Loosen plug (4) of the pipe on the side of the

hydraulic oil cooler and drain the hydraulic oil
from the hydraulic oil cooler and piping.
a Before draining the oil, open the hydraulic
tank cap to release the pressure in the tank.
PC130-7 30-21
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY HYDRAULIC OIL COOLER
7. Lift off hydraulic oil cooler assembly (11). INSTALLATION

a Take care not to damage the hydraulic oil
cooler core. • Carry out installation in the reverse order to
a You can remove the hydraulic oil cooler removal.
assembly with your hands.
• Refilling with oil
4 Hydraulic oil cooler assembly: 6 kg a Add oil through the oil filler to the specified level.
Run the engine to circulate the oil through the
system. Then, check the oil level again.
30-22 PC130-7
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ENGINE AND HYDRAULIC PUMP
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 4. Remove hood assembly (1).
OF ENGINE AND HYDRAULIC 4 Hood assembly: 30 kg

PUMP ASSEMBLY
SPECIAL TOOL
New/Remodel
Symbol
Necessity
Part No. Part name
Sketch
Q'ty
D 796-460-1210 Oil stopper t 1
REMOVAL
k Disconnect the cable from the negative (–) ter- 5. Remove covers (2) – (5).

stop the engine. Then, loosen the hydraulic oil
filler cap slowly to release the internal pressure
of the hydraulic tank.
a Put tags to the disconnected hoses to prevent a
mistake in re-connecting them.
6 Coolant: 13.4 l
2. Remove the hydraulic tank strainer. Using tool

D, stop the oil.
a When not using tool D, remove the drain plug
and drain the oil from the hydraulic tank. [*1] 6. Remove bracket (6) and covers (7), (8), and (8a).
6 Hydraulic tank: 90 l
3. Close the fuel stop valve.
PC130-7 30-23
(2)
7. Remove fan guard (9) and hose (10). [*2] 13. Disconnect wiring harness connectors E11 (19)
and E10 (20) from the left rear of the engine and
remove the wiring harness clamp.
8. Disconnect hose (10a). [*3]
9. Remove fan guard (11). 14. Disconnect terminal (21) and remove the wiring
harness clamp.
10. Disconnect connector E05 (12) and remove
clamp (13).
11. Loosen bolts (14) and (15) and remove air condi-
12. Remove bolts (14) and (15) and spacer (17).

assembly (18) and move them toward the coun-
terweight.
a Do not separate the piping.
15. Disconnect hose (22) from the engine and

remove the clamp above the engine and clamp
(23).
16. Remove clamp (24).
17. Disconnect terminal (25) from the starting motor.
30-24 PC130-7
(2)
18. Remove hose clamps (26) and (27) from the left 23. Disconnect wiring harness connectors E08 (37)
front of the engine. and T92 (38) from the revolving frame at the right
lower part of the engine and remove clamp (39).
19. Disconnect the ground wire from the left front
engine mount bracket.
24. Remove cooling fan (40).
20. Disconnect hoses (28), (29), and (30).

a Put plugs to stop the fuel.
21. Remove the 2 mounting bolts of connector (31)

and disconnect hose (32) from the engine. [*5]
25. Remove cover (40a) and frame (40b).
22. Remove clamp (33) from the left lower part of the
engine and disconnect wiring harness connec-
tors E03 (34), T91 (35), and T13 (36).
PC130-7 30-25
(2)
26. Disconnect hoses (41) – (45). 32. Disconnect wiring harness connector E04 (56)
from the right rear of the engine.
33. Remove 4 engine mounting bolts (57). [*6]
28. Disconnect wiring harness connectors A61 (47),

V22 (48), and V21 (49) and remove clamps (50) 34. Lift off engine and hydraulic pump assembly
and (51). (58).
a Check that all the wires and pipes are dis-
29. Remove bracket (52). connected.
30. Remove the mounting bolt of connector (53). 4 Engine and hydraulic pump assembly:
a Prepare a pan to receive the oil. 470 kg
31. Remove 2 bolts (54) and move engine oil filter

and bracket assembly (55) toward the engine.
30-26 PC130-7
(2)
INSTALLATION • Refilling with oil (Hydraulic tank)

a Add oil through the oil filler to the specified level.
• Carry out installation in the reverse order to Run the engine to circulate the oil through the
removal. system. Then, check the oil level again.
[*1] 5 Hydraulic tank: 90 l

3 Hydraulic tank drain plug:
• Bleeding air
58.6 – 78.5 Nm {5.97 – 8.0 kgm}
a Bleed air. For details, see TESTING AND
(Target: 68.6 Nm {7 kgm})
ADJUSTING, Bleeding air from each part.
[*2]
3 Hose clamp:
10.5 ± 0.5 Nm {107 ± 5 kgcm}
[*3]
3 Hose clamp:
8.8 ± 0.5 Nm {0.9 ± 0.05 kgm}
[*4]
a Install the air conditioner compressor belt.
Testing and adjusting air conditioner com-
pressor belt.
[*5]
3 Hose clamp:
8.8 ± 0.5 Nm {0.9 ± 0.05 kgm}
[*6]
3 Engine mount mounting bolt:
245 – 309 Nm {25 – 31.5 kgm}
(Target: 279.6 Nm {28.5 kgm})
a If the engine mount bracket was removed
from the engine, tighten it to the following
torque.
3 Mount bracket mounting bolt on front side

of engine:
58.9 – 73.6 Nm {6.0 – 7.5 kgm}
(Target: 65.7 Nm {6.7 kgm})
3 Mount bracket mounting bolt on rear side

of engine:
98.1 – 122.6 Nm {10.0 – 12.5 kgm}
(Target: 112.8 Nm {11.5 kgm})

a Add coolant through the coolant filler to the spec-
ified level. Run the engine to circulate the cool-
ant through the system. Then, check the coolant
level again.
5 Coolant: 13.4 l
PC130-7 30-27
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY TRACK SHOE
EXPANSION AND 3. Using tool M, pull out master pin (2). [*2]
INSTALLATION OF TRACK
SHOE ASSEMBLY
SPECIAL TOOLS
New/Remodel
Symbol
Necessity
Part No. Part name
Sketch
Q'ty
791-616-1040
or Remover and t 1
791-620-7000 installer
M
790-101-1300 Cylinder t 1
4. Remove tool M and move the machine forward
790-101-1102 Pump t 1
so that temporary pin [1] will be in front of the
idler, then set block [2].
EXPANSION
5. Pull out temporary pin [1] and remove the dust
1. Stop the machine so that the master pin will be seal. Move the machine in reverse to expand
between the idler and carrier roller and the track track shoe (3). [*3]
shoe can be expanded in the forward and back-
ward directions.
2. Lower the work equipment to the ground and

loosen lubricator (1) to slacken the track shoe.
[*1]
k Since the internal pressure of the adjust-

ment cylinder is very high, do not loosen
the lubricator more than 1 turn. If the
grease does not come out sufficiently, move
the machine forward and in reverse.
30-28 PC130-7
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY TRACK SHOE
INSTALLATION
removal.
[*1]
a Adjust the tension of the track shoe. For
detail, see TESTING AND ADJUSTING,
Inspection and adjustment of track shoe ten-
sion.
[*2]
a Using tool M, press fit the master pin so that
its projection a will be as follows.
• Dimension a: 5.5 ± 2 mm
[*3]
a When fitting the dust seal, apply grease (G2-
LI) to its contact face against the bushing.
a Install the track shoe assembly as shown in

the following figure. (The arrow indicates the
front of the machine.)
PC130-7 30-29
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY SPROCKET
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

OF SPROCKET • Carry out installation in the reverse order to
removal.
REMOVAL
2 Threads of sprocket mounting bolt:
[*1]
1. Expand the track shoe assembly. For details,
see EXPANSION OF TRACK SHOE ASSEM-
3 Sprocket mounting bolt:
Adhesive (LT-2)
BLY.
323.6 – 362.8 Nm {33 – 37 kgm}
2. Swing the work equipment by 90° and push up
the machine with it, and then set blocks [1]
between the track frame and track shoe.
3. Remove the 15 mounting bolts and lift off

sprocket (1). [*1]
a Pass a bar, etc. through a bolt hole of the

sprocket to sling.
4 Sprocket: 40 kg
30-30 PC130-7
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY FINAL DRIVE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 4. Remove the 20 mounting bolts from final drive
assembly (6) and lift if off to remove. [*1]
OF FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY a Be careful. Do not damage the face of the fit-
ting seal at the base of the hose.
REMOVAL a When lifting off the final drive assembly, do
not use a tapped hole for lifting the cover.
4 Final drive assembly: 150kg
1. Remove the sprocket, refer to the removing
sprocket section in this manual.
k Lower the work equipment to the ground for
safety. Stop the engine and loosen the oil filler
cap on the hydraulic tank to release pressure
inside.
2. Remove cover (1).
INSTALLATION
• Install in reverse order to removal.
3 Final drive assembly mounting bolt:

[*1]
3. Disconnect four travel motor hoses (2), (3), (4)
and (5). 245.2 – 308.9 Nm {25 – 31.5 kgm}
• Reflling hydraulic oil

Refill hydraulic oil through the oil filler port to the
specified level, and left the oil circulate in the
hydraulic system by starting the engine.
Then check the oil level again.
• Bleeding air
AJS01012.jpg ADJUSTING, Bleeding air from each part.
PC130-7 30-31
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY IDLER
DISASSEMBLY AND 4. Remove floating seal (6) on the opposite side

from idler (4) and shaft (5) and support (7)
ASSEMBLY OF IDLER assembly.
ASSEMBLY
SPECIAL TOOL
New/Remodel
Symbol
Necessity
Part No. Part name
Sketch
Q'ty
L 1 791-675-1510 Installer t 1
DISASSEMBLY
5. Remove dowel pin (8), and then remove support

(7) from shaft (5).
6. Remove bushings (9) and (10) from idler (4).
1. Remove dowel pin (1) and support (2).
2. Remove floating seal (3) from support (2) and

idler (4).
3. Remove idler (4) from shaft (5) and support (7)

assembly.
a About 90 cc of oil is in these parts. Drain it at
this time or spread cloths to absorb it.
30-32 PC130-7
(2)
ASSEMBLY 4. Install shaft (5) and support (7) assembly to idler

(4).
1. Press fit bushings (9) and (10) to idler (4).
5. Fill the space between shaft (5) and idler (4) with
2. Fit the O-ring and install support (7) to shaft (5) 90 cc of oil.
5 Idler: 90 cc (EO-30CD)
with dowel pin (8).
3. Using tool L1, install floating seal (6) to idler (4)

and shaft (5) and support (7) assembly.
a Thoroughly degrease and dry the O-ring and

the contact surfaces of the floating seal
before installing. Take care that the contact
surfaces of the floating seal will be free from
dirt.
a After installing the floating seal, check that its
slant is less than 1 mm.
PC130-7 30-33
(2)
6. Using tool L1, install floating seal (3) to idler (4) 7. Fit the O-ring and install support (2) with dowel
and support (2). pin (1).
a For the precautions for installing the floating
seal, see step 3.
30-34 PC130-7
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY RECOIL SPRING
DISASSEMBLY AND DISASSEMBLY

ASSEMBLY OF RECOIL 1. Remove lock plate (1), seat (2), and valve (3).
SPRING
2. Piston assembly
Remove piston assembly (5) from recoil spring
SPECIAL TOOLS
assembly (4).
New/Remodel
Symbol
Necessity
Part No. Part name
Sketch
Q'ty
791-600-2001
or Compressor t 1
791-685-8006
790-201-2780 Spacer t 1
1 791-635-3160 Extension t 1
790-101-1300 Cylinder t 1
790-101-1102 Pump t 1
J
790-201-1500 Push tool kit q 1
• 790-201-1590 • Plate 1
2
• 790-101-5021 • Grip 1
• 01010-50816 • Bolt 1
PC130-7 30-35
(2)
3. Disassembly of recoil spring assembly

1) Set tool J1 to recoil spring assembly (4).
k Since the installed load of the spring is

heavy and dangerous, set the spring
securely.
a Installed load of spring:
84,340 N {8,600 kg}
2) Apply hydraulic pressure gradually to com-

press the spring, and then remove nut (6).
a Compress the spring until the nut is loos-
ened.
a Release the hydraulic pressure gradually
to lower the spring tension perfectly.
a Free length of spring: 501.4 mm
3) Remove pilot (8), cylinder (9), and dust seal
(10) from spring (7).
4. Disassembly of piston assembly

1) Remove wear ring (12) from piston (11).
2) Remove snap ring (13) and U-packing (14).
30-36 PC130-7
(2)
ASSEMBLY
1. Assembly of piston assembly

1) Install U-packing (14) to piston (11) and
secure it with snap ring (13).
2) Install wear ring (12).
2. Assembly of recoil spring assembly

1) Using tool J2, install dust seal (10) to cylin-
der (9).
3) Apply hydraulic pressure gradually to com-

press the spring and tighten nut (6) the
installed length of the spring is a.
a Installed length a of spring: 390 mm
2) Install cylinder (9) and pilot (8) to spring (7),

and then set them to tool J1.
2 Sliding parts of cylinder:
Grease (G2-LI)
PC130-7 30-37
(2)
4) Remove recoil spring assembly (1) from tool

D1.
3. Piston assembly
Install piston assembly (5) to recoil spring
2 Sliding parts of piston: Grease (G2-LI)

assembly (4).
2 Wear ring: Grease (G2-LI)

a Install the piston assembly so that the valve
wil l b e i ns ta ll ed o n th e o utsi de of the
machine.
a Pour at least 120 cc of grease (G2-LI) in the
cylinder and bleed air, and then check that
grease comes out of the grease hole.
30-38 PC130-7
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY TRACK ROLLER
DISASSEMBLY AND
ASSEMBLY OF TRACK
ROLLER ASSEMBLY
SPECIAL TOOLS
New/Remodel
Symbol
Necessity
Part No. Part name
Sketch
Q'ty
2 790-434-1650 Installer t 1
L
4 791-601-1000 Oil pump q 1
a Using tool L4, fill the track roller assembly with
oil, and then tighten plug (11).
5 Track roller: 75 – 85 cc (EO30-CD)

DISASSEMBLY
a Referring to the following drawing, disassemble
the track roller assembly.
a Tighten the mounting bolts of the track roller
2 Mounting bolt: Adhesive (LT-2)

assembly to the following torque.
ASSEMBLY
a Referring to the following drawing, assemble the 3 Mounting bolt:
track roller assembly. 245.2 – 308.9 Nm {25 – 31.5 kgm}
a In this section, only precautions for assembling
the track roller assembly are explained. For
items which are not explained below, see the
assembly procedure for the idler assembly.
a Using tool L2, install the floating seals.

a Thoroughly degrease and dry the O-ring and
contact surfaces of the floating seals (5) and (6)
(hatched parts) before installing. Take care that
the contact surfaces of the floating seal will be
free from dirt.
a After installing the floating seal, check that its
slant is less than 1 mm and its projection a is 5 –
7 mm.
PC130-7 30-39
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY CARRIER ROLLER
DISASSEMBLY AND
ASSEMBLY OF CARRIER
ROLLER ASSEMBLY
SPECIAL TOOLS
New/Remodel
Symbol
Necessity
Part No. Part name
Sketch
Q'ty
3 790-434-1660 Installer t 1
L
4 791-601-1000 Oil pump q 1
DISASSEMBLY
a Referring to the following drawing, disassemble
the carrier roller assembly.
ASSEMBLY
a Referring to the following drawing, assemble the
carrier roller assembly.
a In this section, only precautions for assembling
the carrier roller assembly are explained. For
items which are not explained below, see the
assembly procedure for the idler assembly and
track roller assembly.
a Using tool L3, install the floating seals.

a Thoroughly degrease and dry the O-rings and
contact surfaces of the floating seals (6) and (7)
(hatched parts) before installing. Take care that
the contact surfaces of the floating seal will be
free from dirt.
a After installing each floating seal, check that its
slant is less than 1 mm.
a Using tool L4, fill the carrier roller assembly with
oil, and then tighten plug (8).
5 Carrier roller: 68 – 76 cc (EO30-CD)
30-40 PC130-7
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY SWING MOTOR AND SWING MACHINERY

OF SWING MOTOR AND • Carry out installation in the reverse order to
SWING MACHINERY removal.
ASSEMBLY
3 Mounting bolt:
[*1]
REMOVAL 245 – 308.7 Nm {25 – 31.5 kgm}

k Release the residual pressure in the hydraulic
• Refilling with oil (Hydraulic tank)
circuit. For details, see TESTING AND
ADJUSTING, Releasing residual pressure in
hydraulic circuit.
k Lower the work equipment to the ground in a
stable posture and set the lock lever in the • Bleeding air
LOCK position. a Bleed air from the circuit. For details, see TEST-
ING AND ADJUSTING, Bleeding air from each
1. Disconnect hoses (1) – (5). part.
2. Remove 14 mounting bolts (6). [*1]
3. Using forcing screw [1], lift off swing motor and

swing machinery assembly (7).
a Take care that the assembly will not interfere
with the hoses, etc. around it.
4 Swing motor and swing machinery assem-

bly: 110 kg
PC130-7 30-41
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND 2. Swing motor

Remove swing motor assembly (1).
ASSEMBLY OF SWING
MOTOR AND SWING 4 Swing motor assembly : 30 kg
MACHINERY ASSEMBLY
New/Remodel
Symbol
Necessity
Part No. Part name
Sketch
Q'ty
790-101-2501 Push puller kit q 1
• 790-101-2510 • Block 1
• 790-101-2550 • Leg 2
1 • 790-101-2560 • Nut 2
• 790-101-2570 • Plate 2
790-101-3101 Bearing puller q 1 3. No. 1 carrier, No. 2 sun gear assembly
790-101-4200 Puller q 1 1) Remove No. 1 sun gear (2).
796T-426-1140 Push tool t 1 Q
2) Remove No. 1 carrier and No. 2 sun gear
2 assembly (3).
790-201-2680 Plate t 1
F 1 790-201-2850 Spacer q 1
3
2 790-201-2750 Spacer q 1
790-101-5401 Push tool kit q 1
• Plate
• 790-101-5461 (For main bearing) 1
4
• 790-101-5441 • Plate 1
(For sub bearing)
• 790-101-5421 • Grip 1
• 01010-51240 • Bolt 1
790-201-2850 Spacer q 1
5
790-201-2650 Plate q 1
DISASSEMBLY 3) Disassemble No. 1 carrier and No. 2 sun

gear assembly (3) as follows.
1. Draining oil i) Remove snap ring (4), then remove
Loosen drain plug and drain oil from swing thrust washer (5), gear (6), bearing (7),
machinery. and thrust washer (8).
6 Swing machinery case : Approx. 2.5 l
30-42 PC130-7
(2)
ii) Knock in pin (9) and knock out shaft (10). 3) Disassemble No. 2 carrier assembly as fol-
a After removing the shaft, remove pin lows.
(9). i) Push in pin (17), and knock out shaft (18)
iii) Remove snap ring (11), then remove No. from carrier (19).
2 sun gear (12) from carrier (13). a After removing the shaft, remove pin
(17).
ii) Remove thrust washer (20), gear (21),
bearing (22), and thrust washer (23).
4. Ring gear
Remove ring gear (14).
5. No. 2 carrier assembly 6. Retainer, collar

1) Remove spacer (15). 1) Remove retainer (24).
2) Remove No. 2 carrier assembly (16). 2) Set shaft and case assembly to press, push
split collar (25) with push tool F5, and press
fit bearing (26).
a Operate the press slowly, and press fit
the bearing to a position where it is pos-
sible to remove the split collar.
3) Remove split collar (25).
PC130-7 30-43
(2)
7. Shaft assembly 2) Using puller [5], remove bearing outer races

1) Set block [2] to shaft and case assembly (34) and (35) from case (33).
(27), then using push tool [3], remove shaft
assembly (28) with press .
2) Remove bearing (26).
3) Using push tool F1, remove bearing (29) and

collar (30) from shaft (31).
8. Oil seal, bearing outer race

1) Remove oil seal (32) from case (33).
30-44 PC130-7
(2)
ASSEMBLY 4) Using push tool F3-2, press fit bearing (26) to

a position where it is possible to insert split
a Clean all parts, and check for dirt or damage. collar.
Coat the sliding surfaces of all parts with engine a Press-fitting force : 11.8 kN {1,200 kg}
oil before installing. a Rotate the case and gradually press fit
the bearing.
1. Bearing outer races
Using push tool F4, press fit outer races (34) and
(35) to case (33).
5) Install split collars (25).
6) Screw bolt (Thread dia.=12mm, Pitch=1.75mm)

2. Shaft assembly into case, then using push- pull scale [8], mea-
1) Fit O-ring to inside of collar (30) and install to sure tangential force in direction of rotation.
shaft (31). a Tangential force : Max. 176.5 N {18 kg}
a The tangential force is the maximum force
2) Using push tool F3-1, press fit bearing (29) when starting rotation.
with press.
3) Set case assembly (36) to shaft assembly

(28).
PC130-7 30-45
(2)
3. Oil seal iii) Align position of pin holes of shaft and

Using push tool F2, press fit oil seal (32). carrier, then tap with plastic hammer to
a Replace the oil seal with a new part.
2 Lip of oil seal : Grease (G2-LI)
install shaft (18).
a When installing the shaft, rotate the
2 Periphery of oil seal:

planetary gear, and be careful not to
damage the thrust washers.
Gasket sealant (LG-6) iv) Insert pin (17).
a Take care that the gasket sealant will not a After inserting the pin, caulk the pin
stick to the oil seal lip and shaft. portion of the carrier.
4. Retainer 2) Install No. 2 carrier assembly (16) to shaft

Install retainer (24). and case assembly.
3) Install spacer (15).
5. No. 2 carrier assembly

1) Assemble No. 2 carrier assembly as follows. 6. Ring gear
i) Assemble bearing (22) to gear (21). Assemble O-ring (37) to shaft and case assem-
ii) Fit top and bottom thrust washers (20) bly, and install ring gear (14).
and (23), then set gear assembly to car-
rier (19).
30-46 PC130-7
(2)
7. No. 1 carrier, No. 2 sun gear assembly 2) Install No. 1 carrier and No. 2 sun gear
1) Assemble No. 1 carrier and No. 2 sun gear assembly (3).
assembly as follows. 3) Install No. 1 sun gear (2).
i) Assemble No. 1 carrier (13) to No. 2 sun
gear (12), and install snap ring (11).
ii) Align position of pin holes of shaft and
carrier, then tap with a plastic hammer to
install shaft (10).
iii) Insert pin (9).
a After inserting the pin, caulk the pin
portion of the carrier .
a Check that the stepped difference a
between the shaft and carrier is less
than 0.2 mm.
8. Swing motor assembly

Install swing motor assembly (1).
3 Mounting bolt :
110.3 ± 12.3 Nm {11.25 ± 1.25 kgm}
iv) Assemble thrust washer (8), bearing (7),

gear (6), and thrust washer (5), then
install snap ring (4).
9. Refilling with oil

Tighten the drain plug and add engine oil through
oil filler.
5 Swing machinery case : Approx. 2.5 l
PC130-7 30-47
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY CENTER SWIVEL JOINT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 4. Disconnect hoses (11) – (17).
OF CENTER SWIVEL JOINT

REMOVAL
k Release the residual pressure in the hydraulic cir-
cuit. For details, see TESTING AND ADJUST-
ING, Releasing residual pressure in hydraulic
circuit.
1. Remove pin (1) and move bar (2).
2. Disconnect hoses (3) – (10).

5. Remove elbow (18).
6. Sling the center swivel joint assembly tempo-

rarily.
7. Remove 4 mounting bolts (19).
8. Lift off center swivel joint assembly (20).
4 Center swivel joint assembly: 35 kg
3. Remove undercovers (10a) and (10b).
30-48 PC130-7
(2)
INSTALLATION
removal.

• Bleeding air
a Bleed air from the circuit. For details, see TEST-
ING AND ADJUSTING, Bleeding air from each
part.
PC130-7 30-49
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND
4. Remove O-ring (6) and slipper seal (7) from the
ASSEMBLY OF CENTER swivel rotor.
SWIVEL JOINT ASSEMBLY
New/Remodel
Symbol
Necessity
Part No. Part name
Sketch
Q'ty
790-101-2501 Push puller q 1
• 790-101-2510 • Block 1
• 790-101-2520 • Screw 1
• 791-112-1180 • Nut 1
C • 790-101-2540 • Washer 1
• 790-101-2630 • Leg 2
• 790-101-2570 • Plate 4 ASSEMBLY
• 790-101-2560 • Nut 2
1. Fit slipper seal (7) and O-ring (6) to the swivel
• 790-101-2650 • Adapter 2
rotor.
2. Set swivel shaft (5) to a block. Using the push

DISASSEMBLY tool, hit swivel rotor (4) lightly with a plastic ham-
2 Contact surfaces of rotor and shaft:

mer to install the swivel shaft.
Grease (G2-LI)
a When installing the rotor, take care extremely
not to damage the slipper seal and O-ring.
3. Install ring (3) and secure it with snap ring (2).
3 Mounting bolt:
4. Fit the O-ring and install cover (1).
31.3 ± 2.9 Nm {3.2 ± 0.3 kgm}
2. Remove snap ring (2).
3. Using tool C, pull swivel rotor (4) and ring (3) out
of swivel shaft (5).
30-50 PC130-7
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY WORK EQUIPMENT

OF WORK EQUIPMENT
ASSEMBLY
SPECIAL TOOLS
New/Remodel
Symbol
Necessity
Part No. Part name
Sketch
Q'ty
792-785-1100 Remover t 1
Puller
R 790-101-4000 (490 kN {50t} long) t 1
790-101-1102 Pump t 1 4. Start the engine and retract the piston rod.
(294 kN {30t})
a Fasten the piston rod with wire so that it will
not slip out and lower the cylinder onto a
REMOVAL stand, or place a support under the bottom of
k Except the arm and bucket fully. Lower the

the cylinder to support it. In the latter case,
remove the grease fitting on the bottom side
work equipment to the ground and set the lock first.
a Remove the bottom cylinder on the other
k Release the residual pressure in the hydraulic
lever to the lock position.
side in the same manner.
circuit. For details, see TESTING AND
ADJUSTING, Release of residual pressure from 5. Disconnect hoses (6) to (9).
hydraulic circuit. a Put tags to the disconnected hoses and
tubes to prevent a mistake in re-connecting
1. Disconnect grease hose (1). them.
a Put an oil stopper plug to each hose connect-
ing part and bind the hose with ropes, etc. so
that it will not be an obstacle to the work.
6. Disconnect wiring harness connector A42 (10).
2. Sling boom cylinder assembly (2), and remove

lock bolt (3).
3. Remove plate (4), then remove head pin (5). [*1]

a There are shims installed, so check the num-
ber and thickness, and keep them in a safe
plate.
PC130-7 30-51
(2)
7. Sling the work equipment assembly and remove INSTALLATION

plate (11) and foot pin (12). [*2]
removal.
[*1]
a Tighten the locknut so that clearance a
between the plate and nut will be 0.5 – 1.5
mm.
• When removing with tool R

Remove plate (11). Using tool R, remove
foot pin (12).
a Check the quantity and positions of the
inserted shims.
2 Greasing inside of bushing before assem-

bling pin:
2 Greasing after assembling pin:

Molybdenum disulfide grease (LM-P)
k When aligning the pin holes, never insert

your finger in the pin holes.

a Adjust clearance a between cylinder rod (14)
and plate (4) to below 1.0 mm with a shim.
• Standard shim thickness: 1.0 mm
8. Lift off work equipment assembly (13).
4 Work equipment assembly: 2,700 kg
[*2]
2 Greasing inside of bushing before assem-
bling pin:
2 Greasing after assembling pin:

30-52 PC130-7
(2)
k When aligning the position of the pin hole,

never insert your fingers into the pin hole.
a Adjust clearance a between boom (15) and
frame (16) with shim so that it will be less
than 0.5 mm.
• Thickness of standard shims:
0.5, 1.0, and 2.0 mm.

• Bleeding air
PC130-7 30-53
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY REVOLVING FRAME

OF REVOLVING FRAME
REMOVAL
1. Remove the work equipment assembly. For
details, see Removal and installation of work
equipment assembly.
2. Remove the counterweight assembly. For

details, see Removal and installation of counter-
weight assembly.
3. Disconnect hoses (1) – (11)

a Put tags to the disconnected hoses to pre-
vent a mistake in re-connecting them. 7. Remove pin (16) from the center swivel joint and
move bar (17).
4. Remove block (12).
vent a mistake in re-connecting them.
5. Sling boom cylinder assembly (13) temporarily.
6. Remove plate (14) and pin (15), and then lift off
boom cylinder assembly (13). [*1]
a Remove opposite boom cylinder assembly 9. Sling the revolving frame assembly temporarily.
as same procedure. a If the revolving frame assembly interferes
4 Boom cylinder assembly: 100 kg

with the sling, move or remove the sling.
10. Remove the 34 mounting bolts and lift off revolv-

ing frame assembly (22). [*2]
30-54 PC130-7
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY REVOLVING FRAME
a Leaving 2 – 3 mounting bolts at the front and INSTALLATION

rear parts, adjust the balance of the revolving
frame in each direction with lever blocks, etc. • Carry out installation in the reverse order to
Then, remove those mounting bolts. removal.
k When removing the revolving frame assem- [*1]

bly, take care that it will not interfere with the a Adjust clearance a between boom cylinder
center swivel joint. (13) and frame (23) to below 1 mm with
4 Revolving frame assembly: 2,800 kg

shims.
• Set shim thickness: 1.0, 2.0 mm
2 Mating face of swing circle:

[*2]
2 Mounting bolt threads of revolving frame:

Gasket sealant (LG-1)
3 Mounting bolt of revolving frame:

Adhesive (LT-2)
245 – 308.9 Nm {25 – 31.5 kgm}

Target: 279.3 Nm {28.5 kgm}

• Bleeding air
PC130-7 30-55
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY SWING CIRCLE

OF SWING CIRCLE ASSEMBLY • Carry out installation in the reverse order to
removal.
REMOVAL
[*1]
2 Mounting bolt threads of swing circle:
1. Remove the revolving frame assembly. For
details, see Removal and installation of revolving
frame assembly. Adhesive (LT-2)
3 Mounting bolt of swing circle:
2. Remove 38 mounting bolts (1). [*1] 245 – 308.9 Nm {25 – 31.5 kgm}
Target: 279.3 Nm {28.5 kgm}
[*2]
a Set soft zone a (marked with S) of the inner
race on the side of the machine (outer race
soft zone b). (The arrow indicates the front
of the machine.)
2 Quantity of grease for circle:
Grease (G2-LI), 9.1 l
3. Lift off swing circle assembly (2). [*2]
4 Swing circle assembly: 160 kg
30-56 PC130-7
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY HYDRAULIC TANK

OF HYDRAULIC TANK
ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
1. Drain the oil from the hydraulic tank. [*1]
6. Remove frames (11) – (13).
3. Remove covers (2) and (3).

vent a mistake in re-connecting them.
4. Remove covers (4) – (7).
5. Remove covers (8) – (10).
PC130-7 30-57
(2)
8. Remove clamps (22) and (23). 15. Remove the 4 mounting bolts and hydraulic tank
assembly (31). [*3]
4 Hydraulic tank assembly: 100 kg
10. Remove water separator and bracket assembly

(25) and move it toward the engine.
11. Disconnect hose (26).
12. Disconnect wiring harness connector A61 (27)

and remove clamp (28).
13. Remove the mounting bolt of connector (29) and

disconnect hose (30). [*2]
14. Sling the hydraulic tank assembly temporarily.
30-58 PC130-7
(2)
INSTALLATION
removal.
[*1]

58.8 – 78.5 Nm {6 – 8 kgm}
Target: 68.6 Nm {7 kgm}
[*2]
a When tightening the hose clamp screws, set
them 180° apart from each other laterally (in
3 Hose clamp: 90 ± 5 Nm {8.8 ± 0.5 kgm}

the horizontal direction).

[*3]
3 Mounting bolt:
245 – 309 Nm {25.0 – 31.5 kgm}

• Bleeding air
PC130-7 30-59
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY CONTROL VALVE

OF CONTROL VALVE
ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
stop the engine. Then, loosen the hydraulic oil
k Set the lock lever in the LOCK position.

• The control valve described below is a 7-spool
valve (6-spool valve + service valve) to which no
attachments are connected.
1. Open the engine hood and remove cover (1).
2. Disconnect the following hoses in front of the

control valve.
• (1): Attachment 1
• (2): Attachment 1
• (3): Bucket cylinder (Head side)
• (4): Bucket cylinder (Bottom side)
• (5): Arm cylinder (Head side)
• (6): Arm cylinder (Bottom side)
• (7): Hydraulic tank
• (8): Boom cylinder (Bottom side)
• (9): Boom cylinder (Head side)
• (10): Right travel motor
• (11): Right travel motor
• (12): Left travel motor
• (13): Left travel motor
• (14): Swing motor
• (15): Swing motor
30-60 PC130-7
(2)
3. Disconnect the following hoses and wiring con- 4. Disconnect the following hoses and wiring con-
nectors on the left side of the control valve. nectors on the right side of the control valve.
• (17): Service 1 PPC valve • (26): Pump pressure sensor connector A51
• (18): Bucket CURL PPC/EPC valve • (27): Service 1 PPC valve
(Hose band: White) • (28): Bucket DUMP PPC/EPC valve
• (19): Arm IN PPC/EPC valve (Hose band: Black)
(Hose band: Blue) • (29): Arm OUT PPC/EPC valve
• (20): Boom RAISE PPC/EPC valve (Hose band: Yellow)
(Hose band: Brown) • (30): Boom RAISE PPC/EPC valve
• (21): Right travel FORWARD PPC valve (Hose band: Green)
(Hose band: Green) • (31): Right travel REVERSE PPC valve
• (22): Left travel REVERSE PPC valve (Hose band: Blue)
• (23): Swing RIGHT PPC valve • (32): Left travel FORWARD PPC valve
• (24): Swing motor (Hose band: Red)
• (25): Oil cooler • (33): Swing LEFT PPC/EPC valve
(Hose band: Red)
• (35): 2-stage relief solenoid valve
PC130-7 30-61
(2)
5. Disconnect the following hoses at the rear of the INSTALLATION

control valve.
• (36): LS valve • Carry out installation in the reverse order to
• (37): Hydraulic pump removal.
• (38): Swing holding brake solenoid valve
• (39): Swing holding brake solenoid valve • Refilling with oil (Hydraulic tank)
• (40): Boom RAISE PPC/EPC valve a Add oil through the oil filler to the specified level.
• (41): Hydraulic pump Run the engine to circulate the oil through the
• Bleeding air
6. Remove the 4 mounting bolts and lift off control

valve assembly (42).
4 Control valve assembly: 120 kg
30-62 PC130-7
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND
ASSEMBLY OF CONTROL
VALVE ASSEMBLY
a In this section, only the precautions for assem-
bling the control valve assembly are described.
a For the tightening torque of the control valve
parts which are not shown in the following sec-
tional view and explanation, see STRUCTURE
AND OPERATION, MAINTENANCE STAN-
DARD, "Hydraulic equipment", "Control valve".
ASSEMBLY
a When tightening bolt (1) and plug (2) shown in

the figure, apply a drop (approx. 0.02 g) of LOC-
TITE (No. 638) to their threads.
a Apply LOCTITE to plug (2) as shown in the figure
at right.
3 Bolt (1): 11.8 – 14.7 Nm {1.2 – 1.5 kgm}

• Dimension a = 2 – 3 mm
3 Plug (2): 14.7 – 19.6 Nm {1.5 – 2 kgm}
PC130-7 30-63
(2)
a Tighten the 4 combination nuts on the top of the

control valve in the following numerical order in 3
times.
a The arrow in the figure indicates the front of the
machine.
3 Combination nut:
1st time: 58.8 – 68.8 Nm {6 – 7 kgm}
2nd time: 78.5 – 88.3 Nm {8 – 9 kgm}
3rd time: 98.1 – 113 Nm {10 – 11.5 kgm}
30-64 PC130-7
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY HYDRAULIC PUMP

OF HYDRAULIC PUMP
ASSEMBLY
SPECIAL TOOLS
New/Remodel
Symbol
Necessity
Part No. Part name
Sketch
Q'ty
D 796-460-1210 Oil stopper t 1
REMOVAL
4. Remove covers (2) – (4) and frame (5).

minal of the battery. 5. Remove bracket (6) and cover (7).
stop the engine. Then, loosen the hydraulic oil 6. Remove clamp (8). [*2]
1. Remove the hydraulic tank strainer. Using tool

D, stop oil from flowing out.
a When not using tool D, remove the drain plug
and drain oil from the hydraulic tank. [*1]
2. Drain oil from the damper case.
6 Damper case: 0.75 l
PC130-7 30-65
(2)
7. Remove muffler drain tube (9). 13. Sling the hydraulic pump assembly temporarily.
a The muffler drain tube is fixed with the
mounting bolts of the hydraulic pump assem- 14. Remove governor motor bracket mounting bolts
bly. (22) and (23) and fix the bracket to the engine
with ropes.
8. Remove muffler and bracket assembly (10).
15. Lift off hydraulic pump assembly (24). [*3]
4 Hydraulic pump assembly: 85 kg

11. Disconnect wiring harness connectors A61 (17),

V22 (18), and V21 (19) and remove clamp (20).
12. Remove the mounting bolt of connector (21).

a Prepare a pan to receive the oil.
30-66 PC130-7
(2)
INSTALLATION
removal.

[*1]
58.5 – 78.5 Nm {5.97 – 8.0 kgm}

(Target: 68.6 Nm {7 kgm})
3 Clamp mounting bolt:

[*2]
1st time: 39.2 – 49 Nm {4 – 5 kgm}

2nd time: 68.6 – 122.5 Nm {7 – 12.5 kgm}
2 Hydraulic pump shaft spline:

[*3]
2 Mating face of hydraulic pump case:

Molybdenum disulfide grease (LM-G)
Gasket sealant (LG-6)
• Refilling with oil (Damper case)

5 Damper case: 0.75 l

5 Hydraulic tank: 90l
• Bleeding air
PC130-7 30-67
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY HYDRAULIC PUMP INPUT SHAFT OIL SEAL

OF HYDRAULIC PUMP INPUT • Carry out installation in the reverse order to
SHAFT OIL SEAL removal.
[*1]
SPECIAL TOOLS
a Using tool N, press fit oil seal (3).
2 Lip and periphery of oil seal:
New/Remodel
Symbol
Grease (G2-LI)
Necessity
Part No. Part name
a Apply grease thinly to the periphery of the oil
Sketch
seal.
Q'ty
791-463-1141 Push tool t 1
N
790-201-2740 Spacer t 1
REMOVAL
1. Remove the hydraulic pump assembly. For
details, see REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF
HYDRAULIC PUMP ASSEMBLY.
2. Remove snap ring (1) and spacer (2).
3. Pry off oil seal (3) with a screwdriver, etc. [*1]

a Take extreme care not to damage the shaft.
30-68 PC130-7
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
DISASSEMBLY AND
ASSEMBLY OF HYDRAULIC
CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
SPECIAL TOOLS
New/Remodel
Symbol
Necessity
Part No. Part name
Sketch
Q'ty
1 790-502-1003 Cylinder repair stand t 1
790-102-4300 Wrench assembly t 1
2
790-102-4310 Pin t 2
3 790-720-1000 Expander q 1 4) Set piston rod assembly (2) to tool H1.
Ring
796-720-1660 (for boom and q 1
bucket)
Clamp
4 07281-01159 (for boom and q 1
bucket)
796-720-1650 Ring (for bucket) q 1
07281-01029 Clamp (for bucket) q 1
790-201-1702 Push tool kit t 1
H • 790-101-5021 • Grip 1
• 01010-50816 • Bolt 1
5 • 790-201-1811 • Push tool 1
(for boom)
• 790-201-1821 • Push tool (for arm) 1
5) Remove piston assembly lock screw (3).
• 790-201-1791 • Push tool 1
(for bucket) a If the screw is so caulked that you cannot
790-201-1500 Push tool kit t 1 remove it, tighten it temporarily and cut
• 790-201-5021 • Grip 1 the threads on it, and then remove it.
• 01010-50818 • Bolt 1
6
• 790-201-1620 • Plate (for boom) 1
• 790-201-1630 • Plate (for arm) 1
• 790-201-1610 • Plate (for bucket) 1
DISASSEMBLY
a The following explanation is common to the

boom, arm, and bucket cylinders, unless other-
wise specified.
1. Piston rod assembly

1) Remove the piping from the cylinder assem-
bly.
2) Remove the mounting bolts and cylinder
head assembly (1).
3) Pull out piston rod assembly (2).
a Put a container under the cylinder to
receive oil.
PC130-7 30-69
(2)
6) Using tool H2, remove piston assembly (4). 2. Disassembly of piston assembly
1) Remove rings (11), wear rings (12), and pis-
ton ring (13).
2) Remove the O-ring and backup rings (14).
7) Remove plunger (5) and collar (6).

a Perform this work for only the boom and
arm cylinders.
8) Remove cylinder head assembly (7). 3. Disassembly of cylinder head assembly
1) Remove the O-ring and backup ring (15).
2) Remove snap ring (16) and dust seal (17).
3) Remove rod packing (18), buffer ring (19),
and bushing (20).
9) Remove cap (8), 11 balls (9), and plunger

(10).
a Take care not to lose the balls.
a Perform this work for only the arm cylin-
der.
30-70 PC130-7
(2)
ASSEMBLY 2) Using tool H4, install piston ring (13).
a The following explanation is common to the

boom, arm, and bucket cylinders, unless other-
wise specified.
a Take care not to damage the packings, dust
seals, O-rings, etc.
a Clean the all parts. After installing them, cover
the piping ports and pin holes to prevent dirt from
entering.
a Do not insert each backup ring forcibly, but warm
it in water at 50 – 60 °C and then insert it.
1. Assembly of cylinder head assembly

1) Using tool H5, press fit bushing (20).
2) Install buffer ring (19) and rod packing (18). 3) Install backup rings (14) and O-ring.
3) Using tool H6, install dust seal (17) and 4) Install wear rings (12).
secure it with snap ring (16). 5) Install rings (11).
4) Install backup ring (15) and O-ring. a Do not increase the closed gap of the
ring too much.
2 Ring groove: Grease (G2-LI)
3. Piston rod assembly

1) Set piston rod assembly (2) to tool H1.
2. Assembly of piston assembly

1) Set piston ring (13) to tool H3 and turn the
handle 8 – 10 times to expand the piston
ring.
PC130-7 30-71
(2)
2) Install cylinder head assembly (7). 6) Tighten piston assembly (4). Then, using
3) Fit the O-ring and backup ring to collar (6), tool H2, tighten piston assembly (4) until the
and then install them. screw holes are aligned.
a Perform this work for only the boom and a Remove the burrs from the threads with
arm cylinders. a file.
4) Install plunger (5).
arm cylinders.
7) Tighten screw (3).

2 Threads of screw:
Adhesive (LOCTITE No. 262)
3 Screw:
5) Set plunger (10) to the piston rod. Install 11
balls (9) and secure them with cap (8).
a After installing the plunger, check that it 58.9 – 73.6 Nm {6 – 7.5 kgm}
has a little play at its end. 8) Caulk threaded part a by 4 places with a
a Perform this work for only the arm cylin- punch.
der.
•When reusing the rod and piston assem-

bly, assemble them according to the fol-
lowing procedure.
a Clean the parts thoroughly and remove
metal chips, dirt, etc.
30-72 PC130-7
(2)
• When replacing either or both of the rod and pis- 12) Tighten screw (3).
2 Threads of screw:
ton assembly (2), assemble the new parts
Adhesive (LOCTITE No. 262)
3 Screw:
a Make a mark of the cushion plug position on the
end of the rod having the bottom cushion. (Per-
form this work for only the arm cylinder.) 58.9 – 73.6 Nm {6 – 7.5 kgm}
9) Using tool H2, tighten piston assembly (4) 13) Caulk the threaded part by 4 places with a
until it reaches end b of the rod. punch.
3 Piston assembly:
294 ± 29.4 Nm {30 ± 3.0 kgm}
a After tightening the piston, check that
plunger (5) has some play.
arm cylinders.
14) Install piston rod assembly (2).

a Set the abutment joint of the ring at a
side and insert the piston rod, aligning it
with the cylinder tube.
a After inserting the piston rod, check that
the ring is not broken or removed, and
then insert to the end.
10) Make a screw hole to install screw (3).
a Apply a drill to the V-groove of the
threaded parts of piston (4) and rod (2)
and make a hole.
a When making a hole on the cylinder hav-
ing the bottom cushion, make it around
the cushion plug. (Perform this work for
only the arm cylinder.)
• Dimensions of screw hole (mm)
Tap drill Tap drill hole Tap to be Tapping
diameter depth used depth
10.3 27 12 x 1.75 20
11) After making the hole, remove all metal chips

and dirt.
PC130-7 30-73
(2)
15) Tighten the mounting bolts of cylinder head

assembly (1).
3 Mounting bolt:
Arm cylinder:
270 ± 39.0 Nm {27.5 ± 4.0 kgm}
Boom/Bucket cylinder:
172 ± 24.5 Nm {17.5 ± 2.5 kgm}
16) Install the piping.

a Tighten the bolts to install the piping
band to the cylinder to the following
torque.
3 27.4 ± 6.9 Nm {2.8 ± 0.7 kgm}
30-74 PC130-7
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY COUNTERWEIGHT

OF COUNTERWEIGHT • Carry out installation in the reverse order to
ASSEMBLY removal.
[*1]
REMOVAL
1. Sling the counterweight assembly temporarily. 2 Threads of mounting bolt:
3 Mounting bolt:
Adhesive (LT-2)
2. Remove 4 mounting bolts (1). [*1]
1,177 – 1,470 Nm {120 – 150 kgm}
Target: 1,324 Nm {135 kgm}
[*2]
a Adjust the clearance between the counter-
weight and revolving frame and the clear-
ance between the counterweight and outside
door to 10 ± 5 mm on right and left sides.
3. Lift off counterweight assembly (2). [*2]
4 Counterweight assembly: 2,500 kg
PC130-7 30-75
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY AIR CONDITIONER UNIT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION a When removing box (2), disconnect hoses (4)
and (5).
OF AIR CONDITIONER UNIT
ASSEMBLY
SPECIAL TOOLS
New/Remodel
Symbol
Necessity
Part No. Part name
Sketch
Q'ty
799-703-1200 Service tool kit t 1
Vacuum pump
799-703-1100 (100 V) t 1
799-703-1110 Vacuum pump t 1

(220 V)
a When removing box (3), disconnect wiring har-
Vacuum pump
Q 799-703-1120 (240 V) t 1 ness connector M79 (6).
799-703-1401 Gas leak detector t 1
Adapter (When
799-703-1300 vacuum pump for t 1
refrigerant R12 is
used)
REMOVAL

6 Coolant: 13.4 l
2. Discharge the refrigerant (gas) from the air con-
ditioner circuit. [*1]
3. Remove the operator's seat.
4. Remove cover (1) and boxes (2) and (3).
30-76 PC130-7
(2)
6. Remove covers (8) – (10). 9. Disconnect wiring harness connectors M33 (15)
and M27 (16) and remove them from the
bracket.
a Remove the mounting bolts of bracket (17),
and then hold the clip on the back side of the
bracket and remove the connectors.
7. Disconnect ducts (11) and (12) from the air con-

ditioner unit.
10. Remove duct (18).
11. Disconnect hoses (19) and (20) and remove air

conditioner unit assembly (21). [*2]
a When removing the air conditioner unit
assembly, disconnect the 2 hoses from its
lower side.
8. Remove ducts (13) and (14).
PC130-7 30-77
(2)
INSTALLATION
removal.
a When installing the hoses of the air conditioner

circuit, take care that dirt, dust, water, etc. will not
enter them.
a When installing each air conditioner hose, check
that the O-ring is fitted to it.
a Check each O-ring for flaw and deterioration.
[*1]
• Charging with air conditioner refrigerant
a Using tool Q, charge the air conditioner cir-
cuit with air conditioner refrigerant (R134a).
[*2]
a When connecting each refrigerant pipe,
apply compressor oil (ND-OIL8) to its
threads and use a double spanner to tighten
it.
3 Hose threads M16 x 1.5 (Width across
flats: 19):
12 – 15 Nm {1.2 – 1.5 kgm}
Hose threads M22 x 1.5 (Width across
flats: 24):
20 – 25 Nm {2.0 – 2.5 kgm}
Hose threads M24 x 1.5 (Width across
flats: 27):
30 – 35 Nm {3.0 – 3.5 kgm}
M6 bolt of receiver (Width across flats:
10):
4 – 7 Nm {0.4 – 0.7 kgm}
M6 bolt of compressor pipe (Width
across flats: 10):
8 – 12 Nm {0.8 – 1.2 kgm}
30-78 PC130-7
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OPERATOR'S CAB
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 5. Remove cover (5) and boxes (6) and (7).
OF OPERATOR'S CAB
REMOVAL
1. Remove floor mat (1).
a When removing box (6), disconnect hoses

(8) and (9).
2. Remove the operator's seat assembly.
3. Remove the monitor panel assembly. For details,

see Removal and installation of monitor panel
assembly.
4. Remove covers (3) and (4).

a When removing cover (3), disconnect wiring
harness connector M19 on its back side. a When removing box (7), disconnect wiring
harness connector M79 (10).
PC130-7 30-79
(2)
6. Remove cover (11). 10. Remove ducts (17) and (18).
7. Remove covers (12) – (14). 11. Return the right lever stand removed in step 9.
12. Disconnect wiring harness connectors M71 (19),

H10 (20), H11 (21), and H12 (22).
8. Disconnect wiring harness connector W04 (15).
9. Remove the 4 mounting bolts of right lever stand

(16) and move the lever stand to the left side in 13. Remove duct (23).
the operator's cab.
30-80 PC130-7
(2)
14. Remove bracket (24) and duct (25). 18. Remove cover (32) under the front of the opera-
tor's cab.
15. Disconnect wiring harness connectors M72 (26),

H08 (27), H09 (28), and M31 (29). 19. Disconnect windshield washer hose (33).
16. Remove bracket (30) and move it toward the air

conditioner unit.
20. Sling operator's cab assembly temporarily.
21. Remove 5 mounting bolts (34) and 4 mounting

17. Remove the 5 mounting bolts of controller bracket nuts (35).
(31) and move the bracket toward the air condi- a Check the bolt length.
tioner unit.
PC130-7 30-81
(2)
22. Lift off operator's cab assembly (36). INSTALLATION

4 Operator's cab assembly: 280 kg • Carry out installation in the reverse order to
removal.
30-82 PC130-7
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OPERATOR'S CAB GLASS
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF OPERATOR'S CAB GLASS

(STUCK GLASS)
* Among the panes of window glass on the 4 sides (1) : Right side window glass
of the operator's cab, 4 panes (1) – (4) are stuck. (2) : Left side rear window glass
In this section, the procedure for replacing the (3) : Door lower window glass
stuck glass is explained. (4) : Front window glass
When replacing front window glass (4), remove (5) : Front window assembly
front window assembly (5). (It is impossible to (Front window glass + Front frame)
replace only the front window glass while the (6) : Both-sided adhesive tape
front window assembly is installed to the opera- (16): Center trim seal
tor's cab.)
For the procedure for replacing the front window
assembly, see REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
OF FRONT WINDOW ASSEMBLY.
PC130-7 30-83
(2)
SPECIAL TOOLS (The figure shows the operator's cab of a

wheel loader.)
New/Remodel
Symbol
Necessity
Part No. Part name
Sketch
Q'ty
1 793-498-1210 Lifter (Suction cup) t 2
X
2 20Y-54-13180 Adapter t 2
REMOVAL
* Remove the window glass to be replaced
1. Using seal cutter [1], cut the adhesive between

broken window glass (7) and operator's cab a If the window glass is broken finely, it may be
(metal sheet) (8). removed with knife [4] and a screwdriver.
a Widening the cut with a screwdriver, cut the
adhesive and both-sided adhesive tape with
knife [4].
(The figure shows the operator's cab of a

wheel loader.)
a If a seal cutter is not available, make holes

on the adhesive and both-sided adhesive
tape with a drill and pass a fine wire (piano
wire, etc.) [2] through the holes. Grip the
both ends of the wire with priors [3], etc. (or
hold them by winding them onto something)
and move the wire to the right and left to cut 2. Remove the window glass.
the adhesive and both-sided adhesive tape.
Since the wire may be broken by the fric-
tional heat, apply lubricant to it.
30-84 PC130-7
(2)
INSTALLATION (The figure shows the operator's cab of a wheel

loader.)
1. Using a knife and scraper [5], remove the
remaining adhesive and both-sided adhesive
tape from the metal sheets (glass sticking sur-
faces) of the operator's cab.
a Remove the adhesive and both-sided adhe-
sive tape to a degree that they will not affect
adhesion of the new adhesive. Take care not
to scratch the painted surfaces. (If the
painted surfaces are scratched, adhesion will
be lowered.)
(The figure shows the operator's cab of a

wheel loader.)
3. Apply primer (10).

a The using limit of primer (10) is 4 months
after the date of manufacture. Do not use
primer (10) after this limit.
a Use the primer within 2 hours after unpack-
ing it.
a Even if the primer is packed again just after it
is unpacked, use it within 24 hours after it is
unpacked for the first time. (Discard the
primer 24 hours after it is packed.)
1) Stir the primers for paint and glass suffi-
ciently before using them.
a If the primer has been stored in a refrig-
2. Remove oil, dust, dirt, etc. from the sticking sur- erator, leave it at the room temperature
faces of cab (8) and window glass (9) with white for at least half a day before stirring it. (If
gasoline. the primer is unpacked just after taken
a If the sticking surfaces are not cleaned well, out of the refrigerator, water will be con-
the glass may not be stuck perfectly. densed. Accordingly, leave the primer at
a Clean the all black part on the back side of the room temperature for a sufficient
the window glass. time.)
a After cleaning the sticking surfaces, leave 2) When reusing primer brush (11), wash it in
them for at least 5 minutes to dry. white gasoline.
a After washing the brush, check it again
for dirt and foreign matter.
a Prepare respective brushes for the paint
primer glass primer.
PC130-7 30-85
(2)
3) Evenly apply paint primer to the surfaces to a In addition to the above parts, apply the
stick both-sided adhesive tapes and the sur- primer to right side window glass (1) and
faces out of those surfaces on operator's cab door lower window glass (3).
(8) which will be coated with the adhesive. • Range to apply primer additionally for right
2 Paint primer:
side window glass (1): (b)
• Range to apply primer additionally for door
SUNSTAR PAINT PRIMER 580
lower window glass (3): (c)
SUPER or equivalent
a After applying the primer, leave it for at least
a Do not apply the primer more than 2
5 minutes (within 8 hours) to dry.
times. (If it is applied more than 2 times,
its performance will be lowered.)
a Parts to be coated with primer: Apply the

primer all over dimension (a).
• Dimension to apply primer (a): 25 mm
a Never apply wrong primer. If the glass primer

is applied by mistake, wipe it off with white
gasoline.
30-86 PC130-7
(2)
4) Evenly apply glass primer to the sticking sur- 4. Stick both-sided adhesive tape (6) along the
faces of window glass (9). inside edge of the glass sticking section.
2 Glass primer:
a Do not remove the release tape of the both-
sided adhesive tape on the glass sticking
SUNSTAR GLASS PRIMER 580
side before sticking the glass.
SUPER or equivalent
a When sticking the both-sided adhesive tape,
a Do not apply the primer more than 2
do not touch the cleaned surface as long as
times. (If it is applied more than 2 times,
possible.
its performance will be lowered.)
a Take that the both-sided adhesive tape will
not float at each corner of the window frame.
a Parts to be coated with primer: Apply the

primer to the sticking surfaces of window
a When sticking both-sided adhesive tape (6)
glass (9) and all over dimension (d)
around a frame, do not lap its finishing end
which will be on both-sided adhesive
over the starting end but make clearance e of
tape (6) and operator's cab (8).
about 5 mm between them.
a Do not apply the primer to the boarder
1) Stick both-sided adhesive tape (6) for right
about 5 mm wide between the black part
side window glass (1) as shown in the figure.
and transparent part of the glass.
a After applying the primer, leave it for at
least 5 minutes (within 8 hours) to dry.
a Never apply wrong primer. If the glass
primer is applied by mistake, wipe it off
with white gasoline.
PC130-7 30-87
(2)
a Stick both-sided adhesive tape (6a) addi- 3) Stick both-sided adhesive tape (6) for door
tionally for right side window glass (1). lower window glass (3) as shown in the fig-
• Positions to stick additional both-sided ure.
adhesive tape for right side window
glass:
(f) : 50 mm
(g) : 90 mm
(h) : 250 mm
a Stick both-sided adhesive tape (6b) addi-

tionally for door lower window glass (3).
a Positions to stick additional both-sided
adhesive tape for door lower window
glass:
2) Stick both-sided adhesive tape (6) for left (j) : 110 mm
side rear window glass (2) as shown in the (k) : 90 mm
figure. (m) : 200 mm
30-88 PC130-7
(2)
4) Stick both-sided adhesive tape (6) for front 5. Position the new window glass.
window glass (4) as shown in the figure. 1) Check the clearance between the window
glass and the operator's cab on the right, left,
upper, and lower sides, and then adjust it
evenly.
2) Stick tapes [6] between window glass (9) and
operator's cab (8) and draw positioning line
n.
a Stick tapes [6] to the right, left, and lower
parts of the right side window glass, left
side rear window glass, and door lower
window glass for accurate positioning.
3) Cut the tape between window glass (9) and
operator's cab (8) with a knife, and then
remove the window glass.
a Do not remove the tapes left on the win-
a Stick both-sided adhesive tape (6c) of dow glass and operator's cab before
the lower side of the front window glass installing the window glass.
along the outside edge of the lower line,
differently from other both-sided adhe-
sive tapes (6). (If it is stuck along the
inside, it will be seen through the trans-
parent part of the glass.)
PC130-7 30-89
(2)
a When positioning front window glass (4), 2) Cut the tip of the adhesive nozzle (14) so
set its horizontal position to the frame that dimensions (q) and (r) will be as follows.
width and set its vertical position so that • Dimension (q): 10 mm
height difference (p) between it and the • Dimension (r): 15 mm
frame top will be 3 mm.
3) Set adhesive cartridge (12) to caulking gun

6. Apply adhesive. [7].
a Use either of the 2 types of the adhesive. a An electric caulking gun is more efficient.
2 Adhesive (Summer):
SUNSTAR PENGUINE SEAL 580
2 Adhesive (Winter):
SUPER "S"

SUPER "W"
a The using limit of the adhesive is 4 months
after the date of manufacture. Do not use the
adhesive after this limit.
a Keep the adhesive in a dark place where the
temperature is below 25°C.
a Never heat the adhesive higher than 30°C.
a When reusing the adhesive, remove the all
hardened part from the nozzle tip.
1) Break aluminum seal (13) of the outlet of 4) Remove the release tape of the both-sided
adhesive cartridge (12) and install the noz- adhesive tape on the glass side.
zle.
30-90 PC130-7
(2)
5) Apply adhesive (15) to the outside of both- a Apply adhesive (15) additionally for addi-
sided adhesive tape (6) of the operator's cab. tional both-sided adhesive tape (6a) of
the right side window glass and addi-
tional both-sided adhesive tape (6b) of
door lower window glass.
a Apply adhesive (15) to dimensions (s)

and (t) of both-sided adhesive tape (6) of
operator's cab (8).
• Dimension (s): 10 mm
• Dimension (t): 15 mm
a Apply adhesive (15) higher than both-
sided adhesive tape (6).
a Apply the adhesive evenly.
AJF00822
PC130-7 30-91
(2)
7. Install the window glass. a After installing front window glass (4), fill
1) Install window glass (9), matching it to the the clearances between it and center trim
lines of the positioning tapes drawn in step 5. seal (16) with caulking material in range
a Since the window glass cannot be (s) to dimensions (t) and (u).
removed and stuck again, stick it very After applying the primer to glass (4) of
carefully. section A – A, apply adhesive as caulk-
a Stick the glass within 5 minutes after ing material.
applying the adhesive. • Caulking dimension (t): 2 mm
2) After sticking window glass (9), press all • Caulking dimension (u): 5 mm
around it until it is stuck to the both-sided a When caulking, mask the glass side and
adhesive tape. form the adhesive with a rubber spatula
a Press the corners of the window glass as shown in the figure.
firmly. a Wipe off projected adhesive.
2 Glass primer:
SUNSTAR GLASS PRIMER 580
2 Adhesive:
SUPER

SUPER "S" or "W"
a You can perform this work efficiently by

pulling window glass (9) from inside of
the operator's cab with suction cup X1.
30-92 PC130-7
(2)
8. Fix the window glass. 9. After installing the window glass, remove the
1) After installing right window glass (1) to the primer and adhesive from the operator's cab and
operator's cab, insert stopper rubbers X2 to 2 window glass.
places (v) at the bottom of the glass to fix the a Using white gasoline, wipe off the adhesive
glass. before it is dried up.
a When cleaning the glass, do not give an
impact to it.
10. Protect the stuck window glass.

1) Keep the stopper rubbers, styrene foam
blocks, and rubber bands installed for 10
hours (at temperature of 20°C and humidity
of 60%).
2) After removing the stopper rubbers, styrene
foam blocks, and rubber bands, wait at least
14 hours, at least 24 hours in total, before
operating the machine actually.
2) Using styrene foam blocks [9] and rubber

bands [10], fix the window glass and both-
sided adhesive tape to fit them completely.
PC130-7 30-93
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY FRONT WINDOW
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 5. Release the rear locks.
OF FRONT WINDOW 6. Lower the front window assembly carefully a lit-

ASSEMBLY tle. Put out rollers (8) and (9) under the both

sides of the front window through the portion
from which the corner blocks were removed in
stop the engine. step 3 (the portion where the rail is open) and
hold them.
* To replace the front window glass, the front win-
dow assembly must be removed from the opera- 7. Remove rollers (8) and (9) under the both sides
tor's cab. The procedure for removing and of the front window.
installing the front window assembly (front frame
and front window glass) is explained below.
REMOVAL
1. Raise the front window assembly to the ceiling
and fix it with the rear locks (on both sides).
2. Remove left corner blocks (1) and (2) and right

corner block (3). [*1]
3. Remove left striker bolt (4), right striker bolt (5),

left corner block bracket, and right corner block
bracket (7). [*2]
4. Install left striker bolt (4) to the operator's cab

again and tighten it lightly.
a This bolt will be used to hang the pull-up
assist cable in step 8.
30-94 PC130-7
(2)
8. Remove left lower pin (10). [*3] 9. Put out the bottom of front window assembly (13)
a If left lower pin (10) is removed, plate (12) at through the rail opening portion and lower it
the end of pull-up assist cable (11) comes gradually.
off.
a Hang plate (12) on the left striker bolt.
k The return load of 58.8 N {6 kg} is applied

to the rear of the operator's cab. Accord-
ingly, take care when removing left lower
pin (10) to disconnect pull-up assist cable
(11).
10. Lower front window assembly (13) completely.

a Do not let the front window assembly touch
the monitor.
PC130-7 30-95
(2)
11. Twist front window assembly (13) to the right and INSTALLATION
left to remove both upper rollers (14) and (15)
from the rails, and then remove front window • Carry out installation in the reverse order to
assembly (13). removal.
[*1] [*2]
• Adjust opening and closing of the front window
assembly according to the following procedure.
1. Open and close the front window to check that it

does not interfere with the rails and the rollers
are not hitch.
2. If there is any problem in opening or closing of

the front window, loosen the mounting bolts of
roller adjustment brackets (16) and (17) and
adjust the condition of the front window, and then
tighten the mounting bolts again.
3 Mounting bolt: 98 Nm {1.0 kgm}
30-96 PC130-7
(2)
3. Raise the front window assembly and fix it with

the rear locks (on both sides).
a Check that the locks in the rear of the opera-
tor's cab are applied securely.
4. Install right corner block (3) and fix right corner

block bracket (7) with right striker bolt (5).
a Tighten the striker bolt securely after adjust-
ing it in step 6.
a Install the right corner block so that there will
be no level difference at part (a).
a Install the right corner block so that level dif-
ference (b) between the rail and right corner
block (3) at part PF will be 0 – 1.0 mm.
Check that the right corner block is not pro-
jected from the rail at the rolling surface of
the roller.
a Secure roller clearance (c) at part PJ.
PC130-7 30-97
(2)
5. Install left corner blocks (1) and (2) and secure 6. Adjust the striker bolts according to the following
left corner bracket (6) with left striker bolt (4). procedure (Adjust the "CLOSE" positions of the
a Tighten the striker bolt securely after adjust- front window assembly locks).
ing it in step 6. 1) Tighten left striker bolt (4) and right striker
a Install the left corner blocks so that there will bolt (5) at roughly right positions so that front
be no level difference at 2 part (d). window glass (18) will be fitted to cab-side
a Secure roller clearance (e). trim seal (19).
30-98 PC130-7
(2)
2) Open and close the front window assembly

and check the working condition of both
locks (20) and (21).
i) If both locks do not work normally, move
the striker bolts toward the rear of the
cab and tighten them again.
ii) After moving the striker bolts, check the
fitness of the front window glass and cab-
side trim seal which was checked in step
1).
iii) Repeat the work in i) and ii) until the fit-
ness of the front window and the working
condition of both locks (20) and (21) are
acceptable, and then tighten the striker
bolts.
7. After adjusting the striker bolts, splash water 9. Adjust the front window stoppers.
heavily over the front window glass and check 1) After adjusting "closing" lock of the front win-
that the water does not leak into the cab. dow assembly in step 8, check the contact of
both front window stoppers (23).
8. Adjust the "opening" lock of the front window 2) If both stoppers (23) do not contact normally,
assembly. adjust and fix them at places where they con-
1) After adjusting the "closing" lock of the front tact normally.
window in step 6, raise the front window
assembly to the ceiling.
2) Set the right and left front window assembly
locks at the rear of the operator's cab to the
"OPEN" positions, and then check the follow-
ing items.
• Check that right and left locks (20) and
(21) are closed normally.
• Check that right and left locks (20) and
(21) are inserted in parallel in right and
left striker plates (22).
• Check that right and left rubber stoppers
(24) are in contact with the front window
assembly and their deflection allowance
is 1.5 – 3.0 mm.
3) After checking the above items, if necessary,
adjust them by moving right and left striker
plates (22) at the rear of the operator's cab.
PC130-7 30-99
(2)
10. Check the latching effort of the front window

assembly.
1) After finishing steps 6 – 8, check that latching
efforts of both locks (20) and (21) are even.
a Check the latching efforts on both "clos-
ing" side (in the front of the operator's
cab) and "opening" side (in the rear of
the operator's cab).
[*3]
3 Left lower pin:
27 – 34 Nm {2.75 – 3.47 kgm}
30-100 PC130-7
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY MONITOR PANEL
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 3. Disconnect wiring harness connectors P01 (3)

and P02 (4) and remove monitor panel assembly
OF MONITOR PANEL (5).
ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL

a When removing the cover, disconnect wiring
harness connector P15 on its back side.
INSTALLATION
removal.
2. Remove 3 mounting bolts (2).
a Take care not to drop the mounting bolts in

the cover or duct.
PC130-7 30-101
(2)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY CONTROLLER

OF CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY • Carry out installation in the reverse order to
removal.
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect wiring harness connectors C01 (2),

C02 (3), and C03 (4).
3. Loosen the 2 lower mounting bolts and remove

the 2 upper mounting bolts, and then pull up and
remove controller assembly (5).
a Take care extremely not to give a shock of
falling, etc. to the controller assembly.
30-102 PC130-7
(2)
40 MAINTENANCE STANDARD
SWING MACHINERY .............................................................. 40- 2

SWING CIRCLE ...................................................................... 40- 4
TRACK FRAME, IDLER CUSHION......................................... 40- 5
IDLER ...................................................................................... 40- 6
CARRIER ROLLER ................................................................. 40- 7
TRACK ROLLER ..................................................................... 40- 8
SPROCKET ............................................................................. 40- 9
TRACK SHOE ......................................................................... 40-10
HYDRAULIC PUMP................................................................. 40-14
CONTROL VALVE ................................................................... 40-15
SUCTION SAFETY VALVE ..................................................... 40-24
SELF PRESSURE REDUCTION VALVE ................................ 40-25
TRAVEL MOTOR..................................................................... 40-26
SWING MOTOR ...................................................................... 40-27
SOLENOID VALVE .................................................................. 40-28
CENTER SWIVEL JOINT ........................................................ 40-29
PPC VALVE ............................................................................. 40-30
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER......................................................... 40-34
WORK EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 40-36
DIMENSION OF WORK EQUIPMENT.................................... 40-38
PC130-7 40-1
MAINTENANCE STANDARD SWING MACHINERY
SWING MACHINERY
40-2 PC130-7
MAINTENANCE STANDARD SWING MACHINERY
Unit: mm
No. Check item Criteria Remedy
Standard clearance Clearance limit

1 Backlash between swing motor
shaft and No.1 sun gear. 0.07 – 0.18 0.4
Backlash between No.1 sun gear

2 and No.1 planetary gear. 0.13 – 0.31 0.6
Backlash between No.1 planetary

3 gear and ring gear. 0.15 – 0.34 0.7
Backlash between No.1 planetary

4 carrier and No.2 0.14 – 0.34 0.7
sun gear. Replace
Backlash between No.2 sun gear
5 and No.2 planetary gear. 0.13 – 0.31 0.6
6 Backlash between No.2 planetary 0.15 – 0.34 0.7

gear and ring gear.
7 Backlash between No.2 planetary 0.08 – 0.19 0.4

carrier and swing pinion.
8 Backlash between swing pinion 0.13 – 1.16 2.3

and swing circle.
Standard size Repair limit Apply hard-

9 Wear of swing pinion surface con- chrome plating
tacting with oil seal. 0
144.8 recondition, or
145 - 0.1000 replace
PC130-7 40-3
MAINTENANCE STANDARD SWING CIRCLE
SWING CIRCLE
Unit: mm

1 Axial clearance of bearing Replace
0.10 – 0.25 0.9
40-4 PC130-7
MAINTENANCE STANDARD TRACK FRAME, IDLER CUSHION
TRACK FRAME, IDLER CUSHION
Unit: mm
Standard size Clearance limit

Rebuild
Idler guide top and Track frame 84 89
1 bottom width
Rebuild or
Idler support 82 77 replace
Track frame 185 193 Rebuild

2 Idler guide left and
right width Rebuild or
Idler support 183 175 replace
Standard size Repair limit
Installed Installed Installed
Free length length load Free length load
3 Recoil spring Replace
84.3 kN 75.0 kN
502 390 {8,600 kg} 490 {7,650 kg}
PC130-7 40-5
MAINTENANCE STANDARD IDLER
IDLER
Unit: mm

Outer diameter of protruding
1 portion 527 —
2 Outer diameter of tread 489 477
3 Depth of protruding portion 19 25 Rebuild or

replace
4 Width of protruding portion 52 42
5 Total width 115 107
6 Width of tread 31.5 36.5
Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance

Clearance between idler shaft and size Shaft Hole clearance limit
7 bushing
– 0.250 + 0.074 0.250 –
54 – 0.280 0 0.354 1.5
Standard Tolerance Standard in- Interference

Interference between idler size Shaft Hole terference limit Replace
8
and bushing
61 + 0.117 + 0.030 0.057 – —
+ 0.087 0 0.117
9 Side clearance of idler
(on one side) 0.18 – 0.38 1.5

Tread wall thickness Rebuild or
10 (at center of tread) replace
15 9
40-6 PC130-7
MAINTENANCE STANDARD CARRIER ROLLER
CARRIER ROLLER
Unit: mm

Rebuild or
1 Outer diameter of tread replace
116 106
2 Width of tread 123 — —

Clearance between shaft and size Shaft Hole clearance limit
3
bushing
40 + 0.055 + 0.261 -0.145 – —
– 0.035 + 0.200 0.226
Replace
Interference between collar and size Shaft Hole terference limit
4 bushing
+ 0.061 + 0.025 0.011 –
47 – 0.036 0 0.061 —

Play on carrier roller in
5 axial direction 0.363 – 0.537 1.5

6 (at 10 mm away from end face roller) 17.7 12.7 replace
PC130-7 40-7
MAINTENANCE STANDARD TRACK ROLLER
TRACK ROLLER
Unit: mm

Diameter of flange
1 (outside) 158 —
Rebuild or
2 Outer diameter of tread 130 120 replace
3 Flange width 26.5 —
4 Total width 176 — —
Rebuild or
5 Width of tread 35 — replace

Clearance between shaft and size Shaft Hole clearance limit
6
bushing
– 0.250 + 0.186 0.225 –
48 – 0.350 – 0.025 0.536 1.5

Interference between roller and size Shaft Hole terference limit Replace
7
bushing
55 + 0.190 + 0.093 0.017 – —
+ 0.110 + 0.063 0.127
8 Track roller side clearance
(on one side) 0.160 – 0.345 1.5

9 (at center of width) replace
37.5 32.5
40-8 PC130-7
MAINTENANCE STANDARD SPROCKET
SPROCKET
Unit: mm
Standard size Tolerance Repair limit

1 Wear on tooth bottom diameter + 1.0
547.4 535
– 2.0
2 Wear on addendum diameter 607 — 595

Rebuild or
3 Wear on addendum width 27 — 22 replace
4 Wear on tooth bottom width 42 ± 1.5 39
+ 0.465
5 Tooth bottom wall thickness 111.7 – 1.160 105.5
PC130-7 40-9
MAINTENANCE STANDARD TRACK SHOE
TRACK SHOE
TRIPLE SHOE, ROAD LINER, CITY PAD SHOE
1 Triple shoe and city pad shoe

2 Road liner
a P portion shows the link of bushing press fitting end.
40-10 PC130-7
Unit: mm

1 Link pitch
175.25 178.25
When turned Turn of replace

Standard size
Normal road Impact road
2 Bushing outside diameter
46.3 — 42.3

3 Link height Rebuild or
86 81 replace
4 Thickness of link metal 24 19

(bushing pressfitting portion)
5 102.4
Replace
6 Shoe bolt pitch 86.4
7 57
8 Inside diameter 52.4
9 Link Overall width 35 Rebuild or

replace
10 Tread width 30.1
11 Protrusion of pin 5.5
12 Protrusion of regular bushing 3.75
13 Overall length of pin 173

Adjust of
14 Overall length of bushing 86.7 replace

15 Thickness of bushing metal
7.8 3.8
16 Thickness of spacer —
17 Bushing 39.2 –137.2 kN {4 – 14 ton}
Press fitting
18 force Regular pin 78.4 –186.3 kN {8 – 19 ton} —
*19 Master pin 39.2 – 98.1 kN {4 – 10 ton}
a The items marked * are for dry type track.
PC130-7 40-11
Unit: mm
Tightening torque (Nm {kgm}) Additional tightening angle (deg)

Triple shoe 196 ± 20
City pad shoe {20 ± 2} 90 ± 10
a. Regular link
Road liner 147 ± 10 50 ± 5

Shoe bolt {15 ± 1} Retighten
20 Tightening torque Additional tightening Lower limit torque
(Nm {kgm}) angle (deg) (Nm {kgm})
b. Master link
— — —
No. of shoe (each side) 43 —
Tolerance Standard
Standard size
Interference between bushing Shaft Hole interference
21 and link
46 + 0.387 + 0.062 0.285 – 0.387
+ 0.347 0
22 Interference between regular 30 + 0.150 – 0.198 0.198 – 0.400

pin and link 0 – 0.250
Tolerance Standard
Standard size
Clearance between regular Shaft Hole clearance
23 pin and bushing
30 + 0.150 – 0.830 0.180 – 0.830 Adjust or
0 – 0.330 replace
Tolerance Standard
Standard size interference
Interference between master Shaft Hole
*24 pin and link
+ 0.020 – 0.198
30 – 0.020 – 0.250 0.178 – 0.270
Tolerance Standard
Standard size
Clearance between master Shaft Hole interference
*25
pin and bushing
30 – 0.200 + 0.630 0.430 – 0.930
– 0.300 + 0.230
26 Height of a. Road liner Replace
grouser 58 21
a The items marked * are for dry type track.
40-12 PC130-7
RIPLE SHOE, CITY PAD SHOE
Unit: mm

1 Height of grouser
20 10
2 Overall height of shoe 29.5 19.5

Repair by
3 Thickness 9.5 build-up
welding or
replace
4 14
5 Length of grouser top 13
6 15
PC130-7 40-13
MAINTENANCE STANDARD HYDRAULIC PUMP
HYDRAULIC PUMP
40-14 PC130-7
MAINTENANCE STANDARD CONTROL VALVE
CONTROL VALVE
(1/9)
PC130-7 40-15
(3)
(2/9)
Unit: mm

Free length Installed Installed Installed
x O.D. length load Free length load
1 Suction valve spring
5.50±0.40N 4.40 N Replace spring
46.8 x 7.50 40.6 {0.56±0.04kg}
— {0.45 kg} if any damages
or deformations
5.70 N 4.50 N are found
2 Suction valve spring 16.0 x 16.0 12.0 —
{0.58 kg} {0.46 kg}
3 Piston spring 20.0 x 7.0 14.0 1.20 N — 0.98 N

{0.12 kg} {0.10 kg}
40-16 PC130-7
(3)
(3/9)
Unit: mm

1 Spool return spring
53.5 N Replace spring
— 45.0 {5.46 kg} — — if any damages
or deformations
55.9 N are found
2 Spool return spring — 45.0 — —
{5.70 kg}
3 Spool return spring — 41.0 92.2 N — —

{9.4 kg}
PC130-7 40-17
(4/9)
Unit: mm

1 Flow control valve spring
29.4 N
— 23.5 {3 kg} — —
Replace spring
if any damages
2 Pressure reduction valve spring 27.5 x 14.2 18.0 17.7±0.98N
— 13.7 N or deformations
{1.80±0.10kg} {1.40 kg} are found
29.4±2.94N 23.5 N
3 Pressure reduction valve spring 28.2 x 14.5 26.0 —
{3.0±0.30kg} {2.40 kg}
17.6 N 14.1 N
4 Pressure reduction valve spring 32.5 x 14.2 23 {1.8 kg} — {1.44 kg}
40-18 PC130-7
(3)
(5/9)
Unit: mm

Free length Installed Installed Installed Replace spring
Free length if any damages
1 Check valve spring x O.D. length load load
or deformations
41.5 x 8.50 31.5 —
{0.60 kg} {0.48 kg}
PC130-7 40-19
(3)
(6/9)
Unit: mm

Free length Installed Installed Free length Installed
1 Lift check valve spring x O.D. length load load
Cooler bypass valve spring
135±4.90N 113 N Replace spring
72.7 x 20.6 42.5 — if any damages
{13.8±0.50kg} {11.5 kg}
or deformations
67.7 N are found
2 Lift check valve spring 72.7 x 20.6 42.5 — —
{6.9 kg}
3.92±0.98N 2.94 N
3 Bleed spool return spring 23.3 x 12.5 23.0 {0.40±0.10kg} — {0.30 kg}
40-20 PC130-7
(3)
(7/9)
Unit: mm

Free length if any damages
1 Travel junction spool x O.D. length load load
or deformations
13.7±0.10N 10.1 N are found
17.7 x 8.20 13.0 —
{1.40±0.10kg} {1.10 kg}
PC130-7 40-21
(8/9)
Unit: mm

x O.D. length load Free length load if any damages
1 Check valve spring
or deformations
41.5 x 8.50 31.5 —
{0.60 kg} {0.48 kg}
40-22 PC130-7
(3)
(9/9)
PC130-7 40-23
(3)
MAINTENANCE STANDARD SUCTION SAFETY VALVE
SUCTION SAFETY VALVE

FOR SERVICE VALVE
Unit: mm

1 Suction valve spring x O.D. length load load Replace spring
if any damages
16.3 x 21.3 9.50 2.06 N — 1.57 N or deformations
{0.21 kg} {0.16 kg} are found
2.06 N 1.57 N
2 Piston spring 20.0 x 7.0 14.0 {0.21 kg} — {0.16 kg}
40-24 PC130-7
MAINTENANCE STANDARD SELF PRESSURE REDUCTION VALVE
SELF PRESSURE REDUCTION VALVE
Unit: mm

Spring x O.D. length load Free length load
1 (pressure reduction main)
19.6 N 17.7 N
19.2 x 7.20 16.1 {2.0 kg} — {1.80 kg} Replace spring
if any damages
2 Spring 16.5 x 7.20 12.7 20.6 N — 18.6 N or deformations
(pressure reduction valve pilot) {2.10 kg} {1.90 kg} are found
200 N 186 N
3 Spring 71.0 x 18.0 59.0 —
{20.4 kg} {19.0 kg}
61.7 N 58.8 N
4 Spring (safety valve) 16.1 x 7.80 13.4 {6.30 kg} — {6.0 kg}
PC130-7 40-25
MAINTENANCE STANDARD TRAVEL MOTOR
TRAVEL MOTOR
GM18VL-3
40-26 PC130-7
MAINTENANCE STANDARD SWING MOTOR
SWING MOTOR
KMF40ABE-3
Unit: mm

1 Check valve spring x O.D. length load load Replace spring
if any damages
33.0 x 13.8 23.0 1.28 N — 0.98 N or deformations
13.7 N 10.8 N
2 Shuttle valve spring 16.4 x 8.90 11.5 {1.40 kg} — {1.10 kg}
PC130-7 40-27
MAINTENANCE STANDARD SOLENOID VALVE
SOLENOID VALVE
FOR PPC LOCK, 2ND TRAVEL SPEED SELECTOR, SWING AND PARK BRAKE, AND 2-
STAGE RELIEF SOLENOID VALVE
40-28 PC130-7
MAINTENANCE STANDARD CENTER SWIVEL JOINT
CENTER SWIVEL JOINT
Unit: mm
Standard size Standard clearance Clearance limit

1 Clearance between rotor and Replace
shaft 80 0.056 – 0.105 0.111
PC130-7 40-29
MAINTENANCE STANDARD PPC VALVE
PPC VALVE
FOR SWING, WORK EQUIPMENT
Unit: mm

1 Centering spring x O.D. length load load
(for P3 and P4 ports)
29.4 N 23.5 N Replace spring
44.45 x 15.5 34.0 — if any damages
{3.0 kg} {2.40 kg}
or deformations
Centering spring 39.2 N 31.4 N are found
2 (for P1 and P2 ports) 47.93 x 15.5 34.0 {4.0 kg} — {3.20 kg}
3 Metering spring 26.53 x 8.15 34.0 16.7 N — 13.7 N

{1.70 kg} {1.40 kg}
40-30 PC130-7
FOR TRAVEL
Unit: mm

x O.D. length load Free length load Replace spring
1 Metering spring
if any damages
16.7 N 13.7 N or deformations
6.5 x 8.15 24.9 {1.70 kg} — {1.40 kg} are found
2 Centering spring 48.1 x 15.5 32.5 108 N — 86.3 N

{11.0 kg} {8.80 kg}
PC130-7 40-31
FOR SERVICE
Unit: mm

1 Centering spring x O.D. length load load Replace spring
if any damages
42.4 x 15.5 28.4 207.8 N — 167 N or deformations
2 Metering spring 2.7 x 8.10 22.0 16.7 N — 13.3 N

{1.70 kg} {1.36 kg}
40-32 PC130-7
MAINTENANCE STANDARD HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
BOOM CYLINDER
ARM CYLINDER
BUCKET CYLINDER
40-34 PC130-7
MAINTENANCE STANDARD HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
Unit: mm

Cylinder size clearance
Shaft Hole limit
Boom 70 – 0.030 + 0.259 0.093 – 0.435

Clearance between – 0.076 + 0.063 0.335
1 piston rod and
bushing – 0.030 + 0.279 0.095 –
Arm 75 – 0.076 + 0.065 0.355 0.455
– 0.030 + 0.250 0.085 –

Bucket 65 – 0.076 + 0.055 0.326 0.426
Boom 70 – 0.030 + 0.190 0.100 – 1.0

– 0.100 + 0.070 0.290 Replace
Clearance between – 0.030 + 0.190 0.100 – bushing
2 piston rod support Arm 70 1.0
– 0.100 + 0.070 0.290
shaft and bushing
Bucket 65 – 0.030 + 0.170 0.100 – 1.0
– 0.080 + 0.070 0.250
Boom 70 – 0.030 + 0.190 0.100 – 1.0

– 0.100 + 0.070 0.290
Clearance between
3 cylinder bottom sup- – 0.030 + 0.190 0.100 –
port shaft and bush- Arm 70 – 0.100 + 0.070 0.290 1.0
ing
Bucket 65 – 0.030 + 0.170 0.100 – 1.0
– 0.080 + 0.070 0.250
Boom 172 ± 24.5 Nm {17.5 ± 2.5 kgm}
4 Cylinder head Arm 270 ± 39 Nm {27.5 ± 4.0 kgm}

tightening torque
Bucket 172 ± 24.5 Nm {17.5 ± 2.5 kgm}
Boom 294 ± 29.4 Nm {30.0 ± 3.0 kgm}
5 Cylinder piston Arm 294 ± 29.4 Nm {30.0 ± 3.0 kgm} Re-tightening

tightening torque
Bucket 294 ± 29.4 Nm {30.0 ± 3.0 kgm}
Boom 66.2 ± 7.4 Nm {6.75 ± 0.75 kgm}

Cylinder piston lock
6 screw tightening Arm 66.2 ± 7.4 Nm {6.75 ± 0.75 kgm}
torque
Bucket 30.9 ± 3.4 Nm {3.15 ± 0.35 kgm}
PC130-7 40-35
MAINTENANCE STANDARD WORK EQUIPMENT
WORK EQUIPMENT
40-36 PC130-7
MAINTENANCE STANDARD WORK EQUIPMENT
Unit: mm

Clearance between connecting size Shaft Hole clearance limit
1 pin and bushing of revolving
frame and boom. – 0.030 + 0.130 0.095 –
70 – 0.100 + 0.065 0.230 0.8
Clearance between connecting

2 pin and bushing of boom and 70 – 0.030 + 0.141 0.104 – 0.8
arm. – 0.100 + 0.074 0.241
3 Clearance between connecting – 0.030 + 0.129 0.104 –

pin and bushing of arm and link. 60 – 0.080 + 0.074 0.209 0.8
Clearance between connecting Replace

4 pin and bushing of arm and buck- 60 – 0.030 + 0.135 0.104 – 0.8
et. – 0.080 + 0.074 0.215
Clearance between connecting
5 pin and bushing of link and 65 – 0.030 + 0.133 0.104 – 0.8
bucket. – 0.080 + 0.074 0.213
6 Clearance between connecting – 0.030 + 0.130 0.104 –

pin and bushing of link and link. 60 – 0.080 + 0.074 0.210 0.8
Clearance between the blade and

7 track frame mounting pin and 70 – 0.030 + 0.198 0.154 – 1.5
bushing – 0.100 + 0.124 0.298
PC130-7 40-37
MAINTENANCE STANDARD DIMENSION OF WORK EQUIPMENT
DIMENSION OF WORK EQUIPMENT

ARM
40-38 PC130-7
Unit: mm
Tolerance
No. Measuring position Standard size
Shaft Hole
1 — 70 – 0.030 + 0.100
– 0.100 0
Arm side 81.5 + 1.0
0
2
Cylinder head side 80 ± 1.2
Boom side 226 + 0.5

0
3
Arm side 226 – 0.2
– 0.7
4 — 70 – 0.030 + 0.100
– 0.100 0
5 — 264 ± 2.0
6 — 213.5 ± 1.0
7 — 640.6 ± 0.5
8 — 2,491 —
9 — 2,101.9 ± 1.5
10 — 290.4 ± 0.5
11 — 493 ± 0.2
12 — 422 ± 0.5
13 — 374.9 —
14 — 1,175.1 —
15 – 0.030 + 0.200
— 60 – 0.080 0
0
Link side 259 – 0.1
16
Bucket side 261 ± 1.0
17 – 0.030 + 0.200
— 60 – 0.080 0
0
Arm side 226 – 0.5
18
Bucket side 274 —
Min. 1,378 —
19
Max. 2,263 —
PC130-7 40-39
BUCKET
40-40 PC130-7
Unit: mm
No. Measuring position Standard size Tolerance
1 — 371.3 ± 0.5
2 — 51.6 ± 0.5
3 — 97.9° —
4 — 374.9 —
5 — 1241.6 —
6 — 190.2 —
7 — 5° —
8 — 0° —
9 + 0.2
— 60 0
10 — 64 —
11 — 80 + 0.25
0
12 — 261 ± 1.0
13 — 50 —
14 — 85 —
15 — 380 + 1.0
0
16 — 18 —
17 — 110 —
18 — 130 —
19 — 132 —
20 — 108 —
21 — 274 —
22 — 51 —
23 — 34 —
24 — 104.2 —
25 — 119.6 —
26 — 74 —
27 — 65 —
PC130-7 40-41
90 OTHERS
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM........................................................... 90- 3

ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (1/4) ................................................ 90- 5
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (2/4) ................................................. 90- 7
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (3/4) ................................................. 90- 9
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (4/4) ..................................................90-11
PC130-7 90-1
(3)
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
PC130-7 90-3
(3)
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (1/4)
PC130-7 90-5
(3)
PC130-7 90-7
(3)
PC130-7 90-9
(3)
PC130-7 90-11
(3)

PC 130-7 Sebm - Sebm036303 - Sebm036303 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PC 130-7 Sebm - Sebm036303 - Sebm036303 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SEBM036303

MACHINE MODEL SERIAL NUMBER

PC130-7 70001 and up

• PC130-7 mounts the SAA4D95LE-3 engine.

10 STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION .................................................................10-1

20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING .......................................................................20-1

30 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ..........................................................30-1

( ) Page to be deleted Discard

Pages having no marks are those previously revised

LIST OF REVISED PAGES

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS 6. Decide a place in the repair workshop to keep

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION

TESTING AND ADJUSTING

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

HOW TO READ THE SHOP MANUAL REVISED EDITION MARK

VOLUMES When a manual is revised, an edition mark

Chassis volume: Issued for every machine model REVISIONS

DISTRIBUTION AND UPDATING

Slinging near the edge of the hook may cause

• If a part cannot be smoothly removed from the

★ The allowable load value is estimated to be one-

2) Sling wire ropes from the middle portion of the

METHOD OF DISASSEMBLING, CONNECTING PUSH-PULL TYPE COUPLER

k Before carrying out the following work, release Type 1

k Even if the residual pressure is released from

2) Hold adapter (1) and push hose joint (2) into

3) After hose joint (2) is pushed into adapter (3),

4) Hold hose adapter (1) or hose (5) and pull it out.

2) After inserting the hose in the mating adapter

• Used to prevent rubber gaskets, rub-

Holtz • Used as heat-resisting sealant for re-

• Used as lubricant for sliding portion

SYG2-400CA • Used for normal temperature, light

Molybdenum • Used for heavy load portion

SUNSTAR • Used as primer for cab side

• "S" is used for high-tempera-

SUNSTAR • Used to seal joints of glass

STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUE

6 10 11.8 – 14.7 1.2 – 1.5

16 24 235 – 285 23.5 – 29.5

27 41 1150 – 1440 118 – 147

6 10 5.9 – 9.8 0.6 – 1.0

TABLE OF TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR FLARED NUTS

Thread diameter Width across flat Tightening torque

14 19 24.5 ± 4.9 2.5 ± 0.5

TABLE OF TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR SPLIT FLANGE BOLTS

Thread diameter Width across flat Tightening torque

TABLE OF TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR O-RING BOSS PIPING JOINTS

Thread diameter Width across flat Tightening torque (Nm {kgm})

02 14 35 – 63 {3.5 – 6.5} 44 {4.5}

TABLE OF TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR O-RING BOSS PLUGS

Thread diameter Width across flat Tightening torque (Nm {kgm})

08 08 14 5.88 – 8.82 {0.6 – 0.9} 7.35 {0.75}

TIGHTENING TORQUE FOR 102 ENGINE SERIES

ELECTRIC WIRE CODE

0.85 11 0.32 0.88 2.4 12 Starting, lighting, signal

2 26 0.32 2.09 3.1 20 Lighting, signal etc.

5 65 0.32 5.23 4.6 37 Charging and signal

15 84 0.45 13.36 7.0 59 Starting (Glow plug)

40 85 0.80 42.73 11.4 135 Starting

60 127 0.80 63.84 13.6 178 Starting

100 217 0.80 109.1 17.6 230 Starting